GRT200 (6F2S1890) 0.21

6F2S1890 (0.
21)
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Transformer Protection
GR200 series (GRT200)
(Revision 0.21)
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Safety Precautions
Before using this equipment, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GR
equipment. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly
read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used
Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result

indeath or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in
WARNING
death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided,
may result in minor injury or moderate injury or property
damage.
DANGER
•Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to
be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a
dangerously high voltage.
WARNING
•Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous.
•Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
•Fiber optic
Invisible laser radiation
Do not view directly with optical instruments.
i
6F2S1890 (0.21)
CAUTION
•Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
•Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and
dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
•Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check
that they conform to the equipment ratings.
•Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is
on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully
check the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
•Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
•Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•Short-wire(link)
Do not remove the short-link wire(s) connected to the frame earth (FG) at the terminal
block on the rear of the relay.
•Electric wire between #35 - #37 on the power-supply terminal block
Make sure the wire is connected.
(Exception: This wire need to be detached for performing the dielectric voltage test.)
ii
6F2S1890 (0.21)
•Disposal
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled.
When disposing of this equipment, the customer must contact an operator responsible for
industrial waste disposal, and request that the operator dispose of this equipment in
accordance with the local waste disposal regulations; otherwise the person who disposes
of this equipment may be punished under local regulations. When disposing of this
equipment is practiced by the customer acting on their own behalf, it must be done so in a
safe manner according to local regulations. For further information in terms of the disposal,
the customer shall contact to a local dealer and sales staff at Toshiba.
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor recyclables.
•Plastics material
This equipment contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins, Nylon 66, and others.
Equipment installation and operation

•Equipment installation
Never remove cables at frame ground terminals (FGs) while the AC/DC power supplies.
•Equipment operation
The user shall have responsibilities to use and install the equipment where the
specifications are designated by the manufacture. Never operate the equipment on the
condition where the manufacture cannot intend. Otherwise, the safety function furnished
into the equipment may not be operated properly.
•Symbols
Symbol Description
Protective conductor terminal
Caution, risk of electric shock
iii
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Liability, copyright and others

•Disclaimer of liability
We have checked the description of this manual against the hardware and software
described, but we cannot guarantee that all deviations have been eliminated from the
description completely; hence, no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions
contained in the information given. We review the information in this manual regularly
and there will be some corrections in subsequent editions. We reserve the right to
make technical improvements without notice.
•Copyright
Copyright © Toshiba 2014, 2015. All rights reserved.
•Registered Trademarks
Product/Equipment names (mentioned herein) may be trademarks of their respective
companies.
iv
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Contents
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Protection functions ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.2 Monitoring and metering functions ............................................................................................... 6
1.3 Hardware overview ......................................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Symbols used in logical diagrams .................................................................................................. 8
1.5 Abbreviation .................................................................................................................................. 12
1.6 Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number ..................................................................... 13
2 Transformer replica functions ............................................................................................................. 14
2.1 Transformer replica functions ...................................................................................................... 15
2.2 Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 15
2.2.1 System configuration applicable in GRT200........................................................................ 15
2.2.2 Transformer winding configuration ...................................................................................... 16
2.2.3 Three-phase relay CT ............................................................................................................ 17
2.2.4 Neutral Relay CT ................................................................................................................... 19
2.2.5 Adjustment of CT secondary rating ...................................................................................... 20
2.2.6 Relay VT ................................................................................................................................. 21
2.2.7 Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 23
2.2.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 25
2.2.9 FEP_Common function .......................................................................................................... 26
3 Relay application .................................................................................................................................. 29
3.1 Current differential protection (DIF)........................................................................................... 30
3.1.1 Relay characteristics .............................................................................................................. 31
3.1.2 CT ratio compensation ........................................................................................................... 34
3.1.3 Compensation of CT secondary currents.............................................................................. 37
3.1.4 Enhanced CT saturation countermeasure function (CTS) ................................................. 41
3.1.5 Decision for fault phases ....................................................................................................... 43
3.1.6 Differential current monitoring function (DIF-SV) ............................................................. 44
3.1.7 Settings and setting guidance ............................................................................................... 45
3.1.8 DIF scheme logic .................................................................................................................... 55
3.1.9 Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 57
3.1.10 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 58
3.2 Restricted earth fault protection (REF) ....................................................................................... 60
3.2.1 Element characteristics ......................................................................................................... 60
3.2.2 Setting means ......................................................................................................................... 66
3.2.3 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................... 68
3.2.4 Settings list............................................................................................................................. 71
3.2.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 73
3.3 Overcurrent protection (OC)......................................................................................................... 75
v
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.3.1 Non-directional and directional OC ...................................................................................... 75

3.3.2 Operate time characteristic ................................................................................................... 80
3.3.3 Reset time characteristics ..................................................................................................... 82
3.3.4 Threshold value for activation .............................................................................................. 87
3.3.5 Reset Ratio.............................................................................................................................. 87
3.3.6 Miscellaneous functions......................................................................................................... 88
3.3.7 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................... 88
3.3.8 Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 91
3.3.9 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 99
3.4 Earth fault protection (EF) ......................................................................................................... 104
3.4.1 Non-directional and directional EF .................................................................................... 104
3.4.2 Operate time characteristic ................................................................................................. 107
3.4.3 Reset time characteristics ................................................................................................... 110
3.4.4 Threshold value for activation ............................................................................................ 115
3.4.5 Reset Ratio............................................................................................................................ 115
3.4.6 Miscellaneous functions....................................................................................................... 116
3.4.7 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 116
3.4.8 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 119
3.4.9 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 128
3.5 Earth fault protection with neutral current (EFIn) ................................................................. 132
3.5.1 Operate time characteristic ................................................................................................. 132
3.5.2 Reset time characteristics ................................................................................................... 135
3.5.3 Threshold value for activation ............................................................................................ 140
3.5.4 Reset Ratio............................................................................................................................ 140
3.5.6 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 141
3.5.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 144
3.5.8 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 148
3.6 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN) .................................................................... 150
3.6.1 Non-directional and directional OCN ................................................................................. 150
3.6.2 Threshold value .................................................................................................................... 153
3.6.3 Reset Ratio............................................................................................................................ 153
3.6.5 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 154
3.6.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 156
3.6.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 165
3.7 Broken conductor protection (BCD) ........................................................................................... 167
3.7.1 Equivalent circuit for a one-phase series fault .................................................................. 167
3.7.2 Characteristic and setting ................................................................................................... 169
vi
6F2S1890 (0.21)

3.7.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 170
3.7.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 172
3.7.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 173
3.8 Thermal overload protection (THM) .......................................................................................... 175
3.8.1 Characteristic ....................................................................................................................... 175
3.8.2 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 178
3.8.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 180
3.8.4 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 181
3.9 Inrush current detection function (ICD).................................................................................... 182
3.9.1 Inrush current ...................................................................................................................... 182
3.9.2 Characteristic ....................................................................................................................... 182
3.9.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 183
3.9.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 183
3.9.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 185
3.9.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 185
3.10 Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) ................................................................................... 186
3.10.1 CBF features ........................................................................................................................ 186
3.10.2 Re-trip feature ...................................................................................................................... 187
3.10.3 Backup feature ..................................................................................................................... 187
3.10.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 189
3.10.5 Operation timing .................................................................................................................. 191
3.10.6 Settings ................................................................................................................................. 192
3.10.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 195
3.11 UV protection for GRT (UV) ....................................................................................................... 201
3.11.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic .................................................................................... 201
3.11.2 Time characteristic .............................................................................................................. 202
3.11.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 205
3.11.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 207
3.11.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 210
3.12 UVS protection for GRT (UVS) .................................................................................................. 214
3.12.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic .................................................................................... 214
3.12.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 218
3.12.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 220
3.12.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 223
3.13 Overvoltage protection for phase-to-neutral (OV) .................................................................... 227
vii
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.13.1 Drop-off and pickup characteristic ..................................................................................... 227

3.13.2 Delay for the operation of OV element ............................................................................... 228
3.13.5 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 231
3.13.6 Setting list ............................................................................................................................ 233
3.13.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 236
3.14 Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase (OVS)..................................................................... 239
3.14.1 Drop-off and pickup setting ................................................................................................. 239
3.14.2 Delay for the operation of OVS element............................................................................. 240
3.14.5 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 243
3.14.6 Setting list ............................................................................................................................ 245
3.14.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 247
3.15 Earth fault overvoltage protection (OVG) ................................................................................. 250
3.15.1 Drop-off and pickup ............................................................................................................. 250
3.15.2 Definite time characteristic ................................................................................................. 250
3.15.3 Invers time delay (Dependent time characteristic) ........................................................... 252
3.15.5 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 254
3.15.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 256
3.15.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 260
3.16 Frequency protection (FRQ/DFRQ) ........................................................................................... 262
3.16.1 FRQ features and characteristics ....................................................................................... 263
3.16.2 DFRQ features and characteristics .................................................................................... 266
3.16.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 268
3.16.4 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 274
3.17 Over-excitation protection (VPH) ............................................................................................... 279
3.17.1 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 279
3.17.2 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 281
3.17.3 Settings ................................................................................................................................. 283
3.17.4 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 284
3.18 VT failure detection (VTF).......................................................................................................... 285
3.18.1 Relay and decision ............................................................................................................... 285
3.18.2 Logic ...................................................................................................................................... 286
3.18.3 Usage..................................................................................................................................... 287
3.18.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 289
3.18.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 290
viii
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.19 Trip circuit (TRC) ........................................................................................................................ 292

3.19.1 Scheme switch ...................................................................................................................... 292
3.19.2 Trip command scheme logic ................................................................................................ 292
3.19.3 General alarm scheme logic ................................................................................................ 295
3.19.4 Operated phase scheme logic .............................................................................................. 296
3.19.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 299
3.19.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 299
3.20 Mechanical trip protection (MECH) .......................................................................................... 301
3.20.1 Scheme switch ...................................................................................................................... 301
3.20.2 Mechanical trip timer .......................................................................................................... 301
3.20.3 Mechanical trip command output ....................................................................................... 301
3.20.4 Scheme logic ......................................................................................................................... 301
3.20.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 307
3.20.6 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 313
3.21 Protection common (PROTCOM) ............................................................................................... 320
3.21.1 Decision of CB open/close status ......................................................................................... 320
3.21.2 Decision of DS open/close status ......................................................................................... 322
3.21.3 Detection of current change (OCD)..................................................................................... 324
3.21.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 325
3.21.5 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 326
4 Technical Description ......................................................................................................................... 329
4.1 IED case and module slot ........................................................................................................... 332
4.1.1 1/1 Case for Compression-type terminal ............................................................................ 332
4.1.2 3/4 case for Compression-type terminal ............................................................................. 334
4.2 Transformer module (VCT module) ........................................................................................... 339
4.2.1 VCT for GRT200 model 1 .................................................................................................... 339
4.2.2 VCT for GRT200 model 2 .................................................................................................... 340
4.2.3 VCT for GRT200 model 3 .................................................................................................... 341
4.2.4 VCT for GRT200 model 4 .................................................................................................... 342
4.2.5 VCT for GRT200 model 5 .................................................................................................... 343
4.2.6 Constitution of VCT ............................................................................................................. 344
4.2.7 Setting VCT ratio ................................................................................................................. 346
4.2.8 Selection of rated current .................................................................................................... 348
4.3 Signal processing and communication modules (CPU) ............................................................ 350
4.3.1 Communication modules ..................................................................................................... 351
4.3.2 Location of communication modules................................................................................... 352
4.4 Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO)......................................................................................... 354
ix
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.4.1 Binary input feature for Compression-type terminal ....................................................... 355

4.4.2 Binary input circuit ............................................................................................................. 356
4.4.3 Binary output feature for Compression-type terminal ..................................................... 364
4.4.4 Binary output circuit ........................................................................................................... 366
4.4.5 Structure of binary IO Module for Compression-type terminal ....................................... 372
4.4.6 Settings of binary input circuits ......................................................................................... 377
4.4.7 Data IDs of binary input circuits ........................................................................................ 379
4.4.8 Settings of binary output circuits ....................................................................................... 381
4.4.9 Data IDs of binary output circuits ...................................................................................... 383
4.5 Power supply module (PWS) ...................................................................................................... 385
4.6 Human Machine Interface (HMI) .............................................................................................. 387
4.6.1 Outlook.................................................................................................................................. 387
4.6.2 LED Indicators ..................................................................................................................... 388
4.6.3 Function keys with LEDs .................................................................................................... 393
4.6.4 Monitoring jacks................................................................................................................... 398
4.6.5 Operation keys ..................................................................................................................... 400
4.7 Clock function .............................................................................................................................. 401
4.7.1 Clock setting ......................................................................................................................... 401
4.7.2 Time Synchronization .......................................................................................................... 402
4.7.3 Selection of date and time formats ..................................................................................... 407
4.7.4 Setting time zone ................................................................................................................. 408
4.7.5 DST setting (Summer time setting).................................................................................... 409
4.7.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 411
5 Engineering tool.................................................................................................................................. 412
5.1 Overview of GR-TIEMS .............................................................................................................. 413
5.2 Connection ................................................................................................................................... 414
5.3 Common tools .............................................................................................................................. 414
5.4 Monitoring tools........................................................................................................................... 415
5.5 Record tools .................................................................................................................................. 415
5.6 Generic configuration tools ......................................................................................................... 416
5.7 IEC 61850 configuration tool...................................................................................................... 416
5.8 MIMIC configuration tool ........................................................................................................... 417
6 PLC function ....................................................................................................................................... 418
6.1 Overview of PLC function ........................................................................................................... 419
6.2 Checking PLC errors ................................................................................................................... 420
6.3 PLC driver.................................................................................................................................... 421
7 Recording Function ............................................................................................................................ 424
7.1 Fault Recording ........................................................................................................................... 425
7.2 Event Recording .......................................................................................................................... 426
x
6F2S1890 (0.21)
7.3 Disturbance Recording................................................................................................................ 427

7.4 Data ID......................................................................................................................................... 429
8 Metering Function .............................................................................................................................. 430
8.1 Display of current metering........................................................................................................ 431
9 Automatic supervision........................................................................................................................ 432
9.1 Outline of automatic supervision ............................................................................................... 433
9.2 Generic supervision tasks ........................................................................................................... 436
9.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM (ROM/RAM error)..................................................... 437
9.2.2 Check-sum error (SUM error) ............................................................................................. 438
9.2.3 Verifying program codes (CPU error) ................................................................................. 439
9.2.4 Monitoring interruption (NMI error) ................................................................................. 440
9.2.5 Supervision of RAM (RAM error) ....................................................................................... 441
9.2.6 Supervision of ECC memory (ECC error) .......................................................................... 442
9.2.7 Sampling error (SMP error) ................................................................................................ 443
9.2.8 Detection of sub-CPU not operated (Stopped error) .......................................................... 444
9.2.9 Supervision of A/D accuracy on VCT (ACC) ....................................................................... 445
9.2.10 Supervision of MRAM memory (MRAM) ........................................................................... 446
9.2.11 Failure on binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error) ................................................................... 447
9.2.19 Malfunction on the human machine interface (HMI error) .............................................. 455
9.2.20 Parameter error in the settings (Setting error) ................................................................. 456
9.2.21 Verification of DPRAM on sub-CPU (DPRAM error) ........................................................ 457
9.2.22 Clock error (RTC error) ....................................................................................................... 458
9.2.23 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error).................................................................... 459
9.2.24 Detection of a failure in the circuit breakers (CB fail) ...................................................... 460
9.2.25 Failure in the disconnectors (DS fail) ................................................................................. 461
9.2.26 Data error in PLC function (PLC data error) .................................................................... 462
9.2.27 Pinging problem for the first address (LAN1 ping error) ................................................. 463
9.2.28 Pinging problem for the second address (LAN2 ping error) ............................................. 464
9.2.29 Irregular data in the 61850 settings (Data(commslv) error) ............................................ 465
9.2.30 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error).................................................. 466
9.2.31 Detection of erroneous differential current in the DIF (Id) .............................................. 467
9.2.32 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 468
xi
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.33 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 472

10 Communication protocol ................................................................................................................. 477
10.1 LAN communication ................................................................................................................... 478
10.1.1 Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 478
10.1.2 Settings ................................................................................................................................. 486
10.1.3 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 488
10.2 IEC 61850 communication.......................................................................................................... 490
10.2.1 61850 protocol ...................................................................................................................... 492
10.2.2 Communication service ....................................................................................................... 495
10.2.3 Engineering in 61850 communication ................................................................................ 498
10.2.4 Setting for IED ..................................................................................................................... 516
10.2.5 How to monitor 61850 communications ............................................................................. 518
10.2.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 519
10.2.7 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 519
10.3 USB communication.................................................................................................................... 521
11 User interface .................................................................................................................................. 522
11.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................... 523
11.2 HMI operation ............................................................................................................................. 527
11.3 Record sub-menu ......................................................................................................................... 532
11.4 Monitoring sub-menu .................................................................................................................. 540
11.5 Setting sub-menu ........................................................................................................................ 550
11.6 I/O setting sub-menu................................................................................................................... 565
11.7 Time sub-menu ............................................................................................................................ 572
11.8 Test sub-menu.............................................................................................................................. 580
11.9 Information sub-menu ................................................................................................................ 587
11.10 Security setting sub-menu ...................................................................................................... 589
12 Installation ...................................................................................................................................... 591
12.1 Unpacking .................................................................................................................................... 592
12.2 Rack mounting............................................................................................................................. 592
12.3 Caution for storage ...................................................................................................................... 594
12.4 Handling precautions .................................................................................................................. 594
12.5 Wiring work ................................................................................................................................. 595
12.6 How to replace an inside module by a service module ............................................................. 597
13 Commissioning and Maintenance.................................................................................................. 602
13.1 Cautions ....................................................................................................................................... 604
13.2 Preparations ................................................................................................................................ 605
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function ...................................................................................... 611
Appendix 2 Case outline ...................................................................................................................... 619
Appendix 3 Typical external connection ............................................................................................. 628
xii
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Appendix 4 Ordering ............................................................................................................................ 636

Appendix 5 Technical data ................................................................................................................... 649
Appendix 6 Rack mounting.................................................................................................................. 661
Appendix 7 PLC driver for relay application ..................................................................................... 667
xiii
6F2S1890 (0.21)
1 Introduction
The GRT200 (transformer protection relay) is based on the Toshiba GR-200 series IED platform. It
implements high-speed protection for both a transformer and a reactor, and has high dependability
and security for diverse faults such as single-phase faults, multi-phase faults, overload and
over-excitation. It is suitable to use as a main protection and backup protection of the following
transformers and reactors.
 Two-winding or three-winding power transformers
 Auto-transformers
 Generator-transformer unit
 Shunt reactor
The GRT200 is available for five models; the model is depends on inputting CT/VT construction as
showed in the Table 1.1-1
Table 1.1-1
Analog inputs Analog inputs Configuration
GRT200 Model Model Ordering
(VT/CT) symbol for table (example)
2 x three-phase CT 2CT/
Model 1 GRT200-1-*
1 x one-phase VT 1x1VT
3 x three-phase CT
3CT/
Model 2 GRT200-2-* 3 x zero-phase CT
1x1VT
1 x one-phase VT
3 x three-phase CT
3CT/
1x3VT
1 x three-phase VT
- 1 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Analog inputs Analog inputs Configuration

GRT200 Model Model Ordering
(VT/CT) symbol for table (example)
4 x three-phase CT 4CT/ I1 I3
V
Model 4 GRT200-4-*
1 x one-phase VT 1x1VT
I2 I4
5 x three-phase CT
5CT/
2x3VT
2 x three-phase VT
The user can use mix of different current rating CTs, 1A/5A, for the GRT200 with appropriate
setting. The GRT200 could work even under the magnetizing inrush and over excitation current
condition.
The GRT200 provides the following metering and recording functions.
 Metering
 Fault records
 Event records
 Disturbance records.
- 2 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
1.1 Protection functions

The GRT200 provides the following protection relay functions listed in the tables below.
Table 1.1-1 Protection Relay Functions
GRT200
Relay element Model 1 Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Model 5 Function name

2CT/ 3CT/ 3CT/ 4CT/ 5CT/
1x 1VT 1x 1VT 1x 3VT 1x 1VT 2x 3VT
DIF DIF-S1-1/2/3
DIF-S2-1/2/3
√ √ √ √ √ Current differential protection
DIF-2f-1/2/3
DIF-5f-1/2/3
REF REF-P
Restricted earth fault
REF-S √ √ √
protection
REF-T
OC OC1-A/B/C
OC2-A/B/C
OC3-A/B/C
OC4-A/B/C
√ √ √ √ √ Overcurrent protection
OC5-A/B/C
OC6-A/B/C
OC7-A/B/C
OC8-A/B/C
EF EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
√ √ √ √ √ Earth fault protection
EF5
EF6
EF7
EF8
EFIn EFIn1
EFIn2 Earth fault protection with
√ √ √
EFIn3 neutral current
EFIn4
OCN OCN1
OCN2 Negative sequence
√ √ √ √ √
OCN3 overcurrent protection
OCN4
THM THM-A
√ √ √ √ √ Thermal overload protection
THM-T
BCD BCD-P √ √ √ √ √
BCD-S √ √ √ √ √ Broken conductor protection
BCD-T √ √ √ √
CBF OCCBF1-A/B/C √ √ √ √ √
OCCBF2-A/B/C √ √ √ √ √
Circuit breaker failure
OCCBF3-A/B/C √ √ √ √
protection
OCCBF4-A/B/C √ √
OCCBF5-A/B/C √
OV OV1-A/B/C
OV2-A/B/C Overvoltage protection for
√ √
OV3-A/B/C phase-to-neutral
OV4-A/B/C
OVG OVG1
OVG2 Earth fault overvoltage
√ √ √ √ √
OVG3 protection
OVG4
- 3 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 1.1-2 Protection Relay Functions

GRT200
Relay element Model 1 Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Model 5 Function name

2CT/ 3CT/ 3CT/ 4CT/ 5CT/
1x 1VT 1x 1VT 1x 3VT 1x 1VT 2x 3VT
OVS OVS1-AB/BC/CA
OVS2-AB/BC/CA Overvoltage protection for
OVS3-AB/BC/CA √ √ phase-to-phase
OVS4-AB/BC/CA
UV UV1-A/B/C
UV2-A/B/C Undervoltage protection for
UV3-A/B/C √ √ phase-to-phase
UV4-A/B/C
UVS UVS1-AB/BC/CA
UVS2-AB/BC/CA √ √ Undervoltage protection for
UVS3-AB/BC/CA phase-earth
UVS4-AB/BC/CA
FRQ FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3 √ √ √ √ √ Frequency protection
FRQ4
FRQ5
FRQ6
VPH VPH-T
VPH-H √ √ √ √ √ Over-excitation protection
VPH-A
ICD ICD-P-A/B/C/OR √ √ √ √ √
Inrush current detection
ICD-S-A/B/C/OR √ √ √ √ √
function
ICD-T-A/B/C/OR √ √ √ √
VTF UVVTF-P-A/B/C
OVGVTF-P √ √
EFVTF-P
UVVTF-S-A/B/C
OVGVTF-S √ √ VT failure detection
EFVTF-S
UVVTF-T-A/B/C
OVGVTF-T √ √
EFVTF-T
- 4 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
The DIF and the REF are the main protection functions of transformer. The DIF function
operates with DIF-S1, harmonic frequency protection for second (2F) and fifth (5F) and
DIF-S2HOC. Figure 1.1-1 shows their protection coverage.
DIF-S1
REF DIF-S2
Earth fault only
REF_DEF = ON REF_DEF = OFF
Small Differential current Large
Figure 1.1-1 Protection coverage of DIF, HOC and REF

REF: Protection for an earth fault at star-winding side
DIF-S1: Protection for all internal transformer faults
DIF-S2: Protection for all internal transformer faults, in particular heavy
internal faults requiring high-speed operations
1Note: The DIF can be blocked by 2F or 5F elements.
2Note: The HOC is not blocked by 2F or 5F elements.
- 5 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
1.2 Monitoring and metering functions

Using the HMI, the monitoring and metering functions can display status, settings, data and
others. The user can also see information using “GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and
Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS)” both at local and remote end.
Monitoring function:
This function supervises status of protection functions, and displays power system quantities.
It also shows failure information in the CT and VT.
Fault record function:

Such function records the state of a fault when the trip command is issued. It also memorizes
the fault data. The user can see, with the IED screen, these data with additional information:
date & time, fault phase, tripping phase, tripping mode, fault location, operating mode and
power system quantities.
Event record function:

The function provides recording feature that memorizes any event occurred in the IED.
Disturbance record function:

Disturbance record is triggered by fault detection. The user can see the waveform recorded by
this function using GR-TIEMS.
- 6 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
1.3 Hardware overview

The HMI consists of a screen, indication lights, operation and function keys, monitoring jacks
and a USB connector. The signal enters into the IED via terminals at the rear. Input and
output module circuits are provided as the interface.
HMI features:
- Menu-driven human interfaces for relay setting or viewing of stored data.
- LCD screen (7×21 characters), LED display, 7 function keys and operation keys
- Password protection
Communication features:
- USB for GR-TIEMS
Module circuits and others:

- Binary input circuits and binary output circuits with configurable features
- AC inputs
- Programmable logic for I/O configuration, alarms, indications, recording and others
- Automatic supervision
- 7 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
1.4 Symbols used in logical diagrams

Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

Mapping point
1. Marked with : Relay elements
2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number
Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows:

A binary output (BO) circuit
A LED circuit
Like in the BO and LED circuits, it can also be connected or mapped to what follows:
A PLC connection point
The IEC 61850 logical node (LN) to send a signal for the SAS
3. Marked with : PLC connection points designated by Element ID and its name
Element ID (or Data ID) Signal name corresponding to Element or Data ID
Note that the symbol can be used for the reception point coming from the output of PLC
logics.
Note that the user does not apply a PLC connection point straightforward when
functions (relays/control and monitoring) are operated on sub-CPU rather than
main-CPU. Thereby, an alternative connection point (PLC driver1/Input dummy2) is
provided in place of the PLC connection point. The user shall notice that the provision
of the alternative connection point is dependent upon the selection of the model.
1PLC driver is discussed in Chapter PLC function.
2Input dummy can be discussed in Appendix Input dummy for relay application.
4. Marked with : Mapping points designated by Data ID and its name
Data ID Signal name corresponding to Data ID
1Note that the symbol can be used as a signal reception-point coming from the SAS.
The reception point is mapped to the LN of the IEC61850.
- 8 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii) Timer symbol

 Delay timer
Delayed pick-up timer
t 0 Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
t 0
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─ YYY
Delayed drop-off timer
0 t Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
0 t
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─YYY
 One-shot timer
A Output A
XXX - YYY Output

XXX - YYY: Setting range
- 9 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) Logic symbol

 AND gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
& Output
B 1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 0
 OR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
≥1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 XOR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 0
=1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 Signal inversion
A Output
0 1
A 1 Output
1 0
- 10 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iv) Flip-flop symbol

A B Output
A S 0 0 No change
Output 1 0 1
B R 0 1 0
1 1 0
(v) Scheme switch

A Switch Output
1 On 1
A Output
On 1 Off 0
Switch Output
+ Output
On On 1
Off 0
- 11 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
1.5 Abbreviation
Abbreviation Description
ADC Analog to digital converter
BCU Bay Control Unit
BCPU Bay Control and Protection Unit
BI Binary Input module or circuit
BO Binary Output module or circuit
BIO Binary Input and Output module or circuit
CB Circuit Breaker
CPU Signal processing and communication module
CT Current Transformer
DS Disconnecting Switch
EF Earth Fault
ES Earthing Switch
EWS Engineering Workstation in the substation
GPS Global Positioning System
GR-TIEMS GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software
GUI Graphical User Interface
HMI Human Machine Interface
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time
LCD Liquid Crystal Display for IED screen (standard LCD screen)
LCP Local Panel for Controlling
LED Light Emitting Diode
MIMIC MIMIC display panel for IED screen (Large LCD screen)
NA Not Applicable
NGR Neutral Grounding Resistance
N/C Normally Closed
N/O Normally Open
OWS Operator Workstation in the substation
PC Personal Computer for maintenance
PCB Printed circuit board
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
RCC Remote Control Centre
SAS Substation Automation System
SC Station Computer
SCMS Substation Control and Monitoring System
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol
- 12 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Abbreviation Description
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
SyncSrc Synchronization Source
VT Voltage Transformer
VCT Transformer module including VTs and CTs
43 Selector device or selector switch
1.6 Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number

Function Block (FB) is the software module and GR-series IED implements FBs for
protections, controls and communications. The function ID is unique ID described by six digits
in hexadecimal; each function ID represents each FB. Signal number (or Data ID) is the
logical address of the input and output data of the FB. The signal number (Data ID) consists
of a function ID and an element ID. The function ID is common within the FB; accordingly the
element ID will be shown to make description simple. The element ID is 10 hexadecimal and
it has the element ID name for easy to read. Figure 1.6-1 exemplifies the symbols, the
function ID, and the element ID. The table below shows the structure of the signal.
Function ID Element ID Note
Format (Hex) FFFFFF XXXXXXXXXX

Signal example 440001 8000011C20 OC relay in phase-A is operated.
Element ID
FB (Function ID=440001)
8000011C20 800011B68
A & ≥1 OC1_OPT
8100011C21
OC1 B &
8200011C22
C
&
Element ID Signal name
&
800001EBB4 OC1_BLOCK 1
3. PLC connection point† 1. Relay element 2. Signal monitoring point

Figure 1.6-1 Example of symbols and others
†Note: In some scheme logic, the PLC connection point is presented as the function ID
plus element ID, which is shown in 16 delights in hexadecimal.
- 13 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
2 Transformer replica functions
- 14 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
2.1 Transformer replica functions

GRT200 replica function contains parameters to configure the transformer to operate in
various types of power system configuration. The transformer replica function has settings for
connections between the target transformer and relay CTs/VTs, transformer capacity, winding
configuration, analog input types as common settings. Furthermore, the transformer replica
function creates and distributes the electrical data commonly required in each application
such as protection, monitoring, recording and supervision.
2.2 Settings
2.2.1 System configuration applicable in GRT200
The below figures show examples of applicable system configurations with 2/3 and 4/5
terminals.
(A) P S (F) S
(D)
P
T
T
P S
(B) T
(G)
P S (E)
S
P S P
S
(C)
P
Figure 2.2-1 Examples of system configurations with 2/3 terminals
- 15 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(H) (J) (L)

S P S S
P P
(K)
(M)
(I) T S T
P
P S P S
Figure 2.2-2 Examples of system configurations with 4/5 terminals
(i) Transformer rated capacity

The maximum three phase rated capacity [Tr-Capacity] should be selected form the rated
capacities of each transformer Primary/Secondary/Tertiary winding side.
Note: CT ratio compensation coefficients are calculated using this setting in TP_DIF FB.
(ii) Transformer rated voltage

The rated phase-to-phase voltage of the transformer Primary/Secondary/Tertiary winding
[Tr-Vn_P], [Tr-Vn_S] and [Tr-Vn_T] should be selected respectively.
Note: CT ratio compensation coefficients are calculated using these settings in TP_DIF
FB.
2.2.2 Transformer winding configuration

This setting method complies with IEC 60076-1 standard (Power transformers - Part:
General).
Model 2-5 (For three winding transformer model)

[VecGroupP-W] = Y / D: Primary winding vector group, default Y
[VecGroupS-W] = Non / y / d：Secondary winding vector group, default y
[VecGroupS-C] = 0-11: Phase angle difference (clock position) between the Primary -
Secondary winding, default 0
[VecGroupT-W] = Non / y / d：Tertiary winding vector group, default y
[VecGroupT-C] = 0-11 : Phase angle difference (clock position) between the Primary -
Tertiary winding, default 0
- 16 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Model 1 (for two winding transformer),

[VecGroupP-W] = Y / D
[VecGroupS-W] = Non / y / d
[VecGroupS-C] = 0-11
Note: Refer DIF protection (section, Phase matching) for specifying phase angle
difference (clock position); that is, [VecGroup P/S/T-C].
2.2.3 Three-phase relay CT

(i) Connections with the target system
Examples of CT connections to the target system are shown below. The names of 1CT to 5CT
are defined in GRT200 as follows
• 1CT: Three-phase CT for the 1st terminal
• 2CT: Three-phase CT for the 2nd terminal
• 3CT: Three-phase CT for the 3rd terminal
• 4CT: Three-phase CT for the 4th terminal
• 5CT: Three-phase CT for the 5th terminal
GRT200
1CT
T 2CT [Conn-1CT] = Primary

[Conn-2CT] = Secondary
3CT [Conn-3CT] = Secondary
P S [Conn-5CT] = No Use
4CT
5CT
GRT200
1CT
P S 2CT [Conn-1CT] = Primary

[Conn-3CT] = Tertiary
3CT
[Conn-4CT] = Primary
T [Conn-5CT] = Secondary
4CT
5CT
Figure 2.2-3 Setting example for three-phase relay CT connections
As per the operating settings [Conn-1CT] to [Conn-5CT], zero ampere control is

performed. In the following example, the 5CT current is forced to zero, as it is not used.
- 17 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
GRT200
1CT
T 2CT [Conn-1CT] = Primary

3CT [Conn-3CT] = Secondary
P S [Conn-5CT] = No Use
4CT
5CT
Figure 2.2-4 Example of zero ampere control
(ii) Types of current input

Using setting [InType-CT] = 2P/3P, the type of current input either the three-phase currents
or two-phase currents should be selected.
Note:
• When 2 phase current is selected, the CT inputs should be from A and C phase only.
Other combinations are not supported in GRT200.
• Applicable two winding transformer vector group for 2P setting are Yy0, Dd0, Yy6,
Dd6 in terms of phase angle compensation.
(iii) CT polarity inverting function

GRT200 provides the CT polarity inverting function for each CT group without changing
physical wirings.
Using settings [Pol-1CT] to [Pol-5CT], CT polarity for each CT group should be set.
The positive Polarity is set when the measured current in the specific relay CT is in
positive direction for the current flowing into the transformer. On the other hand, the
negative polarity is set when the measured current in relay CT is in positive direction for
current flowing out of the transformer.
- 18 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
GRT200
1CT
I1 I4
[Pol-1CT] = Positive
2CT
[Pol-2CT] = Positive
P
3CT [Pol-3CT] = Negative
I3
[Pol-4CT] = Negative
S T
4CT [Pol-5CT] = Positive
5CT
I2 I5
Figure 2.2-5 Setting example for three-phase relay CT polarity
2.2.4 Neutral Relay CT

(i) Connection with Target system
Using settings [Conn-1NCT] to [Conn-3NCT], ‘Use’ / ‘No use’ is selected for the neutral CT.
The names of 1NCT to 3NCT are defined in GRT200 as follows:
• 1NCT: Neutral CT at Primary side
• 2NCT: Neutral CT at Secondary side
• 3NCT: Neutral CT at Tertiary side
GRT200
S
[Conn-1NCT] = Use
P T [Conn-2NCT] = Use
1NCT [Conn-3NCT] = Use
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 2.2-6 Setting example for neutral relay CT connections
As per the operating setting [Conn-1NCT] to [Conn-3NCT], zero ampere control is performed.
In the following example, the 1NCT and 3NCT current is forced to zero as it is not used.
- 19 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
GRT200
P S [Conn-1NCT] = No Use
[Conn-2NCT] = Use
1NCT [Conn-3NCT] = No Use
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 2.2-7 Example of zero ampere control
(ii) CT polarity inverting function

Using settings [Pol-1NCT] to [Pol-3NCT], CT polarity for each neutral CT should be set.
The positive polarity is set when the measured current in the specific relay CT is in positive
direction for the current flowing into the transformer. On the other hand, the negative
polarity is set when the measured current in relay CT is in negative direction for the current
flowing in to the transformer.
GRT200
P
[Pol-1NCT] = Positive
[Pol-2NCT] = Negative
S T
[Pol-3NCT] = Positive
1NCT
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 2.2-8 Setting example for neutral relay CT polarity
2.2.5 Adjustment of CT secondary rating

GRT200 can accommodate all the combinations of three-phase relay CT rating (1A/5A) for
possible application as shown in the appendix ***. A particular combination can be specified
with the ordering schedule.
The CT secondary rating schedule is used for determining the full-scale value in GRT200.
The user can change the CT secondary rating combination after shipment following the
procedures described in section ***.
- 20 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
2.2.6 Relay VT
(i) Connections with the target system
This setting provides connection of VT(s) to the target system.
GRT200 GRT200
S
P VT
VT VT
1VT
VT
P S
2VT
・Model 5 (two sets of three-phase voltage)

・Model 1 (one set of representative voltage) [Conn-1VT] = Primary
[Conn-VT] = Secondary [Conn-2VT] = Secondary
Figure 2.2-9 Setting example for relay VT connections
(ii) Types of voltage input

Voltage input is classified as follows:
• Representative voltage model
[InType-VT]=
1PN: Single phase-to-earth voltage
1PP: Single phase-to-phase voltage
1N: Residual voltage
GRT200
VT
・Model 1/2/4
P S
[InType-VT] = 1PP
1 Ø VT
Figure 2.2-10 Setting example for representative voltage model

• 1 X three-phase voltage model
[InType-1VT]=
- 21 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

3PN: Three phase-to-earth voltage
3PP: Three phase-to-phase voltage
AB C
P S
GRT200
・Model 3
[InType-1VT] = 1N
1VT
Figure 2.2-11 Setting example for 1 X three-phase voltage model
• 2 X three-phase voltage model

[InType-1VT]/ [InType-2VT]=
3PN: Three phase-to-earth voltage
3PP: Three phase-to-phase voltage
AB C GRT200
・Model 5 (two sets of

1VT
AB C three-phase voltage)
S P [InType-1VT] = 3PN
3 Ø VT [InType-2VT] = 1PN
2VT
1 Ø VT
Figure 2.2-12 Setting example for 2 X three-phase voltage model
Note: In three-phase voltage models, in case of 1PN/1PP/1N connection, it is necessary to

connect to A phase VT as shown in Figure 2.2-11 and Figure 2.2-12.
- 22 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
2.2.7 Setting
Setting of REPLICA (Function ID: 4F1001)
Range Unit Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5 (Full)
Setting device 1A 5A Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
rating rating
s rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating
Transformer vector group
Tr VecGroupP-W Y/D - Y Y Y Y Y
(Primary)
param
eters VecGroupS-W Non / y / d - y y y y y
(Secondary)
VecGroupS-C 0 - 11 - 0 0 0 0 0
VecGroupT-W Non / y / d - (Non) y y y y
(Tertiary)
VecGroupT-C 0 - 11 - (0) 0 0 0 0
Largest 3-phase transformer
capacity within the rated
Tr-Capacity 0.10 - 5000.00 MVA capacity 1732.05 1732.05 1732.05 1732.05 1732.05
of each transformer
winding
Transformer rated
Tr-Vn-P 0.1 - 1000.0 kV phase-to-phase voltage 500.0 500.0 500.0 500.0 500.0
(Primary)
Transformer rated
Tr-Vn-S 0.1 - 1000.0 kV phase-to-phase voltage 500.0 500.0 500.0 500.0 500.0
(Secondary)
Transformer rated
Tr-Vn-T 0.1 - 1000.0 kV phase-to-phase voltage (500.0) 500.0 500.0 500.0 500.0
(Tertiary)
No use /
Transformer winding
Primary /
Conn-1CT - equipped with the CT Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
Secondary /
connected to the Relay 1CT
Tertiary
No use /
Transformer winding
Primary /
Conn-2CT - equipped with the CT Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary
Secondary /
Tertiary
No use /
Transformer winding
Primary /
Conn-3CT - equipped with the CT (No use) Tertiary Tertiary Tertiary Tertiary
Secondary /
Tertiary
No use /
Transformer winding
Primary /
Conn-4CT - equipped with the CT (No use) (No use) (No use) Primary Primary
Secondary /
Tertiary
No use /
Transformer winding
Primary /
Conn-5CT - equipped with the CT (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) Secondary
Secondary /
Tertiary
Type of current input for
InType-CT 2P / 3P - 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P
Relay CTs
CT Negative /
Pol-1CT - 1CT Polarity Positive Positive Positive Positive Positive
Positive
Negative /
Pol-2CT - 2CT Polarity Positive Positive Positive Positive Positive
Positive
Negative /
Pol-3CT - 3CT Polarity (Positive) Positive Positive Positive Positive
Positive
Negative /
Pol-4CT - 4CT Polarity (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) Positive Positive
Positive
Negative /
Pol-5CT - 5CT Polarity (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) Positive
Positive
Connection with Relay
Conn-1NCT No use / Use - (No use) Use Use (No use) Use
neutral 1CT
neutral 2CT
neutral 3CT
Negative /
Pol-1NCT - Neutral 1CT Polarity (Positive) Positive Positive (Positive) Positive
Positive
Negative /
Positive
Negative /
Positive
No use /
Transformer winding
Primary /
Conn-VT - equipped with the VT Primary Primary (Non) Primary (No use)
Secondary /
connected to the Relay VT
Tertiary
VT
No use /
Transformer winding
Primary /
Conn-1VT - equipped with the VT (No use) (No use) Primary (No use) Primary
Secondary /
connected to the Relay 1VT
Tertiary
- 23 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Range Unit Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5 (Full)

rating rating
s rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating
No use /
Transformer winding
Primary /
Conn-2VT - equipped with the VT (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) Secondary
Secondary /
connected to the Relay 2VT
Tertiary
Type of voltage input for
InType-VT 1PN / 1PP / 1N - 1PP 1PP (1PP) 1PP (1PP)
Relay VT
1PN / 1PP / 1N Type of Voltage input for
InType-1VT - (3PN) (3PN) 3PN (3PN) 3PN
/ 3PN / 3PP Relay 1VT
1PN / 1PP / 1N Type of Voltage input for
InType-2VT - (3PN) (3PN) 3PN (3PN) 3PN
/ 3PN / 3PP Relay 2VT
- 24 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
2.2.8 Data ID
REPLICA (Function ID: 4F1001)
Element ID Name Description
4F10018000001B60 VEC_GROUP_P_Y Transformer vector group is Y (primary)
4F10018100001B61 VEC_GROUP_P_D Transformer vector group is D (primary)
4F10018000001B62 VEC_GROUP_S_N Transformer vector group no use (secondary)
4F10018100001B63 VEC_GROUP_S_Y Transformer vector group is Y (secondary)
4F10018200001B64 VEC_GROUP_S_D Transformer vector group is D (secondary)
4F10018000001B65 VEC_GROUP_T_N Transformer vector group no use (tertiary)
4F10018100001B66 VEC_GROUP_T_Y Transformer vector group is Y (tertiary)
4F10018200001B67 VEC_GROUP_T_D Transformer vector group is D (tertiary)
4F10018000101B60 CONN_1CT_N Transformer winding connected to Relay 1CT no use
4F10018100101B61 CONN_1CT_P Transformer primary winding connected to Relay 1CT
4F10018200101B62 CONN_1CT_S Transformer secondary winding connected to Relay 1CT
4F10018300101B63 CONN_1CT_T Transformer tertiary winding connected to Relay 1CT
4F10018200101B6A CONN_3CT_S Transformer secondary winding connected to Relay 3CT
4F10018300101B6B CONN_3CT_T Transformer tertiary winding connected to Relay 3CT
4F10018000101B6C CONN_4CT_N Transformer winding connected to Relay 4CT no use
4F10018100101B6D CONN_4CT_P Transformer primary winding connected to Relay 4CT
4F10018200101B6E CONN_4CT_S Transformer secondary winding connected to Relay 4CT
4F10018300101B6F CONN_4CT_T Transformer tertiary winding connected to Relay 4CT
- 25 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
2.2.9 FEP_Common function

The FEP (Front End Processor) function obtains electrical quantities data measured by CTs /
VTs.
Using electrical quantity data received from the FEP function, FEP common function
with transformer replica function generates electrical quantity data commonly required in
each application such as protection, monitoring, recording and supervision, and distribute
them to each application.
The relationship between the FEP function and FEP_Common function is shown in the
Figure 2.2-13.
- 26 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
FEP1 TP_FEP_COMMON
VCT1 Calculating Sum CT, CT Polarity，Delta,
P/N/Z Phase Currnt for EA.CT and V/I of EA.
Tr winding
Setting Output Setting Output

EA. AI_ch; EA. AI_ch; 1W-IY_1,2,3
･CT Ratio Electrical data 1W-IΔ_1,2,3,

1W-I1
･ CT secondary -for Input
1W-I2
rating measurement VCT#1_CH3 …ia1
1W-I0
-for Protect VCT#1_CH4 …ib1
1W-VY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH5 …ic1
-for log 1W-VΔ_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH6 …ia2
-Full scale 1W-V1
VCT#1_CH7 …ib2
Input 1W-V2
-CT secondary VCT#1_CH8 …ic2
VCT#1_CH9 …ia3 1W-V0
rating
VCT#1_CH10 …ib3 2W-IY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH11 …ic3 2W-IΔ_1,2,3

VCT#2_CH9 …ia4 2W-I1
VCT#2_CH10 …ib4 2W-I2
VCT#2_CH11 …ic4 2W-I0
VCT#2_CH12 …ia5 2W-VY_1,2,3
VCT#2_CH13 …ib5 2W-VΔ_1,2,3
VCT#2_CH14 …ic5
2W-V1
VCT#1_CH12 …in1
2W-V2
VCT#1_CH13 …in2
FEP2 2W-V0
VCT#1_CH14 …in3
VCT2 VCT#1_CH1 …v
3W-IY_1,2,3
3W-IΔ_1,2,3
VCT#2_CH1 …va1
3W-I1
VCT#2_CH2 …vb1
VCT#2_CH3 …vc1 3W-I2
VCT#2_CH5 …va2 3W-I0

Setting Output VCT#2_CH6 …vb2 3W-VY_1,2,3
EA. AI_ch; EA. AI_ch; VCT#2_CH7 …vc2 3W-VΔ_1,2,3
(VCT#1;Type44, 3W-V1
･CT Ratio Electrical data
VCT#2; Type47 or 48)
3W-V2
･ CT secondary -for
Below case; re-connect by 3W-V0
rating measurement
config file Type-VT_P，S，T
-for Protect -Model 4 (4CT+rep.V)
(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP/1N)
VCT#1_CH12 …ia4
-for log 1CT-IY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH13 …ib4
-Full scale 1CT-IΔ_1,2,3,
VCT#1_CH14 …ic4
Input 1CT-I1
-CT secondary -Model 1 (2CT+rep.V)
VCT#1;Type46 1CT-I2
rating
VCT#1_CH1 …v 1CT-I0
VCT#1_CH4 …ia1 2CT-IY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH5 …ib1 2CT-IΔ_1,2,3,
VCT#1_CH6 …ic1 2CT-I1
VCT#1_CH7 …ia2 2CT-I2
VCT#1_CH8 …ib2
2CT-I0
VCT#1_CH9 …ic2
3CT-IY_1,2,3
Conn-1CT (Non/Primary/ 3CT-IΔ_1,2,3,

Secondary / Tertiary) 3CT-I1
Conn-2CT (N/P/S/T) 3CT-I2
Conn-3CT (N/P/S/T)
3CT-I0
Conn-4CT (N/P/S/T)
Conn-5CT (N/P/S/T) 4CT-IY_1,2,3
Pol-1CT(Negative/Positive) 4CT-IΔ_1,2,3,
Pol-2CT(Negative/Positive) 4CT-I1
Pol-5CT(Negative/Positive) 5CT-IY_1,2,3
Conn-0VT (Non/Primary/
5CT-IΔ_1,2,3,
Secondary / Tertiary)
5CT-I1
Conn-1VT (N/P/S/T)
5CT-I2
Conn-2VT (N/P/S/T)
5CT-I0
InType-0VT
(1PN/1PP/1N) 1CTn
InType-1VT 2CTn
(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP/1N) 3CTn
InType-2VT
(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP/1N)
Figure 2.2-13 Example function configuration
- 27 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(i) Inputs to transformer replica function

• Analog inputs measured using each relay VT/CT
• CT ratios for each CT/VT
• Relay CT ratings (1A or 5A) for each CT/VT
• Replica settings
(ii) Outputs from transformer replica function

• Data of each transformer winding (after vector summation at
Primary/Secondary/Tertiary side and CT polarity compensation)
Primary (similar outputs for Secondary and Tertiary)
o Analog inputs (Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P, Iab-P, Ibc-P, Ica-P, I1-P, I2-P, I0-P, Va-P, Vb-P,
Vc-P, V2-P, V0-P)
• Data of each CT (after CT polarity compensation)
1CT (similar outputs for 2CT, 3CT, 4CT, 5CT, 1NCT, 2NCT and 3NCT)
o Analog inputs (Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT, Iab-1CT, Ibc-1CT, Ica-1CT, I1-1CT,
I2-1CT, I0-1CT)
• CT ratios
• Relay CT ratings (1A or 5A)
𝑰𝑰𝒂𝒂 − 𝑷𝑷 = 𝑰𝑰𝒂𝒂 − 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 + 𝑰𝑰𝒂𝒂 − 𝟒𝟒𝟒𝟒𝟒𝟒

𝑰𝑰𝒃𝒃 − 𝑷𝑷 = 𝑰𝑰𝒃𝒃 − 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 + 𝑰𝑰𝒃𝒃 − 𝟒𝟒𝟒𝟒𝟒𝟒
1CT
𝑰𝑰𝒄𝒄 − 𝑷𝑷 = 𝑰𝑰𝒄𝒄 − 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 + 𝑰𝑰𝒄𝒄 − 𝟒𝟒𝟒𝟒𝟒𝟒
P S
2CT 𝑰𝑰𝒂𝒂 − 𝑺𝑺 = 𝑰𝑰𝒂𝒂 − 𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐

4CT T
𝑰𝑰𝒃𝒃 − 𝑺𝑺 = 𝑰𝑰𝒃𝒃 − 𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐
3CT 𝑰𝑰𝒄𝒄 − 𝑺𝑺 = 𝑰𝑰𝒄𝒄 − 𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐
𝑰𝑰𝒂𝒂 − 𝑻𝑻 = 𝑰𝑰𝒂𝒂 − 𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑

𝑰𝑰𝒃𝒃 − 𝑻𝑻 = 𝑰𝑰𝒃𝒃 − 𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑
𝑰𝑰𝒄𝒄 − 𝑻𝑻 = 𝑰𝑰𝒄𝒄 − 𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑
Figure 2.2-14 Example for relationship between data of each transformer winding and each CT
- 28 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3 Relay application
- 29 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.1 Current differential protection (DIF)

Current differential protection (DIF) provides fast and selective main protection for
two-winding and three-winding power transformers, auto-transformers and
generator-transformer units. This protection requires no interposing CTs and provides
stability against magnetizing inrush, overexcitation and CT saturation. Up to five phase
current inputs whose ratings are a combination of 1A / 5A can also be connected. The DIF
calculates differential currents per phase and has the capability to detect internal
phase-to-phase faults, phase-to-earth faults and turn-to-turn faults occurring in a power
transformer.
The DIF calculation is based on Kirchhoff ’s law, that is, the vector summation of all
currents flowing into a protected zone must be zero. Figure 3.1-1 illustrates the DIF
protection principle. Differential current (id) is the vector summation of all currents measured
at the relevant CTs. Since current values at the transformer primary side (i1) equal current
values at the transformer secondary side (−i2) under normal or external fault conditions, the
differential currents (id=i1+i2) are zero. On the other hand, in the event of the occurrence of
an internal fault, the differential currents (id) are not zero since current values at the
transformer primary side (i1) are not equal to current values at the transformer secondary
side (−i2), and DIF will operate accordingly.
Primary Secondary
I1 I2
Transformer
i1 i2
id=i1+i2
Differential
current detection DIF
Figure 3.1-1 DIF protection principle
The DIF comprises protection relay elements that operate for differential currents per
phase such as a segregated-phase-current differential relay element (S1), a second-harmonic
detection element (2F), a fifth-harmonic detection element (5F), an enhanced CT saturation
countermeasure element (CTS) and a high-set overcurrent differential relay element (S2).
Consequently, the DIF can initiate a trip command based upon the operation decision of these
elements.
- 30 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.1.1 Relay characteristics

This section describes the characteristics for S1, 2F, 5F and S2 respectively. The settings for
these relay elements are described in detail later. (See 3.1.7)
(i) S1 characteristic
The S1 is used to detect all internal faults within a protection zone for a transformer. As
illustrated in Figure 3.1-2, S1 is a percentage-restraining element and it has dual slope
characteristics: the first slope is a weak restraint characteristic (DIF-S1-I1) in small
percentage-of-error current region, the second one is a strong restraint characteristic
(DIF-S1-I2) in large percentage-of-error current region.
Figure 3.1-2 illustrates the DIF_S1-I1 and the DIF-S1-I2 together with a differential
current (Id) and a restraining current (Ir): The Id is a vector summation of all of the phase
currents measured at the relevant CTs; the Ir is the scalar summation of all of the phase
currents.
Id = Ir (one-end infeed)
Id
[DIF-S1-I1]
[DIF-S1-I1] [DIF-S1-I2] Ir
Figure 3.1-2 DIF characteristic
Assuming that an external fault occurs outside the DIF protection zone, high through-fault
currents might cause incorrect operation of the S1 due to CT tolerance. Hence, the DIF-S1-I2
provides the margin to potential incorrect operations in the large current region and the S1
has the stability against external faults generating a high-through fault current. Although
high fault currents flow in the event of the occurrence of an internal fault, the highset element
(S2) can clear the fault promptly. Incidentally, CT saturation might occur in the event of the
occurrence of a heavy external fault. In addition to DIF-S1-I2, the DIF also provides CTS as
the countermeasure. (See 3.1.4)
As illustrated in the Figure 3.1-2, the DIF-S1-I1 has a weak restraint characteristic and
hence ensures sensitivity to low-current level faults; the DIF-S1-I1 is expressed using the
following equation:
- 31 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
𝐼𝐼𝑑𝑑 > [𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 − 𝑆𝑆1 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆1] ∙ 𝐼𝐼𝑟𝑟 + (1 − [𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 − 𝑆𝑆1 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆1]) ∙ [𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 − 𝑆𝑆1 − 𝐼𝐼1 ] (3.1-1)
where,
DIF-S1-Slope1: Small current slope
DIF-S1-I1: Minimum operating current
The Id and Ir are expressed using the following equations:

𝐼𝐼𝑑𝑑 = |𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘1 ∙ 𝐼𝐼1 + 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘2 ∙ 𝐼𝐼2 + 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘3 ∙ 𝐼𝐼3 + 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘4 ∙ 𝐼𝐼4 + 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘5 ∙ 𝐼𝐼5 | (3.1-2)
𝐼𝐼𝑟𝑟 = 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘1 ∙ |𝐼𝐼1 | + 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘2 ∙ |𝐼𝐼2 | + 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘3 ∙ |𝐼𝐼3 | + 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘4 ∙ |𝐼𝐼4 | + 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘5 ∙ |𝐼𝐼5 | (3.1-3)
where,
kct1: Coefficient1 for CT ratio compensation on Group 1 phase current inputs;
I1: Phase compensated current2 derived from CT for Group 1;
I5: Phase compensated current2 derived from CT for Group 5.
1Note: The details with regard to CT ratio compensation are described in 3.1.2
and 3.1.2(ii).
2Note: The details with regard to vector group compensation are described in
3.1.2 and 3.1.2(ii).
The DIF-S1-I2 characteristic has a strong restraint characteristic and hence, has less
probability for a possible incorrect operation in the DIF when high fault currents saturate
relevant CTs during an external fault. The DIF-S1-I2 characteristic is expressed using the
following equation:
𝐼𝐼𝑑𝑑 > [𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 − 𝑆𝑆1 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆2] ∙ 𝐼𝐼𝑟𝑟 + ([𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 − 𝑆𝑆1 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆1] − [𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 − 𝑆𝑆1 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆2])
(3.1-4)
∙ [𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 − 𝑆𝑆1 − 𝐼𝐼2 ] + (1 − [𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 − 𝑆𝑆1 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆1]) ∙ [𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 − 𝑆𝑆1 − 𝐼𝐼1 ]
where,
DIF-S1-Slope2: Large current slope
DIF-S1-I2: Knee point located between the area ‘Slope1’ and the area ‘Slope2’
- 32 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii) 2F and 5F characteristic

Inrush currents include several harmonic components and appear in the events like, (1)
energizing the transformer after a previous period of de-energization, (2) the voltage returns
to normal after a fault clearance and (3) a nearby transformer is energized. Although the
inrush currents might cause the incorrect operation in the S1, this can be prevented with the
detection of the harmonic components included in inrush currents. The 2F capable of
determining the occurrence of the second-harmonic component in accordance with the
sensitivity setting is used to detect inrush currents.
Magnetizing currents appear in the event when a power transformer is overexcited and
which might cause the incorrect operation of S1. The 5F capable of determining the
occurrence of the fifth-harmonic component in accordance with the sensitivity setting is used
to detect overexcitation. The fifth-harmonic component can be used for the detection rather
than third-harmonic component because a power transformer with delta-windings eliminates
the third harmonic component.
(iii) High-set characteristic (S2)

The S2 is a high-set overcurrent differential relay element, which has the capability to protect
a transformer against the damage, possibly caused by a heavy internal fault. It provides
high-speed protection in the event of the occurrence of a heavy internal fault. The S2 is
expressed using the following equation:
𝐼𝐼𝑑𝑑 > 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 − 𝑆𝑆2 − 𝐼𝐼 (3.1-5)

Where,
DIF-S2-I: Sensitivity for S2.
The S2 element is unrestrained and is not affected by 2F and 5F harmonic block.
Id = Ir (one-end infeed)
Id
[DIF-S2-I]
[DIF-S1-I1]
Figure 3.1-3 Highset characteristic
- 33 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.1.2 CT ratio compensation

(i) Equations and settings
Differential current Id is determined using Equation (3.1-2) and Id becomes zero in theory
except in the event of the occurrence of an internal fault. In order to achieve it, all the phase
compensated currents must be compensated with CT ratio, taking into account rated
secondary currents and secondary base currents for Group 1 to 5. The coefficients for CT ratio
compensation are automatically calculated in GRT200 using the following equations:
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛1
kct1 = �𝐼𝐼 (3.1-6)
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏1
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛2
kct2 = �𝐼𝐼 (3.1-7)
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛3
kct3 = �𝐼𝐼 (3.1-8)
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛4
kct4 = �𝐼𝐼 (3.1-9)
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛5
kct5 = �𝐼𝐼 (3.1-10)
Where,
In1 to In5: Rated secondary current settings for Group 1 to 5 (1A or 5A);
Ibase1 to Ibase5: Secondary base currents for Group 1 to 5.
Ibase1 to Ibase5 are determined using the following equations with the settings for the
transformer capacity, the rated voltage and phase-CT ratios i.e. [1CT Ratio] to [5CT Ratio]1:
T𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀)
𝐼𝐼𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏1 =
√3 × R𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑒𝑒𝑑𝑑 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 (𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘) × [1CT Ratio]
√3 × R𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 (𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘) × [2CT Ratio]
√3 × R𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 (𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘) × [5CT Ratio]
- 34 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
1Note: The user can set the [1CT Ratio] to [5CT Ratio] using settings [AI*_Ch*_Ratio]. For
more information for the settings VCT ratio using the [ AI*_Ch*_Ratio], see
Chapter Technical description: Transformer module: Setting VCT ratio
(ii) CT ratio compensation example

When taking the transformer shown in Figure 3.1-4, as an example, the CT ratio
compensation settings, kct1, kct2, and kct3 can be calculated as follows. For transformer
capacity, take the maximum one from the rated capacity of the three windings.
Primary Secondary
1CT 40MVA 40MVA 2CT
300/5 154kV 66kV 600/5
A B
3CT
1200/5
Tertiary
12MVA
11kV
kct1 kct3 kct2

IED
Figure 3.1-4 Example of CT ratio compensation
Calculation steps, for example, are discussed in Table 3.1-1, but the calculation is made
automatically in the DIF. Thus, the setting values at step 1, 2, 3, and 6 in Table 3.1-1 are
required in the CT ratio compensation.
- 35 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 3.1-1 Setting terms and points for CT ratio compensation

Primary / 1CT Secondary / 2CT Tertiary / 3CT
Step Calculation steps Unit Equation
[Setting point] [Setting point] [Setting point]
Transformer 40.00
1 MVA —
capacity (a) [Tr-Capacity]
154.0 66.0 11.0
2 Voltage (b) kV —
[Tr-Vn-P] [Tr-Vn-S] [Tr-Vn-T]
Rated line current
3 A a ∕ (b×√3) 150 350 2100
(c)
60.000 120.000 240.000
4 CT ratio (d) — —
Settings [AI*_Ch*_Ratio]1
Secondary rated
5 A c∕d 2.50 2.92 8.75
line current (e)
CT secondary 5 5 5
6 A —
rating (f) Settings [AI*_Ch*_Rating]2
7 kct3 — f∕e kct1=2.00 kct2=1.71 kct3=0.57
1Note: Settings [AI*_Ch*_Ratio] regarding the 1CT/2CT/3CT are discussed in Chapter
Technical description: Transformer module: Setting VCT ratio.
2Note: Settings [AI*_Ch*_Rating] regarding the 1CT/2CT/3CTare discussed in Chapter
Technical description: Transformer module: Selection of rated current.
3Note: The user should ensure that the difference between CT rating and the nominal
current rating of the protected windings is not large (kct should be <8).
- 36 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.1.3 Compensation of CT secondary currents

GRT200 provides a built-in function on compensation of CT secondary currents so that DIF
can be calculated correctly. The compensation of CT secondary currents consists of CT polarity
compensation, phase compensation / zero-sequence current elimination and CT ratio
compensation per current input group as illustrated in Figure 3.1-5.
I1 I4
CT ratio: N1 CT ratio: N4
(*1) (*4)
(*3)
CT ratio: N3
(*2) (*5)
I3
CT ratio: N2 CT ratio: N5
I2 I5
(*1) (*2) (*3) (*4) (*5)

I1/N1 I2/N2 I3/N3 I4/N4 I5/N5
=i1 =i2 =i3 =i4 =i5
GRT200
CT polarity compensation … CT polarity compensation
Phase compensation / Phase compensation /

Zero-sequence current … Zero-sequence current
elimination elimination
CT ratio compensation … CT ratio compensation

kct1×i1 … kct5×i5
DIF calculation
Figure 3.1-5 Compensation of CT secondary currents
(i) CT polarity compensation

CT polarity compensation is done in the FEP-common function block (For details, Refer
FEP-common function block in Replica setting).
(ii) Phase compensation

GRT200 integrates a phase compensation function for all groups of phase currents in
accordance with a target transformer configuration. Phase currents, fed from corresponding
CTs connected to a star-winding side and a delta-winding side, are compensated respectively
as follows:
-Star-winding side: each compensated current is calculated by means of taking away the
zero-sequence current from each phase current. This means that phase angle compensation is
- 37 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
not performed at the star-winding side.
-Delta-winding side: each phase-to-phase current is calculated using two phase currents
respectively. Phase angle compensation is performed on the delta winding side.
An example of vector diagram for phase compensation in a Yd11 transformer is

illustrated in Figure 3.1-6. The phase compensation formulas for both star-winding side and
delta-winding side are shown in (3.1-11) to (3.1-13). The description on the transformer
configuration settings is explained in 3.1.7(vi).
IYa I∆a
IY1 I∆1 I∆b
IYc IYb I∆c
Figure 3.1-6 Example of vector diagram for phase compensation in Yd11
̇ − 𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌
2𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌 ̇ − 𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌
̇ 𝐼𝐼 ̇ − 𝐼𝐼∆𝑐𝑐
̇
̇ =
𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌1 ̇ = ∆𝑎𝑎
, 𝐼𝐼Δ1 (3.1-11)
3 √3
̇ − 𝐼𝐼Y𝑐𝑐
2𝐼𝐼Y𝑏𝑏 ̇ − 𝐼𝐼Y𝑎𝑎
̇ 𝐼𝐼 ̇ − 𝐼𝐼∆𝑎𝑎
̇
̇ =
𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌2 ̇ = ∆𝑏𝑏
, 𝐼𝐼Δ2 (3.1-12)
3 √3
̇ − 𝐼𝐼Y𝑎𝑎
2𝐼𝐼Y𝑐𝑐 ̇ − 𝐼𝐼Y𝑏𝑏
̇ 𝐼𝐼 ̇ − 𝐼𝐼∆𝑏𝑏
̇
̇ =
𝐼𝐼Y3 ̇ = ∆𝑐𝑐
, 𝐼𝐼Δ3 (3.1-13)
3 √3
where,
IY1, IY2, IY3: Phase compensated currents at star-winding side
IYa, IYb, IYc: Phase currents connected to star-winding side
IΔ1, IΔ2, IΔ3: Phase compensated currents at delta-winding side
IΔa, IΔb, IΔc: Phase currents connected to delta-winding side
Further, for the calculation of the differential current, zero-sequence current is

eliminated from the input current (IY∗) using equations (3.1-14) to (3.1-16):
̇ − 𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌
2𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌 ̇ − 𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌
̇ ̇ − (𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌
3𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌 ̇ + 𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌
̇ + 𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌
̇ )
̇ =
𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌1 = ̇ − 𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌0
= 𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌 ̇ (3.1-14)
3 3
̇ − 𝐼𝐼Y𝑐𝑐
2𝐼𝐼Y𝑏𝑏 ̇ − 𝐼𝐼Y𝑎𝑎
̇ ̇ − (𝐼𝐼Y𝑐𝑐
3𝐼𝐼Y𝑏𝑏 ̇ + 𝐼𝐼Y𝑎𝑎
̇ +𝐼𝐼Y𝑏𝑏
̇ )
̇ =
𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌2 = ̇ − 𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌0
= 𝐼𝐼𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌 ̇ (3.1-15)
3 3
- 38 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
̇ − 𝐼𝐼Y𝑎𝑎
2𝐼𝐼Y𝑐𝑐 ̇ − 𝐼𝐼Y𝑏𝑏
̇ ̇ − (𝐼𝐼Y𝑎𝑎
3𝐼𝐼Y𝑐𝑐 ̇ + 𝐼𝐼Y𝑏𝑏
̇ + 𝐼𝐼Y𝑐𝑐
̇ )
̇ =
𝐼𝐼Y3 = ̇ − 𝐼𝐼Y0
= 𝐼𝐼Y𝑐𝑐 ̇ (3.1-16)
3 3
(iii) Zero-sequence current elimination

In order to prevent incorrect operations of DIF against an external earth fault, zero-sequence
current at star-winding side of a transformer needs to be eliminated in the process of the
compensation of CT secondary currents as described in the following Case 1.
Case 1: Zero-sequence current flows at the star-winding side of a transformer in the event
that an external fault occurs at the start-winding side as illustrated in Figure 3.1-7.
On the other hand, zero-sequence current circulates within the delta-winding and is
not measured at the delta-winding side CTs. As a result, the zero-sequence current at
star-winding side appears as a differential current.
I0 Transformer Ia
I0
I0
I0 Ib
II0
I0
Ic
3I
0
DIF
Figure 3.1-7 External earth fault at start-winding side
Zero-sequence current also needs to be eliminated at delta-winding side assuming the

following Case 2.
Case 2: Figure 3.1-8 illustrates that the delta-winding side of a transformer is earthed with
an in-zone earthing transformer. In the event that an external earth fault occurs at
the delta-winding side, the zero-sequence current is only measured at the
delta-winding side CTs, and it appears as a differential current.
- 39 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Ia
I0
Ib
I0
Ic
I0
Earthing
Transformer
3I 0
DIF
Figure 3.1-8 External earth fault at delta-winding side with in-zone earthing transformer
Zero-sequence currents at both star-winding and delta-winding of a target transformer

is eliminated in the process of the aforementioned phase compensation shown in the
preceding equations (3.1-14) and (3.1-16). Thus, GRT200 has no risk of DIF incorrect
operations for both cases.
- 40 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.1.4 Enhanced CT saturation countermeasure function (CTS)

As described earlier, S1 has the strong restraint characteristic DIF-S1-I2 which has stability
against CT tolerance. Furthermore, the S1 also provides another enhanced CT saturation
countermeasure element (CTS). The CTS can operate securely for a high through-fault
current during a heavy external fault and has the capability to detect CT saturation.
A CT saturated current waveform has two distinguishable periods within a cycle: a

non-saturated period and a saturated period. The CTS uses these periods to detect CT
saturation correctly.
DIF Logic
Differential operation
&
Starting
Element (SE) 0 t
&
& & 1
Waveform Discriminating
Element (WDE)
[DIF-CTSat] On
＋
Trigger activated
Evolving fault detection

0 t 1
element (EVD)
Off-delayTimer：
1 cycle CT Saturation detection function (CTS)
Figure 3.1-9 CTS block diagram
Figure 3.1-9 shows the CTS block diagram consisting of a waveform discriminating
element (WDE), a starting element (SE) and the evolving fault detection element (EVD).
The WDE operates if instantaneous differential current changes to less than a specified
percentage of instantaneous restraining current; the WDE operates during the CT being in
non-saturation. The differential current is zero theoretically during the non-saturation period
within a heavy through-fault current waveform.
The SE discriminates between healthy conditions and unhealthy conditions in a power

system; the SE blocks the WDE output when the power system is under healthy conditions.
The CTS algorithm is given using the following equations:

ΔId < 0.15 × (ΔIp + ΔIn) (3.1-6)
ΔId = �𝐼𝐼𝑑𝑑(𝑚𝑚) − 𝐼𝐼𝑑𝑑(𝑚𝑚−1) � + �𝐼𝐼𝑑𝑑(𝑚𝑚−1) − 𝐼𝐼𝑑𝑑(𝑚𝑚−2) � (3.1-7)
ΔIp + ΔIn = �𝐼𝐼𝑝𝑝(𝑚𝑚) − 𝐼𝐼𝑝𝑝(𝑚𝑚−1) � + �𝐼𝐼𝑝𝑝(𝑚𝑚−1) − 𝐼𝐼𝑝𝑝(𝑚𝑚−2) �
(3.1-8)
+ �𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛(𝑚𝑚) − 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛(𝑚𝑚−1) � + �𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛(𝑚𝑚−1) − 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛(𝑚𝑚−2) �
where,
ΔId: Change in the differential current Id
- 41 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
ΔIp + ΔIn: Change in the restraining current in positive and negative cycles
Id: Differential current
Ip: Sum of positive input currents
In: Sum of negative input currents
m, m-1, m-2: Sampling timing.
Figure 3.1-10 shows CT-secondary-current waveforms with the CT saturation in the

event of the occurrence of a heavy external fault: (a) current measured at the incoming
terminal, (b) current measured at the outgoing terminal and (c) differential current (Id)
subtracted (b) from (a).
a. Incoming current
b. Outgoing current
c. Differential current
No change period
Figure 3.1-10 CT Secondary Current Waveforms and Differential Current for a heavy external
Fault with CT Saturation
As long as the CT keeps unsaturation, both Id and ΔId are zero. However, when the
change determined by the Equation (3.1-8) becomes a large positive value sufficiently, the
Equation (3.1-6) holds and the WDE operates accordingly. The SE operates instantly in the
event that the SE detects the Id. As a result, the SE and the WDE make an AND output.
In contrast, in the event of the occurrence of a heavy internal fault, CT saturation makes
the ΔId small. WDE does not operate, because the change in restraining current is also small
during this period. As a result, the DIF operation is correctly unblocked during a heavy
internal fault.
The EVD operates when an external fault progresses into an internal fault. The EVD
unblocks the blocking by WDE and SE elements, thus ensuring correct operation for external
faults progressing into internal fault.
The CTS includes a scheme switch [DIF-CTSat] to enable or disable the CTS.
- 42 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.1.5 Decision for fault phases

Decision for fault phases function is a useful feature of GRT200, which provides information
for testing. The feature helps the operator in assessing the severity of the fault and the
associated phase. The decision for faulted phase is based on the threshold settings for the
maximum differential current (Id) and maximum winding currents (Ip, Is, It).
The fault phase function is enabled by setting the [Phase Mode] scheme switch to ‘Fault
phases’. Figure 3.1-11 shows the scheme logic of fault phase function.
8C00001B7C
DIF-OPT-1 & ≥1 DIF-OPT-A
8D00001B7D
DIF-OPT-2 & ≥1 DIF-OPT-B
8E00001B7E
DIF-OPT-3 & ≥1 DIF-OPT-C
&
& Decision for
fault phases
Operating phases &
Phase Mode
Fault phases
8000801C23
1
Max. Id 8100801C27
2
phases 8200801C2B
3
Y
8000901C23 VecGroupP-W
D
A
Max. Ip 8100901C27
B
phases 8200901C2B Y
C VecGroupS-W
D
8000A01C23
A
Max. Is 8100A01C27 Y
VecGroupT-W
B D
phases 8200A01C2B
C
8000B01C23
A
Max. It 8100B01C27
B
phases 8200B01C2B
C
Figure 3.1-11 Decision for fault phases
- 43 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.1.6 Differential current monitoring function (DIF-SV)

(i) Equation and setting
The differential current monitoring function (DIF-SV) is provided to supervise the health of
the CT circuit. The DIF-SV detects the erroneous differential current that appears in the case
of a CT circuit failure. The DIF-SV is expressed using the following equation;
𝐼𝐼𝑑𝑑 > 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 [DIF-Slope1] ∙ 𝐼𝐼𝑟𝑟 + (1 − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 [DIF-Slope1]) ∙ 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 [DIF-IDSV]) (3.1-9)
he DIF-SV has a non-restraint current characteristic as shown below.

Id Id = Ir (one-end infeed)
IDSV operate
[DIF-S1-I1]
[DIF-IDSV]
Figure 3.1-12 DIF-SV characteristic
(ii) DIF-SV scheme logic

If the DIF-SV detects an erroneous differential current, the output signal DIF-IDSV can be
connected to DIF_TP_BLOCK (Refer Figure 3.1-15using PLC logic based on the application
requirement. The differential current monitoring function is operated when On is set for the
scheme switch [DIF-IDSV-EN].
8000501C23 TDIF-IDSV
8000501B60
1
8100501C27
& DIF-IDSV-1
8100501B61
DIF-SV 2
8200501C2B
& 8200501B62
DIF-IDSV-2
3 & DIF-IDSV-3
0-300s
DIF-SV_BLOCK
1 8300501B63
& DIF-IDSV
AMF-ON ≥1
DIF-IDSV-EN On
Figure 3.1-13 DIF-SV scheme logic
- 44 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.1.7 Settings and setting guidance

(i) DIF-S1-I1 setting
The minimum operation sensitivity of the DIF is subject to the setting [DIF-S1-I1], which
regulates the maximum erroneous differential current under normal condition. The setting
[DIF-S1-I1], thus, is placed as a ratio of the CT secondary rated current.
(ii) DIF-S1-Slope1, DIF-S1-Slope2 and DIF-S1-I2 settings

DIF-S1-Slope1: As for the small current area in the DIF, the DIF-S1-Slope1 is a restraining
coefficient that determines the S1 restraining characteristic and is reflected in percentage.
The value is summed by the following four error values:
1. CT accuracy error (considered as 5%, generally)
2. Tap error: the tap error proves the latitude of a power-transformer-tap value and
the power-transformer-tap includes maximum tap value and minimum tap value.
The value of the tap error is taken at middle position of the tap changer, as a
reference.
3. Matching error: the setting can neglect this error value because CT mismatch
may be small, as a rule. CT mismatch is taken care by GRT200 by the ratio
compensation kct1-kct5. (Refer 3.1.2). The user must ensure that the difference
between CT rating and the nominal current rating of the protected windings is
not large (kct should be <8).
4. Relay calculation error, and others (5%)
The value recommended for the DIF-S1-Slope1 setting is 1.5 times the sum of the four
error values. (The “1.5” reflects a margin.)
DIF-S1-Slope2: The DIF-S1-Slope2 is a restraining coefficient for the large current area
in the DIF; its setting is determined from a maximum erroneous differential current, that
appears when a through-fault current flows largely.
DIF-S1-I2: The DIF has dual slope characteristics and hence the break point is placed
with the DIF-S1-I2. The DIF-S1-I2 is set as the multiplier of rated current of CT secondary; it
includes CT ratio correction. The setting value of the DIF-S1-I2 to be greater than the
maximum operating current level, that is reflected as a ratio to the CT secondary rated
current; the DIF-S1-I2 to be between the maximum forced-cooled rated current and the
maximum emergency overload current.
While on the subject, percentage-restraining coefficient is reflected in % slope and its

equation is described as follow:
- 45 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Persentage restraining factor (% slope) =
𝑇𝑇ℎ𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟ℎ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (3.1-17)
=
(𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐)
(iii) 2f setting
The inrush current includes a second harmonic content (2nd harmonic) on energizing a
transformer. For the detection of the 2nd harmonic, the DIF provides a setting and the setting
value is placed for setting [DIF-2f]. (A setting of 15% is suggested if there is no minimum data
on the 2nd harmonic.)
(iv) 5f setting
When a transformer is in over-excitation condition, a fifth harmonic content (5th harmonic) is
appeared. The 5th harmonic affects protection operations in the IED and hence it is required
to detect the 5th harmonic. Thus, the DIF provides a setting and the setting value is placed for
setting [DIF-5f]. (A setting of 30% is suggested if there is no minimum data on the 5th
harmonic.)
(v) S2 setting
As cited in section 3.1.3(i), the DIF includes the high-set and the setting is determined with
setting [DIF-S2-I]. The setting value should be greater than a maximum inrush current
estimated. Hence, a recommended setting value is greater than the maximum inrush current
multiplied by the kct. (Greater than, “Maximum peak value of Inrush current” ×kct.)
Incidentally, setting [DIF-S2-I] is prescribed with Per-unit (pu). The DIF-S2-I is set as the
multiplier of rated current of secondary CT; it includes CT ratio correction.
(vi) Setting phase matching

The phase angle difference between line currents on either side of the power transformer are
corrected by setting according to the hands of a clock and the transformer connections
described in IEC60076-1.
(vi)-1 Determination of setting

As for transformer windings, there are winding settings and the primary winding setting is
determined with scheme switches [VecGroupP-W]. Likewise, the secondary and the tertiary
windings are determined with scheme switch [VecGroupS-W], and [VecGroupT-W]. When a
transformer unit is Star-winding, a set of 1 is placed for the scheme switch; whereas a set of 2
is placed when another transformer unit is delta-winding.
On the other hand, for phase angle difference, settings are determined with scheme
- 46 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
switches [VecGroupS-C] and [VecGroupT-C]; the scheme switch [VecGroupS-C] is used to set
the phase angle difference between primary and secondary; the scheme switch [VecGroupT-C]
is used to set the phase angle difference between primary and tertiary. The difference is
determined by a lagging angle from the primary winding, and is expressed with a number
that is reflected with 0–11 in time unit. The number corresponds to a lagging degree: e.g., an
hour o’clock corresponds to lagging 30°.
The phase angle matching, that is setting for transformer connection and being complied
with IEC60076-1 is summarized in Table 3.1-4 and Table 3.1-5.
As for a three-winding Star-Star-Delta transformer, e.g., settings are determined with

scheme switches [VecGroupP-W], [VecGroupS-W], [VecGroupT-W], [VecGroupS-C], and
[VecGroupT-C] in accordance with Table 3.1-5. Table 3.1-2 shows “Yy0d11” transformer
connection, for example.
Table 3.1-2 Scheme switch for Star-Star-Delta transformer (an example from Table 3.1-5)
Transformer
Connection settings
(IEC60076-1) VecGroupP-W VecGroupS-W VecGroupS-C VecGroupT-W VecGroupT-C
Y y 0 d 11 Y y 0 d 11
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
a: A set of Y is placed because the primary winding is Star.

b: A set of y is placed because the secondary winding is Star.
c: A set of 0 is placed because the secondary winding is in phase with the primary.
d: A set of d is placed because the tertiary winding is Delta.
e: A set of 11 is placed because the tertiary vector lags the primary winding by 11 hours
o’clock (330°).
Primary Secondary Tertiary

transformer (P) Transformer (S) Transformer (T)
Figure 3.1-14 Yy0d11 vectors in three-winding (See Table 3.1-5)
- 47 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 3.1-3 Phase angle matching calculation1

Clock Calculation Remarks
position
0 Ia’ = (2Ia − Ib − Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (2Ib − Ic − Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (2Ic − Ia − Ib)/ 3 Setting value
0
1 Ia’ = (Ia – Ib)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib − Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic – Ia)/ 3 11 1
2 Ia’ = (Ia − 2Ib + Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib − 2Ic + Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic −2Ia + Ib)/ 3 10 2
3 Ia’ = (− Ib + Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (– Ic + Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (− Ia + Ib)/ 3 9 3
4 Ia’ = (− Ia − Ib + 2Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (− Ib − Ic + 2Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (− Ic − Ia + 2Ib)/ 3
8 4
5 Ia’ = (– Ia + Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (– Ib + Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (– Ic + Ib)/ 3
7 5
6 6
Ia’ = (−2Ia + Ib + Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (− 2Ib + Ic + Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (− 2Ic + Ia + Ib)/ 3
7 Ia’ = (− Ia + Ib)/ 3 Ib’ = (− Ib + Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (– Ic + Ia)/ 3

8 Ia’ = (− Ia + 2Ib − Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (− Ib + 2Ic − Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (− Ic + 2Ia − Ib)/ 3
9 Ia’ = (Ib – Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ic – Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ia – Ib)/ 3

10 Ia’ = (Ia + Ib − 2Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib + Ic −2Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic + Ia − 2Ib)/ 3
11 Ia’ = (Ia – Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib − Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic − Ib)/ 3

1Note: For phase angle correction, the DIF determines its calculation formula with clock
position.
- 48 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 3.1-4 Setting for phase angle matching of α-method in 2 windings transformers
Transformer connection*1 Settings for phase angle correction Remark
Primary, Secondary Primary Secondary Phase angle diff. Phase angle
(P) (S) [VecGroupP-W] [VecGroupS-W] [VecGroupS-C] matching calc. 2
P: 0 O’clock
Yy0 Y y 0
S: 0 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd0 D d 0
S: 1 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd1 Y d 1
S: 1 O’clock
P: 11 O’clock
Dy1 D y 1
S: 0 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd2 D d 2
S: 3 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd4 D d 4
S: 5 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd5 Y d 5
S: 5 O’clock
P: 7 O’clock
Dy5 D y 5
S: 0 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yy6 Y y 6
S: 6 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd6 D d 6
S: 7 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd7 Y d 7
S: 7 O’clock
- 49 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Primary, Secondary Primary Secondary Phase angle diff. Phase angle
(P) (S) [VecGroupP-W] [VecGroupS-W] [VecGroupS-C] matching calc. 2
P: 5 O’clock
Dy7 D y 7
S: 0 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd8 D d 8
S: 9 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd10 D d 10
S: 11 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd11 Y d 11
S: 11 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dy11 D y 11
S: 0 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dz10 D d 10
S: 11 O’clock
*1Note: Reference phase is drawn in a dash line and complied with IEC60076-1.
*2Note: Phase angle calculation is discussed in Table 3.1-3.
Transformer connection is complied with IEC60076-1; Table 3.1-5 shows that the DIF,
which protects a two-winding transformer, can cover a three-winding transformer with a
stabilizing-winding circuit.
- 50 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 3.1-5 Setting for phase angle matching of α-method in 3 windings transformers
Phase angle diff.
Phase angle diff.

[VecGroupS-C]
[VecGroupT-C]
Primary, Secondary, Tertiary Phase angle
[VecGroup
[VecGroup
[VecGroup
Secondary
Primary
Tertiary
(P) (S) (T)
P-W]
S-W]
matching calc.*2
T-W]
P: 0 O’clock
Yy0d1 Y y 0 d 1 S: 0 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yy0d11 Y y 0 d 11 S: 0 O’clock
T: 11 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd1d1 Y d 1 d 1 S: 1 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd11d11 Y d 11 d 11 S: 11 O’clock
T: 11 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dy11d0 D y 11 d 0 S: 0 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
P: 11 O’clock
Dy1d0 D y 1 d 0 S: 0 O’clock
T: 11 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd0d0 D d 0 d 0 S: 1 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yy0y0 Y y 0 y 0 S: 0 O’clock
T: 0 O’clock
*1Note: Reference phase is drawn in a dash line and complied with IEC60076-1.
*2Note: Phase angle calculation is discussed in Table 3.1-3.
- 51 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(vi)-2 Practical setting and a point to note

1. Reference phase for phase angle matching
A reference phase be selected from the phase of a Star-connected side and hence the
phase of primary winding is applied for the reference phase in the case of a Star-delta
transformer. The followings shows tips for each transformer connection:
 Star-delta transformer (Yd): the reference phase is chosen from primary winding
phase.
 Delta-Star transformer (Dy): the reference phase is chosen from secondary
winding phase.
 Star-Star transformer (Yy): the reference phase is chosen from primary winding
phase.
 Delta-delta transformer (Dd): the reference phase leads the A-phase of primary
winding by 30°.
2. Phase rotation
The phase relationship between each terminal current, which depends on the
transformer connection and the connection between the transformer and the power
system, must be checked. The phase displacement of a delta-connected side may not be
determined only by the transformer connection described in Table 3.1-4 and Table 3.1-5.
Table 3.1-6 shows an example illustrating the connection between a transformer and
power system. The Table 3.1-6 also shows their current vectors when an Yd1 transformer
is connected to the power system with both clockwise and anticlockwise phase rotation.
Care should be taken that the setting for phase angle correction is not corresponding to
Table 3.1-5.
- 52 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 3.1-6 Transformer connection and current vector

Delta-side connected with 30° lagging Delta-side connected with 30° leading
Connection between Transformer Transformer

Primary Yd1 Secondary Primary Yd1 Secondary
Yd1 Transformer and a U u a a U u a
v b v b
Power system
b V b V
c W w c c W w c
Each winding a Transformer u a a Transformer u a

U U
I1a I2a I2a’=I2a−I2c I1a I1c I2c I2a’=I2a−I2b
connection and b V v b b V v b
I1b I2b I2b’=I2b−I2a I1b I1b I2b I2b’=I2b−I2c
Incoming/Outgoing c W w c c W w c
I1c I2c I2c’=I2c−I2b I1c I1a I2a I2c’=I2c−I2a
current
I1a I2b’=I2b−I2a I1a I2c’=I2c−I2a
Incoming current I2c I2b
I2b I2c
vector and Outgoing I2b’=I2b−I2c
30° I2c’=I2c−I2b 30°
I1c I1b I1c I1b
current vector I
I2a’=I2a−I2c 2a I2a’=I2a−I2b I2a
Incoming Outgoing Incoming Outgoing
Current Current Current Current
Setting VecGroupP-W =Y, VecGroupP-W =Y,
VecGroupS-W =d, VecGroupS-W =d,
VecGroupS-C =1 (Same as Yd1) VecGroupS-C =11 (Same as Yd11)
3. Auto-transformer (with internal delta-winding)

For setting as the auto-transformer, see “Yy0” in Table 3.1-4.
4. Zigzag connected transformer

Place a set of D,d for the scheme switches [VecGroupP-W], [VecGroupS-W] and
[VecGroupS-C] for zigzag connected side. Zero-sequence current is canceled.
5. When three-winding applied to a two-winding transformer

Keep the scheme switches [VecGroupT-W] and [VecGroupT-C] to the default setting
values.
6. One and a half breaker system

Table 3.1-7 shows settings when one-and-a-half breaker system (1.5CB) is applied. The
settings are required for the DIF.
- 53 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 3.1-7 Example of DIF setting

Type Settings
Yd11
P S
[VecGroupP-W]=Y
1CT 2CT [VecGroupS-W]=d
1NCT
[VecGroupS-C]=11
[Conn-1CT]= Primary
[Conn-2CT]= Secondary
[Conn-3CT]= No use
[Conn-1NCT]= Use
[Conn-2NCT]= No use
1.5CB system [VecGroupP-W]=Y
1CT Yy0d11 [VecGroupS-W]=d

P S 2CT [VecGroupS-C]=0
[VecGroupT-W]= Non
3CT
1NCT
[Conn-1CT]= Primary
[Conn-3CT]= Primary
[Conn-1NCT]= Use
[Conn-2NCT]= No use
1CT Yy0d11
3CT [VecGroupP-W]=Y
P
T [VecGroupS-W]=y
1NCT
[VecGroupS-C]=0
2CT
S
[VecGroupT-W]=d
2NCT
[VecGroupT-C]=11
[Conn-1CT]= Primary
[Conn-3CT]= Tertiary
[Conn-1NCT]= Use
[Conn-2NCT]= Use
- 54 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.1.8 DIF scheme logic

Figure 3.1-15 and Figure 3.1-16 show the scheme logic of DIF function.
8000101C23
1 & & S2-1-OP
8100101C27
S2 2 & & S2-2-OP
8200101C2B
3 &
DIF 8000201C23 & S2-3-OP
1 S1-1-OP
8100201C27 & & ≥1 &
S1 2 S1-2-OP
8200201C2B & & ≥1 &
3
& & ≥1 & S1-3-OP
DIF-S2-EN On
≥1
DIF-S1-EN
&
On
DIF-TP_BLOCK 1
DIF-BlockMode Block-PerP
Block-3P
DIF-1_BLK 1
DIF-2_BLK 1
DIF-3_BLK 1
Figure 3.1-15 DIF scheme logic (1)
DIF output signals can be blocked when 2F, or 5F or CTS operates. The 2F and 5F
elements become active when ‘On’ is set for the scheme switches [DIF-2F-EN] and [DIF-5F-EN].
The CTS element becomes active when ‘Block is set for the scheme switch [DIF-CTSat]. The
following two operation modes can be selected using the scheme switch [DIF-BlockMode]:
Block-PerP: In case of a fault except for three-phase fault, an element in any phase of
2F 5F operates, then a DIF signal, which is connected to the element
operated is blocked.
Block-3P: When any phase operates, all the three-phase DIF signals are blocked. The
setting Block-3P is recommended for a large-size transformer because the
second harmonic component of the transformer may be low.
- 55 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
≥1 8000001B64
DIF-OPT-1
8100001B65
≥1 DIF-OPT-2
8200001B66
≥1 DIF-OPT-3
8000101B60
TDIF-S2 8000001B63
S2-OPT-1 8200101B63
S2-1-OP ≥1 S2-OPT DIF-OPT
8100101B61
≥1 ≥1
S2-2-OP S2-OPT-2
≥1
8200101B62
S2-3-OP S2-OPT-3
≥1
0-100s
&
&
&
TDIF-S1 8000201B60
S1-OPT-1 8100201B63
S1-1-OP ≥1 S1-OPT
8100201B61 ≥1
S1-2-OP ≥1 S1-OPT-2
8200201B62
S1-3-OP S1-OPT-3
≥1
0-100s
&
&
&
DIF_INST_OP
DIF-TP1 8000001B70
On DIF-TRIP1
&
DIF-TP2 On 8100001B71
& DIF-TRIP2
DIF-TP3 8200001B72
On
& DIF-TRIP3
DIF-TP4 On 8300001B73
& DIF-TRIP4
DIF-TP5 8400001B74
On
& DIF-TRIP5
DIF-TP6 On 8500001B75
& DIF-TRIP6
Figure 3.1-16 DIF scheme logic (2)
- 56 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.1.9 Setting
Setting of DIF (Function ID: 413001)
Range Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5 (Full)
Setting device 1A 5A Units Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating
DIF trip command
DIF-TP1 Off / On - output from TP1 BO On On On On On
contact
DIF trip command
contact
DIF trip command
contact
DIF trip command
Common DIF-TP4 Off / On - output from TP4 BO On On On On On
contact
DIF trip command
contact
DIF trip command
contact
Operating
Phase indication for
Phase mode phases / Fault - Fault phases Fault phases Fault phases Fault phases Fault phases
Fault record
phases
DIF-S1-EN Off / On - DIF S1 protection enable On On On On On

Minimum operating
DIF-S1-I1 0.10 - 1.00 pu 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
value
Knee point between
DIF-S1-I2 1.00 - 40.00 pu small and large current 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
regions
S1 Small current region
DIF-S1-Slope1 10 - 50 % percentage slope of Id-Ir 50 50 50 50 50
characteristic
Large current region
DIF-S1-Slope2 10 - 100 % percentage slope of Id-Ir 100 100 100 100 100
characteristic
TDIF-S1 0.00 - 100.00 s DIF-S1 timer 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
DIF-S2-EN Off / On - DIF S2 protection enable On On On On On

S2 DIF-S2-I 2.00 - 20.00 pu DIF S2 operating value 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
TDIF-S2 0.00 - 100.00 s DIF-S2 timer 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
2f component detection
DIF-2f-EN Off / On - On On On On On
enable
2f DIF-2f 10 - 50 % 2f component sensitivity 15 15 15 15 15
DIF-BlockMode- Non / Block-3P / DIF block mode using 2f
- Block-3P Block-3P Block-3P Block-3P Block-3P
2f Block-PerP components
5f component detection
DIF-5f-EN Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
enable
5f DIF-5f 10 - 100 % 5f component sensitivity 30 30 30 30 30
DIF-BlockMode- Non / Block-3P / DIF block mode using 5f
- Block-3P Block-3P Block-3P Block-3P Block-3P
5f Block-PerP components
DIF block triggered by Non Non Non Non Non

CT-sat DIF-CTSat Non / Block -
CT saturation detection
DIF-IDSV-EN Off / On - Id supervision enable Off Off Off Off Off

Id supervision
Id-SV DIF-IDSV 0.05 - 1.00 pu 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24
sensitivity
TDIF-IDSV 0 - 300 s Id supervision timer 10 10 10 10 10
- 57 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.1.10 Data ID
 Signal monitoring point
DIF (Function ID: 413001)
8000101C23 DIF-S2-1 DIF-S2 relay element operated (phase-1)
8200101C2B DIF-S2-3 DIF-S2 relay element operated (phase-3)
8200201C2B DIF-S1-3 DIF-S1 relay element operated (phase-3)
8000301C23 DIF-2f-1 DIF-2f relay element operated (phase-1)
8200301C2B DIF-2f-3 DIF-2f relay element operated (phase-3)
8200401C2B DIF-5f-3 DIF-5f relay element operated (phase-3)
8000501C23 DIF-SV-1 DIF-SV relay element operated (phase-1)
8100501C27 DIF-SV-2 DIF-SV relay element operated (phase-2)
8200501C2B DIF-SV-3 DIF-SV relay element operated (phase-3)
8000801C23 Max.Id phase-1 Maximum intensity of current (phase-1)
8100801C27 Max.Id phase-2 Maximum intensity of current (phase-2)
8200801C2B Max.Id phase-3 Maximum intensity of current (phase-3)
8000901C23 Max.Ip phase-A Maximum intensity primary of current (phase-A)
8100901C27 Max.Ip phase-B Maximum intensity primary of current (phase-B)
8200901C2B Max.Ip phase-C Maximum intensity primary of current (phase-C)
8000A01C23 Max.Is phase-A Maximum intensity secondary of current (phase-A)
8100A01C27 Max.Is phase-B Maximum intensity secondary of current (phase-B)
8200A01C2B Max.Is phase-C Maximum intensity secondary of current (phase-C)
8000B01C23 Max.It phase-A Maximum intensity tertiary of current (phase-A)
8100B01C27 Max.It phase-B Maximum intensity tertiary of current (phase-B)
8200B01C2B Max.It phase-C Maximum intensity tertiary of current (phase-C)
8F00301B60 DIF-2f-OR DIF-2f protection operated
8F00401B60 DIF-5f-OR DIF-5f protection operated
8000001B60 DIF-1_BLK DIF-1 block command
8000101B60 S2-OPT-1 DIF-S2 protection operated (phase-1)
8000001B63 DIF-OPT DIF protection operated
8100201B63 S1-OPT DIF-S1 protection operated
8200101B63 S2-OPT DIF-S2 protection operated
8000001B64 DIF-OPT-1 DIF operation phase or fault phase (phase-1)
- 58 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8000001B70 DIF-TRIP1 DIF trip command output from TP1 B0
8C00001B7C DIF-OPT-A DIF operating phase or fault phase (phase-A)
8D00001B7D DIF-OPT-B DIF operating phase or fault phase (phase-B)
8E00001B7E DIF-OPT-C DIF operating phase or fault phase (phase-C)
8000501B60 DIF-IDSV-1 DIF-IDSV protection operated (phase-1)
8300501B63 DIF-IDSV DIF-IDSV protection operated
8100001BB0 DIF_TP_BLOCK DIF-TP block command
8200001BB1 DIF_SV_BLOCK DIF-SV block command
8F00001BB2 DIF_BLOCK DIF block command
8000001BB3 DIF_INST_OP DIF instant operation command
8000001BB4 DIF-1_BLOCK DIF-1 block command
 Connection point in PLC logic

810000EBB0 DIF_TP_BLOCK DIF TP block command
820000EBB1 DIF_SV_BLOCK DIF SV block command
8F0000EBB2 DIF_BLOCK DIF block command
800000EBB3 DIF_INST_OP DIF instant operation command
800000EBB4 DIF-1_BLOCK DIF-1 block command
- 59 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.2 Restricted earth fault protection (REF)

Restricted earth fault protection (REF) is applied to a star-connected transformer with a
neutral point, which is earthed directly or is earthed through a low impedance resistor. The
REF includes a differential scheme for a zero phase sequence current and hence can provide
highly sensitive protection for an internal earth fault.
Ia+Ib+Ic
REF
In
Figure 3.2-1 REF protection principle
The differential scheme is designed for low impedance current. As shown in Figure 3.2-1,
the zero-sequence current (3I0) is derived from measured phase currents (Ia, Ib, and Ic). On
the other hand, the neutral conductor, feeds neutral current (In). The REF, therefore, can
detect the differential current in case of internal earth fault.
GRT200
P S
1CT REF-P
2CT
3CT REF-S
T
4CT
5CT
1NCT REF-T
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 3.2-2 Application example
3.2.1 Element characteristics

The IED has three elements namely REF-P, REF-S and REF-T. The REF characteristic and
settings are identical for all the three elements.
Figure 3.2-3 shows the REF block diagram that consists of REF-DIF and REF-DEF
elements. REF-DIF is a biased differential current element, whereas REF-DEF is a
directional earth fault element. The REF-DEF element complements the REF-DIF element
operation in the small differential current region, thereby providing security against mal
operation especially when the REF-DIF element has a very high sensitivity (low pick up)
- 60 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
setting. For through fault high current, when phase CTs saturate the operation of REF is
blocked by REF-DEF element. This is achieved due to the maximum limit of the directional
characteristics.
REF-□
REF-DIF-□ &
REF-DEF-□
& ≧1
On
REF-□-DEF-EN Off
○
+
Figure 3.2-3 REF block diagram
The operation of the REF protection is described below:

a) Scheme switch [REF-[]-DEF-EN] is ‘On’
Figure 3.2-4 shows the REF protection with [REF-[]-DEF-EN] = ‘On’. The REF
protection operates in the small current region only. For large differential current due
to internal earth fault, the DIF (three-phase differential current) protection will
operate. However, the zero sequence currents are eliminated in the DIF scheme. The
DIF will operate for large earth fault current due to the presence of positive and
negative sequence currents.
DIF
S1 S2
REF
Earth fault only
Level of differential current
2.0 x Max_KCT_REF Threshold: Maximum value of the

in-rush current
Figure 3.2-4 REF protection with REF-[]-DEF-EN On
b) Scheme switch [REF-[]-DEF-EN] is ‘Off’

Figure 3.2-5 shows the operation of REF protection with [REF-[]-DEF-EN] = ‘Off’. The
REF protection operates for small and large differential currents. The DIF protection
will also operate in the large differential current region.
- 61 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
DIF
S1 S2
REF
Earth fault only
Level of differential current
Threshold: Maximum value of the

in-rush current
Figure 3.2-5 REF protection with REF-[]-DEF-EN Off
(i) REF-DIF characteristic

As shown in the Figure 3.2-6, the REF-DIF element has a dual slope characteristic: the first
slope is a weak restraint characteristic (S1) in the small current region, the second slope is a
strong restraint characteristic (S2) in the large current region.
In Figure 3.2-6, a differential current (Id0) and restraining current (Ir0) determines the
dual slope characteristic. The Id0 is a vector summation of phase current of all windings; the
Ir0 is the larger of the residual current or the neutral current.
3I0
IN
Id0 = Ir0 (One-end infeed) Operating zone

Id0
S2 REF-[]-SLOPE2
50-100%
S1
Max_KCT_REF
・[REF-[]-I1] REF-[]-SLOPE1=10%
Max_KCT_REF [REF-[]-I2] Ir0

・[REF-[]-I1]
Iod: Residual differential current (|3I0 + IN|)
Ires: Restraining current (Max(|IA|, |IB|, |IC|, |IN|))
REF-[]-I1: Minimum operating value
REF-[]-I2: Knee point ([]: P, S, T)
Figure 3.2-6 REF-DIF characteristic
The weaker restraint of the S1 ensures sensitivity to low-level faults; the S1

characteristic is expressed using the following equation:
Id0 − [ ] > 0.1 ∗ Ir0 − [ ] + (1 − 0.1) ∗ MaxKCTREF -[ ] ∗ [REF − [ ] − I1] (3.2-1)

where,
- 62 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
[ ]: P or S or T
Max_KCT_REF-[ ]: Max(KCT1_REF- [], KCT2_REF- [], KCT3_REF-
[],KCT4_REF- [], KCT5_REF- [])
Zero phase differential current Id0-[] is expressed using the following equation:
Id0 − [] = |KCT1_REF − [] ∙ I01 + KCT2_REF − [] ∙ I02 + KCT3_REF − [] ∙ I03 +

(3.2-2)
KCT4_REF − [] ∙ I04 + KCT5_REF − [] ∙ I05 + IN |
where,
KCT1_REF-[] to KCT5_REF-[]: CT ratio matching coefficient of 1CT - 5CT
The KCT is calculated automatically as Phase CT ratio / Neutral CT ratio. The neutral
CT rating is used as the base value.
The restraint current is expressed using the following equation:

Ir0- []＝Max (KCT1_REF-[]･|Ia1|, KCT1_REF-[]･|Ib1|, KCT1_REF-[]･|Ic1|,
KCT2_REF-[]･|Ia2|, KCT2_REF-[]･|Ib2|, KCT2_REF-[]･|Ic2|,
KCT3_REF-[]･|Ia3|, KCT3_REF-[]･|Ib3|, KCT3_REF-[]･|Ic3|, (3.2-3)
KCT4_REF-[]･|Ia4|, KCT4_REF-[]･|Ib4|, KCT4_REF-[]･|Ic4|,
KCT5_REF-[]･|Ia5|, KCT5_REF-[]･|Ib5|, KCT5_REF-[]･|Ic5|, |IN|)
where
I01, I02, I03, I04, I05: Residual current of 1CT – 5CT
I*a, I*b, I*c: phase current of 1CT – 5CT
IN: Neutral current
Note that all currents are CT secondary currents.
The strong restraint characteristic of the S2 lies on the large current region for a
high-through fault; it is expressed using the following equation:
𝐼𝐼𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − [] > [𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 − [] − 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠2] × 𝐼𝐼𝑟𝑟0 − [] + (0.1 − [𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 − [] − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆2]) × [𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 − [] − 𝐼𝐼2 ] ×
(3.2-4)
𝑀𝑀𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎_𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾_𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 − [] + �(1 − 0.1) × [𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 − [] − 𝐼𝐼2 ] × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀_𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾_𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 − []�
where,
[]: P or S or T
Max_KCT_REF-[]: Max (KCT1_REF-[] KCT2_REF-[],
KCT3_REF-[],KCT4_REF-[], KCT5_REF-[])
- 63 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Zero ampere control

In the following example, the 4CT and 5CT current is forced to zero as it is not used.
GRT200
I01 x KCT1_REF-P I0d operation

1CT I02 x KCT2_REF-P
I03 x KCT3_REF-P
I04 x KCT4_REF-P(＝0)
P 2CT I05 x KCT5_REF-P(＝0)
Operation
3CT TP_REPLICA REF-P
TP_REF
S 4CT
5CT
In
1NCT
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 3.2-7 Example of Zero ampere control
(ii) REF-DEF characteristic

As shown in Figure 3.2-8, the REF-DEF characteristic consists of a directional characteristic
and a non-directional characteristic, as shown in Figure 3.2-9. Note that MAX(Ia,Ib,Ic) is less
than 2×MAX(KCT1_REF_[], …, KCT5_REF_[]).*1
REF-DEF-□
Directional element
(a) ≥1
Non-directional
element (b)
Figure 3.2-8 REF-DEF logic
90°
(*1)
? 3I0
IN
180° 0 0°
O Ik2 3I0
Operating
Ik1
2×Max_KCT_REF
270°
Figure 3.2-9 REF-DEF characteristic

Note: Current sensitivity is fixed in 0.01pu=Ik1 and 0.025pu=Ik2
IN is neutral current in the transformer
3I0 is Zero sequence current calculated with Ia, Ib and Ic
- 64 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) Example of KCT calculation and relationship to REF-DEF operation

Figure 3.2-10 shows an example of KCT*_REF_[] calculation done automatically by GRT200.
The KCT2_REF_P is larger than KCT1_REF_P; hence, the Max_KCT_REF takes the value
three (KCT2_REF_P=3). With reference to Figure 3.2-9 , 2.0 × Max_KCT_REF = 2.0 × 3 = 6 A.
In Figure 3.2-10, the rated current of neutral CT is 1200A. The REF_DEF is blocked when the
maximum phase current exceeds 2×Max_KCT_REF×(rated current of neutral CT). In other
words, if a phase current on the primary side or on the secondary side exceeds 7200A, the
REF is blocked.
Primary Secondary
CT ratio: 2400/1 CT ratio: 3600/1
KCT1_REF_P=2 KCT2_REF_P=3
I01 I01
CT ratio:
1200/1
REF
IN
Figure 3.2-10 KCT*_REF_[] calculation
- 65 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.2.2 Setting means

(i) Setting tips for REF-P to REF-T
Table 3.2-1 shows the examples of REF setting.
Table 3.2-1 Setting examples of REF element

System configuration GRT200 setting example
[REF-P-EN] = On
[REF-P-1CT] = Use
[REF-P-2CT] = No use
GRT200
P S
1CT REF-P [REF-P-3CT] = No use
2CT
3CT [REF-S-EN] = On
REF-S
[REF-S-1CT] = No use
T
4CT [REF-S-2CT] = Use

5CT [REF-S-4CT] = No use
1NCT REF-T [REF-S-5CT] = No use
[REF-T-EN] = On
2NCT
3NCT
[REF-T-1CT] = No use
[REF-T-3CT] = Use
[REF-P-EN] = On
[REF-P-1CT] = Use
GRT200
1CT REF-P [REF-P-3CT] = No use

S P [REF-P-4CT] = No use
2CT [REF-P-5CT] = No use
[REF-S-EN] = On
3CT REF-S [REF-S-1CT] = No use
T [REF-S-2CT] = Use
4CT [REF-S-3CT] = Use
5CT [REF-S-5CT] = No use
1NCT REF-T [REF-T-EN] = Off
2NCT
3NCT
- 66 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
System configuration GRT200 setting example

[REF-P-EN] = On
[REF-P-1CT]= Use
[REF-P-2CT] = Use
GRT200
1CT REF-P [REF-P-3CT] = Use

P 2CT [REF-P-5CT] = No use
3CT REF-S [REF-S-EN] = Off

S 4CT
5CT [REF-T-EN] = Off

1NCT REF-T
2NCT
3NCT
[REF-P-EN]= On
GRT200
[REF-P-1CT] = Use
1CT REF-P [REF-P-2CT] = Use
[REF-P-3CT] = Use
P 2CT [REF-P-4CT] = Use
3CT REF-S [REF-S-EN]= Off
S 4CT
5CT
1NCT [REF-T-EN]= Off

REF-T
2NCT
3NCT
- 67 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.2.3 Scheme logic

Figure 3.2-11, Figure 3.2-12 and Figure 3.2-13 show the scheme logic including three REFs.
Every REF can signal an instantaneous trip or a time-delayed trip; every REF element can
send a trip signal simultaneously to five CBs by setting On for each scheme switch.
No Use
REF-P-1CT
Use
No Use
REF-P-2CT
Use
No Use 8000101C23 TREF-P
REF-P-3CT
Use REF-P t 0
& 8000101B60
No Use &
REF-P-4CT 0.00-100.00s
≥1 REF-P-OPT
Use
No Use
REF-P-5CT
Use
&
REF-P-EN On
REF-P-BLOCK On
1
REF-P-INST_OP
On
REF-P-TP1 8000101B61
&
On REF-P-TRIP1
REF-P-TP2 On 8100101B62 REF-P-TRIP2

&
REF-P-TP3 8200101B63
&
On REF-P-TRIP3
REF-P-TP4 8300101B64
&
On REF-P-TRIP4
REF-P-TP5 8400101B65
&
On REF-P-TRIP5
REF-P-TP6 On 8500101B66
&
REF-P-TRIP6
REF-P-ALM On 8B00101B6
REF-P-ALARM
&
Figure 3.2-11 REF scheme logic (P)
- 68 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
No Use
REF-S-1CT
Use
No Use
REF-S-2CT
Use
No Use 8100201C23
REF-S-3CT TREF-S
Use REF-S
& t 0 8100201B60
No Use &
REF-S-4CT Use 0.00-100.00s
≥1 REF-S-OPT
No Use
REFS-5CT Use &
REF-S-EN On
REF-S-BLOCK On
1
REF-S-INST_OP On
8000201B61
&
REF-S-TP1
On REF-S-TRIP1
REF-S-TP2 8100201B62
On & REF-S-TRIP2
8200201B63
&
REF-S-TP3
On REF-S-TRIP3
8300201B64
REF-S-TP4 On & REF-S-TRIP4
REF-S-TP5 8400201B65
On & REF-S-TRIP5
REF-S-TP6 On 8500201B66
& REF-S-TRIP6
REF-S-ALM On 8B00201B6C
&
REF-S-ALARM
Figure 3.2-12 REF scheme logic (S)
- 69 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
No Use
REF-T-1CT
Use
No Use
REF-T-2CT
Use
No Use 8200301C23
REF-T-3CT TREF-T
Use REF-T 0
& t 8200301B60
No Use &
REF-T-4CT Use 0.00-100.00s
≥1 REF-T-OPT
No Use
REF-T-5CT
Use &
REF-T-EN On
REF-T-BLOCK On
1
REF-T-INST_OP
On
8000301B61
&
REF-T-TP1
On REF-T-TRIP1
REF-T-TP2 8100301B62
On & REF-T-TRIP2
8200301B63
REF-T-TP3
&
On REF-T-TRIP3
8300301B64
REF-T-TP4
&
On REF-T-TRIP4
8400301B65
REF-T-TP5
On
& REF-T-TRIP5
8500301B66
REF-T-TP6 On
&
REF-T-TRIP6
8B00301B6C
REF-T-ALM On
&
REF-T-ALARM
Figure 3.2-13 REF scheme logic (T)
- 70 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.2.4 Settings list

Setting of REF(Function ID: 414001)
Range Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5 (Full)
Un
Setting device Contents
1A 5A its 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
1CT's residual current used for

REF-P-1CT No use / Use - (Use) Use Use (Use) Use
REF-P calculation
Replica
REF-P-2CT No use / Use - (No use) No use No use (No use) No use
REF-P calculation
REF-P-3CT No use / Use - (No use) No use No use (No use) No use
REF-P calculation
REF-P-4CT No use / Use - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) No use
REF-P calculation
REF-P-5CT No use / Use - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) No use
REF-P calculation
REF-P-EN Off / On - REF-P protection enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
REF-P-I1 0.05 - 0.50 pu Minimum operating value (0.50) 0.50 0.50 (0.50) 0.50
Knee point between small and
REF-P-I2 0.50 - 4.00 pu (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
large current regions
Small current region percentage
REF-P
REF-P-Slope1 10 - 10 % (10) 10 10 (10) 10

slope of I0d-I0r characteristic
Large current region percentage
REF-P-Slope2 50 - 100 % (100) 100 100 (100) 100
CT saturation countermeasure
REF-P-DEF-EN Off / On - (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
enable
TREF-P 0.00 - 100.00 s REF-P Timer (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
REF-P trip command output
REF-P-TP1 Off / On - (On) On On (On) On
from TP1 BO contact
from TP2 BO contact
from TP3 BO contact
from TP4 BO contact
from TP5 BO contact
from TP6 BO contact
REF-P-ALM Off / On - REF-P alarm enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off

REF-S-1CT No use / Use - (No use) No use No use (No use) No use
REF-S calculation
Replica
REF-S-2CT No use / Use - (Use) Use Use (Use) Use

REF-S calculation
3CT's residual current used for No use
REF-S-3CT No use / Use - (No use) No use (No use) No use
REF-S calculation
REF-S-4CT No use / Use - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) No use
REF-S calculation
REF-S-5CT No use / Use - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) No use
REF-S calculation
REF-S-EN Off / On - REF-S protection enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
REF-S-I1 0.05 - 0.50 pu Minimum operating value (0.50) 0.50 0.50 (0.50) 0.50
REF-S-I2 0.50 - 4.00 pu (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
Small current region percentage
REF-S
REF-S-Slope1 10 - 10 % (10) 10 10 (10) 10

Large current region percentage
REF-S-Slope2 50 - 100 % (100)
slope of I0d-I0r characteristic 100 100 100 100
REF-S-DEF-EN Off / On - (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
enable
TREF-S 0.00 - 100.00 s REF-S Timer (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
REF-S trip command output
REF-S-TP1 Off / On - (On) On On (On) On
from TP1 BO contact
from TP2 BO contact
from TP3 BO contact
from TP4 BO contact
from TP5 BO contact
from TP6 BO contact
REF-S-ALM Off / On - REF-S alarm enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off

REF-T-1CT No use / Use - (No use) No use No use (No use) No use
REF-T calculation
Replica
REF-T-2CT No use / Use - (No use) No use No use (No use) No use
REF-T
REF-T calculation
REF-T-3CT No use / Use - (Use) Use Use (Use) Use
REF-T calculation
REF-T-4CT No use / Use - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) No use
REF-T calculation
REF-T-5CT No use / Use - (No use) (No use) (No use) (No use) No use
REF-T calculation
- 71 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
REF-T-EN Off / On - REF-T protection enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
REF-T-I1 0.05 - 0.50 pu Minimum operating value (0.50) 0.50 0.50 (0.50) 0.5
REF-T-I2 0.50 - 4.00 pu (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
Small current region percent
REF-T-Slope1 10 - 10 % (10) 10 10 (10) 10
Large current region percent
REF-T-Slope2 50 - 100 % (100) 100 100 (100) 100
REF-T-DEF-EN Off / On - (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
enable
TREF-T 0.00 - 100.00 s REF-T Timer (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
REF-T trip command output
REF-T-TP1 Off / On - (On) On On (On) On
from TP1 BO contact
from TP2 BO contact
from TP3 BO contact
from TP4 BO contact
REF-T-TP5 Off / On - (On)
from TP5 BO contact (On) (On) (On) (On)
from TP6 BO contact
REF-T-ALM Off / On - REF-T alarm enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
Note:
1) Model 1 and 4 does not provide REF protection.
2) Model 2, 3 and 5 provide REF protection. Model 2 and 3 provide 3 sets of 3-phase
current inputs. Model 5 provides 5 sets of 3-phase current inputs. Three (3) sets of
neutral current input are provided in model 2, 3 and 5.
- 72 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.2.5 Data ID
REF(Function ID: 414001)
8000101C23 REF-P REF primary relay element operated
8100201C23 REF-S REF secondary relay element operated
8200301C23 REF-T REF tertiary relay element operated
8000101B60 REF-P-OPT REF primary operated
8100201B60 REF-S-OPT REF secondary operated
8200301B60 REF-T-OPT REF tertiary operated
8000101B61 REF-P-TRIP1 REF primary trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00101B6C REF-P-ALARM REF primary alarm enable
8000201B61 REF-S-TRIP1 REF secondary trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00201B6C REF-S-ALARM REF secondary alarm enable
8000301B61 REF-T-TRIP1 REF tertiary trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00301B6C REF-T-ALARM REF tertiary alarm enable
8000001B61 REF-TRIP1 REF trip command output from TP1
8B00001B6C REF-ALARM REF alarm enable
8000101BB0 REF-P_BLOCK REF primary block command
8100201BB0 REF-S_BLOCK REF secondary block command
8200301BB0 REF-T_BLOCK REF tertiary block command
8000101BB1 REF-P_INST_OP REF primary instant operation command
8100201BB1 REF-S_INST_OP REF secondary instant operation command
8200301BB1 REF-T_INST_OP REF tertiary instant operation command
 Connection point on PLC logic

REF (Function ID: 414001)
- 73 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

REF (Function ID: 414001)
800010EBB0 REF-P_BLOCK REF primary block command
810020EBB0 REF-S_BLOCK REF secondary block command
820030EBB0 REF-T_BLOCK REF tertiary block command
800010EBB1 REF-P_INST_OP REF primary instant operation command
810020EBB1 REF-S_INST_OP REF secondary instant operation command
820030EBB1 REF-T_INST_OP REF tertiary instant operation command
- 74 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.3 Overcurrent protection (OC)

The overcurrent protection relay function for GRT200 (hereafter referred as OC) detects
overcurrent conditions and operates accordingly. The OC has both directional elements and
time characteristic. The OC feature has eight stages, OC1 to OC8, which operate
independently and can be selected using scheme switches. The OC is set to measure a
phase-to-phase current as default, but the measurement of a phase-to-ground current is also
possible with the setting of OC if necessary. To simplify, only OC1 is discussed but is
applicable to OC2 to OC8 stages.
The OC1 is enabled using the scheme switch [OC1-EN] and the transformer winding to
be protected is set using the scheme switch [OC1-TarWind]. The input currents and voltages
for the OC function are obtained from FEP-Common function (refer section FEP…).
VCTs GRT200
FEP OC TRC
Common (Trip circuit)
VCT OC1
module
IY, IΔ, I1, I2, I0, OC-Operation
In, CT ratio, VY, OC2
VΔ, V1, V2, V0,
Type-VT (3PN/
Replica 3PP/1PN/1N)
setting Replica OC8
(Transformer)
setting
OC*-EN(ON/OFF)
FEP Common;
OC*-TarWind(P/S/T)
Calculating vector sum CT, CT polarity，Delta, P/N/Z phase
current for each CT and V/I of each Tr winding
3.3-1 OC relay block diagram
3.3.1 Non-directional and directional OC

The user can set the OC as either a non-directional OC or a directional OC for each stage
(OC1 to OC8). Furthermore, the user can also set a directional OC as either forward type OC
or reverse type OC.
(i) Characteristic of the non-directional OC

The characteristic of the non-directional type OC element is a circle that has a center at the
- 75 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
origin, as shown in Figure 3.3-2. The circle illustrates the threshold value of the
non-directional OC element and the hatched area shows the operation area of the
non-directional OC element.
A setting and a scheme switch is used to configure the non-directional OC; that is, the
user can set the threshold value of the non-directional OC at stage 1 with setting
[OC1-DT/IDMT]. Nondir is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir].
Stage 1
0 I
Figure 3.3-2 Characteristic of non-directional OC1-DT/IDMT
- 76 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii) Characteristic of the directional OC in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 3.3-3, the characteristic of the directional OC in the forward direction is
drawn as a semi-circle and a zero torque line; the hatched area shows the operation region of
the directional-OC.
Non-operation (No trip) zone
Reference voltage or
ϕ θ
Polarizing voltage (Vpol)
Operation (Trip) zone
Figure 3.3-3 Characteristic of the directional-OC in the forward direction

Note: A sensing angle (θ) forms an angle with the directional-OC. The half plane
represents an operation zone that borders one side of the zero torque line.
Note: For the polarizing voltage (Vpol), greater than 1.0 voltage should be applied for
sensing.
A reference signal, that is, polarization signal is required for the directional OC, and the
reference signal is derived from a phase-to-phase voltage: for example, the directional OC for
phase-A (OC-A) takes a 90° lead w.r.t to phase-B-to-phase-C voltage (VBC∠90°), the reference
signal is illustrated in Figure 3.3-4. The direction of phase-A current (IA) is determined from
the measured angle of IA against the VBC∠90°. The purpose of 90° leading is a reason that the
reference voltage (VBC∠90°) takes the same direction of phase-A voltage (VA) that is not same
in a fault condition. As a result, when a fault occurs, IA flows and lags from the VBC∠90°.
Similarly for a reference voltage (VCA∠90°) and a current (IB) of the directional OC for
phase-B (OC-B) is similar to the OC-A and same for OC-C. Table 3.3-1 shows the relationship
between a current and a reference voltage.
- 77 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
VBC∠90°
Leading 90°
VA
VBC
VBC
Figure 3.3-4 Object current (IA) and reference voltage (VBC∠90°)
Table 3.3-1 Directional polarizing signal

Directional Object current Reference voltage
OC-A IA VBC∠90°
OC-B IB VCA∠90°
OC-C IC VAB∠90°
For the fault that is close to a three-phase fault, three reference voltages VBC∠90°, VCB∠90°
and VAB∠90° falls below a minimum threshold voltage of the OC. In case of reduction in these
reference voltages, the function of voltage memory provides polarizing signals temporarily.
The temporary polarizing signals are provided during the three-phase fault and the OC
determines the direction of the fault. In addition, the directional element function determines
the output based on the loss of voltage memory and is effective while the fault current flows in
accordance with Figure 3.3-5.
Phase difference calculation

|V|•|I|cos(θ−ϕ) ≥0 &
≥1 Output of
directional element
Amplitude calculation F/F &
1 1
|l|≥ OC pickup current
Amplitude calculation
|Vpol|≥ Set voltage (OV−Vpol)
Figure 3.3-5 Direction determination after loss of voltage memory
- 78 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
The setting of overcurrent threshold, the sensing angle and the sensing direction are the
settings for directional OC: for example, user can set the threshold value of the OC at stage 1
using setting [OC1-DT/IDMT] and Forward is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir]. The sensing
angle (θ) is set using the setting [OC1-Angle] with the θ value set in the range of 0–180°.
Figure 3.3-6 shows an example of an angle and a characteristic set by the θ.
Reverse
Vpol Vpol Vpol
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
Reverse Forward Reverse Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
Vpol
Vpol
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
Figure 3.3-6 Examples of sensing angle (θ)
(iii) Characteristic of directional OC in the reverse direction

The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting of
overcurrent threshold, the sensing angle and the sensing direction are the settings for
directional OC. Reverse is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir] when the direction of the OC
on stage 1 is considered.
- 79 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.3.2 Operate time characteristic

The OC element monitors the currents, and when one of the currents over the threshold set in
the replica setting, the OC element will operate after the operation time delay defined by the
time characteristic feature.
The user can choose the OC operate time delay characteristics, either (i) independent
(definite) time characteristic delay or (ii) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The
operate time of the independent (definite) time characteristic delay is a constant, and the
operate time in the dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay depends upon the level of
the energizing current.
The OC element reset time delay characteristic will be either the independent time reset or
the dependent time reset. This will be discussed in the reset time characteristic section.
(i) Independent time characteristic (definite time delay)

The operate time of the independent time characteristic OC element will be a constant time
and is not affected by the level of current. The reset time is also set to a constant time.
The user can set the OC1 scheme switch [OC1-Type] to “DT” for the independent time
characteristic. For each OC independent operate time; the value of the required operate time
is set using the setting TOC1 in the range 0.00–300.00s. Likewise, [OC2-Type] – [OC8-Type]
and TOC2 – TOC8 correspond for each the OC2 to the OC8 independently.
The user can set instantaneous operation by setting the operate time to 0.00.
(ii) Dependent time characteristic (inverse time delay)

The operate time of the dependent time characteristic OC element is inversely proportional to
the level of the fault current. The user can determine the operate time delay from a preset
curve. Ten (10) characteristic curves are available; i.e. nine (9) pre-installed curves covering
IEC, IEEE, US and UK standard characteristic curves and one (1) original (user
programmable) characteristic curve for which the user can set the equation parameters.
The operate time of the dependent time characteristics is defined by equation (3.3-1).
(Refer IEC 60255-151):
k
t(I) = TMS × �� α � + 𝑐𝑐� (3.3-1)
�𝐼𝐼�𝐼𝐼 � − 1
𝑠𝑠
Where:
t = operate time with constant current I (seconds),
- 80 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
I = operate (energizing) current (amperes),

Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting number,
k, c = constants (seconds).
α = constant
The nine (9) pre-programmed standard characteristic curves are defined in Table 3.3-2. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each OC stage (OC1 to OC8). Figure 3.3-7 illustrates these characteristic curves. The User
should set the scheme switch [OC1-Type] for OC1 stage and similarly for other stages. The
scheme switches, “IEC-NI" for IEC Normal Inverse characteristic, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very
inverse, “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK Long Time Inverse, “IEEE-MI”
for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse, “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely
Inverse, “US-CO8” for US CO8 Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 Short Time Inverse and
“Original” for user-programmable characteristic.
A time multiplier (TMS) is the coefficient for the operate time delay. The user can set the
TMS for each OC stage and each standard characteristic curve including user-programmable
of each OC stage; e.g. the TMS for the IEC standard characteristic curve of OC1 stage will be
set in the scheme switch [OC1-TMS-IEC]. The other TMSs for the OC1 stage are also set in the
scheme switches [OC1-TMS-UK] for UK standard, [OC1-TMS-IEEE] for IEEE standard,
[OC1-TMS-US] for US standard, and [OC1-TMS-ORG] for the user programmable. Each
default TMS value is 1.0.
Table 3.3-2 Constants for dependent operate time characteristics

Curve type Curve Description k α c
(IEC 60255-151) sec sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) 0.14 0.02 0
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) 13.5 1 0
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) 80 2 0
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) 120 1 0
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 0.0515 0.02 0.114
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 19.61 2 0.491
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 28.2 2 0.1217
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2 0.18
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 0.02394 0.02 0.01694
Note: For original curve (user programmable), user can specify the curve coefficients k, α
and c; for example, original curve for OC1 can be specified with scheme switches
[OC1-k], [OC1-a] and [OC1-c].
- 81 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Figure 3.3-7 IDMT Characteristics
3.3.3 Reset time characteristics

The OC will be reset after energize (fault) current is back to the normal condition. The reset
time will have the delay time characteristic in order to correspond to the intermittent fault
condition and/or to coordinate with other relay. The reset time characteristics will be either
the instantaneous reset (no intentional delay on reset), the definite time resetting or the
dependent time resetting.
The instantaneous reset and the definite time resetting will be applicable for all OC operate
condition. The dependent time resetting is applicable for the dependent time operation of the
IEEE standard, the US standard and the original (user-programmable) operate.
(i) Instantaneous reset

The instantaneous reset is no intentional delay on reset. For example, the user can set OC1
stage as instantaneous reset by setting scheme switches [OC1-Rtype] to “DEF” and [TOC1R]
- 82 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
to “0.00”. Other stage should set the delay time value to 0.00.
(ii) Definite time resetting

The user can set OC1 stage as the definite resetting by setting scheme switches [OC1-Rtype]
to “DEF” and [TOC1R] to intentional delay of reset time. The user can set [TOC1R] for the
range of “0.00 – 300.00” in seconds.
Figure 3.3-8 illustrates the definite time resetting operation characteristic.
Figure 3.3-8 Definite time reset and instantaneous reset characteristic
(iii) Dependent time resetting

The reset time of the dependent time resetting characteristic is proportional to the level of the
energize current. The user can determine the reset time delay from a preset characteristic
curve. Six (6) characteristic curves are available; i.e. five (5) pre-installed curves covering
IEEE and US standard and one (1) original (user programmable).
The following equation defines the dependent time resetting time (Refer IEC 60255-151):
- 83 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
kr
t(I) = RTMS × � β
� (3.3-2)
1 − �𝐼𝐼�𝐼𝐼 �
𝑠𝑠
Where,
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energizing current (amperes),
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting,
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is
zero (seconds),
β = constants defining curve.
The user can set OC1 stage as the dependent time resetting by setting scheme switches
[OC1-Rtype] to “DEP”. The user can set RTMS for the IEEE standard, US standard or
user-programmable characteristic as [OC1-RTMS-IEEE] for IEEE standard characteristic
curve, [OC1-RTMS-US] for US standard and [OC1-RTMS-ORG] for an original
(user-programmable). Table 3.3-3 indicates the values of kr and β for the IEEE and US
standard characteristic curve. The user original dependent time resetting coefficient value of
kr and β can be specified in the scheme switches [OC1-kr] and [OC1-b] respectively.
Figure 3.3-9. Illustrate the standard characteristic curve.)
Table 3.3-3 Constants for dependent reset time characteristics

Curve Type Curve Description kr β
IEC 60255-151 sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) N/A N/A
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) N/A N/A
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) N/A N/A
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) N/A N/A
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 4.85 2
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 21.6 2
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 29.1 2
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 2.261 2
- 84 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Figure 3.3-9 Dependent reset time characteristics curves
Figure 3.3-9 illustrates the effect of dependent time resetting on the internal time delay
counter. An object current (I), where I is greater than a setting (Is) provides an energizing
quantity for the function which continues to flow for a cumulative period causing the
operation of the function. If the operating quantity falls below the Is setting, the function will
return to its reset state after the time t(I). The time t(I) is calculated using Equation (3.3-2).
- 85 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Start time Disengaging time

Energizing
quantity I > Is
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator
Value of internal time

delay counter
(integrator)
tr reset time setting

(with I=0, TMS=1)
Reset time
Figure 3.3-10 Dependent reset time characteristics
(iv) Summary of OC operation

Table 3.3-4 shows the summary of OC operation.
- 86 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 3.3-4 Operation type and standard board (A tick shows a selectable function)
IEC IEEE US
Setting DT UK-LTI Original
IEC-NI IEC-VI IEC-EI IEEE-MI IEEE-VI IEEE-EI US-CO2 US-CO8
DT (Definite time) ✓
IEC-NI ✓
✓
IEC
IEC-VI
Characteristics for operation
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DT (Definite time) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Characteristics for resetting
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
3.3.4 Threshold value for activation

The threshold current for the activation of OC is configured by settings; for example, setting
[OC1-DT/-IDMT] is provided for the OC on stage 1. The other settings also are provided:
setting [OC2-DT/-IDMT], [OC3-DT/-IDMT], [OC4-DT/-IDMT], [OC5-DT/-IDMT], [OC6-DT/-IDMT],
[OC7-DT/-IDMT] and [OC8-DT/-IDMT].
Note that the sets of threshold have distinct values among OC1, OC2, OC3 OC5, OC6,
OC7 and OC8 should consider an input rating that is chosen between 1A rating and 5A rating.
The input rating is discussed separately. (Refer FEP)
3.3.5 Reset Ratio

The ratio of the threshold current for activation to reset is set by a setting; for example, the
ratio of the OC1 is set for the setting [OC1-DPR]. The other ratios for the OC2, OC3 OC5, OC6,
OC7 and OC8 are also provided with settings: [OC2-DPR], [OC3-DPR], [OC4-DPR],
[OC5-DPR], [OC6-DPR], [OC7-DPR] and [OC8-DPR].
- 87 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.3.6 Miscellaneous functions

(i) Harmonic detection
Harmonic current detection (2nd harmonic) is provided by the Inrush current detection
(ICD) function. Each OC can negate the operation of the OC by using a scheme switch, as
a relay detects a harmonic, which is caused by a magnetizing inrush current phenomenon
as the transformer is energized. For example, for OC1, the scheme switch [OC1-2fBlk] is
provided, and Block-3P is set when the nullification of the OC1 in the three-phase is
required when harmonic occurs. On the other hand, Block-PerP is set as the negation at
single phase is required. Non is set for the scheme switch [OC1-2fBlk] as a default.
(ii) Block operation of VTF for OC

The operation of the OC can be blocked by the function of a voltage transformer failure
(VTF) with a scheme switch. For example, Block is set for the scheme switch
[OC1-VTFBlk] as the operation of the OC1 is blocked during the VTF. Non is set for the
scheme switch [OC1-VTFBlk] as a default.
(iii) Signal of OC trip

Up to six (6) BO contacts can be selected to signal trip command; for example, scheme
switch [OC1-TP1] is set to On to select TP1 BO contact. An alarm signal can be set using
the scheme switch [OC1-ALM] set to On.
3.3.7 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of both the non-directional and the directional OC1 illustrates in Figure
3.3-11 and Figure 3.3-12. Each element of the OC1 provides the result of judgment whether a
pickup current exceeds a setting, and then trip signals are fed into the trip circuit, which is
discussed separately. (See Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit function)
- 88 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101B60
≥1 OC1-OR
8000101B61
≥1 OC1PU-OR
8000101C20 TOC1
& & t 0 8000101B62
A 8100101C21
≥1 OC1-OPT-A
OC1 B 8200101C22 t
& &
0
8100101B63
C ≥1 OC1-OPT-B
t 0
& & 8200101B64
≥1 OC1-OPT-C
0.00–300s
8000101C24
≥1
& & &
OC1 A 8100101C25
B 8200101C26 ≥1
PU & & &
C
& ≥1 &
&
OC1_TYPE DT
OC1-ICD-A IEC-NI
OIC1-ICD-B IEC-VI
OC1-ICD-C
IEC-EI
OC1-TARWIND
UK-LTI
IEEE-MI
IEEE-VI
OC1-EN On
IEEE-EI
US-C02
US-C08
ORIGINAL
OC1-VTF_DETECT
OC1-VTFBlk &
Block
≥1
OC1_BLOCK
OC1_INST_OP
Figure 3.3-11 Scheme logic for the OC1 (1)

Note: OC1 PU is OC1 operation on pick up.
- 89 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101B65
OC1-OPT-A 8000101B66
OC1-OPT-B ≥1
& OC1-TRIP1
OC1-OPT-C
OC1-TP1 On
8100101B67
& OC1-TRIP2
OC1-TP2 8200101B68
On
& OC1-TRIP3
OC1-TP3
On 8300101B69
& OC1-TRIP4
OC1-TP4 On 8400101B6A
& OC1-TRIP5
OC1-TP5 8500101B6B
On
& OC1-TRIP6
OC1-TP6 8B00101B6C
On
& OC1-ALARM
OC1-ALM
On
Figure 3.3-12 Scheme logic for the OC1 (2)
- 90 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.3.8 Setting
Range Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5
Uni
Setting device 1A 5A Contents
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
OC1-EN Off / On - OC1 protection enable Off Off Off Off Off
OC1-TarWi Primary / Secondary Target transformer winding for
- Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
nd / Tertiary OC1 protection
NonDir / Forward /
OC1-Dir - OC1 directional characteristic (NonDir) (NonDir) NonDir (NonDir) NonDir
Reverse
OC1 directional characteristic
OC1-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI
/ IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
OC1-Type - OC1 delay type DT DT DT DT DT
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
OC1-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A OC1 threshold (in DT mode) 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
OC1-IDMT 0.02 - 0.10 - A OC1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
5.00 25.00
OC1-DPR 10 - 100 % OC1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100 100 100 100 100
OC1 operating delay time (in
TOC1 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
OC1-TMS-I OC1 time multiplier of IEC
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EC inverse curve
OC1-TMS- OC1 time multiplier of UK
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
OC1-TMS-I OC1 time multiplier of IEEE
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EEE inverse curve
OC1-TMS- OC1 time multiplier of US
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
OC1-TMS- OC1 time multiplier of Original
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG inverse curve
OC1-Rtype DEF / DEP - OC1 reset delay type DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF
O TOC1R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 definite time reset delay 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
C
OC1 dependent reset time
1 OC1-RTMS
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEEE inverse 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
-IEEE
curve
OC1-RTMS OC1 dependent reset time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
-US multiplier of US inverse curve
OC1-RTMS
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of Original inverse 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
-ORG
curve
OC1 user original curve
OC1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
Non / Block-3P / OC1 operation block by
OC1-2fBlk - Non Non Non Non Non
Block-PerP 2f-detection
OC1-VTFBl
Non / Block - OC1 operation block by VTF (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
k
OC1 trip command output from
OC1-TP1 Off / On - On On On On On
TP1 B0 contact
TP2 B0 contact
TP3 B0 contact
TP4 B0 contact
TP5 B0 contact
TP6 B0 contact
OC1-ALM Off / On - OC1 alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
- 91 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
OC2-Dir - OC2 directional characteristic NonDir NonDir NonDir NonDir NonDir
Reverse
OC2-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) (45)
angle
/ IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
TOC2 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG inverse curve
C
2 OC2 dependent reset time
OC2-RTMS
-IEEE
curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
OC2-RTMS
-ORG
curve
OC2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC2-VTFBl Non / Block - OC2 operation block by VTF (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
k
TP1 B0 contact
TP2 B0 contact
TP3 B0 contact
TP4 B0 contact
TP5 B0 contact
TP6 B0 contact
- 92 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
OC3-Dir - OC3 directional characteristic NonDir NonDir NonDir NonDir NonDir
Reverse
OC3-Angle 0 - 180 deg 45 45 45 45 45
angle
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OC3-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
/ IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
OC3-Type OC3 delay type DT DT DT DT DT
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original-
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
OC3-DPR 10 – 100 % OC3 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100 100 100 100 100
TOC3 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
O 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG inverse curve
C OC3-Rtype DEF / DEP - OC3 reset delay type DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF
3
TOC3R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC3 definite time reset delay 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
OC3-RTMS
-IEEE
curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
OC3-RTMS
-ORG
curve
OC3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC3-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC3-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC3-VTFBl Non / Block - OC3 operation block by VTF (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
k
TP1 B0 contact
TP2 B0 contact
TP3 B0 contact
TP4 B0 contact
TP5 B0 contact
TP6 B0 contact
- 93 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OC4-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
/ IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
TOC4 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG inverse curve
C
OC4-RTMS
-IEEE
curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
OC4-RTMS
-ORG
curve
OC4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC4-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC4-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC4-VTFBl
k
TP1 B0 contact
TP2 B0 contact
TP3 B0 contact
TP4 B0 contact
TP5 B0 contact
TP6 B0 contact
- 94 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OC5-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
/ IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
TOC5 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG inverse curve
C
OC5-RTMS
-IEEE
curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
OC5-RTMS
-ORG
curve
OC5-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC5-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC5-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC5-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC5-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC5-VTFBl
k
TP1 B0 contact
TP2 B0 contact
TP3 B0 contact
TP4 B0 contact
TP5 B0 contact
TP6 B0 contact
- 95 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OC6-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
/ IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
TOC6 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG inverse curve
C
OC6-RTMS
-IEEE
curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
OC6-RTMS
-ORG
curve
OC6-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC6-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC6-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC6-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC6-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC6-VTFBl
k
TP1 B0 contact
TP2 B0 contact
TP3 B0 contact
TP4 B0 contact
TP5 B0 contact
TP6 B0 contact
- 96 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OC7-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
/ IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
TOC7 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG inverse curve
C
OC7-RTMS
-IEEE
curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
OC7-RTMS
-ORG
curve
OC7-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC7-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC7-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC7-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC7-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC7-VTFBl
k
TP1 B0 contact
TP2 B0 contact
TP3 B0 contact
TP4 B0 contact
TP5 B0 contact
TP6 B0 contact
- 97 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Uni
ts 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OC8-Angle 0 - 180 deg (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
angle
/ IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02-250.00
50.00 250.00
0.02-25.00
5.00 25.00
TOC8 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EEE inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
ORG inverse curve
C
OC8-RTMS
-IEEE
curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
OC8-RTMS
-ORG
curve
OC8-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC8-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC8-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC8-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC8-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient
OC8-VTFBl
k
TP1 B0 contact
TP2 B0 contact
TP3 B0 contact
TP4 B0 contact
TP5 B0 contact
TP6 B0 contact
- 98 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.3.9 Data ID
OC (Function ID : 45A001)
8000101C20 OC1-A OC1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C21 OC1-B OC1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 OC1-C OC1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00301C22 OC3-C OC3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C20 OC4-A OC4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 OC4-B OC4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 OC4-C OC4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00701C22 OC7-C OC7 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00801C20 OC8-A OC8 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00801C21 OC8-B OC8 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00801C22 OC8-C OC8 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101C24 OC1PU-A OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100101C25 OC1PU-B OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200101C26 OC1PU-C OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00301C26 OC3PU-C OC3 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00401C24 OC4PU-A OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00401C25 OC4PU-B OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00401C26 OC4PU-C OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
- 99 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8A00701C26 OC7PU-C OC7 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00801C24 OC8PU-A OC8 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00801C25 OC8PU-B OC8 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00801C26 OC8PU-C OC8 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000101B60 OC1-OR OC1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 OC1PU-OR OC1 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 OC1-OPT-A OC1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100101B63 OC1-OPT-B OC1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200101B64 OC1-OPT-C OC1 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00301B64 OC3-OPT-C OC3 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00401B62 OC4-OPT-A OC4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00401B63 OC4-OPT-B OC4 protection operated (phase-B)
8E00401B64 OC4-OPT-C OC4 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00701B64 OC7-OPT-C OC7 protection operated (phase-C)
- 100 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8C00801B62 OC8-OPT-A OC8 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00801B63 OC8-OPT-B OC8 protection operated (phase-B)
8E00801B64 OC8-OPT-C OC8 protection operated (phase-C)
8000101B65 OC1-OPT OC1 protection operated
8000101B66 OC1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OC1 protection operation
8400101B6A OC1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by OC1 protection operation
8500101B6B OC1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by OC1 protection operation
8B00101B6C OC1-ALARM Alarm signal by OC1 protection operation
- 101 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8000001B60 OC-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OC protection operation
8B00001B6B OC-ALARM Alarm signal by OC protection operation
8C00001B6C OC-OPT-A OC protection operated (phase-A)
8D00001B6D OC-OPT-B OC protection operated (phase-B)
8E00001B6E OC-OPT-C OC protection operated (phase-C)
8000101BB0 OC1_BLOCK OC1 protection block command
8000101BB1 OC1_INST_OP OC1 protection instant operation command
- 102 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

800010100D OC1_SECONDARY_RATING OC1 secondary rating
- 103 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.4 Earth fault protection (EF)

The earth fault protection relay function for GRT200 (hereafter referred as EF) detects earth
fault conditions and operates accordingly. The EF has both directional and non-directional
elements. The EF protection has eight (8) stages EF1 to EF8, which operate independently
can be selected using scheme switches. To simplify, only EF1 is discussed but it is applicable
to all other stages (EF2 to EF8).
The EF1 is enabled using the scheme switch [EF1-EN] and the transformer winding to
be protected is set using the scheme switch [EF1-TarWind]. The input currents and voltages
for the EF function are obtained from FEP-Common function (refer section FEP…).
TP_REPLICA TP_EF TP_TRC

Va, Vb, Vc, I0
EF relay EF logic (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_ Type-VT EF-OPERATION
(3PN/3PP/1P EF1 to EF8
COMMON N/1PP/1N) element sequence
CT
secondary
CT polarity rating
compensated Full scale

ICD Output
Dir, Type,
TarWind-P/S/T
Figure 3.4-1 EF Function block diagram
3.4.1 Non-directional and directional EF

The user can set the EF as either a non-directional EF or a directional EF for each stage (EF1
to EF8). Furthermore, the user can also set a directional EF as either forward type EF or
reverse type EF.
(i) Characteristic of the non-directional EF

The characteristic of the non-directional type EF element is a circle that has a center at the
origin, as shown in Figure 3.4-2. The circle illustrates the threshold value of the
non-directional EF element and the hatched area shows the operation area of the
non-directional EF element.
A setting and a scheme switch is used to configure the non-directional EF that is, the
user can set the threshold value of the non-directional EF at stage 1 using the setting
[EF1-DT/IDMT]. Nondir is set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir].
- 104 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3I0
Stage 1
0 I
Figure 3.4-2 Characteristic of non-directional EF1-DT/IDMT
(ii) Characteristic of the directional EF in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 3.4-3, the characteristic of the directional EF in the forward direction is
the directional EF.
ϕ θ
Polarizing voltage (-3V0)
Figure 3.4-3 Characteristic of the directional EF in the forward direction

Note: A sensing angle (θ) forms an angle with the directional EF. The half plane
A reference signal, that is, polarization signal is required for the directional EF. The reference
- 105 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
signal (-3V0) is derived from the measured three phase voltages or directly obtained from the
broken delta voltage depending on the voltage measurement model used (refer Replica
function).
The operation of the EF is based on the following equations:

3𝐼𝐼0 ≥ 𝐼𝐼𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 (3.4-1)
3𝐼𝐼0 × cos(φ − θ) ≥ 0 (3.4-2)
3𝑉𝑉0 ≥ 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸_𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 (3.4-3)
Where,
3I0 = residual current
3V0 = residual voltage
−3V0 = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage)
φ= lagging angle
θ = EF setting angle
IEF = Setting value of the EF (EF1 to EF8)
EF_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage
Note: The phase angle in the event of an internal fault is equal to the angle of the
zero-sequence impedance of the system and in the directly-earthed system this
value ranges approximately from 50° to 90°. θ of the EF can be set from 0° to 180°.
The minimum voltage necessary to maintain directionality can be set from 0.5 to
100.0 V.
The setting of earth fault threshold, the sensing angle and the sensing direction are the
settings for directional EF: for example, user can set the threshold value of the EF at stage 1
using setting [EF1-DT/IDMT] and Forward is set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir]. The sensing
angle (θ) is set using the setting [EF1-Angle]. Figure 3.4-4 shows examples of (characteristic
angle) sensing angle.
- 106 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Reverse
-3V0 -3V0 -3V0
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
-3V0
-3V0
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
(iii) Characteristic of directional EF in the reverse direction

The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting of
overcurrent threshold, the sensing angle and the sensing direction are the settings for
directional EF. Reverse is set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir] when the direction of the EF on
stage 1 is considered.

The EF element monitors the currents, and when one of the currents is over the threshold, the
EF element will operate after the operation time delay defined by the time characteristic
feature.
The user can choose the EF operate time delay characteristics, either (i) independent
The EF element reset time delay characteristic will be either the independent time reset or
the dependent time reset. This will be discussed in the reset time characteristic section.
- 107 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

The operate time of the independent time characteristic EF element will be a constant time
The user can set the EF1 scheme switch [EF1-Type] to “DT” for the independent time
characteristic. For each EF independent operate time; the value of the required operate time
is set using the setting TEF1 in the range 0.00–300.00s. Likewise, [EF2-Type] – [EF8-Type]
and TEF2 – TEF8 correspond for each of the EF2 to the EF8 independently.

The operate time of the dependent time characteristic EF element is inversely proportional to
the level of the fault current. The user can determine the operate time delay from a preset
The operate time of the dependent time characteristics is defined by equation (3.4-4)).
(Refer IEC 60255-151):
k
t(I) = TMS × �� α � + 𝑐𝑐� (3.4-4)
�𝐼𝐼�𝐼𝐼 � − 1
𝑠𝑠
Where:
Is = earth fault setting (amperes),
α = constant
The nine (9) pre-programmed standard characteristic curves are defined in Table 3.4-1. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each EF stage (EF1 to EF8). Figure 3.4-5 illustrates these characteristic curves. The User
should set the scheme switch [EF1-Type] for EF1 stage and similarly for other stages. The
scheme switches, “IEC-NI" for IEC Normal Inverse characteristic, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very
for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse, “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely
Inverse, “US-CO8” for US CO8 Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 Short Time Inverse and
- 108 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
“Original” for user-programmable characteristic.
TMS for each EF stage and each standard characteristic curve including user-programmable
of each EF stage; for example, the TMS for the IEC standard characteristic curve of EF1 stage
will be set using the scheme switch [EF1-TMS-IEC]. The other TMSs for the EF1 stage are also
set in the scheme switches [EF1-TMS-UK] for UK standard, [EF1-TMS-IEEE] for IEEE
standard, [EF1-TMS-US] for US standard, and [EF1-TMS-ORG] for the user programmable.
Each default TMS value is 1.0.

(IEC 60255-151) sec sec
and c; for example, original curve for EF1 can be specified with scheme switches
[EF1-k], [EF1-a] and [EF1-c].
- 109 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

The EF will be reset after the energizing (fault) current is back to the normal condition. The
reset time will have the delay time characteristic in order to correspond to the intermittent
fault condition and/or to coordinate with other relay. The reset time characteristics will be
either the instantaneous reset (no intentional delay on reset), the definite time resetting or
the dependent time resetting.
The instantaneous reset and the definite time resetting will be applicable for all EF
operate condition. The dependent time resetting is applicable for the dependent time
operation of the IEEE standard, the US standard and the original (user-programmable)
operate.

The instantaneous reset is with no intentional delay on reset. For example, the user can set
EF1 stage as instantaneous reset by setting scheme switches [EF1-Rtype] to “DEF” and
[TEF1R] to “0.00”. Other stage should set the delay time value to 0.00.
- 110 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

The user can set EF1 stage as the definite resetting by setting scheme switches [EF1-Rtype]
to “DEF” and [TEF1R] to intentional delay of reset time. The user can set [TEF1R] in the range
of “0.00 – 300.00” in seconds.
Intermittent
Fault Condition
TRIP LEVEL
Definite time reset

Delayed
Reset
TRIP LEVEL
Instantaneous reset

energizing current. The user can determine the reset time delay from a preset characteristic
The following equation defines the dependent time resetting time (Refer IEC
60255-151):
- 111 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
kr
� (3.4-5)
1 − �𝐼𝐼�𝐼𝐼 �
𝑠𝑠
Where,
zero (seconds),
The user can set EF1 stage as the dependent time resetting by setting scheme switches
[EF1-Rtype] to “DEP”. The user can set RTMS for the IEEE standard, US standard or
user-programmable characteristic as [EF1-RTMS-IEEE] for IEEE standard characteristic
curve, [EF1-RTMS-US] for US standard and [EF1-RTMS-ORG] for an original
kr and β can be set using the scheme switches [EF1-kr] and [EF1-b] respectively. Figure 3.4-7
illustrate the standard characteristic curve.

IEC 60255-151 sec
- 112 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
return to its reset state after the time t(I). The time t(I) is calculated using Equation (3.4-5)
Figure 3.4-8 illustrates the dependent time characteristics,
- 113 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Energizing
quantity I > Is
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator

delay counter
(integrator)

(with I=0, TMS=1)
Reset time
(iv) Summary of EF operation

Table 3.4-3 shows the summary of EF operation.
- 114 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
IEC IEEE US
IEC-NI ✓
✓
IEC
IEC-VI
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DT (Definite time) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓

The threshold current for the activation of EF is configured by settings; for example, setting
[EF1-DT/IDMT] is provided for the EF on stage 1. The other settings also are provided: setting
[EF2-DT/IDMT] to [EF8-DT/IDMT].
Note that the sets of threshold have distinct values among EF1, EF2, EF3, EF4, EF5,
EF6, EF7 and EF8 and should consider an input rating that is chosen between 1A rating and
5A rating. The input rating is discussed separately. (Refer FEP)
3.4.5 Reset Ratio

ratio of the EF1 is set for the setting [EF1-DPR]. The other ratios for the EF2, EF3 EF5, EF6,
EF7 and EF8 are also provided with settings: [EF2-DPR] to [EF8-DPR].
- 115 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

(i) Harmonic detection
Harmonic current detection (2nd harmonic) is provided by the Inrush current detection
(ICD) function. Each EF can negate the operation of the EF by using a scheme switch, as
a relay detects a harmonic, which is caused by a magnetizing inrush current phenomenon
as the transformer is energized. For example, for EF1, the scheme switch [EF1-2fBlk] is
provided which can be set to block if blocking of EF1 is required when harmonic occurs.
Non is set for the scheme switch [EF1-2fBlk] as a default.
(ii) Block operation of VTF for EF

The operation of the EF can be blocked by the function of a voltage transformer failure
(VTF) with a scheme switch. For example, Block is set for the scheme switch
[EF1-VTFBlk] as the operation of the EF1 is blocked during the VTF. Non is set for the
scheme switch [EF1-VTFBlk] as a default.
(iii) Signal of EF trip

switch [EF1-TP1] is set to On to select TP1 BO contact. An alarm signal can be set using
the scheme switch [EF1-ALM] set to On.
3.4.7 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of both the non-directional and the directional EF1 illustrates in Figure
3.4-9 and Figure 3.4-10. Each element of the EF1 provides the result of judgment whether a
pickup current exceeds a setting, and then trip signals are fed into the trip circuit, which is
discussed separately. (See Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit function)
- 116 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101C23
TEF1
EF1
& & t 0 8000101B60
≥1 EF1-OPT
8000101C27 0.00–300s
EF1 PU
& ≥1 &
&
EF1-ICD-OR
EF1-TARWIND
EF1-EN On
EF1-VTF_DETECT
EF1-VTFBlk
Block &
≥1
EF1_BLOCK 800010EBB0
EF1_INST_OP
DT DT IDMT
IEC-NI
IEC-VI
IEC-EI
UK-LTI
IEEE-MI
IEEE-VI ≥1
IEEE-EI
US-C02
US-C08
EF1_TYPE ORIGINAL
Figure 3.4-9 Scheme logic for EF1 (1)

Note: EF1 PU is EF1 operation on pick up.
- 117 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101B61
EF1-OPT
& EF1-TRIP1
EF1-TP1 On 8100101B62
& EF1-TRIP2
EF1-TP2 8200101B63
On
& EF1-TRIP3
EF1-TP3
On 8300101B64
& EF1-TRIP4
EF1-TP4 On 8400101B65
& EF1-TRIP5
EF1-TP5 8500101B66
On
& EF1-TRIP6
EF1-TP6 8B00101B6C
On
& EF1-ALARM
EF1-ALM
On
Figure 3.4-10 Scheme logic for EF1 (2)
- 118 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.4.8 Setting
Setting of EF (Function ID: 45A401)
Un
ratin ratin its
rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating
g g
EF-V The polarising voltage level of

Common 0.5 - 100.0 V (3.0) (3.0) 3.0 (3.0) 3.0
pol EF directional characteristic
- 119 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Range
Un
Setting device Contents Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF1-EN Off / On - EF1 protection enable Off Off Off Off Off
Primary / Secondary / Target transformer
EF1-TarWind - Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
Tertiary winding for EF1 protection
EF1 directional
EF1-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - (NonDir) (NonDir) NonDir (NonDir) NonDir
characteristic
de EF1 directional
EF1-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
g characteristic angle
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI /
IEC-EI / UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
EF1-Type - EF1 delay type DT DT DT DT DT
IEEE-VI / IEEE-EI / US-CO2
/ US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00 EF1 threshold (in DT
EF1-DT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 50.00 mode)
0.02 – 25.00 EF1 threshold (in IDMT
EF1-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 25.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
EF1-DPR 10 - 100 % EF1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100 100 100 100 100
EF1 operating delay time
TEF1 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF1 time multiplier of IEC
EF1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF1 time multiplier of UK
EF1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF1-TMS-IEE EF1 time multiplier of
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
E IEEE inverse curve
EF1 time multiplier of US
EF1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF1-TMS-OR EF1 time multiplier of
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
G Original inverse curve
EF1-Rtype DEF / DEP - EF1 reset delay type DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF
EF1 definite time reset
TEF1R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
EF1 dependent reset time
E EF1-RTMS-IE
F EE
1 curve
EF1-RTMS-U
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of US inverse 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
S
curve
EF1-RTMS-O
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of Original 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
RG
inverse curve
EF1 user original curve 0.0000
EF1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF1 operation block by
EF1-2fBlk Non / Block - Non Non Non Non Non
2f-detection
EF1-VTFBlk Non / Block - (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
VTF
EF1 trip command output
EF1-TP1 Off / On - On On On On On
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
EF1-ALM Off / On - EF1 alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
- 120 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF2 directional
characteristic
de EF2 directional
EF2-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
EF2-DT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 50.00 mode)
EF2-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 25.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF2 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF2-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF2-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF2-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TEF2R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
E EF2-RTMS-IE
F EE
2 curve
EF2-RTMS-U
S
curve
EF2-RTMS-O
RG
inverse curve
EF2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
2f-detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
- 121 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF3 directional
characteristic
de EF3 directional
EF3-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
EF3-DT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 50.00 mode)
EF3-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 25.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF3 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF3-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF3-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF3-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TEF3R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
E EF3-RTMS-IE
F EE
3 curve
EF3-RTMS-U
S
curve
EF3-RTMS-O
RG
inverse curve
EF3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF3-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF3-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
2f-detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
- 122 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF4 directional
characteristic
de EF4 directional
EF4-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
EF4-DT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 50.00 mode)
EF4-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 25.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF4 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF4-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF4-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF4-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TEF4R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
E EF4-RTMS-IE
F EE
4 curve
EF4-RTMS-U
S
curve
EF4-RTMS-O
RG
inverse curve
EF4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF4-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF4-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
2f-detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
- 123 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF5 directional
characteristic
de EF5 directional
EF5-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
EF5-DT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 50.00 mode)
EF5-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 25.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF5 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF5-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF5-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF5-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TEF5R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
E EF5-RTMS-IE
F EE
5 curve
EF5-RTMS-U
S
curve
EF5-RTMS-O
RG
inverse curve
EF5-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF5-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF5-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF5-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF5-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
2f-detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
- 124 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF6 directional
characteristic
de EF6 directional
EF6-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
EF6-DT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 50.00 mode)
EF6-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 25.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF6 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF6-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF6-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF6-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TEF6R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
E EF6-RTMS-IE
F EE
6 curve
EF6-RTMS-U
S
curve
EF6-RTMS-O
RG
inverse curve
EF6-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF6-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF6-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF6-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF6-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
2f-detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
- 125 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF7 directional
characteristic
de EF7 directional
EF7-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
EF7-DT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 50.00 mode)
EF7-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 25.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF7 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF7-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF7-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF7-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TEF7R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
E EF7-RTMS-IE
F EE
7 curve
EF7-RTMS-U
S
curve
EF7-RTMS-O
RG
inverse curve
EF7-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF7-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF7-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF7-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF7-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
2f-detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
- 126 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Range
Un
its
1A rating 5A rating
EF8 directional
characteristic
de EF8 directional
EF8-Angle 0 - 180 (45) (45) 45 (45) 45
/ US-CO8 / Original
EF8-DT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 50.00 mode)
EF8-IDMT A 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.02 - 25.00 0.10 - 25.00 mode)
TEF8 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
(in DT mode)
EF8-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
EF8-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
EF8-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
TEF8R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
delay
E EF8-RTMS-IE
F EE
8 curve
EF8-RTMS-U
S
curve
EF8-RTMS-O
RG
inverse curve
EF8-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF8-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF8-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF8-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
EF8-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
coefficient 0
2f-detection
VTF
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
- 127 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.4.9 Data ID
EF (Function ID : 45A401)
8000101C23 EF1 EF1 relay element operated
8000101C27 EF1PU EF1 relay operation level pick up
8000101B60 EF1-OPT EF1 protection operated
8000101B61 EF1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by EF1 protection
8B00101B6C EF1-ALARM Alarm signal by EF1 protection
- 128 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8000001B60 EF-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by EF protection operation
- 129 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8B00001B6B EF-ALARM Alarm signal by EF protection operation
8000101BB0 EF1_BLOCK EF1 protection block command
8000101BB1 EF1_INST_OP EF1 protection instant operation command
800010100D EF1_SECONDARY_RATING EF1 secondary rating

EF (Function ID: 45A401)
800010EBB0 EF1_BLOCK EF1 protection block command
800010EBB1 EF1_INST_OP EF1 protection instant operation command
- 130 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

EF (Function ID: 45A401)
- 131 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.5 Earth fault protection with neutral current (EFIn)

The earth fault protection relay function with neutral current for GRT200 (hereafter referred
as EFIn) detects earth fault conditions and operates accordingly. The EFIn provides up to four
(4) non-directional stages EFIn1 to EFIn4, which operate independently and can be selected
using scheme switches. To simplify, only EFIn1 is discussed but it is applicable to all other
stages (EFIn2 to EFIn4).
The EFIn1 is enabled using the scheme switch [EFIn1-EN] and the transformer winding
to be protected is set using the scheme switch [EFIn1-TarWind]. The input neutral currents for
the EFIn function are obtained from FEP-Common function (refer section FEP…).
TP_REPLICA TP_EFIn TP_TRC

EFIn EFIn logic (TRIP
FEP_ In (1CTn, 2CTn, EFIn- CIRCUIT)
EFIn1 to
3CTn)
relay EFIn4
sequence OPERATION
COMMON
CT secondary
rating element
Full scale
CT polarity
compensated
Type,
TarWind-P/S/T
Figure 3.5-1 EFIn function block diagram

The EFIn element monitors the neutral currents, and when one of the currents over the
threshold set in the replica setting, the EFIn element will operate after the operation time
delay defined by the time characteristic feature.
The user can choose the EFIn operate time delay characteristics, either (i) independent
The EFIn element reset time delay characteristic will be either the independent time
reset or the dependent time reset. This will be discussed in the reset time characteristic
section.
- 132 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

The operate time of the independent time characteristic EFIn element will be a constant time
The user can set the EFIn1 scheme switch [EFIn1-Type] to “DT” for the independent time
characteristic. For each EFIn independent operate time; the value of the required operate
time is set using the setting TEFIn1 in the range 0.00–300.00s. Likewise, [EFIn2-Type] –
[EFIn4-Type] and TEFIn2 – TEFIn4 correspond for each of the EFIn2 to the EFIn4
independently.

The operate time of the dependent time characteristic EFIn element is inversely proportional
to the level of the fault current. The user can determine the operate time delay from a preset
The operate time of the dependent time characteristics is defined by equation (3.5-1)).
(Refer IEC 60255-151):
k
t(I) = TMS × �� α � + 𝑐𝑐� (3.5-1)
�𝐼𝐼�𝐼𝐼 � − 1
𝑠𝑠
Where:
α = constant
The nine (9) pre-programmed standard characteristic curves are defined in Table 3.5-1.
In addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen
for each EFIn stage (EFIn1 to EFIn4). Figure 3.5-2 illustrates these characteristic curves. The
user should set the scheme switch [EFIn1-Type] for EFIn1 stage and similarly for other stages.
The scheme switches, “IEC-NI" for IEC Normal Inverse characteristic, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very
- 133 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse, “IEEE-EI” for IEEE
Extremely Inverse, “US-CO8” for US CO8 Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 Short Time Inverse
and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.
TMS for each EFIn stage and each standard characteristic curve including
user-programmable of each EFIn stage; for example, the TMS for the IEC standard
characteristic curve of EFIn1 stage will be set using the scheme switch [EFIn1-TMS-IEC]. The
other TMSs for the EFIn1 stage are also set in the scheme switches [EFIn1-TMS-UK] for UK
standard, [EFIn1-TMS-IEEE] for IEEE standard, [EFIn1-TMS-US] for US standard, and
[EFIn1-TMS-ORG] for the user programmable. Each default TMS value is 1.0.

(IEC 60255-151) sec sec
and c. For example, original curve for EFIn1 can be specified with scheme switches
[EFIn1-k], [EFIn1-a] and [EFIn1-c].
- 134 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

The EFIn will be reset after the energizing (fault) current is back to the normal condition. The
reset time will have the delay time characteristic in order to correspond to the intermittent
fault condition and/or to coordinate with other relay. The reset time characteristics will be the
instantaneous reset (no intentional delay on reset), the definite time resetting or the
dependent time resetting.
The instantaneous reset and the definite time resetting will be applicable for all EFIn
operate condition. The dependent time resetting is applicable for the dependent time
operation of the IEEE standard, the US standard and the original (user-programmable)
operate characteristics.

The instantaneous reset has no intentional delay on reset. For example, the user can set
EFIn1 stage as instantaneous reset by setting scheme switches [EFIn1-Rtype] to “DEF” and
[TEFIn1R] to “0.00”. Other stages should set the delay time value to 0.00.
- 135 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

The user can set EFIn1 stage as the definite resetting by setting scheme switches
[EFIn1-Rtype] to “DEF” and [TEFIn1R] to intentional delay of reset time. The user can set
[TEFIn1R] in the range of “0.00 – 300.00” in seconds.
Intermittent
Fault Condition
TRIP LEVEL
Definite time reset

Delayed
Reset
TRIP LEVEL
Instantaneous reset

energize current. The user can determine the reset time delay from a preset characteristic
The following equation defines the dependent time resetting time (Refer IEC 60255-151):
kr
� (3.5-2)
1 − �𝐼𝐼�𝐼𝐼 �
𝑠𝑠
Where,
- 136 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
zero (seconds),
The user can set EFIn1 stage as the dependent time resetting by setting scheme switches
[EFIn1-Rtype] to “DEP”. The user can set RTMS for the IEEE standard, US standard or
user-programmable characteristic as [EFIn1-RTMS-IEEE] for IEEE standard characteristic
curve, [EFIn1-RTMS-US] for US standard and [EFIn1-RTMS-ORG] for an original
kr and β can be set using the scheme switches [EFIn1-kr] and [EFIn1-b] respectively.
Figure 3.5-4. illustrates the standard characteristic curve.

IEC 60255-151 sec
- 137 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
return to its reset state after the time t (I). The time t (I) is calculated using Equation (3.5-2).
- 138 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Energizing
quantity I > Is
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator

delay counter
(integrator)

(with I=0, TMS=1)
Reset time
(iv) Summary of EFIn operation

Table 3.5-3 shows the summary of EFIn operation.
- 139 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
IEC IEEE US
IEC-NI ✓
✓
IEC
IEC-VI
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DT (Definite time) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓

The threshold current for the activation of EFIn is configured by settings; for example, setting
[EFIn1-IDMT/DT] is provided for the EFIn on stage 1. The other settings also are provided:
setting [EFIn2-IDMT/DT], [EFIn3-IDMT/DT] and [EFIn4-IDMT/DT].
Note that the sets of threshold have distinct values among EFIn1, EFIn2, EFIn3 and
EFIn4 and should consider an input rating that is chosen between 1A rating and 5A rating.
The input rating is discussed separately. (Refer FEP)
3.5.4 Reset Ratio

ratio of the EFIn1 is set for the setting [EFIn1-DPR]. The other ratios for the EFIn2, EFIn3
and EFIn4 are also provided with settings: [EFIn2-DPR], [EFIn3-DPR], and [EFIn4-DPR].
- 140 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

(i) Signal of EFIn trip
switch [EFIn1-TP1] is set to On to select TP1 BO contact. An alarm signal can be set using
the scheme switch [EFIn1-ALM] set to On.
3.5.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of EFIn1 is illustrated in Figure 3.5-6 and Figure 3.5-7. Each stage of the
EFIn provides the result of judgment whether a pickup current exceeds a setting, and then
trip signals are fed into the trip circuit, which is discussed separately. (See Chapter Relay
application: Trip circuit function)
- 141 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101C23
TEFIN1
EFIn1
& & t 0 8000101B60
≥1 EFIn1-OPT
8000101C27 0.00–300s
EFIn1 PU
& ≥1 & &
Primary
EFIn1-TARWIND Secondary
Tertiary
EFIn1-EN On
EFIn1_BLOCK 800010EBB0 1
EFIn1_INST_OP
DT IDMT
DT
IEC-NI
IEC-VI
IEC-EI
UK-LTI
IEEE-MI
IEEE-VI ≥1
IEEE-EI
US-C02
US-C08
EFIn1_TYPE ORIGINAL
Figure 3.5-6 Scheme logic for EFIn1 (1)

Note: EFIn1 PU is EFIn1 operation on pick up.
- 142 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101B61
EFIn1-OPT
& EFIn1-TRIP1
EFIn1-TP1 On
8100101B62
& EFIn1-TRIP2
EFIn1-TP2 8200101B63
On
& EFIn1-TRIP3
EFIn1-TP3
On 8300101B64
& EFIn1-TRIP4
8400101B65
EFIn1-TP4 On
& EFIn1-TRIP5
8500101B66
EFIn1-TP5
On
& EFIn1-TRIP6
EFIn1-TP6 8B00101B67
On
& EFIn1-ALARM
EFIn1-ALM On
Figure 3.5-7 Scheme logic for EFIn1 (2)
- 143 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.5.7 Setting
Setting of EFIn (Function ID: 45A801)
Range U Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5
N 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
Setting device 1A 5A I
Contents
rat rat rat rat rati rati rati rati rati rati
rating rating T ing ing ing ing ng ng ng ng ng ng
EFIn1-EN Off / On - EFIn1 protection enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
EFIn1-Tar Primary / Secondary / Target transformer winding
- (Primary) Primary Primary (Primary) Primary
Wind Tertiary for EFIn1 protection
IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
EFIn1-Type - EFIn1 delay type (DT) DT DT (DT) DT
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EFIn1 threshold (in DT
EFIn1-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
50.00 250.00
0.02 – 25.00
EFIn1-IDM EFIn1 threshold (in IDMT
T
0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
5.00 25.00
EFIn1-DPR 10 - 100 % EFIn1 drop-out/pick-up ratio (100) 100 100 (100) 100
EFIn1 operating delay time
TEFIn1 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
EFIn1-TMS EFIn1 time multiplier of IEC
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-IEC inverse curve
EFIn1-TMS EFIn1 time multiplier of UK
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-UK inverse curve
EFIn1-TMS EFIn1 time multiplier of
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-IEEE IEEE inverse curve
EFIn1-TMS EFIn1 time multiplier of US
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-ORG Original inverse curve
EFIn1-Rtyp
DEF / DEP - EFIn1 reset delay type (DEF) DEF DEF (DEF) DEF
e
E
EFIn1 definite time reset
F TEFIn1R 0.00 - 300.00 s (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
I delay
n EFIn1-RTM EFIn1 dependent reset time
1 0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEEE inverse (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
S-IEEE
curve
EFIn1 dependent reset time
EFIn1-RTM
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of US inverse (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
S-US
curve
EFIn1-RTM
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of Original inverse (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
S-ORG
curve
EFIn1 user original curve
EFIn1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn1 trip command output
EFIn1-TP1 Off / On - (On) On On (On) On
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
EFIn1-ALM Off / On - EFIn1 alarm enable (Off) Off Off (Off) Off
- 144 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

N 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
Contents
IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EFIn2-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
50.00 250.00
0.02 – 25.00
T
0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
5.00 25.00
TEFIn2 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-IEC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
EFIn2-Rtyp
e
E
F TEFIn2R 0.00 - 300.00 s (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
I delay
S-IEEE
curve
EFIn2-RTM
S-US
curve
EFIn2-RTM
S-ORG
curve
EFIn2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
- 145 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

N 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
Contents
IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EFIn3-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
50.00 250.00
0.02 – 25.00
T
0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
5.00 25.00
TEFIn3 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-IEC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
EFIn3-Rtyp
e
E
F TEFIn3R 0.00 - 300.00 s (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
I delay
S-IEEE
curve
EFIn3-RTM
S-US
curve
EFIn3-RTM
S-ORG
curve
EFIn3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn3-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn3-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
- 146 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

N 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
Contents
IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI /
IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
0.02 – 250.00
EFIn4-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
50.00 250.00
0.02 – 25.00
T
0.02 - 0.10 - A
mode)
(1.50) 1.50 1.50 (1.50) 1.50
5.00 25.00
TEFIn4 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) 1.00 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-IEC inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-UK inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
-US inverse curve
0.010 - 50.000 - (1.000) 1.000 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
EFIn4-Rtyp
e
E
F TEFIn4R 0.00 - 300.00 s (0.00) 0.00 0.00 (0.00) 0.00
I delay
S-IEEE
curve
EFIn4-RTM
S-US
curve
EFIn4-RTM
S-ORG
curve
EFIn4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn4-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
EFIn4-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) 0.00000 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
from TP1 B0 contact
from TP2 B0 contact
from TP3 B0 contact
from TP4 B0 contact
from TP5 B0 contact
from TP6 B0 contact
- 147 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.5.8 Data ID
EFIn (Function ID : 45A801)
8000101C23 EFIn1 EFIn1 relay element operated
8000101C27 EFIn1PU EFIn1 PU relay operation level pick up
8000101B60 EFIn1-OPT EFIn1 protection operated
8000101B61 EFIn1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by EFIn1 protection
8B00101B67 EFIn1-ALARM Alarm signal by EFIn1 protection
8000001B70 EFIn-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by EFIn protection
- 148 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

EFIn (Function ID : 45A801)
8B00001B7B EFIn-ALARM Alarm signal by EFIn protection
8000101BB0 EFIn1_BLOCK EFIn1 protection block command
8000101BB1 EFIn1_INST_OP EFIn1 protection instant operation command
800010100D EFIn1_SCNDRY_RATING EFIn1 secondary rating

EFIn (Function ID: 45A801)
800010EBB0 EFIn1_BLOCK EFIn1 protection block command
800010EBB1 EFIn1_INST_OP EFIn1 protection instant operation command
- 149 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.6 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN)

The negative sequence overcurrent protection relay function for GRT200 (hereafter referred
as OCN) detects negative sequence overcurrent and operates accordingly. The OCN has both
directional and non-directional elements. The OCN protection has four (4) stages OCN1 to
OCN4, which operate independently and can be selected using scheme switches. To simplify,
only OCN1 is discussed but it is applicable to all other stages (OCN2 to OCN4).
TP_REPLICA TP_OCN TP_TRC

IY, I∆, I1, I2 I0,
In OCN OCN logic (TRIP
FEP_
OCN1 to OCN-OPERATION
relay sequence CIRCUIT)
COMMON CT
OCN4
secondary element
rating
CT polarity
ICD Output
TarWind -P/S/T
Figure 3.6-1 OCN Function block diagram
3.6.1 Non-directional and directional OCN

The user can set the OCN as either a non-directional OCN or a directional OCN for each stage
(OCN1 to OCN4). Furthermore, the user can also set a directional OCN as either forward type
OCN or reverse type OCN.
(i) Characteristic of the non-directional OCN

The characteristic of the non-directional type OCN is a circle that has a center at the origin,
as shown in Figure 3.6-2. The circle illustrates the threshold value of the non-directional OCN
element and the hatched area shows the operation area of the non-directional OCN element.
A setting and a scheme switch is used to configure the non-directional EF that is, the
user can set the threshold value of the non-directional OCN at stage 1 using the setting
[OCN1-DT/IDMT]. Nondir is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir].
- 150 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
I2
Stage 1
0 I
Figure 3.6-2 Characteristic of non-directional OCN1-DT/IDMT
(ii) Characteristic of the directional OCN in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 3.6-3, the characteristic of the directional OCN in the forward direction is
the directional OCN.
Φ θ Polarizing voltage (-V2)
I2
Figure 3.6-3 Characteristic of the directional OCN in the forward direction

Note: A sensing angle (θ) forms an angle of the directional OCN. The half plane
A setting, a scheme switch, and the non-directional OCN, provide the settings for the
directional OCN: for example, the threshold value (IOCN) at stage 1 is set using the setting
[OCN1] and Forward is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir]. The sensing angle (θ) is set
- 151 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
using the setting [OCN1-Angle], and the θ is set in the range 0–180°. A reference signal (or
polarizing signal –V2) that is derived internally is shown in Figure 3.6-4. Figure 3.6-5 shows
an example of an angle and a characteristic set by the θ.
The operation of the OCN is based on the following equations:
𝐼𝐼2 ≥ 𝐼𝐼𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 (3.6-1)
𝐼𝐼2 × cos(φ − θ) ≥ 0 (3.6-2)
𝑉𝑉2 ≥ 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂_𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 (3.6-3)
Where,
I2 = Negative phase sequence current
V2 = Negative phase sequence voltage
−V2 = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage)
Φ = lagging angle
θ = OCN setting angle
IOCN = Setting value of OCN ([OCN1-DT/IDMT] to [OCN4-DT/IDMT])
OCN_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage ([OCN-Vpol])
Note: The phase angle in the event of an internal fault is equal to the angle of the
zero-sequence impedance of the system; this value ranges approximately from 50°
to 90°. θ of OCN can be set from 0° to 180°. The minimum voltage necessary to
maintain directionality can be set from 0.5 to 25 V.
−V2
VA
V2
Figure 3.6-4 Relationship between negative sequence current and reference voltage
- 152 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Reverse
Vpol Vpol Vpol
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
Vpol Vpol
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
(iii) Characteristic of the directional OCN in the reverse direction

The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. Reverse is set for
the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir] to set the directional OCN in the reverse direction.
3.6.2 Threshold value

The threshold current for the activation of OCN is configured using settings. [OCN1-DT/IDMT]
is provided for stage 1 of OCN, similarly settings [OCN2-DT/IDMT], [OCN3-DT/IDMT] and
[OCN4-DT/IDMT] are also provided for other stages.
It should be noted that the settings of threshold are different among OCN1 to OCN4 and
is dependent on the input ratio of a transformer module that is chosen between 1A rating and
5A rating. The transformer module is discussed separately (See chapter Technical description)
3.6.3 Reset Ratio

The reset ratio of the threshold current for activation is set using a setting; for example, the
ratio of OCN1 is set using the setting [OCN1-DPR]. The other ratios for OCN2, OCN3 and
OCN4 are set using the settings [OCN2-DPR], [OCN3-DPR] and [OCN4-DPR].
- 153 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

(i) Harmonic detection function
Harmonic current detection (2nd harmonic) is provided by the Inrush current detection (ICD)
function. Each OCN can block the operation of OCN by using a scheme switch, when the relay
detects a harmonic, which is caused by a magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when the
transformer is energized. For OCN1, scheme switch [OCN1-2fBlk] is provided; Non is set for
the scheme switch [OCN1-2fBlk] as a default.
(ii) Blocking OCN by VTF

The operation of OCN can be blocked by the voltage transformer failure (VTF) function using
the scheme switch. Block is set for scheme the switch [OCN1-VTFBlk] to block the OCN1
operation during VTF. Non is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-VTFBlk] as a default.
(iii) Signal of OCN trip

Up to six (6) BO contacts can be selected to signal trip command; for example, scheme switch
[OCN1-EN] is set to On to select OCN1 BO contact. An alarm signal can be set using the
scheme switch [OCN1-ALM] set to On.
3.6.5 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of both the non-directional and the directional OCN1 is shown in Figure
3.6-6. According to Figure 3.6-6, OCN1 provides the result of decision whether a current of
negative sequence exceeds a setting, and then operation signals are issued to trip circuits,
which are discussed separately. (See chapter Relay application: Trip circuit)
- 154 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101C23
TOCN1
OCN1 t 0 8000101B60
& &
≥1 OCN1-OPT
8000101C27 0.00-300.00s
OCN1 PU
&
≥1 &
&
OCN1-ICD-OR OCN1_TYPE DT IDMT
OCN1-TARWIND IEC-NI
IEC-VI
OCN1-EN ON IEC-EI
UK-LTI
OCN1-VTF_DETECT IEEE-MI
&
OCN1-VTFBLK IEEE-VI
BLOCY
IEEE-EI
≥1
US-C02
800010EBBO OCN1_BLOCK
US-C08
ORIGINAL
800010EBB1 OCN1_INST_OP
OCN1-OPT 8000101B61
OCN1-TP1 On & OCN1-TRIP1
8100101B62
8200101B63
8300101B64
OCN1-TP4 On
& OCN1-TRIP4
8400101B65
8500101B66
OCN1-TP6 On
& OCN1-TRIP6
8B00101B67
OCN1-ALM On
& OCN1-ALARM
Figure 3.6-6 Scheme logic for OCN1
- 155 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.6.6 Setting
Setting
ni Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
device 1A rating 5A rating ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin
ts g g g g g g g g g g
The polarizing
C
voltage level of
o OCN-Vpol 0.5 - 25.0 V (3.0) (3.0) 3.0 (3.0) 3.0
OCN directional
m
characteristic
- 156 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Setting
OCN1 protection
OCN1-EN Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
enable
Primary / Target transformer
OCN1-Ta
Secondary / - winding for OCN1 Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
rWind
Tertiary protection
NonDir / Forward OCN1 directional
OCN1-Dir - (NonDir) (NonDir) NonDir (NonDir) NonDir
/ Reverse characteristic
d OCN1 directional
OCN1-An
0 - 180 e characteristic (45) (45) 45 45 45
gle
g angle
DT / IEC-NI /
IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI /
OCN1-Ty IEEE-MI /
- OCN1 delay type DT DT DT DT DT
pe IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI /
US-CO2 / US-CO8
/ Original
0.02–250.00
OCN1 threshold
OCN1-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
(in DT mode)
50.00 250.00
0.02–25.00
OCN1-ID OCN1 threshold
0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
MT (in IDMT mode)
5.00 25.00
OCN1
OCN1-DP
10 - 100 % drop-out/pick-up 100 100 100 100 100
R
ratio
OCN1 operating
TOCN1 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
delay time
OCN1 time
OCN1-T
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEC 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-IEC
inverse curve
O OCN1 time
C OCN1-T
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of UK 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
N MS-UK
inverse curve
1 OCN1 time
OCN1-T
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of IEEE 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-IEEE
inverse curve
OCN1 time
OCN1-T
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of US 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-US
inverse curve
OCN1 time
OCN1-T multiplier of
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-ORG Original inverse
curve
OCN1-Rt OCN1 reset delay
DEF / DEP - DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF
ype type
OCN1 definite
TOCN1R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
time reset delay
OCN1 dependent
OCN1-RT reset time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-IEEE multiplier of IEEE
inverse curve
OCN1 dependent
OCN1-RT reset time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-US multiplier of US
inverse curve
OCN1 dependent
reset time
OCN1-RT
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-ORG
Original inverse
curve
OCN1 user
0.00000 -
OCN1-k - original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
500.00000
coefficient
OCN1 user
0.00000 -
OCN1-a - original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
10.00000
coefficient
- 157 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Setting
OCN1 user
0.00000 -
OCN1-c - original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
10.00000
coefficient
OCN1 user
0.00000 -
OCN1-kr - original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
500.00000
coefficient
OCN1 user
0.00000 -
OCN1-b - original curve 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
10.00000
coefficient
OCN1 operation
OCN1-2f
Non / Block - block by Non Non Non Non Non
Blk
2f-detection
OCN1-VT OCN1 operation
Non / Block - (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
FBlk block by VTF
OCN1 trip
OCN1-TP command output
Off / On - On On On On On
1 from TP1 B0
contact
OCN1 trip
2 from TP2 B0
contact
OCN1 trip
3 from TP3 B0
contact
OCN1 trip
4 from TP4 B0
contact
OCN1 trip
5 from TP5 B0
contact
OCN1 trip
6 from TP6 B0
contact
OCN1-AL OCN1 alarm
Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
M enable
- 158 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Setting
OCN2 protection
enable
OCN2-Ta
rWind
Tertiary protection
d OCN2 directional
OCN2-An
gle
g angle
DT / IEC-NI /
IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI /
OCN2-Ty IEEE-MI /
pe IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI /
US-CO2 / US-CO8
/ Original
0.02–250.00
OCN2 threshold
OCN2-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
(in DT mode)
50.00 250.00
0.02–25.00
0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
MT (in IDMT mode)
5.00 25.00
OCN2
OCN2-DP
10 - 100 % drop-out/pick-up 100 100 100 100 100
R
ratio
OCN2 operating
TOCN2 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
delay time
OCN2 time
OCN2-T
MS-IEC
inverse curve
O OCN2 time
C OCN2-T
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of UK 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
N MS-UK
inverse curve
2 OCN2 time
OCN2-T
MS-IEEE
inverse curve
OCN2 time
OCN2-T
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of US 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-US
inverse curve
OCN2 time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
curve
ype type
OCN2 definite
TOCN2R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
time reset delay
OCN2 dependent
OCN2-RT reset time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
OCN2 dependent
OCN2-RT reset time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
OCN2 dependent
reset time
OCN2-RT
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-ORG
Original inverse
curve
OCN2 user
0.00000 -
500.00000
coefficient
OCN2 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
- 159 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Setting
OCN2 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
OCN2 user
0.00000 -
500.00000
coefficient
OCN2 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
OCN2 operation
OCN2-2f
Blk
2f-detection
FBlk block by VTF
OCN2 trip
1 from TP1 B0
contact
OCN2 trip
2 from TP2 B0
contact
OCN2 trip
3 from TP3 B0
contact
OCN2 trip
4 from TP4 B0
contact
OCN2 trip
5 from TP5 B0
contact
OCN2 trip
6 from TP6 B0
contact
OCN2-AL OCN2 alarm
M enable
- 160 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Setting
OCN3 protection
enable
OCN3-Ta
rWind
Tertiary protection
d OCN3 directional
OCN3-An
gle
g angle
DT / IEC-NI /
IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI /
OCN3-Ty IEEE-MI /
pe IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI /
US-CO2 / US-CO8
/ Original
0.02–250.00
OCN3 threshold
OCN3-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
(in DT mode)
50.00 250.00
0.02–25.00
0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
MT (in IDMT mode)
5.00 25.00
OCN3
OCN3-DP
10 - 100 % drop-out/pick-up 100 100 100 100 100
R
ratio
OCN3 operating
TOCN3 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
delay time
OCN3 time
OCN3-T
MS-IEC
inverse curve
O OCN3 time
C OCN3-T
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of UK 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
N MS-UK
inverse curve
3 OCN3 time
OCN3-T
MS-IEEE
inverse curve
OCN3 time
OCN3-T
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of US 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-US
inverse curve
OCN3 time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
curve
ype type
OCN3 definite
TOCN3R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
time reset delay
OCN3 dependent
OCN3-RT reset time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
OCN3 dependent
OCN3-RT reset time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
OCN3 dependent
reset time
OCN3-RT
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-ORG
Original inverse
curve
OCN3 user
0.00000 -
500.00000
coefficient
OCN3 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
- 161 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Setting
OCN3 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
OCN3 user
0.00000 -
500.00000
coefficient
OCN3 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
OCN3 operation
OCN3-2f
Blk
2f-detection
FBlk block by VTF
OCN3 trip
1 from TP1 B0
contact
OCN3 trip
2 from TP2 B0
contact
OCN3 trip
3 from TP3 B0
contact
OCN3 trip
4 from TP4 B0
contact
OCN3 trip
5 from TP5 B0
contact
OCN3 trip
6 from TP6 B0
contact
OCN3-AL OCN3 alarm
M enable
- 162 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Setting
OCN4 protection
enable
OCN4-Ta
rWind
Tertiary protection
d OCN4 directional
OCN4-An
gle
g angle
DT / IEC-NI /
IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI /
OCN4-Ty IEEE-MI /
pe IEEE-VI /
IEEE-EI /
US-CO2 / US-CO8
/ Original
0.02–250.00
OCN4 threshold
OCN4-DT 0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
(in DT mode)
50.00 250.00
0.02–25.00
0.02 - 0.10 - A 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
MT (in IDMT mode)
5.00 25.00
OCN4
OCN4-DP
10 - 100 % drop-out/pick-up 100 100 100 100 100
R
ratio
OCN4 operating
TOCN4 0.00 - 300.00 s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
delay time
OCN4 time
OCN4-T
MS-IEC
inverse curve
O OCN4 time
C OCN4-T
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of UK 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
N MS-UK
inverse curve
4 OCN4 time
OCN4-T
MS-IEEE
inverse curve
OCN4 time
OCN4-T
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of US 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-US
inverse curve
OCN4 time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
curve
ype type
OCN4 definite
TOCN4R 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
time reset delay
OCN4 dependent
OCN4-RT reset time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
OCN4 dependent
OCN4-RT reset time
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
inverse curve
OCN4 dependent
reset time
OCN4-RT
0.010 - 50.000 - multiplier of 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MS-ORG
Original inverse
curve
OCN4 user
0.00000 -
500.00000
coefficient
OCN4 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
- 163 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Setting
OCN4 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
OCN4 user
0.00000 -
500.00000
coefficient
OCN4 user
0.00000 -
10.00000
coefficient
OCN4 operation
OCN4-2f
Blk
2f-detection
FBlk block by VTF
OCN4 trip
1 from TP1 B0
contact
OCN4 trip
2 from TP2 B0
contact
OCN4 trip
3 from TP3 B0
contact
OCN4 trip
4 from TP4 B0
contact
OCN4 trip
5 from TP5 B0
contact
OCN4 trip
6 from TP6 B0
contact
OCN4-AL OCN4 alarm
M enable
- 164 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.6.7 Data ID
OCN(Function ID: 45AC01)
8000101C23 OCN1 OCN1 relay element operated
8000101C27 OCN1PU OCN1 PU relay operation level pick up
8000101B60 OCN1-OPT OCN1 protection operated
8000101B61 OCN1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OCN1 protection
8B00101B67 OCN1-ALARM Alarm signal by OCN1 protection
8000001B60 OCN-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OCN protection
- 165 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8B00001B6B OCN-ALARM Alarm signal by OCN protection
8000101BB0 OCN1_BLOCK OCN1 protection block command
8000101BB1 OCN1_INST_OP OCN1 protection instant operation command

800010EBB0 OCN1_BLOCK OCN1 protection block command
800010EBB1 OCN1_INST_OP OCN1 protection instant operation command
- 166 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.7 Broken conductor protection (BCD)

A series fault or an open circuit fault that results in neither a phase-fault nor an earth-fault is
caused by breaker contact failure, blown fuses, and false operation of single-phase switchgear.
IEC defines a series fault as a fault for which the impedances of each of the three-phases are
not equal that is caused by the interruption of one or two phases.
GRT200 provides up to three (3) broken conductor detections (BCD). It detects

unbalance conditions in each transformer winding caused by an open circuited conductor.
TP_REPLICA TP_BCD TP_TRC

IY, I∆, I1, I2 I0,
In BCD BCD logic (TRIP
FEP_
BCD-P, BCD-OPERATION
COMMON CT
BCD-S,
secondary element
rating BCD-T
CT polarity
ICD Output
TarWind-P/S/T
Figure 3.7-1 BCD Function block diagram
3.7.1 Equivalent circuit for a one-phase series fault

Figure 3.7-2 shows the sequence diagram of the network connection when series fault occurs
in single-phase. Series fault comprises positive sequence, negative sequence and zero
sequence impedances, which are divided into left and right. The ratio of left to right is
determined by the fault location such as k1:1-k1, k2:1-k2, and k0:1-k0.
- 167 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
E1A Series or open circuit fault E1B
k1 1– k1
I1F I1F
k1Z1 (1-k1)Z1
E1A
E
Positive sequence k2Z2 I2F I2F (1-k2)Z2
Negative sequence k0Z0 I0F I0F

(1-k0)Z0
Zero sequence
I1F
k1Z1 k2Z2 (1-k2)Z2 (1-k1)Z1
K0Z0 (1-k0)Z0
E1A E1B
I1F Z2
Z1
E1A Z0 E1B
Figure 3.7-2 Equivalent circuit for a single-phase fault
Series fault results in positive sequence current (I1F), negative sequence current (I2F) and
zero phase sequence current (I0F) in single-phase. These are defined by the following
equations:
𝐼𝐼1𝐹𝐹 + 𝐼𝐼2𝐹𝐹 + 𝐼𝐼0𝐹𝐹 = 0 (3.7-1)
𝑍𝑍2𝐹𝐹 𝐼𝐼2𝐹𝐹 ∙ 𝑍𝑍0𝐹𝐹 𝐼𝐼0𝐹𝐹 = 0 (3.7-2)
𝐸𝐸1𝐴𝐴 ∙ 𝐸𝐸1𝐵𝐵 = 𝑍𝑍1𝐹𝐹 𝐼𝐼1𝐹𝐹 ∙ 𝑍𝑍2𝐹𝐹 𝐼𝐼2𝐹𝐹 (3.7-3)
Where,
E1A ,E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive sequence impedance
Z2: negative sequence impedance
Z0: zero sequence impedance
From Equation (3.7-1), (3.7-2), and (3.7-3), the following equations are derived:
- 168 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
𝑍𝑍2 + 𝑍𝑍0
𝐼𝐼1𝐹𝐹 = (𝐸𝐸 − 𝐸𝐸1𝐵𝐵 ) (3.7-4)
𝑍𝑍1 𝑍𝑍2 + 𝑍𝑍1 𝑍𝑍0 + 𝑍𝑍2 𝑍𝑍0 1𝐴𝐴
−𝑍𝑍0
𝐼𝐼2𝐹𝐹 = (𝐸𝐸 − 𝐸𝐸1𝐵𝐵 ) (3.7-5)
−𝑍𝑍2
𝐼𝐼0𝐹𝐹 = (𝐸𝐸 − 𝐸𝐸1𝐵𝐵 ) (3.7-6)
The magnitude of the fault current depends on impedance across the system, difference
in phase angle, and magnitude between the power source voltages from both the ends.
As described earlier, BCD element detects the fault by measuring the ratio of negative
sequence current to positive sequence current (I2F/I1F). The ratio can be defined with negative
sequence impedance (Z2) and zero sequence impedance (Z0); hence, the equation of the ratio is
expressed as follows:
𝐼𝐼2𝐹𝐹 |𝐼𝐼2𝐹𝐹 | 𝑍𝑍0
= = (3.7-7)
𝐼𝐼1𝐹𝐹 |𝐼𝐼1𝐹𝐹 | 𝑍𝑍2 + 𝑍𝑍0
The ratio value is 0.5 or higher when the zero sequence impedance is larger than the
negative sequence impedance. The ratio, thus, is close to 1.0 if the system is high-impedance
earthed or a one-end earthed system.
3.7.2 Characteristic and setting

Figure 3.7-3 shows that BCD characteristic (hatched region); BCD operates when positive
sequence current (I1) is larger than 0.04×In, negative sequence current (I2) is larger than 0.01×In,
and value |I2/I1| is higher than the setting [BCD].
I2
|𝐼𝐼2 |
�|𝐼𝐼 | ≥ 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
1
BCD
|𝐼𝐼1 | ≥ 0.04 × 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 &
|𝐼𝐼2 | ≥ 0.01 × 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼

0.01×In
0 I1
0.04×In
Figure 3.7-3 Characteristic of BCD
- 169 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

(i) Harmonic detection function
The operation of BCD is blocked when IED detects a harmonic, which is caused by a
magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when the transformer is energized. Block is set for
the scheme switch [BCD-2fBlk] to block the operation of BCD during the occurrence of the
harmonic.
(ii) Signal of BCD trip

Up to six (6) BO contacts can be selected to signal trip command; for example, On is set for the
scheme switch [BCD-P-TP1] to select TP1 BO contact. On is set for the scheme switch
[BCD-P-ALM] to set an alarm signal.
3.7.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.7-4 shows the scheme logic for BCD. BCD issues a trip command through a delayed
pick-up timer value, which is set using the setting [TBCD-P]. Off is set for the scheme switch
[BCD-P-EN] to disable the BCD operation.
- 170 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101C23 8000101B60
BCD-P TBCD-P
& t 0
& BCD-P-OPT
0.00 to 300.00s
ICD-P-OR
On
BCD-P-EN
8000001BB0
800010EBB0 BCD-P-BLOCK 1
To TRC
On 8000101B61
BCD-P-TP1 &
≥1 8000001B61
BCD-TRIP1
On 8100101B62
BCD-P-TP2 &
8200101B63
BCD-P-TP3 On &
8300101B64 ≥1 8100001B62
On BCD-TRIP2
BCD-P-TP4 &
8400101B65
BCD-P-TP5 On &
8500101B66 ≥1 8200001B63
BCD-TRIP3
BCD-P-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B64
On BCD-TRIP4
BCD-P -ALM &
≥1 8400001B65
BCD-TRIP5
≥1 8500001B66
BCD-TRIP6
≥1 8B00001B6C
BCD-ALARM
BCD-S-TRIP1
BCD-S Function logics
BCD-S-TRIP6
BCD-S -ALARM
BCD-T-TRIP1
BCD-T Function logics
BCD-T-TRIP6
BCD-T-ALARM
Figure 3.7-4 Scheme logic for Broken conductor protection
Negative phase sequence currents in the system normally affect the setting value of
[BCD]. BCD determines the ratio (I2F/I1F) continuously. User can check the present ratio along
with the maximum value (I21 max), measured 15 minutes earlier. It is recommended that user
should distinguish the present ratio against the value during commissioning stage; and user
should set a value for [BCD] from 130% to 150% of the ratio that was checked.
Note: The ratio (I2F/ I1F) is displayed only when the current in positive-sequence (or load
current) on the secondary circuit is larger than 2% of the rated current on
secondary circuit.
- 171 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.7.5 Setting
Un
ratin ratin its ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin
g g g g g g g g g g g g
BCD-P-
Off / On - BCD-Primary protection enable Off Off Off Off Off
EN
BCD-Primary relay operating
BCD-P 0.10 - 1.00 - 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
value (I2/I1)
0.00 - BCD-Primary operating delay
TBCD-P s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00 time
BCD-P- BCD-Primary operation block by
Non / Block - Non Non Non Non Non
2fBlk ICD
BCD-P- BCD-Primary command output
TP1 from TP1 B0 contact
BC BCD-P- BCD-Primary command output
D-P TP2 from TP2 B0 contact
BCD-P-
Off / On - BCD-Primary alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
ALM
BCD-S-
Off / On - BCD-Secondary protection enable Off Off Off Off Off
EN
BCD-Secondary relay operating
BCD-S 0.10 - 1.00 - 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
value (I2/I1)
0.00 - BCD-Secondary operating delay
TBCD-S s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00 time
BCD-S- BCD-Primary operation block by
Non / Block - Non Non Non Non Non
2fBlk ICD
BCD-S- BCD-Secondary command output
BC BCD-S- BCD-Secondary command output
D-S TP2 from TP2 B0 contact
BCD-S-
Off / On - BCD-Secondary alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
ALM
BCD-T-
Off / On - BCD-Tertiary protection enable (Off) Off Off Off Off
EN
BCD-Tertiary relay operating
BCD-T 0.10 - 1.00 - (0.20) 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
value (I2/I1)
0.00 -
TBCD-T s BCD-Tertiary operating delay time (1.00) 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
BCD-T- BCD-Primary operation block by
Non / Block - (Non) Non Non Non Non
2fBlk ICD
BCD-T- BCD-Tertiary command output
Off / On - (On) On On On On
BC BCD-T- BCD-Tertiary command output
D-T TP2 from TP2 B0 contact
BCD-T-
Off / On - BCD-Tertiary alarm enable (Off) Off Off Off Off
ALM
- 172 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.7.6 Data ID
BCD(Function ID: 45B001)
8000101C23 BCD-P BCD-P relay element operated
8100201C23 BCD-S BCD-S relay element operated
8200301C23 BCD-T BCD-T relay element operated
8000101B60 BCD-P-OPT BCD-P operated
8100201B60 BCD-S-OPT BCD-S operated
8200301B60 BCD-T-OPT BCD-T operated
8000101B61 BCD-P-TRIP1 BCD-P trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00101B6C BCD-P-ALARM BCD-P alarm enable
8000201B61 BCD-S-TRIP1 BCD-S trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00201B6C BCD-S-ALARM BCD-S alarm enable
8000301B61 BCD-T-TRIP1 BCD-T trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00301B6C BCD-T-ALARM BCD-T alarm enable
8000001B61 BCD-TRIP1 BCD trip command output from TP1
8B00001B6C BCD-ALARM BCD alarm enable
8000101BB0 BCD-P_BLOCK BCD-P block command
8100201BB0 BCD-S_BLOCK BCD-S block command
8200301BB0 BCD-T_BLOCK BCD-T block command
- 173 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

BCD(Function ID: 45B001)
800010EBB0 BCD-P_BLOCK BCD-P block command
810020EBB0 BCD-S_BLOCK BCD-S block command
820030EBB0 BCD-T_BLOCK BCD-T block command
- 174 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.8 Thermal overload protection (THM)

Any device such as, cables, transformers, generators and others can get overheated when
overloaded beyond the design limits. The thermal overload function (THM) determines
temperature rise by monitoring the current and detects the thermal overload of a device.
The THM has exponential characteristics according to IEC 60255-149 standard. The
THM also determines pre-load condition and signals a trip command when an overload
condition arises.
The THM provides an alarm and a trip signal. The alarm is set lower than 100% (trip
value) so that a corrective action can be taken before the trip occurs.
TP_REPLICA TP_THM TP_TRC

1W-IY_1,2,3
THM THM logic (TRIP
FEP_ 1W-I1
THM, THM-OPERATION
1W-I2 relay sequence CIRCUIT)
COMMON
2W-IY_1,2,3 THMA
element
2W-I1
CT polarity 2W-I2
compensated 3W-IY_1,2,3
3W-I1
3W-I2
THM_EN
TarWind-P/S/T
Figure 3.8-1 THM Function block diagram
3.8.1 Characteristic
(i) Thermal state determination
The THM determines the change of thermal state by using an algorithm and can detect an
overload condition. Thermal state (θ) is determined using the following equations:
When the scheme switch [THM-Ieq] = Off,
𝐼𝐼 2 −𝑡𝑡�
θ= 2 �1 − 𝑒𝑒 τ� × 100 (%) (3.8-1)
𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
Where, I is load current applied (largest current in three-phase); IAOL is allowable overload
current; τ is the thermal time constant, which is set using the setting [TTHM].
When the scheme switch [THM-Ieq] = On,
- 175 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
𝐼𝐼 2 −𝑡𝑡�
θ= 2 �1 − 𝑒𝑒 τ� × 100 (%) (3.8-2)
𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
Where, 𝐼𝐼 = �𝐼𝐼1 2 + 𝑞𝑞 ∗ 𝐼𝐼2 2
I1 = Positive sequence current

I2 = Negative sequence current
q = THM-q
Thermal state of 0% is for cold state. Whereas 100% is the thermal limit that is the
safety limit beyond which no further temperature rise can be tolerated and the transformer
should be disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is set using the setting [THM],
which determines the value of overload current. The THM signals a trip when the θ is at
100%.
The THM senses the largest current in the three-phase currents and operates according
to the characteristics defined in IEC60255-149.
The trip time depends not only on the percentage of overload, but also on the value of
load current before reaching the overload state. The trip time depends on whether the
overload is applied from ‘cold’ state or ‘hot’ state. The THM has a threshold for tripping and
alarming; hence, the two thresholds exist independently.
(ii) Thermal characteristic

The characteristics of THM are determined using two equations. Equation (3.8-3) is used to
define cold state and equation (3.8-4) is used to define hot state:
𝐼𝐼 2
t = τ ∙ Ln � 2 � (3.8-3)
𝐼𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
𝐼𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝐼𝑃𝑃2
t = τ ∙ Ln � 2 � (3.8-4)
𝐼𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
Where, t is time (minutes) to trip for a constant overload current I, I is overload current
(largest phase current in amps), IAOL is allowable overload current (amps), IP is previous load
current (amps), τ is thermal time constant (minutes), and Ln is natural logarithm.
Equation (3.8-3), is used for cold curve where IP is zero (refer hot curve equation
(3.8-4).This is considered for the situation where cold system is switched onto an immediate
overload.
Figure 3.8-2 shows the cold curve where an overload has been switched onto a previously
un-loaded system. Figure 3.8-3 shows the hot state where an overload is switched onto a
system that is already loaded to 90% of its capacity. Both figures are in conformity to
- 176 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
IEC60255-149 curves, and these curves are drawn for a range of settings with the time
constant (τ).
Thermal Curves (Cold Curve - no

prior load)
1000
100
Operate Time (minutes) 10
1 100
50
20
0.1 10
5
2
1
0.01
1 10
Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL)
Figure 3.8-2 Thermal curves (cold curve –no prior load)
- 177 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Thermal Curves (Hot Curve -

90% prior load)
1000
100
Operate Time (minutes)

10
1
τ
100
0.1 50
20
10
0.01 5
2
1
0.001
1 10
Overload Current (Multiple of
IAOL)
Figure 3.8-3 Thermal curves (hot curve –90% prior load)
3.8.2 Scheme logic

Figure 3.8-4 shows the scheme logic for the THM. The THM has two thresholds; that is, “A”
threshold is used for alarming, whereas “T” threshold is used for tripping.
The threshold is set using the setting [THM-Alarm] as a percentage of the tripping
threshold. The alarm signal is not generated when Off is set for the scheme switch [THMA-EN].
The trip signal is not generated when Off is set for the scheme switch [THMT-EN]. PLC signals
THMA_BLOCK and THMT_BLOCK are used to block the operation of the THM.
- 178 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101C23 8000101B60
& & THM-OPT-ALARM
A
THM 8100201C23 8100201B60
T
& &
Primary
THM-TARWIN Secondary
D Tertiary
THM-ITYPE Max phase

Equivalent
THMA-EN
ON
THMT-EN
ON
1
800010EBB0 THMA_BLOCK
810020EBB0 THMT_BLOCK
1
8000001B60
THM-OPT-TRIP
& THM-TRIP1
THM-TP1 On 8100001B61
& THM-TRIP2
THM-TP2 On 8200001B62
& THM-TRIP3
THM-TP3 On 8300001B63
& THM-TRIP4
8400001B64
THM-TP4 On
& THM-TRIP5
8500001B65
THM-TP5
On
& THM-TRIP6
THM-TP6 On 8B00001B6B
≥1
&
THM-ALARM
THM-ALM On
Figure 3.8-4 Scheme logic for Thermal overload protection
- 179 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.8.3 Setting
Range U Model1 Model2 Molde3 Model4 Model5(Full)
n
Setting device Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating it rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating
s
T Target
THM-T Primary /
H transformer
arWin Secondary / - Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
M winding for THM
d Tertiary
protection
0.40–10.00
Thermal overload
THM 0.40 - 2.00 - A 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
current
2.00 10.00
m
Heating thermal
TTHM 0.5 - 500.0 i 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
time constant
n
Co
m
m TTHM- Cooling thermal
0.5 - 500.0 i 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
mo rad time constant
n
n
Calculation using
maximum phase
THM-I Max phase /
- current or Equivalent Equivalent Equivalent Equivalent Equivalent
type Equivalent
equivalent
heating current
Unbalance factor
relating to the
THM-q 0 - 10 - 0 0 0 0 0
additional heat
produced by I2
THMT- Thermal
EN protection enable
THM trip
THM-T command output
P1 from TP1 B0
contact
THM trip
P2 from TP2 B0
contact
THM trip
P3 from TP3 B0
TH
contact
M
THM trip
T
P4 from TP4 B0
contact
THM trip
P5 from TP5 B0
contact
THM trip
P6 from TP6 B0
contact
THM- THM alarm
ALM enable
THMA- Thermal alarm

EN enable
TH
Thermal alarm
M
THM-Al level multiplier
A 50 - 100 % 80 80 80 80 80
arm (Percentage of
[THM] setting)
- 180 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.8.4 Data ID
TP THM(Function ID: 451401)
8000101C23 THM-A THM alarm relay element operated
8100201C23 THM-T THM trip relay element operated
8000101B60 THM-OPT-ALARM THM alarm instant operation command
8100201B60 THM-OPT-TRIP THM trip instant operation command
8000001B60 THM-TRIP1 THM trip command output from TP1 B0
8B00001B6B THM-ALARM THM alarm signal
8000101BB0 THMA_BLOCK THM alarm block command
8100201BB0 THMT_BLOCK THM trip block command

TP THM(Function ID: 451401)
800010EBB0 THMA_BLOCK THM-A block command
810020EBB0 THMT_BLOCK THM-T block command
- 181 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.9 Inrush current detection function (ICD)

The Inrush current detection function (ICD) is used to detect inrush current during
transformer energization and to prevent the incorrect operation of the protection functions
like overcurrent (OC), earth fault (EF), negative phase sequence overcurrent (OCN) and
broken conductor detection (BCD).
TP_REPLICA TP_ICD
Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT,
Ic-1CT
ICD relay ICD logic OC
FEP_ ICD-P ICD-
ICD-S
COMMON
… element ICD-T sequence OPERATION EF
Ia-5CT, Ib-5CT, OCN
Ic-5CT
CT polarity CT secondary BCD

rating
compensated
Full scale
2f,
TarWind-P/S/T
Figure 3.9-1 ICD Function block diagram
3.9.1 Inrush current

The energization of a transformer is characterised by an inrush current which is typically
about 8 to 12 times the transformer winding rated current. The inrush current has a
predominant 2nd harmonic, 3rd harmonic, 5th harmonic content and varying degree of higher
harmonics. As the 3rd harmonic is present during a fault condition and the 5th harmonic is
present during overexcitation of transformer, they are not reliable for inrush current
detection. The 2nd harmonic is present only during transformer energization and is reliable in
detecting the inrush current.
3.9.2 Characteristic
The ICD function examines the ratio of second harmonic current (I2f) to the fundamental
current (I1f) for each phase. If the ratio|I2f |⁄|I1f | is larger than a setting value (ICD-2f), the
ICD function will identify the presence of inrush current. Figure 3.9-2 shows the
characteristic and the hatched area shows the operation region. In this figure, the threshold
setting of the ICD function is represented by ICD-OC.
- 182 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
I2f
ICD-2f(%) = tanθ×100
|I2f|/|I1f|≥ICD-2f(%) ICD
&
|I1f|≥ICD–OC
0 I1f
ICD–OC
Figure 3.9-2 ICD element and characteristic
3.9.3 Setting
As shown in Figure 3.9-2, settings [ICD-2F] and [ICD-OC] should be used when the detection
of 2nd harmonic inrush current is required. The user should set On for the scheme switch
[ICD-EN] to enable the ICD function.
3.9.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.9-3 shows the scheme logic for ICD function. When second harmonic inrush current
is detected, the ICD signals are sent to block other protection functional elements like OC, EF,
OCN and BCD.
- 183 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000041C24 8000011C24
ICD
ICD-A
A
8100041C25 & ICD-P-A
8100011C25
ICD ICD-B
B
8200041C26 & 8200011C26 ICD-P-B
ICD-C
C
8300041C23 & ICD-P-C
8300011C23
ICD-OR
≥ & ICD-P-OR
8000021C24
& ICD-S-A
8100021C25
& ICD-S-B
8200021C26
& ICD-S-C
8300021C23
& ICD-S-OR
8000031C24
& ICD-T-A
8100031C25
& ICD-T-B
8200031C26
& ICD-T-C
8300031C23
& ICD-T-OR
Primary
Secondary
ICD-TarWind
Tertiary
Figure 3.9-3 Scheme logic for ICD
- 184 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.9.5 Setting
Setting of ICD (Function ID: 480A01)
Uni
ts
ICD-EN Off / On - ICD function enable Off Off Off Off Off
ICD-Tar
Secondary / - winding for ICD Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
Wind
Tertiary calculation
ICD
Sensitivity for 2f
ICD-2f 10 - 50 % 15 15 15 15 15
component detection
0.10–25.00
Threshold of fundamental
ICD-OC 0.10 - 0.50 - A 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50
current
5.00 25.00
3.9.6 Data ID
ICD (Function ID : 480A01)
8000011C24 ICD-P-A ICD relay element operated(phase-A) Primary
8100011C25 ICD-P-B ICD relay element operated(phase-B) Primary
8200011C26 ICD-P-C ICD relay element operated(phase-C) Primary
8300011C23 ICD-P-OR ICD relay element operated(3-phases OR) Primary
8400021C24 ICD-S-A ICD relay element operated(phase-A) Secondary
8500021C25 ICD-S-B ICD relay element operated(phase-B) Secondary
8600021C26 ICD-S-C ICD relay element operated(phase-C) Secondary
8700021C23 ICD-S-OR ICD relay element operated(3-phases OR) Secondary
8800031C24 ICD-T-A ICD relay element operated(phase-A) Tertiary
8900031C25 ICD-T-B ICD relay element operated(phase-B) Tertiary
8A00031C26 ICD-T-C ICD relay element operated(phase-C) Tertiary
8B00031C23 ICD-T-OR ICD relay element operated(3-phases OR) Tertiary
8B00041C24 ICD-A ICD relay element operated(phase-A)
8B00041C25 ICD-B ICD relay element operated(phase-A)
8B00041C26 ICD-C ICD relay element operated(phase-A)
8B00041C23 ICD-OR ICD relay element operated(3-phases OR)
- 185 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.10 Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF)

When a circuit breaker (CB) fails to clear a fault due to CB failure, then the circuit breaker
failure protection (CBF) function clears the fault by sending a trip signal to another back-up
CB. For example,
a. When the transformer protection operates and issues a trip command to the
transformer CB.
b. If the transformer CB fails to open and clear the fault.
c. Then the CBF protection detects the CB failure and issues a trip command to the
back-up CB, which may be at the remote end or could be at the incomer to the
sub-station.
The CBF protection can also be configured for re-trip of the faulted CB before it
generates a trip signal to the back-up CB.
TP_REPLICA TP_CBF TP_TRC
1CT-IY_1,2,3 CBF CBF logic (TRIP

FEP_ CBF-OPERATION
CBF1- CIRCUIT)
COMMON
2CT-IY_1,2,3 relay sequence
3CT-IY_1,2,3 CBF5
element
4CT-IY_1,2,3
CT polarity
5CT-IY_1,2,3
compensated
Figure 3.10-1 CBF Function block diagram
3.10.1 CBF features

The operation of CBF1 is initiated by the over current element OCCBF1 or by the operation of
other protection functions (for example, Transformer differential protection (DIF),
Overexcitation protection (VPH) and so on.)
The setting [OCCBF1] provides the threshold for OCCBF1. The OCCBF1 is enabled or
disabled using the scheme switch [OCCBF1-EN]. If OCCBF1 is disabled, then the CBF1
operation is based only on the operation of other protection functions. The other protection
function operated signals are from the PLC (GEN.CBF1_START, EXT.CBF1_START_A,
EXT.CBF1_START_B, EXT.CBF1_START_C AND EXT.CBF1_START).
- 186 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.10.2 Re-trip feature

Once a CB failure occurs, CBF1 should issue a back-up trip command to an adjacent CB or an
upstream CB. However, CBF1 can issue another trip command to the faulted CB again before
issuing the back-up trip command. Another trip command is termed as “re-trip”. After CB
“re-trip” operation, if the fault persists then a back-up trip command is issued to the adjacent
CB. The time chart of “re-trip” and the back-up trip are discussed later. (See Figure 3.10-2)
To issue “re-trip”, On is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip]. There are two operation
modes for “re-trip” that is internal or external mode; and user can change the mode using
scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip]:
(i) Internal mode
If On is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip], CBF1 is ready for issuing a “re-trip”
command. For CBF1, OCCBF1 together with the operation of other protection functions
generates a “re-trip” signal.
(ii) External mode

When On-T is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip], CBF1 generates a “re-trip” command
based on the operation of other protection functions. In this mode the OCCBF1 is overridden.
This mode is used in case of transfer trip command coming from remote end CB protection.
For the re-trip operation, On should be set for the scheme switch [OCCBF1]. When a
time delay is needed for “re-trip” operation, setting [TCBF1-RE] is used. The time delay for
re-trip should be coordinated with the response time of CB. The setting time is described later.
(See Section 3.10.5)
“Re-trip” is an advantage since it can avoid unnecessary tripping of an adjacent CB or

an upstream CB. This is particularly required during maintenance and testing of the system.
3.10.3 Backup feature

As described above, “re-trip” issues a trip command to the CB to ensure that CB is tripped. If
“re-trip” cannot clear the fault, CBF1 issues “back-up trip” command. This back-up trip is
used as a last resort to clear the fault.
To issue “back-up trip”, On or ON-AftRe is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Trip].
• If On is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Trip], then “back-up trip” is issued without
waiting for “re-trip”.
• If On-AftRe is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Trip], then “back-up trip” is issued only
after “re-trip”.
- 187 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Appearance of fault Start of CBF1 Back-trip for an adjacent CB
Adjacent CB Close
Open
On
Trip signal from other function
Off Trip of primary Trip of primary CB Off
CB (ordinary (Re-trip)
trip)
State of the primary CB Close
Tcb Tcb
Run
OCCBF1 stage Stop Toc Toc Stop
On
TCBF1-RE
Timer#1 (TCBF1-RE) Off Off
On
Operation of Re-trip Off Off
On
TCBF1-TP
Timer#2 (TCBF1-TP) Off Off
On
CBF1 trip signal Off Off
Tcb : primary CB operating time Toc : OCCBF1 reset time
Figure 3.10-2 Time chart of re-trip and backup trip during CBF1 operation
Figure 3.10-2 shows a sequence diagram of CBF1; it shows that the primary CB cannot
clear the fault whereas the adjacent CB clears the fault. CBF1 operates with a signal from the
other protection functions.
If the primary CB is tripped normally by a trip signal then the fault is cleared and
OCCBF1 function drops-off before Timer#1 (TCBF1-RE) times out; hence, CBF1 is stopped.
After the first trip signal is issued, if OCCBF1 function, continues to operate and Timer
#1 (TCBF1-RE) times out, then the “re-trip” command is issued to the primary CB. If the
primary CB opens to clear the fault by “re-trip” command, then the OCCBF1 drops off before
Timer#2 (TCBF1-TP) times out; hence, CBF1 is stopped.
If the primary CB fails to clear the fault with “re-trip” command, and if OCCBF1
continues to operate and Timer#2 (TCBF1-TP) times out, then CBF1 should issue a trip
command to the adjacent CB to clear the fault, as a last resort.
- 188 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.10.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.10-3 shows the CBF1 stage and logic in the CBF1 function; trip command is issued to
the trip circuit (TRC) function when each CBF stage operates. The phase current is used as an
input to the OCCBF1. On is set for the scheme switch [OCBF1-EN] to enable the OCBF1 trip
operation.
CBF1-START-A
CBF1-START-B
CBF1-START-C
8000101C20 TCBF1-RE
8000101B60
A & & t 0 CBF1-RETRIP-A
8100101C21
&
≥1 ≥1 8100101B61
OCCBF1 B & & t 0 CBF1-RETRIP-B
8200101C22 &
≥1 ≥1
C 8200101B62
& & & t 0 CBF1-RETRIP-C
≥1 ≥1
On 0.00 to 300.00s
OCCBF1-EN
8000101B63
800010EBB0 GEN.CBF1_START
≥1 & &
CBF1-RE_RETRIP
≥1
≥1 & &
≥1 & &
800010EBB1 EXT.CBF1_START-A
810010EBB2 EXT.CBF1_START-B
820010EBB3 EXT.CBF1_START-C
800010EBB4 EXT.CBF1_START
OFF
ON
&
CBF1-Retrip ON-T
&
CBF1-EN ON
CBF1-EN=ON
CBF1-NON_BLOCK
800010EBB6 CBFI-RE_INST
8000101B64
CBF1-RE_RETRIP
CBF1-RETP1 On & CBF1-RETRIP1
8100101B65
CBF1-RETP2 On & CBF1-RETRIP2
8200101B66
CBF1-RETP3 On & CBF1 -RETRIP3
8300101B67
CB1F-RETP4 On
& CBF1 -RETRIP4
8400101B68
CBF1-RETP5 On & CBF1 -RETRIP5
8500101B69
CBF1-RETP6 On
& CBF1 -RETRIP6
Figure 3.10-3 Scheme logic for CBF1 (RE-trip)
- 189 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
TCBF1-TP
CBF1-START-A 8000101B70
t 0 CBF1-TRIP-A
&
≥1 ≥1 8100101B71
CBF1-START-B t 0 CBF1-TRIP-B
&
≥1 ≥1
CBF1-START-C 8200101B72
& t 0 CBF1-TRIP-C
≥1 ≥1
0.00 to 300.00s
8000101B73
CBF1-RETRIP-A
& &
CBF1-TRIP
CBF1- RETRIP -A ≥1
& &
CBF1- RETRIP -A &
&
OFF
ON
&
ON-AftRe
CBF1-Trip &
CBF1-EN=ON
CBF1-NON_BLOCK
800010EBB7 CBF1-TP_INST
CBF1-TRIP 8000101B74
CBF1-TP1 On & CBF1-TRIP1
8100101B75
CBF1-TP2 On & CBF1-TRIP2
8200101B76
CBF1-TP3 On & CBF1 -TRIP3
8300101B77
CB1F-TP4 On
& CBF1 -TRIP4
8400101B78
CBF1-TP5 On & CBF1 -TRIP5
8500101B79
CBF1-TP6 On
& CBF1 -TRIP6
Figure 3.10-4 Scheme logic for CBF1 (back-up trip)
(i) Combination of trip commands

As shown in Figure 3.10-3 and Figure 3.10-4 the CBF1 function can generate six trip
commands to the trip circuit (TRC‡) function; the user can assign trip commands for the TRC
function by setting On or Off for the scheme switches [OCBF-TP*].
‡Note: TRC function is discussed separately. For more information see Relay application:
Trip circuit function.
- 190 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.10.5 Operation timing

The time settings [TCBF1-RE] and [TCBF1-TP] are determined based on the opening time of
the primary CB and the reset time of OCCBF1 (see Tcb and Toc in Figure 3.10-2). The
following example shows the calculation for setting, when “re-trip” is used:
Setting of TCBF1-RE =Breaker opening time + OCCBF1 reset time + Margin

=40ms + 10ms + 20ms
=70ms
Setting of TCBF1-TP = Output relay operating time on Re-Trip + Breaker opening time +
OCCBF1 reset time + Margin
=10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 20ms
=80ms
If “re-trip” is not used, setting [TCBF1-TP] should be the same as setting [TCBF1-RE].
- 191 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.10.6 Settings
Setting device 1A 5A nit Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin rati
g g s g g g g g g g g g ng
CBF1-
Off / On - CBF1 protection enable Off Off Off Off Off
EN
OCCB CBF1 current flow decision
F1-EN enable using OC relay element
OCCB 0.02 - OCCBF1 relay operate level
A 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
F1 25.00 (Current flow detection)
CBF1- Off / On /
- CBF1 retrip operating mode On On On On On
Retrip On-T
TCBF1 0.000 -
s CBF1 retrip timer 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150
-RE 300.000
CBF1- CBF1 relay command output
RETP1 from TP1 B0 contact
Retrip
C CBF1- CBF1 relay command output
B Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
F CBF1- CBF1 relay command output
1 Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
Off / On /
CBF1-
On-AftR - CBF1 trip operating mode On On On On On
Trip
e
TCBF1 0.000 -
s CBF1 trip timer 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
-TP 300.000
CBF1- CBF1 trip command output
Trip TP2 from TP2 B0 contact
CBF2-
Off / On - CBF2 protection enable Off Off Off Off Off
EN
A 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
CBF2- Off / On /
- CBF2 retrip operating mode On On On On On
Retrip On-T
TCBF2 0.000 -
s CBF2 retrip timer 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150
-RE 300.000
C
B Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
F
Retrip CBF2- CBF2 relay command output
2 Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
Off / On /
CBF2-
On-AftR - CBF2 trip operating mode On On On On On
Trip Trip
e
TCBF2 0.000 - s CBF2 trip timer 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
- 192 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

-TP 300.000
CBF3-
Off / On - CBF3 protection enable (Off) Off Off Off Off
EN
A (5.00) 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
CBF3- Off / On /
- CBF3 retrip operating mode (On) On On On On
Retrip On-T
TCBF3 0.000 -
s CBF3 retrip timer (0.200) 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.150
-RE 300.000
Off / On - (Off) Off Off Off Off
Retrip
B Off / On - (Off) Off Off Off Off
3 Off / On - (Off) Off Off Off Off
Off / On /
CBF3-
On-AftR - CBF3 trip operating mode (On) On On On On
Trip
e
TCBF3 0.000 -
s CBF3 trip timer (0.200) 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
-TP 300.000
CBF4-
Off / On - CBF4 protection enable (Off) (Off) (Off) Off Off
EN
Off / On - (On) (On) (On) On On
A (5.00) (5.00) (5.00) 5.00 5.00
C
CBF4- Off / On /
B - CBF4 retrip operating mode (On) (On) (On) On On
Retrip On-T
F
TCBF4 0.000 -
4 s CBF4 retrip timer (0.200) (0.200) (0.200) 0.150 0.150
-RE 300.000
Retrip CBF4- CBF4 relay command output
Off / On - (Off) (Off) (Off) Off Off
CBF4- Off / On - CBF4 relay command output (Off) (Off) (Off) Off Off
- 193 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Off / On /
CBF4-
On-AftR - CBF4 trip operating mode (On) (On) (On) On On
Trip
e
TCBF4 0.000 -
s CBF4 trip timer (0.200) (0.200) (0.200) 0.200 0.200
-TP 300.000
CBF5-
Off / On - CBF5 protection enable (Off) (Off) (Off) (Off) Off
EN
Off / On - (On) (On) (On) (On) On
A (5.00) (5.00) (5.00) (5.00) 5.00
CBF5- Off / On /
- CBF5 retrip operating mode (On) (On) (On) (On) On
Retrip On-T
TCBF5 0.000 -
s CBF5 retrip timer (0.200) (0.200) (0.200) (0.200) 0.150
-RE 300.000
Off / On - (Off) (Off) (Off) (Off) Off
Retrip
B Off / On - (Off) (Off) (Off) (Off) Off
5 Off / On - (Off) (Off) (Off) (Off) Off
Off / On /
CBF5-
On-AftR - CBF5 trip operating mode (On) (On) (On) (On) On
Trip
e
TCBF5 0.000 -
s CBF5 trip timer (0.200) (0.200) (0.200) (0.200) 0.200
-TP 300.000
- 194 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.10.7 Data ID
CBF(Function ID: 45B401)
8000101C20 OCCBF1-A OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C21 OCCBF1-B OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 OCCBF1-C OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00301C22 OCCBF3-C OCCBF3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C20 OCCBF4-A OCCBF4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 OCCBF4-B OCCBF4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 OCCBF4-C OCCBF4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101B60 CBF1-RETRIP-A CBF1 retrip operated (phase-A)
8100101B61 CBF1-RETRIP-B CBF1 retrip operated (phase-B)
8200101B62 CBF1-RETRIP-C CBF1 retrip operated (phase-C)
8A00301B62 CBF3-RETRIP-C CBF3 retrip operated (phase-C)
8C00401B60 CBF4-RETRIP-A CBF4 retrip operated (phase-A)
8D00401B61 CBF4-RETRIP-B CBF4 retrip operated (phase-B)
8E00401B62 CBF4-RETRIP-C CBF4 retrip operated (phase-C)
8000101B63 CBF1-RETRIP CBF1 retrip operated
8000101B70 CBF1-TRIP-A CBF1 trip operated (phase-A)
8100101B71 CBF1-TRIP-B CBF1 trip operated (phase-B)
8200101B72 CBF1-TRIP-C CBF1 trip operated (phase-C)
- 195 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8A00301B72 CBF3-TRIP-C CBF3 trip operated (phase-C)
8C00401B70 CBF4-TRIP-A CBF4 trip operated (phase-A)
8D00401B71 CBF4-TRIP-B CBF4 trip operated (phase-B)
8E00401B72 CBF4-TRIP-C CBF4 trip operated (phase-C)
8000101B73 CBF1-TRIP CBF1 trip operated
8000101B64 CBF1-RETRIP1 CBF1 retrip output command output from TP1 B0
8000101B74 CBF1-TRIP1 CBF1 trip output command output from TP1 B0
- 196 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8000001B60 CBF-RETRIP1 CBF retrip output command output from TP1 B0
8000001B70 CBF-TRIP1 CBF trip output command output from TP1 B0
8000001B66 CBF-RETRIP-A CBF retrip operated (phase-A)
8100001B67 CBF-RETRIP-B CBF retrip operated (phase-B)
8200001B68 CBF-RETRIP-C CBF retrip operated (phase-C)
8000001B76 CBF-TRIP-A CBF trip operated (phase-A)
- 197 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8100001B77 CBF-TRIP-B CBF trip operated (phase-B)
8200001B78 CBF-TRIP-C CBF trip operated (phase-C)
8000001B80 CBF-1 CBF1 operated
8C00001B86 CBF-OPT-A CBF operated (phase-A)
8D00001B87 CBF-OPT-B CBF operated (phase-B)
8E00001B88 CBF-OPT-C CBF operated (phase-C)
8000101BB0 GEN.CBF1_START GEN.CBF1 start command output
8000101BB1 EXT.CBF1_START-A EXT.CBF1 start command output (phase-A)
8100101BB2 EXT.CBF1_START-B EXT.CBF1 start command output (phase-B)
8200101BB3 EXT.CBF1_START-C EXT.CBF1 start command output (phase-C)
8A00301BB3 EXT.CBF3_START-C EXT.CBF3 start command output (phase-C)
8C00401BB1 EXT.CBF4_START-A EXT.CBF4 start command output (phase-A)
8D00401BB2 EXT.CBF4_START-B EXT.CBF4 start command output (phase-B)
8E00401BB3 EXT.CBF4_START-C EXT.CBF4 start command output (phase-C)
8000101BB4 EXT.CBF1_START EXT.CBF1 start command output
8000101BB5 CBF1_BLOCK CBF1 block command output
8000101BB6 CBF1-RE_INST CBF1 retrip instant operation command output
- 198 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8000101BB7 CBF1-TP_INST CBF1 trip instant operation command output
800010100D CBF1_SCND_RATING CBF1 secondary rating
- 199 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

800010EBB0 GEN.CBF1_START GEN.CBF1 start command
800010EBB1 EXT.CBF1_START-A EXT.CBF1 start command (phase-A)
810010EBB2 EXT.CBF1_START-B EXT.CBF1 start command (phase-B)
820010EBB3 EXT.CBF1_START-C EXT.CBF1 start command (phase-C)
8A0030EBB3 EXT.CBF3_START-C EXT.CBF3 start command (phase-C)
8C0040EBB1 EXT.CBF4_START-A EXT.CBF4 start command (phase-A)
8D0040EBB2 EXT.CBF4_START-B EXT.CBF4 start command (phase-B)
8E0040EBB3 EXT.CBF4_START-C EXT.CBF4 start command (phase-C)
800010EBB4 EXT.CBF1_START EXT.CBF1 start command
800010EBB5 CBF1_BLOCK CBF1 block command
800010EBB6 CBF1-RE_INST CBF1 retrip instant operation command
800010EBB7 CBF1-TP_INST CBF1 trip instant operation command
- 200 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.11 UV protection for GRT (UV)

The under-voltage protection function for phase-to-earth (UV) consists of four independent
elements: UV1, UV2, UV3 and UV4. The time characteristic of the UV element is configured
either as definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) or original using the
settings. Thus, the user can select the time characteristic when the UV function is to be
enabled and disabled.
Each UV element detects the under-voltage condition of phase-to-earth. The user can set
a threshold and the ratio of drop-out voltage (DO) to pick-up voltage (PU) in the UV element.
The UV function has a delay timer for the operation. For the UV1 element, the user can set a
delay time using the setting [TUV1]. The user can find the delay timer in the UV function logic.
To simplify, only UV1 is discussed here, but it is also applicable to the other elements (UV2 to
UV4).
TP_REPLICA TP_UV TP_TRC

1W-VY_1,2, (TRIP
FEP_
UV relay UV logic
3 UV1 to UV-OPERATION
element sequence CIRCUIT)
COMMON 2W-VY_1,2,
UV4
3
CT polarity 3W-VY_1,2,
compensated 3
Type-VT_P，
S，T
(3PN/1PN)
UV_EN(OFF/ON)
UV_TarWind (P/S/T)
Figure 3.11-1 UV Function block diagram
3.11.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic

Figure 3.11-2 shows the UV characteristic as hatched area with concentric circles. The
pick-up threshold voltage (PU) is represented by the second outer circle; the drop-off voltage
point (DO) is represented by the dotted circle. The PU voltage of the UV1 element is set using
the setting [UV1]. The DO voltage of the UV1 element is set using the setting [UV1-DPR].
The inner circle shows the area in which the UV function is blocked when the value of
the block voltage is set for [UVBLK].
- 201 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Drop-off
Pickup
o V
UV block
Figure 3.11-2 Characteristic of UV element

.
3.11.2 Time characteristic
The UV element has two characteristics based on voltage condition and an operation time;
hence, the user should select a mode as either (i) definite (independent) time characteristic
delay or (ii) inverse (dependent) time characteristic delay. For the definite time characteristic
delay, the operation time is constant. In the inverse time characteristic delay, the operation
time depends upon the level of the voltage.
(i) Definite time characteristic (DT)

To operate the definite (independent) time delay mode, set DT for the scheme switch
[UV1-Type]; the user should set the time for resetting. Figure 3.11-3 shows the examples of
pick-up and the drop-off points, based on the fault occurrences and the operation time. The
value of the time counter in the UV1 element is incremented when the faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault the time counter does not reach the trip level. In other words,
the operation of the UV1 element is disabled in the reset time set using the setting [TUV1R].
If a series of fault occurs, the time counter increases corresponding to the duration of
series faults. When the time counter reaches the trip level, then the UV1 element issues a trip
command after a certain delay. After issuing the trip command, if the series of fault stops
completely, the operation of the UV1 element is stopped after the reset time [TUV1R].
When the user requires the resetting of UV1 element operation immediately, set zero for
the settings [TUV1R]. Consequently, when a voltage is recovered over the reset threshold, the
operation of the UV1 element is reset.
- 202 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Condition fault occurrence

Intermittent fault A series fault
T3
Fault observation by the relay
Issue of trip command
Relay operation reset

Incrimination of time counter
corresponding to the fault
duration. Trip level
Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Increment process in time Reset of time counter
T1: Resetting time set by the user counter
T2: Actual resetting time in the relay operation Value maintenance of time counter
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and relay start time
Figure 3.11-3 Faults occurrences and reset operation when DT being applied
(ii) Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic

To operate the inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), set IDMT for the scheme switch
[UV1-Type].
(ii)-1 Pick-up characteristic

The invers time delay (IDMT) characteristic is applied when the operation of the UV1 element
is required inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. Figure 3.11-4 illustrates
the characteristic curves for each time multiplier setting [UV1-TMS] using the equation
(3.11-1), to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127.
𝑘𝑘
t(V) = TMS × �� 𝑎𝑎 � + 𝑐𝑐� (3.11-1)
1 − �𝑉𝑉�𝑉𝑉 �
𝑠𝑠
where,
t = operating time (seconds),
V = energizing voltage (voltage),
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, c, a = constants
Except for pre-programmed characteristics, the user can have a user-programmable
- 203 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(original) characteristic curve. The user-programmable (original) curve is obtained when the
constants of k, a, c, as shown in Table 3.11-1, are set, and when Original is set for the scheme
switch [UV1-Type]. The constants are set using the settings [UV1-k], [UV1-a], and [UV1-c].
Table 3.11-1 Values k, a, c for pre-programmable IDMT and user-programmable IDMT

Set item k a c
IDMT 1 1 0
User-programmable 0.000 – 500.000 0.000 – 10.000 0.000 – 10.000
(Original) by 0.001 step by 0.01 step by 0.001 step
Undervoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)
TMS=10
10.000
TMS=5
TMS=2
TMS=1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Figure 3.11-4 IDMT characteristics curves depending on TMS
(ii)-2 Drop-off characteristic

The reset characteristic in the IDMT is similar to the reset characteristic in the DT. Refer to
section 3.11.2(i) for the reset setting and others.

(i) Blocking UV operation
The voltage transformer failure (VTF) function will block the UV operation and a scheme
switch is used for blocking. By default, Non is set for the scheme switch [UV1-VTFBlk].
- 204 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
However, if blocking is required, Block is set for the scheme switch [UV1-VTFBlk].
(iii) Disabling UV operation

Off is set for the scheme switch [UV1-EN] to disable the UV1 operation. On is set for the
scheme switch to enable UV1 operation.
3.11.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.11-5 shows the UV1 elements and logics in the UV function; trip commands and an
alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each UV element is operated. On is set
for the scheme switch [UV1-EN] to enable the UV1 trip operation. Setting [TUV1] is provided
to delay the generation of trip command.
- 205 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101C20 TUV1
8000101B62
A & & t 0 UV1-OPT-A
8100101C21 &
≥1 8100101B63
UV1 B t 0
8200101C22 & & & UV1-OPT-B
≥1
C 8200101B64
& & t 0 UV1-OPT-C
& ≥1
≥1 8000101B60
0.00 - 300.00s
UV1-OR
&
8000101C24 &
A
8100101C25 &
UV1
B
PU 8200101C26
C
≥1 8000101B61
UV1PU-OR
UV1-EN
On
UV1-TARWIND
8000001C20
A TUVBLK TUVBLK1
8100001C21 8000001B60
t 0 0 t UVBLK
UVBLK B &
8200001C22
C 0.00 - 300.00s 0.05s NON UVBLK
1 ≥1
UV1-EN
On
UV-Test
On
UV1-VTF-DETECT
&
≥1 1
UV-VTFBLK
On
800010EBB0 UV1_BLOCK
DT
IDMT
UV-Type ≥1
Original
UV1-OPT-A
8000101B65 UV1-OPT
≥1
UV1-OPT-B
UV1-OPT-C TO TRC
8000101B66
UV1-TP1 On & 8000001B70
8100101B67 ≥1
On UV-TRIP1
UV1-TP2 &
8200101B68
UV1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 8100001B71
≥1
On UV-TRIP2
UV1-TP4 &
8400101B6A
UV1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B72
≥1 UV-TRIP3
UV1-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B73
On UV-TRIP4
UV1-ALM &
8400001B74
≥1
UV-TRIP5
8500001B75
≥1
UV-TRIP6
8B00001B7B
≥1
UV-ALARM
UV4-TRIP1
UV4 function logics
UV4-TRIP6
UV4-ALARM
Figure 3.11-5 Scheme logic for UV function
- 206 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.11.5 Setting
Un
1A rating 5A rating its ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin
g g g g g g g g g g
UVBL
Off / On - UV block function enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
K-EN
Commo UVBL
5.0 - 20.0 V UV block threshold (10.0) (10.0) 10.0 (10.0) 10.0
n K
TUVBL
0.00 - 300.00 s UV block delay time (10.00) (10.00) 10.00 (10.00) 10.00
K
UV1-E
Off / On - UV1 protection enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
N
UV1-Ta
Secondary / - winding for UV1 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
rWind
Tertiary protection
UV1-Ty DT / IDMT /
- UV1 delay type (DT) (DT) DT (DT) DT
pe Original
UV1 5.0 - 130.0 V UV1 threshold (60.0) (60.0) 60.0 (60.0) 60.0
UV1-D UV1 drop-out/pick-up
100 - 120 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
PR ratio
UV1 operating delay time
TUV1 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
UV1-T UV1 time multiplier (in
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
MS IDMT mode)
UV1 definite time reset
TUV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
0.00000 - UV1 user original curve
UV1-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
500.00000 coefficient
UV1 UV1 user original curve
UV1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
UV1 user original curve
UV1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
UV1-V UV1 operation block by
TFBlk VTF
UV1-T UV1 trip command output
Off / On - (On) (On) On (On) On
P1 from TP1 B0 contact
U UV1-T UV1 trip command output
V P4 from TP4 B0 contact
UV1-A
Off / On - UV1 alarm enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
LM
UV2-E
N
UV2-Ta
Secondary / - winding for UV2 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
rWind
Tertiary protection
UV2-Ty DT / IDMT /
pe Original
UV2 5.0 - 130.0 V UV2 threshold (60.0) (60.0) 60.0 (60.0) 60.0
100 - 120 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
PR ratio
TUV2 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
MS IDMT mode)
UV2 UV2 definite time reset
TUV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
UV2-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UV2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
UV2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
TFBlk VTF
- 207 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Un
g g g g g g g g g g
UV2-A
LM
UV3-E
N
UV3-Ta
Secondary / - winding for UV3 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Secondary
rWind
Tertiary protection
UV3-Ty DT / IDMT /
pe Original
UV3 5.0 - 130.0 V UV3 threshold (60.0) (60.0) 60.0 (60.0) 60.0
100 - 120 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
PR ratio
TUV3 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
MS IDMT mode)
TUV3R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
UV3-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UV3 UV3 user original curve
UV3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
UV3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
TFBlk VTF
UV3-A
LM
UV4-E
N
UV4-Ta
Secondary / - winding for UV4 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Secondary
rWind
Tertiary protection
UV4-Ty DT / IDMT /
pe Original
UV4 5.0 - 130.0 V UV4 threshold (60.0) (60.0) 60.0 (60.0) 60.0
100 - 120 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
PR ratio
TUV4 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
MS IDMT mode)
UV4 TUV4R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
UV4-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UV4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
UV4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
TFBlk VTF
- 208 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Un
g g g g g g g g g g
UV4-A
LM
- 209 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.11.6 Data ID
UV(Function ID: 473001)
8000101C20 UV1-A UV1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C21 UV1-B UV1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 UV1-C UV1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8600201C22 UV2-C UV2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00301C22 UV3-C UV3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C20 UV4-A UV4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 UV4-B UV4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 UV4-C UV4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101C24 UV1PU-A UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100101C25 UV1PU-B UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200101C26 UV1PU-C UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8600201C26 UV2PU-C UV2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00301C26 UV3PU-C UV3 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00401C24 UV4PU-A UV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00401C25 UV4PU-B UV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00401C26 UV4PU-C UV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000101B60 UV1-OR UV1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 UV1PU-OR UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 UV1-OPT-A UV1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100101B63 UV1-OPT-B UV1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200101B64 UV1-OPT-C UV1 protection operated (phase-C)
8600201B64 UV2-OPT-C UV2 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00301B64 UV3-OPT-C UV3 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00401B62 UV4-OPT-A UV4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00401B63 UV4-OPT-B UV4 protection operated (phase-B)
- 210 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8E00401B64 UV4-OPT-C UV4 protection operated (phase-C)
8000101B65 UV1-OPT UV1 protection operated
8000101B66 UV1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by UV1 protection
8400101B6A UV1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by UV1 protection
8500101B6B UV1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by UV1 protection
8B00101B6C UV1-ALARM Alarm signal by UV1 protection
8000001C20 UVBLK-A UVBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100001C21 UVBLK-B UVBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200001C22 UVBLK-C UVBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000001B60 UVBLK UV protection block command by UVBLK
8000001B70 UV-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by UV protection
8B00001B7B UV-ALARM Alarm signal by UV protection
- 211 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8C00001B7C UV-OPT-A UV protection operated (phase-A)
8D00001B7D UV-OPT-B UV protection operated (phase-B)
8E00001B7E UV-OPT-C UV protection operated (phase-C)
8000101BB0 UV1_BLOCK UV1 protection block command
- 212 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

800010EBB0 UV1_BLOCK UV1 protection block command
- 213 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.12 UVS protection for GRT (UVS)

The under-voltage protection function for phase-to-earth (UVS) consists of four independent
elements: UVS1, UVS2, UVS3 and UVS4. The time characteristic of the UVS element is
configured either as definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) or original
using the settings. Thus, the user can select the time characteristic when the UVS function is
to be enabled and disabled.
Each UVS element detects the under-voltage condition of phase-to-earth. The user can
set a threshold and the ratio of drop-out voltage (DO) to pick-up voltage (PU) in the UVS
element. The UVS function has a delay timer for the operation. For the UVS1 element, the
user can set a delay time using the setting [TUVS1]. The user can find the delay timer in the
UVS function logic. To simplify, only UVS1 is discussed here, but it is also applicable to the
other elements (UVS2 to UVS4).
TP_REPLICA TP_UVS TP_TRC

1W-VΔ_1,2,3
UVS UVS logic (TRIP
FEP_ 2W-VΔ_1,2,3
UVS1 to UVS-OPERATION
COMMON 3W-VΔ_1,2,3
UVS4
Type-VT_P ， element
CT polarity S，T
compensated (3PN/3PP/1P
P)
UVS1_EN(OFF/ON)
UVS1_TarWind (P/S/T)
Figure 3.12-1 UVS Function block diagram
3.12.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic

Figure 3.11-2 shows the UVS characteristic as hatched area with concentric circles. The
pick-up threshold voltage (PU) is represented by the second outer circle; the drop-off voltage
point (DO) is represented by the dotted circle. The PU voltage of the UVS1 element is set
using the setting [UVS1]. The DO voltage of the UVS1 element is set using the setting
[UVS1-DPR].
The inner circle shows the area in which the UVS function is blocked when the value of
the block voltage is set for [UVSBLK].
- 214 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Drop-off
Pickup
o V
UV block
Figure 3.12-2 UVS element characteristic

The UV element has two characteristics based on voltage condition and an operation time;
delay or (ii) inverse (dependent) time characteristic delay.

[UVS1-Type]; the user should set the time for resetting. Figure 3.11-3 shows the examples of
value of the time counter in the UVS1 element is incremented when the faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault the time counter does not reach the trip level. In other words,
the operation of the UVS1 element is disabled in the reset time set using the setting
[TUVS1R].
If a series of fault occurs, the time counter increase corresponding to the duration of
series faults. When the time counter reaches the trip level, then the UVS1 element issues a
trip command after a certain delay. After issuing the trip command, if the series of fault stops
completely, the operation of the UVS1 element is stopped after the reset time [TUVS1R].
When the user requires the resetting of UVS1 element operation immediately, set zero
for the settings [TUVS1R]. Consequently, when a voltage is recovered over the reset threshold,
the operation of the UVS1 element is reset.
- 215 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Intermittent fault A series fault
T3

Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Figure 3.12-3 Faults occurrences and reset operation when DT being applied
(ii) Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic

To operate the inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), set IDMT for the scheme switch
[UVS1-Type].

The invers time delay (IDMT) characteristic is applied when the operation of the UVS1
element is required inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. The IDMT
characteristic curve is illustrated in Figure 3.11-4 illustrates the characteristic curves for each
time multiplier setting [UVS1-TMS] using the equation (3.11-1), to be in conformity to IEC
60255-127.
𝑘𝑘
t(V) = TMS × �� 𝑎𝑎 � + 𝑐𝑐� (3.12-1)
1 − �𝑉𝑉�𝑉𝑉 �
𝑠𝑠
where,
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, a, c = Constants
- 216 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Except for pre-programmed characteristics, the user can have a user-programmable

(original) characteristic curve. The user-programmable (original) curve is obtained when the
constants of k, a, c, as shown in Table 3.11-1, are set, and when Original is set for the scheme
switch [UVS1-Type]. The constants are set using the settings [UVS1-k], [UVS1-a], and
[UVS1-c].
Table 3.12-1 Values k, a, c for pre-programmable IDMT and user-programmable IDMT

Set item k a c
IDMT 1 1 0
User-programmable 0.000 – 500.000 0.000 – 10.000 0.000 – 10.000
Undervoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
TMS=10
10.000
TMS=5
TMS=2
TMS=1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Figure 3.12-4 IDMT characteristics curves depending on TMS
(ii)-2 Drop-off characteristic

- 217 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

(i) Blocking UVS operation
The voltage transformer failure (VTF) function will block the UVS operation and a scheme
switch is used for blocking. By default, Non is set for the scheme switch [UVS1-VTFBlk].
However, if blocking is required, Block is set for the scheme switch [UVS1-VTFBlk].
(iii) Disabling UVS operation

Off is set for the scheme switch [UVS1-EN] to disable the UVS1 operation. On is set for the
scheme switch to enable UVS1 operation.
3.12.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.11-5 shows the UVS1 elements and logics in the UVS function; trip commands and
an alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each OV element is operated. On is set
for the scheme switch [UVS1-EN] to enable the OV1 trip operation. Setting [TUVS1] is
provided to delay the generation of trip command.
- 218 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101C20 TUVS1
8000101B62
AB & &
t 0 UVS1-OPT-A
8100101C21 &
≥1 8100101B63
UVS1 BC t 0
8200101C22 & & & UVS1-OPT-B
≥1
CA 8200101B64
& & t 0 UVS1-OPT-C
& ≥1
≥1 8000101B60
0.00 - 300.00s
UVS1-OR
&
8000101C24 &
AB
8100101C25 &
UVS1
BC
PU 8200101C26
CA
≥1 8000101B61
UVS1PU-OR
UVS1-EN
On
UVS1-TARWIND
8000001C20
AB TUVSBLK TUVSBLK1
8100001C21 8000001B60
t 0 0 t UVSBLK
UVSBLK BC &
8200001C22
CA 0.00 - 300.00s 0.05s NON UVSBLK
1 ≥1
UVSBLK-EN
On
UVS-Test
On
UVS1-VTF-DETECT
&
≥1 1
UVS1-VTFBLK
On
800010EBB0 UVS1_BLOCK
DT
IDMT
UVS1-Type ≥1
Original
UVS1-OPT-A
8000101B65 UVS1-OPT
≥1
UVS1-OPT-B
UVS1-OPT-C 8000101B66 To TRC

UVS1-TP1 On & 8000001B70
8100101B67 ≥1
On UVS-TRIP1
UVS1-TP2 &
8200101B68
UVS1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 ≥1 8100001B71
On UVS-TRIP2
UVS1-TP4 &
8400101B6A
UVS1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B72
≥1 UVS-TRIP3
UVS1-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B73
On UVS-TRIP4
UVS1-ALM &
8400001B74
≥1
UVS-TRIP5
8500001B75
≥1
UVS-TRIP6
≥1 8B00001B7B
UVS-ALARM
UVS4-TRIP1
UVS4 function logics
UVS4-TRIP6
UVS4-ALARM
Figure 3.12-5 Scheme logic for UVS function
- 219 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.12.5 Setting
Un
1A rating 5A rating its ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin rati
g g g g g g g g g ng
UVSBL
Off / On - UVS block function enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
K-EN
Commo UVSBL
5.0 - 20.0 V UVS block threshold (10.0) (10.0) 10.0 (10.0) 10.0
n K
TUVSB
0.00 - 300.00 s UVS block delay time (10.00) (10.00) 10.00 (10.00) 10.00
LK
UVS1-E
Off / On - UVS1 protection enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
N
UVS1-T
Secondary / - winding for UVS1 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
arWind
Tertiary protection
UVS1-T DT / IDMT /
- UVS1 delay type (DT) (DT) DT (DT) DT
ype Original
UVS1 5.0 - 130.0 V UVS1 threshold (60.0) (60.0) 60.0 (60.0) 60.0
UVS1-D UVS1 drop-out/pick-up
100 - 120 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
PR ratio
UVS1 operating delay time
TUVS1 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
UVS1-T UVS1 time multiplier (in
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
MS IDMT mode)
TUVS1 UVS1 definite time reset
0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
R delay
0.00000 - UVS1 user original curve
UVS1-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS1-a - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS1-c - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS1 10.00000 coefficient
UVS1-V UVS1 operation block by
TFBlk VTF
UVS1 trip command
UVS1-T
Off / On - output from TP1 B0 (On) (On) On (On) On
P1
contact
UVS1 trip command
UVS1-T
P2
contact
U UVS1 trip command
UVS1-T
V Off / On - output from TP3 B0 (On) (On) On (On) On
P3
S contact
UVS1 trip command
UVS1-T
P4
contact
UVS1 trip command
UVS1-T
P5
contact
UVS1 trip command
UVS1-T
P6
contact
UVS1-A
Off / On - UVS1 alarm enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
LM
UVS2-E
N
UVS2-T
Secondary / - winding for UVS2 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
arWind
Tertiary protection
UVS2-T DT / IDMT /
ype Original
100 - 120 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
PR ratio
TUVS2 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
UVS2 UVS2-T UVS2 time multiplier (in
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
MS IDMT mode)
0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
R delay
UVS2-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS2-a - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS2-c - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
TFBlk VTF
UVS2-T Off / On - UVS2 trip command (On) (On) On (On) On
- 220 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Un
P1 output from TP1 B0
contact
UVS2 trip command
UVS2-T
P2
contact
UVS2 trip command
UVS2-T
P3
contact
UVS2 trip command
UVS2-T
P4
contact
UVS2 trip command
UVS2-T
P5
contact
UVS2 trip command
UVS2-T
P6
contact
UVS2-A
LM
UVS3-E
N
UVS3-T
Secondary / - winding for UVS3 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Secondary
arWind
Tertiary protection
UVS3-T DT / IDMT /
ype Original
100 - 120 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
PR ratio
TUVS3 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
MS IDMT mode)
0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
R delay
UVS3-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS3-a - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS3-c - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS3 10.00000 coefficient
TFBlk VTF
UVS3 trip command
UVS3-T
P1
contact
UVS3 trip command
UVS3-T
P2
contact
UVS3 trip command
UVS3-T
P3
contact
UVS3 trip command
UVS3-T
P4
contact
UVS3 trip command
UVS3-T
P5
contact
UVS3 trip command
UVS3-T
P6
contact
UVS3-A
LM
UVS4-E
N
UVS4-T
Secondary / - winding for UVS4 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Secondary
arWind
Tertiary protection
UVS4-T DT / IDMT /
ype Original
UVS4
100 - 120 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
PR ratio
TUVS4 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
(in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
MS IDMT mode)
- 221 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Un
0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
R delay
UVS4-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS4-a - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
UVS4-c - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
TFBlk VTF
UVS4 trip command
UVS4-T
P1
contact
UVS4 trip command
UVS4-T
P2
contact
UVS4 trip command
UVS4-T
P3
contact
UVS4 trip command
UVS4-T
P4
contact
UVS4 trip command
UVS4-T
P5
contact
UVS4 trip command
UVS4-T
P6
contact
UVS4-A
LM
- 222 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.12.6 Data ID
UVS(Function ID: 473401)
8000101C20 UVS1-AB UVS1 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100101C21 UVS1-BC UVS1 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200101C22 UVS1-CA UVS1 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8600201C22 UVS2-CA UVS2 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8A00301C22 UVS3-CA UVS3 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8C00401C20 UVS4-AB UVS4 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8D00401C21 UVS4-BC UVS4 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8E00401C22 UVS4-CA UVS4 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000101C24 UVS1PU-AB UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8100101C25 UVS1PU-BC UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8200101C26 UVS1PU-CA UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8600201C26 UVS2PU-CA UVS2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8A00301C26 UVS3PU-CA UVS3 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8C00401C24 UVS4PU-AB UVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8D00401C25 UVS4PU-BC UVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8E00401C26 UVS4PU-CA UVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8000101B60 UVS1-OR UVS1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 UVS1PU-OR UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 UVS1-OPT-AB UVS1 protection operated (phase-AB)
8100101B63 UVS1-OPT-BC UVS1 protection operated (phase-BC)
8200101B64 UVS1-OPT-CA UVS1 protection operated (phase-CA)
8600201B64 UVS2-OPT-CA UVS2 protection operated (phase-CA)
8A00301B64 UVS3-OPT-CA UVS3 protection operated (phase-CA)
8C00401B62 UVS4-OPT-AB UVS4 protection operated (phase-AB)
8D00401B63 UVS4-OPT-BC UVS4 protection operated (phase-BC)
- 223 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8E00401B64 UVS4-OPT-CA UVS4 protection operated (phase-CA)
8000101B65 UVS1-OPT UVS1 protection operated
8000101B66 UVS1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by UVS1 protection
8400101B6A UVS1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by UVS1 protection
8500101B6B UVS1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by UVS1 protection
8B00101B6C UVS1-ALARM Alarm signal by UVS1 protection
8000001C20 UVSBLK-AB UVSBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8100001C21 UVSBLK-BC UVSBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8200001C22 UVSBLK-CA UVSBLK relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8000001B60 UVSBLK UVS protection block command by UVSBLK
8000001B70 UVS-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by UVS protection
8B00001B7B UVS-ALARM Alarm signal by UVS protection
- 224 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8C00001B7C UVS-OPT-A UVS protection operated (phase-AB)
8D00001B7D UVS-OPT-B UVS protection operated (phase-BC)
8E00001B7E UVS-OPT-C UVS protection operated (phase-CA)
8000101BB0 UVS1_BLOCK UVS1 protection block command
- 225 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

800010EBB0 UVS1_BLOCK UVS1 protection block command
- 226 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.13 Overvoltage protection for phase-to-neutral (OV)

The over voltage protection function for phase (OV) detects an over voltage condition where
phase-to-neutral voltage is larger than a setting and operates accordingly. The OV function
has four stages OV1, OV2, OV3 and OV4 that operate independently. The OV element has a
time delay characteristic and the user can select either (1) independent (definite) time
characteristic delay or (2) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The OV element is
configured for both pickup voltage (PU) and drop-off voltage (DO) settings.
To simplify, only OV1 is discussed here, but it is also applicable to the other elements
(OV2 to OV4).
TP_REPLICA TP_OV
OV relay OV logic TP_TRC
FEP_ 1W-VY_1,2,3 OV1
OV-
2W-VY_1,2,3
element ～ sequence
COMMON OV4 (TRIP
OPERATION
3W-VY_1,2,3
CIRCUIT)
Type-VT_P,ST
CT polarity
(3PN/1PN)
compensated
OV_EN(OFF/ON)
OV_TarWind (P/S/T)
Figure 3.13-1 Function block diagram for OV
3.13.1 Drop-off and pickup characteristic

Figure 3.13-2 shows the characteristic for the OV element. The outer circle shows the pick-up
threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner dotted circle shows drop-off voltage point (DO). The
hatched area shows the operation area of OV.
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
Figure 3.13-2 Characteristic of OV element
- 227 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
For OV1 element, value of pickup voltage is set using the setting [OV1]. On the other
hand, the drop-off element is configured with a ratio of PU to DO using the setting
[OV1-DPR].
3.13.2 Delay for the operation of OV element

The OV element has a delay timer for the operation. For the OV1 element, the user can set a
time delay using the setting [TOV1]. The user can find the delay timer in the OV function logic.
(See section 3.13.5)

The OV element has two characteristics based on voltage condition and an operation time;
delay or (ii) inverse (dependent) time characteristic delay. For the definite time characteristic
delay, the operation time is constant. In the inverse time characteristic delay, the operation
time depends upon the level of the voltage.

[OV1-Type]; the user should set the time for resetting. Figure 3.13-3 shows the examples of
value of the time counter in the OV1 element is incremented when the faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault, the time counter will not reach the trip level. In other words,
the operation of the OV1 element is disabled in the reset time set using the setting [TOV1R].
If a series of fault occurs repeatedly and if the value of the time counter reaches the trip
level, the OV1 element will issue a trip command after a certain delay. After issuing the trip
command, if the series of fault completely disappears after issuing the trip command, the
value of the time counter will reset after the reset time [TOV1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the OV1 element immediately, set zero
for the setting [TOV1R]. Consequently, when a voltage falls below the reset threshold, the
operation of the OV1 element is reset.
- 228 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Intermittent fault Series faults
T3

Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Figure 3.13-3 Fault occurrences and reset operation when DT being applied
(ii) Inverse time characteristic (IDMT)

To operate the dependent (inverse) time delay, IDMT is set for the scheme switch [OV1-Type].

The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to
the level of the voltage. Figure 3.13-4 illustrates the characteristic curves of each time
multiplier setting [OV1-TMS] and the characteristic curve is defined using the equation
(3.13-1) to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127:
𝒌𝒌
𝐭𝐭(𝐕𝐕) = 𝐓𝐓𝐓𝐓𝐓𝐓 × �� 𝒂𝒂 � + 𝒄𝒄� (3.13-1)
�𝑽𝑽�𝑽𝑽 � − 𝟏𝟏
𝒔𝒔
where,
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage), and
TMS = time multiplier setting to adjust a curve
k, a, c = Constants
If the user requires a user-programmable (original) curve in the inverse time
- 229 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
characteristic, it is provided when the constants of k, a, c are set, as shown in Table 3.13-1.
For example, the user-programmable (original) curve in the OV1 element will be acquired
when Original is set for the scheme switch [OV1-Type], and when values of respective
constants are set for [OV1-k], [OV1-a], and [OV1-c].
Table 3.13-1 Constant value at each setting of IDMT curve

Setting k a c
IDMT 1 1 0
User programmable 0.000 – 500.000 0.000 – 10.000 0.000 – 10.000
Overvoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
1.000
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Figure 3.13-4 Inverse time characteristic of OV element
(ii)-2 Reset feature

- 230 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

(i) Block operation of VTF for OV
The voltage transformer failure (VTF) function will block the OV operation and a scheme
switch is used for blocking. By default, Non is set for the scheme switch [OV1-VTFBlk].
However, if blocking is required, Block is set for the scheme switch [OV1-VTFBlk].
(ii) Disabling OV operation

Off is set for the scheme switch [OV1-EN] to disable the OV1 operation. On is set for the
scheme switch to enable OV1 operation.
3.13.5 Scheme logic

Figure 3.13-5 shows the OV1 elements and logics in the OV function; trip commands and an
alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each OV element is operated. Each phase
of the OV1 provides the result of decision whether a pickup voltage exceeds a setting, and
then operation signals are issued to trip circuits, which are discussed separately. (See chapter
Relay application: Trip circuit)
- 231 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101C20 TOV1
8000101B62
A & & t 0 OV1-OPT-A
8100101C21 &
≥1 8100101B63
OV1 B t 0
8200101C22 & & & OV1-OPT-B
≥1
C 8200101B64
& & t 0 OV1-OPT-C
& ≥1
≥1 8000101B60
0.00 - 300.00s
OV1-OR
&
8000101C24 &
A
8100101C25 &
OV1
B
PU 8200101C26
C
≥1 8000101B61
OV1PU-OR
OV1-EN
On
OV1-TARWIND
OV1-VTF-DETECT
&
≥1 1
OV1-VTFBlk
On
800010EBB0 OV1_BLOCK
DT DT
IDMT IDMT
OV1-Type ≥1
Original
OV1-OPT-A
8000101B65 OV1-OPT
≥1
OV1-OPT-B
OV1-OPT-C TO TRC
8000101B66
OV1-TP1 On & 8000001B70
8100101B67 ≥1
On OV-TRIP1
OV1-TP2 &
8200101B68
OV1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 8100001B71
≥1
On OV-TRIP2
OV1-TP4 &
8400101B6A
OV1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B72
≥1 OV-TRIP3
OV1-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B73
On OV-TRIP4
OV1-ALM &
8400001B74
≥1
OV-TRIP5
8500001B75
≥1
OV-TRIP6
8B00001B7B
≥1
OV-ALARM
OV4-TRIP1
OV4 function logics
OV4-TRIP6
OV4-ALARM
Figure 3.13-5 Scheme logic for OV function
- 232 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.13.6 Setting list

U
Setting 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
1A 5A ni Contents
device rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati
rating rating ts
ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng
OV1 protection
OV1-EN Off / On - (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
enable
OV1-Tar
Secondary / - winding for OV1 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
Wind
Tertiary protection
OV1-Ty DT / IDMT /
- OV1 delay type (DT) (DT) DT (DT) DT
pe Original
OV1 1.0 - 220.0 V OV1 threshold (120.0) (120.0) 120.0 (120.0) 120.0
OV1
OV1-DP
10 - 100 % drop-out/pick-up (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
R
ratio
OV1 operating delay
TOV1 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
time (in DT mode)
OV1-TM OV1 time multiplier
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
S (in IDMT mode)
OV1 definite time
TOV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
reset delay
0.00000 - OV1 user original
OV1-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
500.00000 curve coefficient
OV1 user original
OV1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
O OV1 user original
OV1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
V curve coefficient
1 OV1-VT OV1 operation block
FBlk by VTF
OV1 trip command
OV1-TP
Off / On - output from TP1 B0 (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
1
contact
OV1 trip command
OV1-TP
2
contact
OV1 trip command
OV1-TP
3
contact
OV1 trip command
OV1-TP
4
contact
OV1 trip command
OV1-TP
5
contact
OV1 trip command
OV1-TP
6
contact
OV1-AL
Off / On - OV1 alarm enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
M
OV2 protection
enable
OV2-Tar
Secondary / - winding for OV2 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
Wind
Tertiary protection
OV2-Ty DT / IDMT /
pe Original
OV2 1.0 - 220.0 V OV2 threshold (120.0) (120.0) 120.0 (120.0) 120.0
O OV2
OV2-DP
V 10 - 100 % drop-out/pick-up (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
R
2 ratio
OV2 operating delay
TOV2 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
time (in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
S (in IDMT mode)
OV2 definite time
TOV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
reset delay
OV2-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
- 233 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
OV2 user original

OV2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
OV2 user original
OV2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
OV2-VT OV2 operation block
FBlk by VTF
OV2 trip command
OV2-TP
1
contact
OV2 trip command
OV2-TP
2
contact
OV2 trip command
OV2-TP
3
contact
OV2 trip command
OV2-TP
4
contact
OV2 trip command
OV2-TP
5
contact
OV2 trip command
OV2-TP
6
contact
OV2-AL
M
OV3 protection
enable
OV3-Tar
Secondary / - winding for OV3 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Secondary
Wind
Tertiary protection
OV3-Ty DT / IDMT /
pe Original
OV3 1.0 - 220.0 V OV3 threshold (120.0) (120.0) 120.0 (120.0) 120.0
OV3
OV3-DP
10 - 100 % drop-out/pick-up (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
R
ratio
OV3 operating delay
TOV3 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
time (in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
S (in IDMT mode)
OV3 definite time
TOV3R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
reset delay
OV3-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
OV3 user original
OV3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
O OV3 user original
OV3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
V curve coefficient
FBlk by VTF
OV3 trip command
OV3-TP
1
contact
OV3 trip command
OV3-TP
2
contact
OV3 trip command
OV3-TP
3
contact
OV3 trip command
OV3-TP
4
contact
OV3 trip command
OV3-TP
5
contact
OV3 trip command
OV3-TP
6
contact
OV3-AL
M
- 234 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
OV4 protection
enable
OV4-Tar
Secondary / - winding for OV4 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Secondary
Wind
Tertiary protection
OV4-Ty DT / IDMT /
pe Original
OV4 1.0 - 220.0 V OV4 threshold (120.0) (120.0) 120.0 (120.0) 120.0
OV4
OV4-DP
10 - 100 % drop-out/pick-up (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
R
ratio
OV4 operating delay
TOV4 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
time (in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
S (in IDMT mode)
OV4 definite time
TOV4R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
reset delay
OV4-k - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
OV4 user original
OV4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
curve coefficient
O OV4 user original
OV4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
V curve coefficient
FBlk by VTF
OV4 trip command
OV4-TP
1
contact
OV4 trip command
OV4-TP
2
contact
OV4 trip command
OV4-TP
3
contact
OV4 trip command
OV4-TP
4
contact
OV4 trip command
OV4-TP
5
contact
OV4 trip command
OV4-TP
6
contact
OV4-AL
M
- 235 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.13.7 Data ID
OV(Function ID: 465001)
8000101C20 OV1-A OV1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C21 OV1-B OV1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 OV1-C OV1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8600201C22 OV2-C OV2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00301C22 OV3-C OV3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C20 OV4-A OV4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 OV4-B OV4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 OV4-C OV4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101C24 OV1PU-A OV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100101C25 OV1PU-B OV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200101C26 OV1PU-C OV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8600201C26 OV2PU-C OV2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00301C26 OV3PU-C OV3 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00401C24 OV4PU-A OV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00401C25 OV4PU-B OV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00401C26 OV4PU-C OV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000101B60 OV1-OR OV1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 OV1PU-OR OV1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 OV1-OPT-A OV1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100101B63 OV1-OPT-B OV1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200101B64 OV1-OPT-C OV1 protection operated (phase-C)
8600201B64 OV2-OPT-C OV2 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00301B64 OV3-OPT-C OV3 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00401B62 OV4-OPT-A OV4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00401B63 OV4-OPT-B OV4 protection operated (phase-B)

6F2S1890 (0.21)

8E00401B64 OV4-OPT-C OV4 protection operated (phase-C)
8000101B65 OV1-OPT OV1 protection operated
8000101B66 OV1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OV1 protection
8400101B6A OV1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by OV1 protection
8500101B6B OV1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by OV1 protection
8B00101B6C OV1-ALARM Alarm signal by OV1 protection
8000001B70 OV-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OV protection
8B00001B7B OV-ALARM Alarm signal by OV protection
8C00001B7C OV-OPT-A OV protection operated (phase-A)
8D00001B7D OV-OPT-B OV protection operated (phase-B)
8E00001B7E OV-OPT-C OV protection operated (phase-C)
8000101BB0 OV1_BLOCK OV1 protection block command
- 237 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)


800010EBB0 OV1_BLOCK OV1 protection block command
- 238 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.14 Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase (OVS)

The over voltage protection function for phase-to-phase (OVS) detects an over voltage
condition where phase-to-phase voltage is larger than a setting and operates accordingly. The
OVS function has four stages), OVS1, OVS2, OVS3 and OVS4, which operate independently.
The OVS element has a time delay characteristic; and the user can select either (1)
independent (definite) time characteristic delay or (2) dependent (inverse) time characteristic
delay. The OVS element is configured for both pickup voltage (PU) and drop-off voltage (DO)
settings.
To simplify, only OVS1 is discussed here, but it is also applicable to the other elements
(OVS2 to OVS4).
TP_REPLICA TP_OVS
1W-VΔ_1,2,3
OVS OVS TP_TRC
FEP_ OVS1
OVS-
2W-VΔ_1,2,3 relay ～ logic
COMMON OVS4 (TRIP
OPERATION
3W-VΔ_1,2,3 element sequence
CIRCUIT)
Type-VT_P,ST
CT polarity
(3PN/3PP/1PP)
compensated
OVS_EN(OFF/ON)
OVS_TarWind (P/S/T)
Figure 3.14-1 Function block diagram for OVS
3.14.1 Drop-off and pickup setting

Figure 3.14-2 shows the characteristic for the OVS element. The outer circle shows the
pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner circle shows drop-off voltage point (DO).
The hatched area shows the operation area of OVS.
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
- 239 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Figure 3.14-2 Characteristic of OVS element

For OVS1 element, value of pickup voltage is set using the setting [OVS1]. On the other
hand, the drop-off element is configured with a ratio of PU to DO using the setting
[OVS1-DPR].
3.14.2 Delay for the operation of OVS element

The OVS element has a delay timer for the operation. For the OVS1 element, the user can set
a time delay using setting [TOVS1]. The user can find the delay timer in the OVS function
logic. (See section 3.14.5)

The OVS element has two characteristics based on voltage condition and an operation time;
hence, the user should select a mode either (i) definite (independent) time characteristic delay
or (ii) inverse (dependent) time characteristic delay. For the definite time characteristic delay,
the operation time is constant. In the inverse time characteristic delay, the operation time
depends upon the level of the voltage condition.

To operate the definite (independent) time delay mode, set DT for the scheme switch [OVS1-Type]; the
user should set the time for resetting.
Figure 3.14-3 shows the examples of the pick-up and the drop-off points, based on the fault
occurrences and the operation time. The value of the time counter in the OVS1 element is
incremented when the faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault, the time counter will not reach the trip level. In other words,
the operation of the OVS1 element is disabled in the reset time set using the setting
[TOVS1R].
If a series of fault occurs repeatedly and if the value of the time counter reaches the trip
level, the OVS1 element will issue a trip command after a certain delay. After issuing the trip
command, if the series of fault completely disappears after issuing the trip command, the
value of the time counter will reset after the reset time [TOVS1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the OVS1 element immediately, set
zero for the setting [TOVS1R]. Consequently, when a voltage falls below the reset threshold,
the operation of the OVS1 element is reset promptly.
- 240 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Intermittent fault Series faults
T3

Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Figure 3.14-3 Fault occurrences and reset operation when DT being applied
(ii) Inverse time characteristic (IDMT)

To operate the dependent (inverse) time delay, IDMT is set for the scheme switch [OVS1-Type].

The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to
the level of the voltage condition. Figure 3.14-4 illustrates the characteristic curves of each
time multiplier setting [OVS1-TMS] and the characteristic curve is defined using the equation
(3.13-1) to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127:
𝒌𝒌
𝐭𝐭(𝐆𝐆) = 𝐓𝐓𝐓𝐓𝐓𝐓 × �� 𝒂𝒂 � + 𝒄𝒄� (3.14-1)
�𝑽𝑽�𝑽𝑽 � − 𝟏𝟏
𝒔𝒔
Where,
TMS = time multiplier setting to adjust a curve
If the user requires a user-programmable (original) curve in the inverse time

characteristic, it is provided when the constants of k, a, c are set, as shown in Table 3.14-1.
- 241 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
For example, the user-programmable (original) curve in the OVS1 element will be acquired
when Original is set for the scheme switch [OVS1-Type], and when values of respective
constants are set for [OVS1-k], [OVS1-a], and [OVS1-C].
Table 3.14-1 Constant value at each setting of IDMT curve

Setting K a C
IDMT 1 1 0
User programmable 0.000 – 500.000 0.000 – 10.000 0.000 – 10.000
Overvoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
1.000
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Figure 3.14-4 Inverse time characteristic of OVS element
(ii)-2 Reset feature


(i) Block operation of VTF for OVS
The voltage transformer failure (VTF) function will block the OV operation and a scheme
- 242 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
switch is used for blocking. By default, Non is set for the scheme switch [OVS1-VTFBlk].
However, if blocking is required, Block is set for the scheme switch [OVS1-VTFBlk].
(ii) Disabling OV operation

Off is set for the scheme switch [OVS1-EN] to disable the OVS1 operation. On is set for
the scheme switch to enable OVS1 operation.
3.14.5 Scheme logic

Figure 3.14-5 shows the OVS1 elements and logics in the OVS function; trip commands and
an alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each OVS element is operated. Each
phase of the OVS1 provides the result of decision whether a pickup voltage exceeds a setting,
and then operation signals are issued to trip circuits, which are discussed separately. (See
chapter Relay application: Trip circuit)
- 243 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101C20 TOVS1
8000101B62
A & & t 0 OVS1-OPT-A
8100101C21 &
≥1 8100101B63
OVS1 B t 0
8200101C22 & & & OVS1-OPT-B
≥1
C 8200101B64
& & t 0 OVS1-OPT-C
& ≥1
≥1 8000101B60
0.00 - 300.00s
OVS1-OR
&
8000101C24 &
A
8100101C25 &
OVS1
B
PU 8200101C26
C
≥1 8000101B61
OVS1PU-OR
OVS1-EN
On
OVS1-TARWIND
OVS1-VTF-DETECT
&
≥1 1
OVS1-VTFBlk
On
800010EBB0 OVS1_BLOCK
DT DT
IDMT IDMT
OVS1-Type ≥1
Original
OVS1-OPT-A
8000101B65 OVS1-OPT
≥1
OVS1-OPT-B
OVS1-OPT-C TO TRC
8000101B66
OVS1-TP1 On & 8000001B60
8100101B67 ≥1
On OVS-TRIP1
OVS1-TP2 &
8200101B68
OVS1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 8100001B61
≥1
On OVS-TRIP2
OVS1-TP4 &
8400101B6A
OVS1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B62
≥1 OVS-TRIP3
OVS1-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B63
On OVS-TRIP4
OVS1-ALM &
8400001B64
≥1
OVS-TRIP5
8500001B65
≥1
OVS-TRIP6
8B00001B6B
≥1
OVS-ALARM
OVS4-TRIP1
OVS4 function logics
OVS4-TRIP6
OVS4-ALARM
Figure 3.14-5 Scheme logic for OVS function
- 244 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.14.6 Setting list

U
Setting 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
nit Contents
device 1A rating 5A rating ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin rati
s
OVS1-E
Off / On - OVS1 protection enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
N
Target transformer
OVS1-Ta Primary / Secondary /
- winding for OVS1 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
rWind Tertiary
protection
OVS1-Ty
DT / IDMT / Original - OVS1 delay type (DT) (DT) DT (DT) DT
pe
OVS1 1.0 - 220.0 V OVS1 threshold (120.0) (120.0) 120.0 (120.0) 120.0
OVS1-D OVS1 drop-out/pick-up
10 - 100 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
PR ratio
OVS1 operating delay
TOVS1 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
time (in DT mode)
OVS1-T OVS1 time multiplier (in
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
MS IDMT mode)
OVS1 definite time reset
TOVS1R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
OVS1 user original curve
OVS1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
OVS1-a 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
O OVS1 user original curve
V OVS1-c 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
S OVS1-V OVS1 operation block by
1 Non / Block - (Non) (Non) Non (Non) Non
TFBlk VTF
OVS1 trip command
OVS1-T
P1
contact
OVS1 trip command
OVS1-T
P2
contact
OVS1 trip command
OVS1-T
P3
contact
OVS1 trip command
OVS1-T
P4
contact
OVS1 trip command
OVS1-T
P5
contact
OVS1 trip command
OVS1-T
P6
contact
OVS1-A
Off / On - OVS1 alarm enable (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
LM
OVS2-E
N
Target transformer
- winding for OVS2 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Primary
rWind Tertiary
protection
OVS2-Ty
pe
10 - 100 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
PR ratio
TOVS2 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
time (in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
MS IDMT mode)
TOVS2R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
OVS2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
O OVS2-a 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
V OVS2 user original curve
S OVS2-c 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
2 OVS2-V OVS2 operation block by
TFBlk VTF
OVS2 trip command
OVS2-T
P1
contact
OVS2 trip command
OVS2-T
P2
contact
OVS2 trip command
OVS2-T
P3
contact
OVS2 trip command
OVS2-T
P4
contact
OVS2 trip command
OVS2-T
P5
contact
OVS2 trip command
OVS2-T
P6
contact
- 245 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
OVS2-A
LM
OVS3-E
N
Target transformer
- winding for OVS3 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Secondary
rWind Tertiary
protection
OVS3-Ty
pe
10 - 100 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
PR ratio
TOVS3 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
time (in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
MS IDMT mode)
TOVS3R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
OVS3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
OVS3-a 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
V OVS3-c 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
TFBlk VTF
OVS3 trip command
OVS3-T
P1
contact
OVS3 trip command
OVS3-T
P2
contact
OVS3 trip command
OVS3-T
P3
contact
OVS3 trip command
OVS3-T
P4
contact
OVS3 trip command
OVS3-T
P5
contact
OVS3 trip command
OVS3-T
P6
contact
OVS3-A
LM
OVS4-E
N
Target transformer
- winding for OVS4 (Primary) (Primary) Primary (Primary) Secondary
rWind Tertiary
protection
OVS4-Ty
pe
10 - 100 % (100) (100) 100 (100) 100
PR ratio
TOVS4 0.00 - 300.00 s (1.00) (1.00) 1.00 (1.00) 1.00
time (in DT mode)
0.010 - 100.000 - (1.000) (1.000) 1.000 (1.000) 1.000
MS IDMT mode)
TOVS4R 0.0 - 300.0 s (0.0) (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0
delay
OVS4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
OVS4-a 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
V OVS4-c 0.00000 - 500.00000 - (0.00000) (0.00000) 0.00000 (0.00000) 0.00000
coefficient
TFBlk VTF
OVS4 trip command
OVS4-T
P1
contact
OVS4 trip command
OVS4-T
P2
contact
OVS4 trip command
OVS4-T
P3
contact
OVS4 trip command
OVS4-T
P4
contact
OVS4 trip command
OVS4-T
P5
contact
OVS4 trip command
OVS4-T
P6
contact
OVS4-A
LM
- 246 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.14.7 Data ID
OVS(Function ID: 465801)
8000101C20 OVS1-AB OVS1 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100101C21 OVS1-BC OVS1 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200101C22 OVS1-CA OVS1 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8600201C22 OVS2-CA OVS2 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8A00301C22 OVS3-CA OVS3 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8C00401C20 OVS4-AB OVS4 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8D00401C21 OVS4-BC OVS4 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8E00401C22 OVS4-CA OVS4 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000101C24 OVS1PU-AB OVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8100101C25 OVS1PU-BC OVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8200101C26 OVS1PU-CA OVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8600201C26 OVS2PU-CA OVS2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8A00301C26 OVS3PU-CA OVS3 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8C00401C24 OVS4PU-AB OVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8D00401C25 OVS4PU-BC OVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8E00401C26 OVS4PU-CA OVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8000101B60 OVS1-OR OVS1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 OVS1PU-OR OVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 OVS1-OPT-AB OVS1 protection operated (phase-AB)
8100101B63 OVS1-OPT-BC OVS1 protection operated (phase-BC)
8200101B64 OVS1-OPT-CA OVS1 protection operated (phase-CA)
8600201B64 OVS2-OPT-CA OVS2 protection operated (phase-CA)
8A00301B64 OVS3-OPT-CA OVS3 protection operated (phase-CA)
8C00401B62 OVS4-OPT-AB OVS4 protection operated (phase-AB)
8D00401B63 OVS4-OPT-BC OVS4 protection operated (phase-BC)

6F2S1890 (0.21)

8E00401B64 OVS4-OPT-CA OVS4 protection operated (phase-CA)
8000101B65 OVS1-OPT OVS1 protection operated
8000101B66 OVS1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OVS1 protection
8400101B6A OVS1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by OVS1 protection
8500101B6B OVS1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by OVS1 protection
8B00101B6C OVS1-ALARM Alarm signal by OVS1 protection
8000001B60 OVS-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OVS protection
8B00001B6B OVS-ALARM Alarm signal by OVS protection
8C00001B6C OVS-OPT-A OVS protection operated (phase-AB)
8D00001B6D OVS-OPT-B OVS protection operated (phase-BC)
8E00001B6E OVS-OPT-C OVS protection operated (phase-CA)
8000101BB0 OVS1_BLOCK OVS1 protection block command
- 248 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)


800010EBB0 OVS1_BLOCK OVS1 protection block command
- 249 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.15 Earth fault overvoltage protection (OVG)

The earth fault overvoltage protection (OVG) function has four (4) stages (OVG1 to OVG4)
and the time characteristic of each stage can be set as either definite time or inverse definite
minimum time. The purpose of each stage of the OVG is to detect earth fault on unearthed,
resistance-earthed system or transformers.
The low voltage setting, which is set for the OVG element, is susceptible to any third
harmonic component, which may be superimposed on an input signal. Therefore, this function
incorporates the filter to suppress the third harmonic component.
3.15.1 Drop-off and pickup

Hatched area with concentric circles shows the characteristic of OVG in Figure 3.15-1. The
outer circle shows pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner circle shows drop-off
voltage point (DO).
For stage 1 PU element, value of pickup voltage is set using the setting [OVG1]. On the
other hand, the drop-off element is configured with a ratio of PU to DO using the setting
[OVG1-DPR].
Similarly, for other stages, settings [OVG2], [OVG3], [OVG4] and [OVG2-DPR]
[OVG3-DPR], [OVG4-DPR] are provided.
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
Figure 3.15-1 Setting points for OVG
3.15.2 Definite time characteristic

For time characteristics in the OVG, there is a relationship between input quantity (input
voltage) and startup time; thus, the operation is divided into two modes: that is, independent
time characteristic (definite time delay DT) and dependent time characteristic (inverse time
delay IDMT).
- 250 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(i) Setting of definite time delay

The definite time delay (DT) is used when the OVG operation is required with a constant
delay time. That is, for example, the OVG1 is operated when fed voltage exceeds the setting
[OVG1] and the OVG1 generates a trip command with a delay time that is set using the
setting [TOVG1]. Make sure that DT is set for the scheme switch [OVG1-Type] prior to the
operation.
(ii) Consideration of reset characteristic

If the definite time delay (DT) is used, make sure that the reset characteristic of the OVG
should be considered, because there are repetitive intermittent faults and a series of faults
in rapid succession. Therefore, note that the reset operation of the OVG is required for each
fault case.
Figure 3.15-2 shows a number of fault occurrences, fault observation in the OVG, and
integrated value that is calculated in the OVG. With regard to the repetitive intermittent
fault, if the integrated value of the OVG produced fails to reach the trip operation threshold,
the OVG will not signal a trip command; hence, the OVG operation is blocked within the
reset time.
If series faults are observed repeatedly and if the integrated value reaches the
threshold of trip operation, the OVG will signal a trip command. If a series of fault, after the
output of the trip command, stops completely, the integrated value will clear up within the
reset time.
- 251 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Fault occurrence and condition

Intermittent fault A series of fault
T3
Faults observed
Trip command signal
Operation reset
Integrated value is calculated
with the duration of fault
occurrence. Threshold of trip operation
Output of a trip
command
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Increment process of the Reset of the integrated value
T1: Resetting time placed by an operator integrated value
T2: Actual resetting time in this function Maintenance of the integrated value
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and function start
Figure 3.15-2 Occurrence of faults and reset operation when definite time reset is applied
(iii) Definite time resetting

Suppose that the definite time delay is applied for the OVG, reset time is set using the
setting [TOVG1R].
(iv) Instantaneous resetting

In case, that the OVG1 requires instantaneous resetting, zero is set for the setting
[TOVG1R]. Consequently, the OVG1 operation clears up when a voltage falls below the reset
threshold.
3.15.3 Invers time delay (Dependent time characteristic)

If OVG startup operation is needed set the IDMT according to the quantity of input voltage,
hence, the startup time will be inversely proportion to the voltage quantity. Figure 3.15-3
illustrates the characteristic curves of each time multiplier setting and the characteristic
curve is defined using the equation (3.15-1) in conformity to IEC 60255-127:
𝑘𝑘
t(G) = TMS × �� 𝑎𝑎 � + 𝑐𝑐� (3.15-1)
�𝑉𝑉�𝑉𝑉 � − 1
𝑠𝑠
Where,
- 252 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

TMS = time multiplier setting.
In case IDMT is set for the scheme switch [OVG1-Type] and time multiplier value is set for the
setting [OVG1-TMS], then the OVG1 operates based on the inverse time delay. The purpose of
the time multiplier is to adjust the characteristic curve.
If the IDMT requires a curve arbitrarily, the arbitrary curve should be provided with
constants k, a, c, as shown in Table 3.15-1. For the arbitrary curve of the OVG1, set Original
for the scheme switch [OVG1-Type]. Constant values are set using the settings [OVG1-k],
[OVG1-a] and [OVG1-C].
Table 3.15-1 Constant value for each setting of IDMT curvin OVG
Setting k a C
IDMT 1 1 0
Original 0.000 – 500.000 0.000 – 10.000 0.000 – 10.000
(User Configurable) by 0.001 step by 0.01 step by 0.001 step
Overvoltage Inverse Time

Curves
1000.000
100.000
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
1.000
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Figure 3.15-3 Inverse time characteristic of OVG
- 253 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

(i) Block operation of VTF for OVG
The voltage transformer failure (VTF) function will block the OVG operation and a
scheme switch is used for blocking. By default, Non is set for the scheme switch
[OVG1-VTFBlk]. However, if blocking is required, Block is set for the scheme switch
[OVG1-VTFBlk].
(iii) Disabling OVG operation

Off is set for the scheme switch [OVG1-EN] to disable the OVG1 operation. On is set for
the scheme switch to enable OVG1 operation.
3.15.5 Scheme logic

Figure 3.15-4 shows the OVG1 elements and logics in the OVG function; trip commands and
an alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each OVG element is operated. Each
phase of the OVG1 provides the result of decision whether a pickup voltage exceeds a setting,
and then operation signals are issued to trip circuits, which are discussed separately. (See
chapter Relay application: Trip circuit)
- 254 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101C23
TOVG1
8000101B60
t 0
& & & OVG1-OPT
OVG1 ≥1
0.0 – 300.0s
8000101C27
&
OVG1 PU
OVG1-TARWIND
OVG1-EN
On
OVG1-VTF-DETECT
&
≥1 1
OVG1-VTFBLK
On
800010EBB0 OVG1_BLOCK
DT
IDMT
OVG1-Type ≥1
Original
8000101B61
OVG1-TP1 On & 8000001B60
8100101B62 ≥1
On OVG-TRIP1
OVG1-TP2 &
8200101B63
OVG1-TP3 On &
8300101B64 ≥1 8100001B61
On OVG -TRIP2
OVG1-TP4 &
8400101B65
OVG1-TP5 On & 8500101B66 8200001B62
≥1 OVG -TRIP3
OVG1-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6B ≥1 8300001B63
On OVG -TRIP4
OVG1-ALM &
8400001B64
≥1
OVG -TRIP5
8500001B65
≥1
OVG -TRIP6
8B00001B6B
≥1
OVG -ALARM
OVG4-TRIP1
OVG4 function logics
OVG4-TRIP6
OVG4-ALARM
Figure 3.15-4 Scheme logic for OVG function
- 255 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.15.6 Setting
Setting
1A 5A ni Contents
device 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
rating rating ts rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating rating
OVG1 OVG1 protection

-EN enable
OVG1 Primary / Target transformer
-TarW Secondary / - winding for OVG1 Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
ind Tertiary protection
OVG1 DT / IDMT /
- OVG1 delay type DT DT DT DT DT
-Type Original
OVG1 1.0 - 220.0 V OVG1 threshold 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
OVG1
OVG1
10 - 100 % drop-out/pick-up 100 100 100 100 100
-DPR
ratio
OVG1 operating
TOV
0.00 - 300.00 s delay time (in DT 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
G1
mode)
OVG1 time
OVG1
0.010 - 100.000 - multiplier (in 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
-TMS
IDMT mode)
TOV OVG1 definite time
0.0 - 300.0 s 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
G1R reset delay
OVG1 OVG1 user original
0.000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
-k curve coefficient
0.000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
-a curve coefficient
0.000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
-c curve coefficient
O OVG1
V OVG1 operation
-VTF Non / Block - Non Non Non Non Non
G block by VTF
Blk
1 OVG1 trip
OVG1 command output
-TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
OVG1 trip
OVG1 command output
-TP2 from TP2 B0
contact
OVG1 trip
OVG1 command output
-TP3 from TP3 B0
contact
OVG1 trip
OVG1 command output
-TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
OVG1 trip
OVG1 command output
-TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
OVG1 trip
OVG1 command output
-TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
OVG1 OVG1 alarm
-ALM enable

-EN enable
O -TarW Secondary / - winding for OVG2 Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
V ind Tertiary protection
G OVG2 DT / IDMT /
2 -Type Original
OVG2 OVG2
10 - 100 % 100 100 100 100 100
-DPR drop-out/pick-up
- 256 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Setting
1A 5A ni Contents
ratio
OVG2 operating
TOV
0.00 - 300.00 s delay time (in DT 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
G2
mode)
OVG2 time
OVG2
0.010 - 100.000 - multiplier (in 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
-TMS
IDMT mode)
0.0 - 300.0 s 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
G2R reset delay
0.000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
0.000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
0.000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
OVG2
OVG2 operation
block by VTF
Blk
OVG2 trip
OVG2 command output
-TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
OVG2 trip
OVG2 command output
-TP2 from TP2 B0
contact
OVG2 trip
OVG2 command output
-TP3 from TP3 B0
contact
OVG2 trip
OVG2 command output
-TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
OVG2 trip
OVG2 command output
-TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
OVG2 trip
OVG2 command output
-TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
OVG2 OVG2 alarm
-ALM enable

-EN enable
-TarW Secondary / - winding for OVG3 Primary Primary Primary Primary Secondary
OVG3 DT / IDMT /
-Type Original
OVG3
OVG3
O 10 - 100 % drop-out/pick-up 100 100 100 100 100
-DPR
V ratio
G OVG3 operating
TOV
3 0.00 - 300.00 s delay time (in DT 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
G3
mode)
OVG3 time
OVG3
0.010 - 100.000 - multiplier (in 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
-TMS
IDMT mode)
0.0 - 300.0 s 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
G3R reset delay
0.000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
OVG3 0.000 - 10.00000 - OVG3 user original 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
- 257 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Setting
1A 5A ni Contents
0.000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
OVG3
OVG3 operation
block by VTF
Blk
OVG3 trip
OVG3 command output
-TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
OVG3 trip
OVG3 command output
-TP2 from TP2 B0
contact
OVG3 trip
OVG3 command output
-TP3 from TP3 B0
contact
OVG3 trip
OVG3 command output
-TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
OVG3 trip
OVG3 command output
-TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
OVG3 trip
OVG3 command output
-TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
OVG3 OVG3 alarm
-ALM enable

-EN enable
-TarW Secondary / - winding for OVG4 Primary Primary Primary Primary Secondary
OVG4 DT / IDMT /
-Type Original
OVG4
OVG4
10 - 100 % drop-out/pick-up 100 100 100 100 100
-DPR
ratio
OVG4 operating
TOV
0.00 - 300.00 s delay time (in DT 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
G4
mode)
OVG4 time
OVG4
O 0.010 - 100.000 - multiplier (in 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
-TMS
V IDMT mode)
G TOV OVG4 definite time
0.0 - 300.0 s 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
4 G4R reset delay
0.000 - 500.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
0.000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
0.000 - 10.00000 - 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
OVG4
OVG4 operation
block by VTF
Blk
OVG4 trip
OVG4 command output
-TP1 from TP1 B0
contact
OVG4 OVG4 trip
-TP2 command output
- 258 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

Setting
1A 5A ni Contents
from TP2 B0
contact
OVG4 trip
OVG4 command output
-TP3 from TP3 B0
contact
OVG4 trip
OVG4 command output
-TP4 from TP4 B0
contact
OVG4 trip
OVG4 command output
-TP5 from TP5 B0
contact
OVG4 trip
OVG4 command output
-TP6 from TP6 B0
contact
OVG4 OVG4 alarm
-ALM enable
- 259 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.15.7 Data ID
GOVG(Function ID: 465401)
8000101C23 OVG1 OVG1 relay element operated
8000101C27 OVG1PU OVG1 PU relay operation level pick up
8000101B60 OVG1-OPT OVG1 protection operated
8000101B61 OVG1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OVG1 protection
8B00101B6B OVG1-ALARM Alarm signal by OVG1 protection
- 260 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8000001B60 OVG-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OVG protection
8B00001B6B OVG-ALARM Alarm signal by OVG protection
8000101BB0 OVG1_BLOCK OVG1 protection block command

800010EBB0 OVG1_BLOCK OVG1 protection block command
- 261 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.16 Frequency protection (FRQ/DFRQ)

The frequency protection (FRQ and DFRQ) functions have six frequency stages to detect
frequency-deviations and rate of frequency-change (∆f/∆t) respectively. If the deviations or
changes occur, the FRQ and DFRQ function can issue a trip command (or an alarm signal) in
response to the degree of the frequency-deviation and the rate of frequency-change
respectively.
With respect to monitoring the frequency-deviation, either an under-frequency stage

(UF) or an over-frequency stage (OF) is used to monitor the frequency. The UF stage is used to
initiate load shedding to maintain load and generation balance and retain power system
stability. The user can set the degree of frequency deviation for each stage. The OF stage is
used to protect synchronous machines (connected through Generator Transformer) from
possible damage due to over-frequency conditions.
With respect to monitoring the rate of frequency-change, either a frequency-rise

monitoring (RISE) or a frequency-down monitoring (DOWN) is used. To monitor the
frequency-change, the user should select either RISE or DOWN setting. The DFRQ is used to
isolate two interconnected systems when the rate of frequency-change is very rapid and to
retain the power system stability.
To simplify, only stage 1 is discussed here, but it is also applicable to all other stages
(stage 2 to stage 6).
TP_REPLICA 1W-VY_1 TP_FRQ TP_TRC

1W-VΔ_1
FRQ FRQ logic (TRIP
FEP_ 1W-V1
FRQ1- FRQ-OPERATION
2W-VY_1
COMMON
FRQ6
2W-VΔ_1 element
2W-V1
CT polarity
3W-VY_1
compensated
3W-VΔ_1
3W-V1
Type-VT_P，S，
T FRQ_EN(Off/On), DFRQ_EN(Off/On)
(3PN/3PP/1P FRQ_TarWind(P/S/T)
N/1PP)
Figure 3.16-1 FRQ Function block diagram
- 262 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.16.1 FRQ features and characteristics

(i) UF/OF characteristic
The UF and OF stages check the frequency every 5ms; they determine whether the frequency
is in under-frequency or over-frequency. Figure 3.16-2(a) shows the UF characteristic; Figure
3.16-2(b) shows the OF characteristic; hatched area shows the operation zone of the UF and
the OF stages.
The user can select stage 1 to detect either over-frequency state or under-frequency state
using the scheme switch [FRQ1-Chara]. For example, if UnderFrq is set for the scheme switch
[FRQ1-Chara], the stage 1 determines the under-frequency state when an under frequency is
observed (Figure 3.16-2(a)). The user can set the threshold value in [FRQ1]. Conversely, if
OverFrq is set for the scheme switch, the stage 1 determines the over-frequency state when an
over frequency is observed (Figure 3.16-2(b)).
The UF or OF stages issue a trip command when the under or over-frequency state is
observed for 16 consecutive times. To delay the generation of trip command, the user can use a
delay timer to postpone the trip command using the setting [TFRQ1].
Hz Hz
OF stage 1
operation zone
frequency
Pickup
frequency
Pickup
UF stage 1
operation zone
o o
V V
Pickup voltage (FRQBLK) Pickup voltage (FRQBLK)
a. Under frequency element at Stage 1 b. Over frequency element at Stage 1
Figure 3.16-2 Characteristics of UF and OF elements (e.g. Stage 1 of FRQ)
For the operation of the UF and OF stages, the user should set the voltage level for
frequency protection blocking. When the measured voltage is under the threshold value,
which is set using the setting [FRQBLK], the protection is blocked. The under voltage block is
necessary to prevent unnecessary operation due to VT failure or to allow other feeder
protection relays to clear fault conditions.
(ii) Enabling FRQ function

The user should set On for the scheme switch [FRQ1-EN] to enable the FRQ function and
should set Off to disable the FRQ function.
- 263 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) FRQ trip command

The FRQ can generate six (6) trip commands to the trip circuit (TRC†) function. The user can
assign trip commands for the TRC function by setting On or Off for the scheme switches
[FRQ-TP*].
†Note: TRC function is discussed separately. For more information see Relay application:
(iv) Generating alarm signals

On is set for the scheme switch [FRQ1-ALM], to enable the alarm signal.
(v) UF/OF scheme logic

Figure 3.16-3 shows the scheme logic for the UF and OF stages. Each stage operates
independently. PLC connection point “FRQ1-BLOCK” is provided to block the stage1 when
blocking is required using an external signal. The user can connect the PLC connection point
with an external signal using PLC function. (For more information of PLC function, see
Chapter PLC function)
The under-voltage block (FRQBLK) element is used to block the FRQ operation, as
described earlier (section 3.16.1(i)).
- 264 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8700001C23 To DFRQ
FRQBLK
(UVBLK) 1 NON FRQBLK
8000101BB1
8000101C23 TFRQ1 8000101B60
t 0
OF & & 800010EBB1 FRQ1-OPT
FRQ1 1 & ≥1 8000101B61
0.00 - 300.00s To TRC
On & 8000001B60
FRQ1 -TP1 8100101B62
UF ≥1 FRQ-TRIP1
& FRQ1 -TP2 On &
8200101B63
On 8100001B61
FRQ1 -TP3 &
Primary 8300101B64 FRQ-TRIP2
FRQ-TarWind On ≥1
Secondary FRQ1 -TP4 &
8400101B65
Tertiary On &
FRQ1-TarWind FRQ1 -TP5
8500101B66
OverFrq On
FRQ1 -TP6 &
UnderFrq
FRQ1-Chara
8100201C23 TFRQ2 8100201B60
8B00101B6C
t 0
OF & & On &
FRQ2 & ≥1 FRQ1 -ALM
1
0.00 - 300.00s
8100201BB1
UF 8500001B65
& FRQ-TRIP6
810020EBB1 FRQ2-OPT ≥1
8000201B61
FRQ-TarWind FRQ2 -TP1 On &

8100201B62
OverFrq On
FRQ2 -TP2 &
UnderFrq 8200201B63
FRQ2-Chara
FRQ2 -TP3 On &
8300201B64
FRQ2 -TP4 On &
8400201B65
FRQ2 -TP5 On &
8500201B66
8500601C23 TFRQ6 8500601B60 FRQ2 -TP6 On &
t 0
OF & &
FRQ6 1 & ≥1
0.00 - 300.00s 8B00201B6C
FRQ2 -ALM On &

UF
&
FRQ-TarWind
OverFrq
UnderFrq
FRQ6-Chara
On
FRQ1-EN
On 8500601BB1
FRQ2-EN
850060EBB1 FRQ6-OPT
8000601B61
FRQ6 -TP1 On &

On 8100601B62
FRQ6-EN
FRQ6 -TP2 On &
8200601B63
FRQ6 -TP3 On &
8300601B64
FRQ6-TP4 On &
8400601B65
FRQ6 -TP5 On &
800010EBB0 FRQ1-BLOCK 1
8500601B66
FRQ6 -TP6 On &
8B00001B66
≥1
8B00601B6C FRQ-ALARM
FRQ6 -ALM On &
Figure 3.16-3 Scheme logic for FRQ function
- 265 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.16.2 DFRQ features and characteristics

(i) RISE/DOWN characteristic
The RISE or DOWN characteristics calculate the gradient of frequency-change (Δf/Δt) every
5ms. Figure 3.16-4 shows how to calculate the gradient using Δf and Δt: the change of
frequency (Δf) over a time interval (Δt =5ms). Six stages are provided for the DFRQ function;
each stage can operate independently. The DFRQ function issues a trip command if Δf exceeds
the set value for 50 consecutive times.
The user can set state 1 to detect whether a frequency is rising or descending using the
scheme switch [DFRQ1-Chara]. For example, when Rise is set for the scheme switch
[DFRQ1-Chara], the DFRQ examines the gradient of frequency-change (Δf/Δt) is up.
Conversely, when Down is set for the scheme switch, the DFRQ examines the gradient of
frequency-change (Δf/Δt) is down. Setting [DFRQ1] is used to configure an operation
threshold; the operation threshold is configured with Hertz per second.
The operation of the DFRQ stage is blocked when the FRQBLK operates. That is, if a
measured voltage is below the setting [FRQBLK], any operation of the DFRQ stage is blocked.
The FRQBLK element is discussed in section 3.16.1(i).
Hz
Δf
Δt
sec
Figure 3.16-4 Gradient of frequency rate-of-change
(ii) Enabling DFRQ function

The user should set On for the scheme switch [DFRQ1-EN] to enable the DFRQ function and
should set Off to disable the DFRQ function.
(iii) DFRQ trip command

The DFRQ can generate six (6) trip commands to the trip circuit (TRC†) function. The user
can assign trip commands for the TRC function by setting On or Off for the scheme switches
[DFRQ-TP*].
- 266 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iv) Generating alarm signals

On is set for the scheme switch [DFRQ1-ALM], to enable the alarm signal.
(v) DFRQ scheme logic

Figure 3.16-5 shows the scheme logic for the DFRQ function. Each stage operates
independently. PLC connection point “DFRQ1-BLOCK” is provided to block stage1; when
blocking is required using an external signal. The user can connect the PLC connection point
using an external signal using PLC function. (For more information of PLC function, see
Chapter PLC function)
The signal for the under-voltage block (FRQBLK) element is provided from the FRQ logic.
From FRQ
NON FRQBLK
FRQ-TARWIND
8000111BB1
8000111C23 8000111B60
& ≥1 & &
OF 800011EBB1 DFRQ1-OPT TO TRC
DFRQ1 1 8000111B61
On & 8000001B68
DFRQ1 -TP1
UF
8100111B62
≥1 DFRQ-TRIP1
& DFRQ1 -TP2 On &
OverFrq 8200111B63
8100001B69
UnderFrq DFRQ1 -TP3 On &
DFRQ1-Chara 8300111B64 DFRQ-TRIP2
≥1
FRQ-TARWIND DFRQ1 -TP4 On &
8100211C23 8100211B60 8400111B65
On
& ≥1 & &
DFRQ1 -TP5 &
OF
DFRQ2 1 On
8500111B66
DFRQ1 -TP6 &
UF
& 8B00111B6C
OverFrq On &
DFRQ1 -ALM
UnderFrq
DFRQ2-Chara
8100211BB1
8500001B6D
DFRQ-TRIP6
810021EBB1 DFRQ2-OPT ≥1
8000211B61
DFRQ2 -TP1 On &

8100211B62
DFRQ2 -TP2 On &

8200211B63
DFRQ2 -TP3 On &
8300211B64
DFRQ2 -TP4 On &
8400211B65
FRQ-TARWIND DFRQ2 -TP5 On &
8500211B66
8500611C23 8500611B60 DFRQ2 -TP6 On &
OF & ≥1 & &
DFRQ6 1
8B00211B6C
UF DFRQ2 -ALM On &

&
OverFrq
UnderFrq
DFRQ6-Chara
On
DFRQ1-EN
On
DFRQ2-EN 8500611BB1
850061EBB1 DFRQ6-OPT
8000611B61
On &
On DFRQ6 -TP1 8100611B62
DFRQ6-EN
DFRQ6 -TP2 On &
8200611B63
DFRQ6 -TP3 On &
8300611B64
DFRQ6-TP4 On &
8400611B65
On &
800011EBB0 DFRQ1-BLOCK 1 DFRQ6 -TP5
8500611B66
DFRQ6 -TP6 On &
810021EBB0 DFRQ2-BLOCK 1 8B00001B6E
≥1
8B00611B6C DFRQ-ALARM
DFRQ6 -ALM On &
850061EBB0 DFRQ6-BLOCK 1
Figure 3.16-5 Scheme logic for DFRQ function
- 267 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.16.3 Setting
U
1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
Setting device ni Contents
rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati rati
ts
ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng ng
Co FRQ-Ta
Secondary - winding for FRQ Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
m rWind
/ Tertiary protection
m FRQBL 40.0 - Voltage level of FRQ
on V 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0
K 100.0 protection blocking
FRQ1-E FRQ1 protection
N enable
The selection of FRQ1
FRQ1-C OverFrq / characteristic
- UnderFrq UnderFrq UnderFrq UnderFrq UnderFrq
hara UnderFrq Over-Frequency or
Under-Frequency
-10.00 - H
FRQ1 FRQ1 threshold -1.00 -1.00 -1.00 -1.00 -1.00
10.00 z
0.00 -
TFRQ1 s FRQ1 timer 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
FRQ1 trip command
FRQ1-T
Off / On - output from TP1 B0 On On On On On
P1
contact
F FRQ1 trip command
FRQ1-T
R Off / On - output from TP2 B0 On On On On On
P2
Q contact
1 FRQ1 trip command
FRQ1-T
P3
contact
FRQ1 trip command
FRQ1-T
P4
contact
FRQ1 trip command
FRQ1-T
P5
contact
FRQ1 trip command
FRQ1-T
P6
contact
FRQ1-A
Off / On - FRQ1 alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
LM
N enable
Under-Frequency
-10.00 - H
10.00 z
0.00 -
TFRQ2 s FRQ2 timer 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
FRQ2 trip command
FRQ2-T
F Off / On - output from TP1 B0 On On On On On
P1
R contact
Q FRQ2 trip command
FRQ2-T
2 Off / On - output from TP2 B0 On On On On On
P2
F contact
R FRQ2 trip command
FRQ2-T
Q Off / On - output from TP3 B0 On On On On On
P3
3 contact
FRQ2 trip command
FRQ2-T
P4
contact
FRQ2 trip command
FRQ2-T
P5
contact
FRQ2 trip command
FRQ2-T
P6
contact
FRQ2-A
LM
- 268 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

U
1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
ts
N enable
Under-Frequency
-10.00 - H
10.00 z
0.00 -
TFRQ3 s FRQ3 timer 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ3-T
P1
contact
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ3-T
P2
contact
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ3-T
P3
contact
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ3-T
P4
contact
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ3-T
P5
contact
FRQ3 trip command
FRQ3-T
P6
contact
FRQ3-A
LM
N enable
Under-Frequency
-10.00 - H
10.00 z
0.00 -
TFRQ4 s FRQ4 timer 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
FRQ4 trip command
FRQ4-T
P1
contact
FRQ4 trip command
F FRQ4-T
R P2
contact
Q FRQ4 trip command
4 FRQ4-T
P3
contact
FRQ4 trip command
FRQ4-T
P4
contact
FRQ4 trip command
FRQ4-T
P5
contact
FRQ4 trip command
FRQ4-T
P6
contact
FRQ4-A
LM

N enable
Under-Frequency
- 269 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

U
1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
ts
-10.00 - H
10.00 z
0.00 -
TFRQ5 s FRQ5 timer 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
FRQ5 trip command
FRQ5-T
P1
contact
FRQ5 trip command
F FRQ5-T
R P2
contact
Q FRQ5 trip command
5 FRQ5-T
P3
contact
FRQ5 trip command
FRQ5-T
P4
contact
FRQ5 trip command
FRQ5-T
P5
contact
FRQ5 trip command
FRQ5-T
P6
contact
FRQ5-A
LM

N enable
Under-Frequency
-10.00 - H
10.00 z
0.00 -
TFRQ6 s FRQ6 timer 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
300.00
FRQ6 trip command
FRQ6-T
P1
contact
FRQ6 trip command
F FRQ6-T
R P2
contact
Q
FRQ6 trip command
6 FRQ6-T
P3
contact
FRQ6 trip command
FRQ6-T
P4
contact
FRQ6 trip command
FRQ6-T
P5
contact
FRQ6 trip command
FRQ6-T
P6
contact
FRQ6-A
LM
DFRQ1- DFRQ1 protection

EN enable
The selection of
DFRQ1- Rise /
D - DFRQ1 characteristic Down Down Down Down Down
Chara Down
F Rise or Down
R H
Q DFRQ1 0.1 - 15.0 z/ DFRQ1 threshold 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
1 s
DFRQ1 trip command
DFRQ1-
TP1
contact
- 270 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

U
1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
ts
DFRQ1 trip command
DFRQ1-
TP2
contact
DFRQ1 trip command
DFRQ1-
TP3
contact
DFRQ1 trip command
DFRQ1-
TP4
contact
DFRQ1 trip command
DFRQ1-
TP5
contact
DFRQ1 trip command
DFRQ1-
TP6
contact
DFRQ1-
Off / On - DFRQ1 alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
ALM

EN enable
The selection of
DFRQ2- Rise /
- DFRQ2 characteristic Down Down Down Down Down
Chara Down
Rise or Down
H
DFRQ2 0.1 - 15.0 z/ DFRQ2 threshold 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
s
DFRQ2 trip command
DFRQ2-
TP1
contact
DFRQ2 trip command
DFRQ2-
D Off / On - output from TP2 B0 On On On On On
TP2
F contact
R DFRQ2 trip command
DFRQ2-
TP3
2 contact
DFRQ2 trip command
DFRQ2-
TP4
contact
DFRQ2 trip command
DFRQ2-
TP5
contact
DFRQ2 trip command
DFRQ2-
TP6
contact
DFRQ2-
ALM

EN enable
The selection of
DFRQ3- Rise /
Chara Down
Rise or Down
H
s
D
DFRQ3 trip command
F DFRQ3-
R TP1
contact
Q
DFRQ3 trip command
3 DFRQ3-
TP2
contact
DFRQ3 trip command
DFRQ3-
TP3
contact
DFRQ3 trip command
DFRQ3-
TP4
contact
- 271 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

U
1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
ts
DFRQ3 trip command
DFRQ3-
TP5
contact
DFRQ3 trip command
DFRQ3-
TP6
contact
DFRQ3-
ALM

EN enable
The selection of
DFRQ4- Rise /
Chara Down
Rise or Down
H
s
DFRQ4 trip command
DFRQ4- Off / On
output from TP1 B0 On On On On On
TP1 -
contact
DFRQ4 trip command
DFRQ4-
TP2
F contact
DFRQ4-
TP3
4 contact
DFRQ4 trip command
DFRQ4-
TP4
contact
DFRQ4 trip command
DFRQ4-
TP5
contact
DFRQ4 trip command
DFRQ4-
TP6
contact
DFRQ4-
ALM

EN enable
The selection of
DFRQ5- Rise /
Chara Down
Rise or Down
H
s
DFRQ5 trip command
DFRQ5-
TP1
contact
DFRQ5 trip command
DFRQ5-
TP2
F contact
DFRQ5-
TP3
5 contact
DFRQ5 trip command
DFRQ5-
TP4
contact
DFRQ5 trip command
DFRQ5-
TP5
contact
DFRQ5 trip command
DFRQ5-
TP6
contact
DFRQ5-
ALM
- 272 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

U
1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
ts
EN enable
The selection of
DFRQ6- Rise /
Chara Down
Rise or Down
H
s
DFRQ6 trip command
DFRQ6-
TP1
contact
DFRQ6 trip command
D DFRQ6-
F TP2
contact
R
DFRQ6 trip command
Q DFRQ6-
6 TP3
contact
DFRQ6 trip command
DFRQ6-
TP4
contact
DFRQ6 trip command
DFRQ6-
TP5
contact
DFRQ6 trip command
DFRQ6-
TP6
contact
DFRQ6-
ALM
- 273 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.16.4 Data ID
FRQ(Function ID: 475A01)
8000101C23 FRQ1 FRQ relay element operated(phase-1)
8700001C23 FRQBLK FRQ block element operated
8000111C23 DFRQ1 DFRQ relay element operated(phase-1)
8000101B60 FRQ1-OPT FRQ elements operated(phase-1)
8000111B60 DFRQ1-OPT DFRQ elements operated(phase-1)
8000101B61 FRQ1-TRIP1 FRQ trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-1)
8B00101B6C FRQ1-ALARM FRQ alarm enable(phase-1)
- 274 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8000111B61 DFRQ1-TRIP1 DFRQ trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-1)
- 275 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8B00111B6C DFRQ1-ALARM DFRQ alarm enable(phase-1)
- 276 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8000001B60 FRQ-TRIP1 FRQ trip command output from TP1
8B00001B66 FRQ-ALARM FRQ alarm enable
8000001B68 DFRQ-TRIP1 DFRQ trip command output from TP1
8100001B69 DFRQ-TRIP2 DFRQ trip command output from TP2
8200001B6A DFRQ-TRIP3 DFRQ trip command output from TP3
8300001B6B DFRQ-TRIP4 DFRQ trip command output from TP4
8400001B6C DFRQ-TRIP5 DFRQ trip command output from TP5
8500001B6D DFRQ-TRIP6 DFRQ trip command output from TP6
8B00001B6E DFRQ-ALARM DFRQ alarm enable
8000101BB0 FRQ1_BLOCK FRQ block command(phase-1)
8000111BB0 DFRQ1_BLOCK DFRQ block command(phase-1)
8000101BB1 FRQ1-OPT FRQ elements operated(phase-1)
- 277 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8000111BB1 DFRQ1-OPT DFRQ elements operated(phase-1)

800010EBB0 FRQ1_BLOCK FRQ block command(phase-1)
800011EBB0 DFRQ1_BLOCK DFRQ block command(phase-1)
800010EBB1 FRQ1-OPT FRQ elements operated(phase-1)
800011EBB1 DFRQ1-OPT DFRQ elements operated(phase-1)
- 278 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.17 Over-excitation protection (VPH)

Over-excitation protection function (VPH) is used to detect over-excitation; the VPH protects
the transformer, measuring the ratio of voltage to frequency (V/F ratio).
The VPH function is capable of operating over a wide range of frequency, that is from
0.2×f0 to 1.2×f0 (f0 is rated frequency). The VPH function consists of a single V/F element.
The VPH function comprises of a high setting (H) element, a minimum operating value
(L) element, an inverse time (T) element, and an alarm (A) element.
TP_REPLICA 1W-VY_1 TP_VPH TP_TRC

1W-VΔ_1
VPH VPH logic (TRIP
FEP_ 1W-V1
VPHA, VPH-OPERATION
2W-VY_1
COMMON
VPH
2W-VΔ_1 element
2W-V1
CT polarity 3W-VY_1
compensated 3W-VΔ_1
3W-V1
Type-VT_P，S，T
(3PN/3PP/1PN/ Dir, Type,

TarWind-P/S/T
1PP)
Figure 3.17-1 VPH Function block diagram
3.17.1 Characteristics
As shown in Figure 3.17-2, the user can configure VPH feature using the H element, the L
element, the T element, and the A element.
V/F
HT
VPH-H T
A
LT
VPH-L
VPH-A
VPH-LT
VPH-HT
TVPH-A
TVPH-H
log t
Figure 3.17-2 Characteristic of VPH function configured by H, L, T and A elements
- 279 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
The VPH value expressed in pu is converted by the following Equation (3.17-2):
𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰 𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗 (𝑽𝑽)

|𝑽𝑽⁄𝑭𝑭| = (𝑷𝑷𝑷𝑷)
𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰𝑰 𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇 (𝑯𝑯𝑯𝑯) (3.17-1)
𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹 𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗𝒗 (𝑽𝑽) ×
𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹𝑹 𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇 (𝑯𝑯𝑯𝑯)
Where, Rated voltage is the rated voltage of the transformer winding referred to the
secondary side of the VT.
(i) H element
The characteristic of the H element is represented by equation (3.17-2):
|𝑽𝑽⁄𝑭𝑭| ≥ 𝑯𝑯 (3.17-2)
where,
H: maximum operation value of the H element
The user can set the value of the maximum operation using the setting [VPH-H] in pu.
(ii) L element
The characteristic of the L element is represented by equation (3.17-3):
|𝑽𝑽⁄𝑭𝑭| ≥ 𝑳𝑳 (3.17-3)
where,
L: Minimum operating value in the L element
The user can set the value of the minimum operation using the setting [VPH-L] in pu.
(iii) T element
The characteristic of the T element is represented by equations (3.17-4) and (3.17-5):
�(|𝑽𝑽⁄𝑭𝑭| − 𝒂𝒂) ≥ 𝒃𝒃 (3.17-4)
(𝑳𝑳𝑳𝑳 × 𝑳𝑳) − (𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻 × 𝑯𝑯) 𝑳𝑳𝑳𝑳 × 𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻 × (𝑯𝑯 − 𝑳𝑳)

𝒂𝒂 = 𝒃𝒃 = (3.17-5)
(𝑳𝑳𝑳𝑳 − 𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻) (𝑳𝑳𝑳𝑳 − 𝑻𝑻𝑻𝑻)
where,
TT: A representative time required to determine the minimum operation time in
the T element
LT: Corresponded time to determine the maximum operation time in the T element
The user can set the values of TT and LT using the settings [VPH-HT] and [VPH-LT].
- 280 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iv) A element
The characteristic of the A element is represented by equation (3.17-6):
𝑽𝑽⁄𝑭𝑭 ≥ 𝑨𝑨 (3.17-6)
where,
A: threshold to signal the alarm
The user can set the A element using the setting [VPH-A] in percentage.
3.17.2 Scheme logic

(i) Relay operation switch
Figure 3.17-3 shows the elements and logics in the VPH function; trip commands and an
alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC†) function when the element H or T is operated. On is set
for the scheme switch [VPHT-EN] to enable the VPH trip operation. The VPH element has
timer [TVPHH] for the H element and [TVPHA] for the A element.
8000201B60
8000201C23
VPH-T-OPT
T 8300201B62
& TVPHH
8100201C27 8100201B61 ≥1 VPH-OPT
t 0
VPH-H-OPT
VPH H &
8200101C23 0.00 to 1000.00s
TVPHA 8200101B60
A & VPH-A-OPT
t 0
0.00 to 1000.00s
VPH-Test On
Primary
Secondary
Tertiary
VPH-TarWind
On
VPHT-EN
&
1
810020EBB0 VPHT_BLOCK
On
VPHA-EN
&
820010EBB0 VPHA_BLOCK 1 To TRC
8000001B60
VPH-TP1 On & VPH-TRIP1

8100001B61

8200001B62

8300001B63
VPH-TP4 On VPH-TRIP4
& 8400001B64
8500001B65
VPH-TP6 On VPH-TRIP6
&
VPH-ALM On & 8B00001B6B

≥1 VPH-ALARM
Figure 3.17-3 Scheme logic for VPH function
(ii) Combination of trip commands

As shown in Figure 3.17-3, the VPH function can generate six trip commands to the trip
circuit (TRC†) function; the user can assign trip commands for the TRC function by setting On
or Off for the scheme switches [VPH-TP*].
- 281 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) Generating alarm signals

On is set for the scheme switch [VPHA-EN], to enable the operation of A element. The A
element has a pick-up timer, which is set using the setting [TVPH-A].
(iv) Introduction of blocking VPH operation using PLC signal

When blocking of VPH operation is required, the user can block the VPH operation using the
external signal supplied via PLC connection points “VPHT_BLOCK” and “VPHA_BLOCK”.
The signal connections are made by PLC function, which is discussed separately. (See Chapter
PLC function)
- 282 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.17.3 Settings
Un
Setting device Contents
1A 5A its 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin
g g g g g g g g g g g g
Primary /
Secondar
VPH-T Target transformer winding for V/f
y/ - Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary
Com arWind protection
Tertiary
mon
100.0 -
VPH-V V Rated secondary voltage 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0
120.0
VPHT-
Off / On - VPH protection enable Off Off Off Off Off
EN
1.05 - Low level i.e. pick up level for V/f
VPH-L pu 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05
1.30 protection
1.10 - High level (definite time level) for
VPH-H pu 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40
1.40 V/f protection
VPH-L 1.00 - Operate time at low level of Inverse
s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
T 600.00 time curve for V/f protection
VPH-H 1.00 - Operate time at high level of Inverse
s 600.00 600.00 600.00 600.00 600.00
T 600.00 time curve for V/f protection
VPH-R 60.00 - Reset time after removing
s 250.00 250.00 250.00 250.00 250.00
T 3600.00 overexcitation condition
TVPH 0.00 - Definite time delay at high level
s 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
H 1000.00 setting
VPHT VPH-T VPH trip command output from TP1
P1 B0 contact
VPH-T VPH trip command output from TP2
P2 B0 contact
P3 B0 contact
P4 B0 contact
P5 B0 contact
P6 B0 contact
VPH-A
Off / On - VPH alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
LM
VPHA-
Off / On - VPH alarm enable Off Off Off Off Off
EN
1.03 -
VPHA VPH-A - Alarm level for V/f protection 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03
1.30
0.00 -
TVPHA s Definite time delay for Alarm 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
1000.00
- 283 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.17.4 Data ID
VPH(Function ID: 476A01)
8000201C23 VPH-T VPH-T relay element operated
8100201C27 VPH-H VPH-H relay element operated
8200101C23 VPH-A VPH-A relay element operated
8000201B60 VPH-T-OPT VPH-T instant operation command
8100201B61 VPH-H-OPT VPH-H instant operation command
8200101B60 VPH-A-OPT VPH-A instant operation command
8300201B62 VPH-OPT VPH instant operation command
8000001B60 VPH-TRIP1 VPH trip command output from TP1
8B00001B6B VPH-ALARM VPH alarm enable
8100201BB0 VPHT_BLOCK VPH-T block command
8200101BB0 VPHA_BLOCK VPH-A block command

VPH(Function ID: 476A01)
810020EBB0 VPHT_BLOCK VPHT block command
820010EBB0 VPHA_BLOCK VPHA block command
- 284 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.18 VT failure detection (VTF)

If a failure occurs on the secondary circuit in the voltage transformer (VT), the VTF elements,
which measures voltage, may operate incorrectly. The VT failure detection (VTF) function
enables these elements not to operate during this time. When the VTF detects a VT failure,
the VTF signals an alarm for the protection functions to block their operations1.
Suppose VTF detects the failure of the VT and the failure is removed later, VTF function
sees that the three-phases of the VT secondary circuit are in healthy condition then the VTF
operation resets. Thus, the protection functions that were blocked are allowed to operate
again. This makes the alarm to reset automatically and also reset of the alarm on the IED
screen.
1Note: Several protection functions are blocked by the VTF. To know this blocking, refer
sections of the respective protection functions.
TP_REPLICA TP_VTF TP_OC

TP_EF
FEP_
1W-VY_1,2,3 VTF VTF logic TP_UV
VTF1_P,～ VTF-OPERATION TP_UVS
COMMON
relay sequence
2W-VY_1,2,3 TP_OV
VTF2_T
element TP_OVS
3W-VY_1,2,3 TP_OVG
CT polarity
Type-VT_P,ST TP_OCN
compensated
(3PN)
VTF1_EN(Off/On)
VTF2_EN(Off/On
Figure 3.18-1 VTF Function block diagram
3.18.1 Relay and decision

The VTF has three relay elements, one each for the primary, secondary and tertiary winding.
The VTF has two criterions (VTF1-P_DET_T and VTF2-P_DET_T) to detect the failure of the
VT.
The following description pertains to VTF detection for primary winding of transformer.
The VTF detection for secondary and tertiary winding is similar.
(i) Phase-to-earth under-voltage element (UVVTF)

The under-voltage element (UVVTF-P) provides the under voltage level for the VTF1
detection. The UVVTF-P element is configured using the setting [UVVTF-P].
- 285 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii) Residual phase overcurrent element (EFVTF)

The residual phase overcurrent element (EFVTF) provides the zero-sequence overcurrent
level for the VTF2 detection. The EFVTF element is configured using the setting [EFVTF2-P].
(iii) Residual overvoltage element (OVGVTF)

The residual overvoltage element (OVGVTF) provides the zero-sequence over voltage level for
the VTF2 detection. The OVGVTF element is configured using the setting [OVGVTF2-P].
(iv) Detection criterion 1 (VTF1-P_DET_T)

When the UVVTF1-P operates and the OCD-P* does not operate (i.e. there is no fault
condition and hence no over current), then the criterion (VTF1-P_DET_T) is used for the VTF
detection.
(v) Detection criterion 2 (VTF2-P_DET_T)

When the EFVTF-P and the OCD-P* both does not operate and the OVGVTF-P operates, then
the criterion (VTF2-P_DET_T) is used for the VTF detection.
3.18.2 Logic
Figure 3.18-2 shows the logics of VTF. As described earlier, the failure of the VT is divided
into VTF1-P_DET_T and VTF2-P_DET_T.
Considering VTF1-P_DET_T is one of the detection criterions of the VT failure. Upper

logic of Figure 3.18-2 shows that the VTF1-P_DET_T signal is generated when the UVVTF-P
is active and the OCD1 is not active.
Similarly, considering VTF2-P_DET_T is another detection criterion of the VT failure.

Lower logic of Figure 3.18-2 shows that the VTF2-P_DET_T is generated when the
OVGVTF-P is active but the OCD and EFVTF-P is not active.
1Note: OCD element is common for both VTF1 detection and VTF2 detection. The OCD
output signal is generated based on OCD-AT, OCD-BT, and OCD-CT. For more
information, see Chapter Relay application: Protection common.
It is possible to select the VTF detection criterion using the scheme switch [VTF1-P-EN]
or [VTF2-P-EN].
- 286 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.18.3 Usage
Suppose On is set for both the scheme switches [VTF1-P-EN] and [VTF2-P-EN], if the VTF
detects the failure of the VT, then the VTF1-P_DET_T is not reset even if the blocking element
(OCD) operates subsequent to VTF detection. The VTF2-P_DET_T is also not reset even if the
blocking elements (OCD and EFVTF) operate subsequent to VTF detection. The VTF1-P_DET
_T and VTF2-P_DET_T are reset when the operation of the UVVTF-P and the OVGVTF-P are
reset.
When OPT-On is set for both the scheme switches [VTF1-P_EN] and [VTF2-P_EN], VTF
detection is reset when the blocking element becomes active subsequent to VTF detection.
If the VTF receives PLC signal (VTF-P_BLOCK), the operation of the VTF is blocked.
VTF-P_ALARM, VTF1-P_ALARM and VTF2-P_ALARM signals are issued if

VTF1-P_DET_T and VTF2-P_DET_T lasts for 10s.
- 287 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000101C20
A 8100101B61
8100101C21 ≥1
UVVTF-P B &
≥1 VTF1-P_DET
8200101C22
C 1 1 KC_VTTP_P1
t 0 S
OCD-P-A S VTF1-P_DET_T
& 0.015s
OCD-P-B ≥1 t 0 R
≥1 1 ≥1
OCD-P-C R
0.1s
VTF1-P_DET_T & 1
t 0
1 &
10s
On
VTF1-P-EN
≥1
OPT-On
8800101C27 8200101B62
OVGVTF-P &
≥1 VTF2-P_DET
1
8400101C23 1 KC_VTTP_P2
EFVTF-P
t 0 S
S ≥1 VTF2-P_DET_T
≥1 & 0.015s
t 0 R
1 ≥1
R
0.1s
VTF2-P_DET_T & 1
&
On
VTF2-P-EN
≥1
OPT-On
CB-P_CLOSE 1 1
0.2s
1
800010EBB0 VTF-P_BLOCK ≥1
AMF-OFF 8000101B63
≥1 VTF-P_ALARM
8100101B64
t 0
VTF1-P_DET_T VTF1-P_ALARM
10s
8200101B65
VTF2-P_DET_T t 0 VTF2-P_ALARM
10s 8000101B66
≥1 VTF-P_DETECT
EXTERNAL-P_VTF
Figure 3.18-2 Scheme logic for VTF function
- 288 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.18.4 Setting
Setting device 5A ni Contents 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A
5A
1A rating ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin ratin
rating ts g g g g g g g g g
rating
VTF VTF1- Off / On / Primary winding VTF1

- (Off) (Off) Off (Off) Off
1-P P-EN OPT-On enable
UVVT Under voltage level for
1.0 - 220.0 V (20.0) (20.0) 20.0 (20.0) 20.0
F1-P primary winding VTF1
VTF VTF2- Off / On / Primary winding VTF2

2-P P-EN OPT-On enable
Zero sequence over voltage
OVGV
1.0 - 220.0 V level for Primary winding (20.0) (20.0) 20.0 (20.0) 20.0
TF2-P
VTF2
0.5
Zero sequence over current
EFVT 0.10 - 0- (0. (1. (0. (1. 0.2 1.0 (0. (1. 0.2
A level for Primary winding 1.00
F2-P 50.00 250 20) 00) 20) 00) 0 0 20) 00) 0
VTF2 blocking
.00
VTF VTF1- Off / On / Secondary winding VTF1

1-S S-EN OPT-On enable
1.0 - 220.0 V (20.0) (20.0) 20.0 (20.0) 20.0
F1-S secondary winding VTF1
VTF VTF2- Off / On / Secondary winding VTF2

2-S S-EN OPT-On enable
OVGV
1.0 - 220.0 V level for secondary (20.0) (20.0) 20.0 (20.0) 20.0
TF2-S
winding VTF2
0.5
EFVT 0.10 - 0- (0. (1. (0. (1. 0.2 1.0 (0. (1. 0.2
A level for secondary 1.00
F2-S 50.00 250 20) 00) 20) 00) 0 0 20) 00) 0
winding VTF2 blocking
.00
VTF VTF1- Off / On / Tertiary winding VTF1

1-T T-EN OPT-On enable
1.0 - 220.0 V (20.0) (20.0) 20.0 (20.0) 20.0
F1-T tertiary winding VTF1
VTF VTF2- Off / On / Tertiary winding VTF2

2-T T-EN OPT-On enable
OVGV
1.0 - 220.0 V level for tertiary winding (20.0) (20.0) 20.0 (20.0) 20.0
TF2-T
VTF2
0.5
EFVT 0.10 - 0- (0. (1. (0. (1. 0.2 1.0 (0. (1. 0.2
A level for tertiary winding 1.00
F2-T 50.00 250 20) 00) 20) 00) 0 0 20) 00) 0
VTF2 blocking
.00
- 289 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.18.5 Data ID
VTF(Function ID: 492001)
8000101C20 UVVTF-P-A UVVTF-P relay element operated(Phase-A)
8100101C21 UVVTF-P-B UVVTF-P relay element operated(Phase-B)
8200101C22 UVVTF-P-C UVVTF-P relay element operated(Phase-C)
8400101C23 EFVTF-P EFVTF-P relay element operated
8800101C27 OVGVTF-P OVGVTF-P relay element operated
8000201C20 UVVTF-S-A UVVTF-S relay element operated(Phase-A)
8100201C21 UVVTF-S-B UVVTF-S relay element operated(Phase-B)
8200201C22 UVVTF-S-C UVVTF-S relay element operated(Phase-C)
8400201C23 EFVTF-S EFVTF-S relay element operated
8800201C27 OVGVTF-S OVGVTF-S relay element operated
8000301C20 UVVTF-T-A UVVTF-T relay element operated(Phase-A)
8100301C21 UVVTF-T-B UVVTF-T relay element operated(Phase-B)
8200301C22 UVVTF-T-C UVVTF-T relay element operated(Phase-C)
8400301C23 EFVTF-T EFVTF-T relay element operated
8800301C27 OVGVTF-T OVGVTF-T relay element operated
8100001B60 CB_ALLPH_OPEN CB all phase open
8100101B60 UVVTF-P-OR UVVTF-P relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8500201B60 UVVTF-S-OR UVVTF-S relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8900301B60 UVVTF-T-OR UVVTF-T relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8100101B61 VTF1-P_DET VTF1-P detected
8200101B62 VTF2-P_DET VTF2-P detected
8500201B61 VTF1-S_DET VTF1-S detected
8600201B62 VTF2-S_DET VTF2-S detected
8900301B61 VTF1-T_DET VTF1-T detected
8A00301B62 VTF2-T_DET VTF2-T detected
8000101B63 VTF-P_ALARM VTF-P alarm (VTF1-P ALARM/VTF2-P ALARM OR)
8100101B64 VTF1-P_ALARM VTF1-P alarm (10s timer)
8200101B65 VTF2-P_ALARM VTF2-P alarm (10s timer)
8400201B63 VTF-S_ALARM VTF-S alarm (VTF1-S ALARM/VTF2-S ALARM OR)
8500201B64 VTF1-S_ALARM VTF1-S alarm (10s timer)
8600201B65 VTF2-S_ALARM VTF2-S alarm (10s timer)
8800301B63 VTF-T_ALARM VTF-T alarm (VTF1-T ALARM/VTF2-T ALARM OR)
8900301B64 VTF1-T_ALARM VTF1-T alarm (10s timer)
8A00301B65 VTF2-T_ALARM VTF2-T alarm (10s timer)
8000101B66 VTF-P_DETECT VTF-P detected (VTF1-P DET/VTF2-P DET OR)
8100201B66 VTF-S_DETECT VTF-S detected (VTF1-S DET/VTF2-S DET OR)
8200301B66 VTF-T_DETECT VTF-T detected (VTF1-T DET/VTF2-T DET OR)
8000101BB0 VTF-P_BLOCK VTF-P block signal
8100201BB0 VTF-S_BLOCK VTF-S block signal
8200301BB0 VTF-T_BLOCK VTF-T block signal
8000101BB1 EXTERNAL-P_VTF External VTF-P receive
8100201BB1 EXTERNAL-S_VTF External VTF-S receive
8200301BB1 EXTERNAL-T_VTF External VTF-T receive
- 290 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

VTF(Function ID: 492001)
800010EBB0 VTF-P_BLOCK VTF-P block signal
810020EBB0 VTF-S_BLOCK VTF-S block signal
820030EBB0 VTF-T_BLOCK VTF-T block signal
800010EBB1 EXTERNAL-P_VTF External VTF-P receive
810020EBB1 EXTERNAL-S_VTF External VTF-S receive
820030EBB1 EXTERNAL-T_VTF External VTF-T receive
- 291 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.19 Trip circuit (TRC)

Trip circuit function (TRC) generates the trip output signal to the circuit breaker (CB) based
on trip commands received from each protection function. As shown in Figure 3.19-1, the TRC
has three parts: (1) Trip command collection, (2) Trip signal production, and (3) CB trip signal
production. The trip signal production generates an output signal for the CB.
DIF
Operating phases
REF
OC TRC
OV General alarm
FB
EF
OVS
EFIn
CB trip signal
OVG production
OCN Command
UV
collection Output signal for Binary output circuit
BCD
UVS CB1
THM
FRQ Fault recording function
Trip signal Output signal for
CBF
DFRQ production CB2
VPH
MECH
Output signal for
CB6
PLC signals
General trip
Figure 3.19-1 TRC outline
3.19.1 Scheme switch

There is only one setting for TRC function, which is set using the scheme switch [Lockout].
The scheme switch can be set to either Off or On, the default is Off. When the scheme switch
is set to On, the trip command remains latched. The trip command can be reset by the
LOCKOUT_RESET signal from PLC.
3.19.2 Trip command scheme logic

(i) Command collection part
The operation commands provided by each protection function are gathered and converted
into trip operation commands “FC_TRIP1, FC_TRIP2, FC_TRIP3, FC_TRIP4, FC_TRIP5, and
FC_TRIP6”, as shown in Figure 3.19-2 to Figure 3.19-7.
- 292 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
FunctionFC01 trip command, TRIP1 8000001B60

FC-TRIP1
FunctionFC02 trip command, TRIP1
. ≥1
800000EBB0 TRIP1_ADD
Figure 3.19-2 Trip1 commands generated by protection functions

FC-TRIP2
.
≥1
.


FC-TRIP3
.
≥1
.

- 293 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

FC-TRIP4
.
≥1
.


FC-TRIP5
.
≥1
.


FC-TRIP6
.
≥1
.

(ii) Trip signal production block

Figure 3.19-8 shows the scheme logic for Trip signal production.
- 294 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8000001B67
FC-TRIP1
I=0
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND1
& S
R1
8100001B68
FC-TRIP2
I=0
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND2
& S
R1
8200001B69
FC-TRIP3
I=0
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND3
& S
R1
8300001B6A
FC-TRIP4
I=0 ≥1 TRIP-COMMAND4
& S
R1
8400001B6B
FC-TRIP5
I=0
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND5
& S
R1
8500001B6C
FC-TRIP6
I=0
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND6
& S
R1
On
Lockout Off 8000001B6D
800000EBBB LOCKOUT_RESET
≥1 ≥1 GEN.TRIP
Figure 3.19-8 Scheme logic for Trip signal production
3.19.3 General alarm scheme logic

Figure 3.19-9 shows the scheme logic for General alarm.
- 295 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
FC01_ALARM
FC02_ALARM
FC03_ALARM
FC04_ALARM 8B00001B66
≥1
FC05_ALARM
GEN.ALARM
FC06_ALARM ≥1
FC07_ALARM
FC08_ALARM
FC09_ALARM
FC10_ALARM
FC11_ALARM
FC12_ALARM
≥1
FC13_ALARM
FC14_ALARM
FC15_ALARM
FC16_ALARM
FC17_ALARM
FC18_ALARM
FC19_ALARM
FC20_ALARM
≥1
FC21_ALARM
FC22_ALARM
FC23_ALARM
FC24_ALARM
FC25_ALARM
FC26_ALARM
FC27_ALARM
FC28_ALARM
≥1
FC29_ALARM
FC30_ALARM
FC31_ALARM
FC32 ALARM
8B0000EBB6 ALARM_ADD
Figure 3.19-9 Scheme logic for General alarm
3.19.4 Operated phase scheme logic

(i) Command collection
Figure 3.19-10 shows the scheme logic for command collection of the operated phase (phase-A).
The scheme logics for phase-B and phase-C are similar to that of phase-A.
- 296 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
FC01_OPT-AR
FC02_ OPT-AR
FC03_ OPT-AR
FC04_ OPT-AR
≥1
FC05_ OPT-AR
OPT-AR
FC06_ OPT-AR ≥1
FC07_ OPT-AR
FC08_ OPT-AR
FC09_ OPT-AR
FC10_ OPT-AR
FC11_ OPT-AR
FC12_ OPT-AR
≥1
FC13_ OPT-AR
FC14_ OPT-AR
FC15_ OPT-AR
FC16_ OPT-AR
FC17_ OPT-AR
FC18_ OPT-AR
FC19_ OPT-AR
FC20_ OPT-AR
≥1
FC21_ OPT-AR
FC22_ OPT-AR
FC23_ OPT-AR
FC24_ OPT-AR
FC25_ OPT-AR
FC26_ OPT-AR
FC27_ OPT-AR
FC28_ OPT-AR
≥1
FC29_ OPT-AR
FC30_ OPT-AR
FC31_ OPT-AR
FC32 OPT-AR
8C0000EBB7 OPT.P-A_ADD
Figure 3.19-10 Scheme logic for command collection (phase-A)
(ii) Operated phase

Figure 3.19-11 shows the scheme logic for operated phases.
3100001B81
OPT.PHASE
8000001B71
OPT-AR OPT.PHASE-A
8100001B72
OPT-BR OPT.PHASE-B
8200001B73
OPT-CR OPT.PHASE-C
800000EBBA OPT-NR
8300001B74
8000001B70 & OPT.PHASE-N
≥1
OPT-ABCR
Figure 3.19-11 Scheme logic for operated phases
- 297 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
By default, signal is not assigned for OPT-NR in the PLC setting hence; phase-N is not
displayed. In order to display the fault phase-N, REF or EF activation signal should be
assigned based on the user configuration.
- 298 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.19.5 Setting
Setting device Units Contents
1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A 5A
Trip signal
TRC Lockout Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
lockout enable
3.19.6 Data ID
TRC (Function ID : 4A3001)
8000001B60 FC-TRIP1 FC trip command output (phase-1)
8B00001B66 GEN.ALARM GEN alarm command output
8000001B67 TRIP-COMMAND1 trip command output (phase-1)
8300001B6A TRIP-COMMAND4 trip command output (phase-4)
8400001B6B TRIP-COMMAND5 trip command output (phase-5)
8500001B6C TRIP-COMMAND6 trip command output (phase-6)
8000001B6D GEN.TRIP GEN trip command output
8000001B70 OPT-ABCR operated 3phase-OR
8000001B71 OPT.PHASE-A operated phase-A
8100001B72 OPT.PHASE-B operated phase-B
8200001B73 OPT.PHASE-C operated phase-C
8300001B74 OPT.PHASE-N operated phase-N
8000001BB0 TRIP1_ADD add trip (phase-1)
8B00001BB6 ALARM_ADD add alarm
8C00001BB7 OPT.P-A_ADD add operated phase-A
8D00001BB8 OPT.P-B_ADD add operated phase-B
8E00001BB9 OPT.P-C_ADD add operated phase-C
8000001BBA OPT_NR NR operated
8000001BBB LOCKOUT_RESET lockout reset

TRC (Function ID: 4A3001)
800000EBB0 TRIP1_ADD add TRIP (phase-1)
- 299 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

TRC (Function ID: 4A3001)
8B0000EBB6 ALARM_ADD add alarm
8C0000EBB7 OPT.P-A_ADD add operated phase-A
8D0000EBB8 OPT.P-B_ADD add operated phase-B
8E0000EBB9 OPT.P-C_ADD add operated phase-C
800000EBBA OPT_NR NR operated
800000EBBB LOCKOUT_RESET lockout reset
- 300 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.20 Mechanical trip protection (MECH)

Mechanical trip function provides an interface with the protection devices mounted on the
transformer. GRT200 provides sixteen (16) interface points as shown in the table below.
Table 3.20-1 Interface points
Main transformer Tap changer Auxiliary/earthing transformer
Buchholz Buchholz Buchholz
Oil temperature Oil temperature Oil temperature
Winding 1 temperature Oil flow Winding temperature
Winding 2 temperature Pressure relief Pressure relief
Winding 3 temperature Sudden pressure increase
Pressure relief
Sudden pressure increase
3.20.1 Scheme switch

The mechanical trip function can be enabled using the scheme switch [MECH*-EN], where * is
1 to 16. The scheme switch can be set to either On or Off, the default setting is Off. The
mechanical trip can be blocked by a PLC signal [MECH*_BLOCK].
3.20.2 Mechanical trip timer

A mechanical trip timer is provided for each trip input. The timer can be bypassed by an
instantaneous override from PLC signal [MECH*_INST_OP].
3.20.3 Mechanical trip command output

The mechanical trip command output can be assigned to TP1 BO to TP6 BO contacts by
setting the scheme switches [MECH*-TP1] to [MECH*-TP6] to On, the default setting is On.
Mechanical trip alarm can be enabled by setting the scheme switch [MECH*-ALM] to On, the
default setting is Off.
3.20.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.9-3shows the scheme logic for Mechanical trip1. Scheme logics for Mechanical trip2
to Mechanical trip 16 are similar to Mechanical trip 1.
- 301 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
TMECH1 8000101B60
MECH1_TP & & t 0 MECH1-OPT
≥
0 – 300s
MECH1_EN &
On
800010EBB1 MECH1-BLOCK 1
800010EBB2 MECH1-INST-OP
8000101B61
MECH1-OPT
& MECH1-TRIP1
MECH1-TP1
On 8100101B62
& MECH1-TRIP2
MECH1-TP2 8200101B63
On
& MECH1-TRIP3
MECH1-TP3 8300101B64
On
& MECH1-TRIP4
MECH1-TP4 8400101B65
On
& MECH1-TRIP5
MECH1-TP5 8500101B66
On
& MECH1-TRIP6
MECH1-TP6
On
8B00101B6C
& MECH1-ALARM
MECH1-ALM
On
Figure 3.20-1 Scheme logic for Mechanical trip1
(i) Collection of Mechanical trip signals

Figure 3.19-9 to Figure 3.20-4 show the scheme logics for collection of Mechanical trip signals.
- 302 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
MECH1-TRIP1
MECH2-TRIP1
MECH3-TRIP1
MECH4-TRIP1
MECH5-TRIP1
MECH6-TRIP1 8000001B61
MECH7-TRIP1
MECH8-TRIP1 ≥1 MECH-TRIP1
MECH9-TRIP1
MECH10-TRIP1
MECH11-TRIP1
MECH12-TRIP1
MECH13-TRIP1
MECH14-TRIP1
MECH15-TRIP1
MECH16-TRIP1
MECH1-TRIP2
MECH2-TRIP2
MECH3-TRIP2
MECH4-TRIP2
MECH5-TRIP2
MECH6-TRIP2
8100001B62
MECH7-TRIP2
MECH9-TRIP2
MECH10-TRIP2
MECH11-TRIP2
MECH12-TRIP2
MECH13-TRIP2
MECH14-TRIP2
MECH15-TRIP2
MECH16-TRIP2
Figure 3.20-2 Scheme logic for signal collection (1)
- 303 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
MECH1-TRIP3
MECH2-TRIP3
MECH3-TRIP3
MECH4-TRIP3
MECH5-TRIP3
MECH7-TRIP3
MECH9-TRIP3
MECH10-TRIP3
MECH11-TRIP3
MECH12-TRIP3
MECH13-TRIP3
MECH14-TRIP3
MECH15-TRIP3
MECH16-TRIP3
MECH1-TRIP4
MECH2-TRIP4
MECH3-TRIP4
MECH4-TRIP4
MECH5-TRIP4
MECH6-TRIP4
8300001B64
MECH7-TRIP4
MECH9-TRIP4
MECH10-TRIP4
MECH11-TRIP4
MECH12-TRIP4
MECH13-TRIP4
MECH14-TRIP4
MECH15-TRIP4
MECH16-TRIP4
- 304 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
MECH1-TRIP5
MECH2-TRIP5
MECH3-TRIP5
MECH4-TRIP5
MECH5-TRIP5
MECH7-TRIP5
MECH9-TRIP5
MECH10-TRIP5
MECH11-TRIP5
MECH12-TRIP5
MECH13-TRIP5
MECH14-TRIP5
MECH15-TRIP5
MECH16-TRIP5
MECH1-TRIP6
MECH2-TRIP6
MECH3-TRIP6
MECH4-TRIP6
MECH5-TRIP6
MECH6-TRIP6
8500001B66
MECH7-TRIP6
MECH9-TRIP6
MECH10-TRIP6
MECH11-TRIP6
MECH12-TRIP6
MECH13-TRIP6
MECH14-TRIP6
MECH15-TRIP6
MECH16-TRIP6
(ii) Collection of Mechanical alarm signals

Figure 3.19-11 shows the scheme logic for collection of Mechanical alarm signals and
generation of MECH-ALARM output.
- 305 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
MECH1-ALARM
MECH2- ALARM
MECH3- ALARM
MECH4- ALARM
MECH5- ALARM
MECH6- ALARM 8B00001B6C
MECH7- ALARM
MECH8- ALARM ≥1 MECH-ALARM
MECH9- ALARM
MECH10- ALARM
MECH11- ALARM
MECH12- ALARM
MECH13- ALARM
MECH14- ALARM
MECH15- ALARM
MECH16- ALARM
Figure 3.20-5 Scheme logic for alarm signals
- 306 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.20.5 Setting
Range Unit Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5
s
MEC
Mechanical trip1
H1-E Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
enable
N
TME Mechanical trip1
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH1 timer
MEC Mechanical trip1
H1-T Off / On - command output On On On On On
MECH H1-T Off / On - command output On On On On On
1 P3 from TP3 B0 contact
MEC
Mechanical trip1
H1-A Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
alarm enable
LM
MEC
Mechanical trip2
enable
N
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH2 timer
MEC
Mechanical trip2
alarm enable
LM
MEC
Mechanical trip3
enable
N
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH3 timer
MECH
3
- 307 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

s
MEC
Mechanical trip3
alarm enable
LM
MEC
Mechanical trip4
enable
N
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH4 timer
MEC
Mechanical trip4
alarm enable
LM
MEC
Mechanical trip5
enable
N
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH5 timer
MEC
Mechanical trip5
alarm enable
LM
MEC
Mechanical trip6
enable
N
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH6 timer
MECH P2 from TP2 B0 contact
6
MEC Off / On - Mechanical trip6 On On On On On
- 308 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

s
H6-T command output
MEC
Mechanical trip6
alarm enable
LM
MEC
Mechanical trip7
enable
N
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH7 timer
MEC
Mechanical trip7
alarm enable
LM
MEC
Mechanical trip8
enable
N
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH8 timer
MEC
Mechanical trip8
alarm enable
LM
MEC
Mechanical trip9
enable
N
0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
CH9 timer
MECH MEC Mechanical trip9
9 H9-T Off / On - command output On On On On On
MEC Off / On - Mechanical trip9 On On On On On
- 309 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

s
H9-T command output
MEC
Mechanical trip9
alarm enable
LM
MEC
Mechanical trip10
H10- Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
enable
EN
TME
Mechanical trip10
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
timer
0
H10- Off / On - command output On On On On On
MECH
10
MEC
Mechanical trip10
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip11
enable
EN
TME
Mechanical trip11
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
timer
1
MECH
11
MEC
Mechanical trip11
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip12
enable
EN
TME
Mechanical trip12
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
timer
2
MECH MEC Mechanical trip12
12 H12- Off / On - command output On On On On On
H12- command output
- 310 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

s
MEC
Mechanical trip12
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip13
enable
EN
TME
Mechanical trip13
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
timer
3
MECH
13
MEC
Mechanical trip13
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip14
enable
EN
TME
Mechanical trip14
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
timer
4
MECH
14
MEC
Mechanical trip14
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip15
enable
EN
TME
MECH Mechanical trip15
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
15 timer
5
- 311 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

s
MEC
Mechanical trip15
alarm enable
ALM
MEC
Mechanical trip16
enable
EN
TME
Mechanical trip16
CH1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
timer
6
MECH
16
MEC
Mechanical trip16
alarm enable
ALM
- 312 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.20.6 Data ID
MECH (Function ID : 487001)
8000101B60 MECH1-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8900A01B60 MECH10-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8A00B01B60 MECH11-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8B00C01B60 MECH12-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8C00D01B60 MECH13-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8D00E01B60 MECH14-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8E00F01B60 MECH15-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8F01001B60 MECH16-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8000101B61 MECH1-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-1)
8B00101B6C MECH1-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-1)
- 313 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

- 314 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8000A01B61 MECH10-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-10)
8B00A01B6C MECH10-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-10)
8000B01B61 MECH11-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-11)
8B00B01B6C MECH11-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-11)
8000C01B61 MECH12-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-12)
8B00C01B6C MECH12-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-12)
8000D01B61 MECH13-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-13)
- 315 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8B00D01B6C MECH13-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-13)
8000E01B61 MECH14-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-14)
8B00E01B6C MECH14-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-14)
8000F01B61 MECH15-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-15)
8B00F01B6C MECH15-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-15)
8000001B61 MECH-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1
8B00001B6C MECH-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable
8000101BB0 MECH1_TP Mechanical trip1 command
- 316 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8900A01BB0 MECH10_TP Mechanical trip10 command
8A00B01BB0 MECH11_TP Mechanical trip11 command
8B00C01BB0 MECH12_TP Mechanical trip12 command
8C00D01BB0 MECH13_TP Mechanical trip13 command
8D00E01BB0 MECH14_TP Mechanical trip14 command
8E00F01BB0 MECH15_TP Mechanical trip15 command
8F01001BB0 MECH16_TP Mechanical trip16 command
8000101BB1 MECH1_BLOCK Mechanical trip1 block command
8900A01BB1 MECH10_BLOCK Mechanical trip10 block command
8A00B01BB1 MECH11_BLOCK Mechanical trip11 block command
8B00C01BB1 MECH12_BLOCK Mechanical trip12 block command
8C00D01BB1 MECH13_BLOCK Mechanical trip13 block command
8D00E01BB1 MECH14_BLOCK Mechanical trip14 block command
8E00F01BB1 MECH15_BLOCK Mechanical trip15 block command
8F01001BB1 MECH16_BLOCK Mechanical trip16 block command
8000101BB2 MECH1_INST_OP Mechanical trip1 instant operation command
- 317 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

8900A01BB2 MECH10_INST_OP Mechanical trip10 instant operation command
8A00B01BB2 MECH11_INST_OP Mechanical trip11 instant operation command
8B00C01BB2 MECH12_INST_OP Mechanical trip12 instant operation command
8C00D01BB2 MECH13_INST_OP Mechanical trip13 instant operation command
8D00E01BB2 MECH14_INST_OP Mechanical trip14 instant operation command
8E00F01BB2 MECH15_INST_OP Mechanical trip15 instant operation command
8F01001BB2 MECH16_INST_OP Mechanical trip16 instant operation command

MECH (Function ID: 487001)
800010EBB0 MECH1_TP Mechanical trip1 command
8900A0EBB0 MECH10_TP Mechanical trip10 command
8A00B0EBB0 MECH11_TP Mechanical trip11 command
8B00C0EBB0 MECH12_TP Mechanical trip12 command
8C00D0EBB0 MECH13_TP Mechanical trip13 command
8D00E0EBB0 MECH14_TP Mechanical trip14 command
8E00F0EBB0 MECH15_TP Mechanical trip15 command
8F0100EBB0 MECH16_TP Mechanical trip16 command
800010EBB1 MECH1_BLOCK Mechanical trip1 block command
- 318 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

MECH (Function ID: 487001)
8900A0EBB1 MECH10_BLOCK Mechanical trip10 block command
8A00B0EBB1 MECH11_BLOCK Mechanical trip11 block command
8B00C0EBB1 MECH12_BLOCK Mechanical trip12 block command
8C00D0EBB1 MECH13_BLOCK Mechanical trip13 block command
8D00E0EBB1 MECH14_BLOCK Mechanical trip14 block command
8E00F0EBB1 MECH15_BLOCK Mechanical trip15 block command
8F0100EBB1 MECH16_BLOCK Mechanical trip16 block command
800010EBB2 MECH1_INST_OP Mechanical trip1 instant operation command
8900A0EBB2 MECH10_INST_OP Mechanical trip10 instant operation command
8A00B0EBB2 MECH11_INST_OP Mechanical trip11 instant operation command
8B00C0EBB2 MECH12_INST_OP Mechanical trip12 instant operation command
8C00D0EBB2 MECH13_INST_OP Mechanical trip13 instant operation command
8D00E0EBB2 MECH14_INST_OP Mechanical trip14 instant operation command
8E00F0EBB2 MECH15_INST_OP Mechanical trip15 instant operation command
8F0100EBB2 MECH16_INST_OP Mechanical trip16 instant operation command
- 319 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.21 Protection common (PROTCOM)

The decision of Protection common function (PROTCOM) is used in a number of other
protection functions. This function decides the following:
• Circuit breaker (CB) status (open/close)
• Disconnect switch (DS) status (open/close)
• CB supervision (CB fail)
• DS supervision (DS fail)
• Detection of current change (OCD)
3.21.1 Decision of CB open/close status

CB auxiliary-contact consists of a normal-open contact (N/O) and a normal-close contact (N/C).
For example, the signals of N/O and N/C of CB#1 are represented as “CB1_NO_CONT” and
“CB1_NC_CONT” respectively in the PROTCOM logic. When these signals appear in the logic,
the CB state can be decided whether it is open or close.
(i) Signal selection

CB state is determined using N/O and N/C signals. The PROTCOM allows the user to select
whether the CB state is decided by N/O or N/C. For example, if the PROTCOM should decide
the CB state with N/O only, NO is set for the scheme switch [CB*-Contact]. Conversely, if the
PROTCOM should decide the CB state with N/C only, NC is set for this scheme switch.
When both N/O and the N/C are required to decide the CB state, Both is set for the
scheme switch [CB*-Contact].
(ii) CB contact supervision

Table 3.21-1 shows the relationship between the main contact and the auxiliary contact in the
CB. For example, when the main contact is open, N/O and N/C are represented as open and
close respectively. However, if both N/O and N/C are represented as open when the main
contact is open, the status information from the CB is incorrect. This function checks the
contact state as per Table 3.21-1.
Table 3.21-1 Main and Auxiliary contacts in CB and its state

Main contact
OPEN CLOSE
N/O OPEN CLOSE
Auxiliary contacts
N/C CLOSE OPEN
Set On for the scheme switch [CB-SV] when contact supervision is required. The time
delay for generating CB fail signal is set using the setting [TCBSV]. The supervision period
- 320 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
has to be set between 0 to 100 seconds.
Note: CB contact monitoring is possible only when Both is set for the scheme switch
[CB*-Contact].
(iii) Logic
Figure 3.21-1 shows the decision logic to decide the status of CB: CB-P_CLOSE, CB-S_CLOSE
and CB-T_CLOSE. Figure 3.21-2 shows the logic for contact supervision of CB.
CONN-1CT-P 8000101B70
& CB1-P_CLOSE
CONN-1CT-S 8100101B71
& CB1-S_CLOSE
CONN-1CT-T 8200101B72
& CB1-T_CLOSE
CB1_NO-CONT 8000101B60
&
≥1
CB1_NC-CONT 8000101B65
1 & 1 CB1-OPEN
NO
≥1
NC
≥1
CB1-Contact
Both
CB1-CONTACT=BOTH
CONN-5CT-P 8000101B7C
& CB5-P_CLOSE
CONN-5CT-S 8100101B7D
& CB5-S_CLOSE
CONN-5CT-T 8200101B7E
& CB5-T_CLOSE
CB5_NO-CONT 8400101B64
&
≥1
CB5_NC-CONT 8400101B69
1 & 1 CB5-OPEN
NO
≥1
NC
≥1
CB5-Contact
Both
CB5-CONTACT=BOTH
3100001B70
CB1-P_CLOSE
CB2-P_CLOSE CB-DS_CONDITION
≥1 8000001B60
CB3-P_CLOSE CB-P_CLOSE
CB4-P_CLOSE
CB5-P_CLOSE
CB1-S_CLOSE
CB2-S_CLOSE
≥1 8100001B61
CB3-S_CLOSE CB-S_CLOSE
CB4-S_CLOSE
CB5-S_CLOSE
CB1-T_CLOSE
CB2-T_CLOSE
≥1 8200001B62
CB2-T_CLOSE CB-T_CLOSE
CB2-T_CLOSE
CB2-T_CLOSE
Figure 3.21-1 Decision logic to decide CB status
- 321 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
CB1_NO_CONT TCBSV
=1 1 8000101B6A
t 0
& CB1-FAIL
CB1_NC_CONT
0.0s
CB1-CONTACT=BOTH
CB5_NO_CONT
=1 1 8400501B6A
& t 0 CB5-FAIL
CB5_NC_CONT
0.0-100.0s
CB5-CONTACT=BOTH
CB-SV On
AMF-ON
Figure 3.21-2 Contact supervision logic for CB
3.21.2 Decision of DS open/close status

PROTCOM can examine the state of DS. Signal configuration and settings of the DS are
similar to that of CB.
(i) Signal selection

Set either NO, NC, or Both for the scheme switch [DS-Contact].
(ii) Contact supervision

When Both is set for the scheme switch [DS-Contact], the contact state of the DS is
supervised. Set On for the scheme switch [DS-SV] when contact supervision is required. The
time delay for generating CB fail signal is set using the setting [TDSSV].
(iii) Logic
Figure 3.21-3 shows the decision logic to decide DS status: DS-P_CLOSE, DS-S_CLOSE and
DS-T_CLOSE. Figure 3.21-4 shows the logic for contact supervision of DS.
- 322 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
CONN-1CT-P 8000201B70
& DS1-P_CLOSE
CONN-1CT-S 8100201B71
& DS1-S_CLOSE
CONN-1CT-T 8200201B72
& DS1-T_CLOSE
DS1_NO-CONT 8000201B60
&
≥1
DS1_NC-CONT 8000201B65
1 & DS1-OPEN
1
NO
≥1
NC
≥1
DS1-Contact
Both
DS1-CONTACT=BOTH
CONN-5CT-P 8000201B7C
& DS5-P_CLOSE
CONN-5CT-S 8100201B7D
& DS5-S_CLOSE
CONN-5CT-T 8200201B7E
& DS5-T_CLOSE
DS5_NO-CONT 8400201B64
&
≥1
DS5_NC-CONT 8400201B69
1 & 1 DS5-OPEN
NO
≥1
NC
≥1
DS5-Contact
Both
DS5-CONTACT=BOTH
DS1-P_CLOSE
DS2-P_CLOSE
≥1 8D00001B63
DS3-P_CLOSE DS-P_CLOSE
DS4-P_CLOSE
DS5-P_CLOSE
DS1-S_CLOSE
DS2-S_CLOSE
≥1 8E00001B64
DS3-S_CLOSE DS-S_CLOSE
DS4-S_CLOSE
DS5-S_CLOSE
DS1-T_CLOSE
DS2-T_CLOSE
≥1 8F00001B65
DS3-T_CLOSE DS-T_CLOSE
DS4-T_CLOSE
DS5-T_CLOSE
Figure 3.21-3 Decision and status logic for DS operation
DS1_NO_CONT TDSSV
=1 1 8800101B6B
t 0
& DS1-FAIL
DS1_NC_CONT
0.0s
DS1-CONTACT=BOTH
DS5_NO_CONT
=1 1 8C00501B6B
& t 0 DS5-FAIL
DS5_NC_CONT
0.0-100s
DS5-CONTACT=BOTH
DS-SV On
AMF-ON
Figure 3.21-4 Contact supervision logic for DS
- 323 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.21.3 Detection of current change (OCD)

(i) Current change detection relay
When there is a difference between a current magnitude at present (IM) and a current
magnitude in the past (IN) and if the difference is larger than the setting, the OCD should
operate. The IN is measured two-cycles before and the difference is derived from the following
equation:
|𝐼𝐼𝑀𝑀 | − |𝐼𝐼𝑁𝑁 | > 𝐼𝐼𝑠𝑠 (3.21-1)
Where, determination value is Is. ( set using the setting OCD-*)
Note: The current change detection relay element uses a scalar summation.
(ii) Logic of OCD

Figure 3.21-5 shows the OCD logic and its output signals.
3100001B72
8001001C20
OCD-OPERATION
A 0 t
8101001C21 OCD-P-AT
OCD-P B 0 t
8201001C22 OCD-P-BT
C
0 t OCD-P-CT
8402201C20 0.1s
A 0 t
8502001C21 OCD-S-AT
OCD-S B 0 t
8602001C22 OCD-S-BT
C
0 t OCD-S-CT
8803001C20 0.1s
A 0 t
8903001C21 OCD-T-AT
OCD-T B 0 t
8A03001C22 OCD-T-BT
C
0 t OCD-T-CT
0.1s
Figure 3.21-5 Scheme logic for current change check
- 324 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.21.4 Setting
Range Uni Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5
0.0 0.2
5- 5- OCD-P relay
OCD-P A 0.10 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.10 0.50
0.2 1.0 operating value
0 0
0.0 0.2
O
5- 5- OCD-S relay
C OCD-S A 0.10 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.10 0.50
D 0.2 1.0 operating value
0 0
0.0 0.2
5- 5- OCD-T relay (0.1 (0.5
OCD-T A 0.10 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.10 0.50
0.2 1.0 operating value 0) 0)
0 0
NO / NC / Type of injected CB1
CB1-Contact - NO NO NO NO NO
Both contact
Both contact
Both contact
C NO / NC / Type of injected CB4
B Both contact
Both contact
CB contact
CB-SV Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
supervision enable
CB contact
TCBSV 0 - 100 s 10 10 10 10 10
supervisor time
NO / NC / Type of injected DS1
DS1-Contact - NO NO NO NO NO
Both contact
Both contact
Both contact
D NO / NC / Type of injected DS4
S Both contact
Both contact
DS contact
DS-SV Off / On - Off Off Off Off Off
supervision enable
DS contact
TDSSV 0 - 100 s 60 60 60 60 60
supervisor time
- 325 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3.21.5 Data ID
PROTCOM(48A401)
8000001C20 OCD-P-A OCD primary relay element operated (Phase-A)
8100001C21 OCD-P-B OCD primary relay element operated (Phase-B)
8200001C22 OCD-P-C OCD primary relay element operated (Phase-C)
8400001C24 OCD-S-A OCD secondary relay element operated (Phase-A)
8500001C25 OCD-S-B OCD secondary relay element operated (Phase-B)
8600001C26 OCD-S-C OCD secondary relay element operated (Phase-C)
8800001C28 OCD-T-A OCD tertiary relay element operated (Phase-A)
8900001C29 OCD-T-B OCD tertiary relay element operated (Phase-B)
8A00001C2A OCD-T-C OCD tertiary relay element operated (Phase-C)
8000101B60 CB1_CLOSE DS close operated (phase-1)
8100101B61 CB2_CLOSE CB close operated (phase-2)
8000101B65 CB1_OPEN CB open operated (phase-1)
8000101B70 CB1-P_CLOSE CB primary close operated (phase-1)
8100101B71 CB1-S_CLOSE CB secondary close operated (phase-1)
8200101B72 CB1-T_CLOSE CB tertiary close operated (phase-1)
8100101B7A CB4-S_CLOSE CB secondary close operated (phase-4)
8200101B7B CB4-T_CLOSE CB tertiary close operated (phase-4)
8000101B7C CB5-P_CLOSE CB primary close operated (phase-5)
8100101B7D CB5-S_CLOSE CB secondary close operated (phase-5)
8200101B7E CB5-T_CLOSE CB tertiary close operated (phase-5)
8000201B60 DS1_CLOSE DS close operated (phase-1)
8000201B65 DS1_OPEN DS open operated (phase-1)
- 326 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

PROTCOM(48A401)
8000201B70 DS1-P_CLOSE DS primary close operated (phase-1)
8100201B71 DS1-S_CLOSE DS secondary close operated (phase-1)
8200201B72 DS1-T_CLOSE DS tertiary close operated (phase-1)
8100201B7A DS4-S_CLOSE DS secondary close operated (phase-4)
8200201B7B DS4-T_CLOSE DS tertiary close operated (phase-4)
8000201B7C DS5-P_CLOSE DS primary close operated (phase-5)
8100201B7D DS5-S_CLOSE DS secondary close operated (phase-5)
8200201B7E DS5-T_CLOSE DS tertiary close operated (phase-5)
8000001B60 CB-P_CLOSE CB primary close condition signal
8100001B61 CB-S_CLOSE CB secondary close condition signal
8200001B62 CB-T_CLOSE CB tertiary close condition signal
8D00001B63 DS-P_CLOSE DS primary close condition signal
8E00001B64 DS-S_CLOSE DS secondary close condition signal
8F00001B65 DS-T_CLOSE DS tertiary close condition signal
8000001B66 CB1-FAIL CB fail signal (phase-1)
8400001B6A CB5-FAIL CB fail signal (phase-5)
8800001B6B DS1-FAIL DS fail signal (phase-1)
8900001B6C DS2-FAIL DS fail signal (phase-2)
8A00001B6D DS3-FAIL DS fail signal (phase-3)
8B00001B6E DS4-FAIL DS fail signal (phase-4)
8C00001B6F DS5-FAIL DS fail signal (phase-5)
8000001B70 OCD-P-AT OCD primary operated (phase-A)
8100001B71 OCD-P-BT OCD primary operated (phase-B)
8200001B72 OCD-P-CT OCD primary operated (phase-C)
8400001B73 OCD-S-AT OCD secondary operated (phase-A)
8500001B74 OCD-S-BT OCD secondary operated (phase-B)
8600001B75 OCD-S-CT OCD secondary operated (phase-C)
8800001B76 OCD-T-AT OCD tertiary operated (phase-A)
8900001B77 OCD-T-BT OCD tertiary operated (phase-B)
8A00001B78 OCD-T-CT OCD tertiary operated (phase-C)
8000101BB0 CB1_NO_CONT CB NO contacted (phase-1)
- 327 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

PROTCOM(48A401)
8000101BB5 CB1_NC_CONT CB NC contacted (phase-1)
8000201BB0 DS1_NO_CONT DS NO contacted (phase-1)
8000201BB5 DS1_NC_CONT DS NC contacted (phase-1)

PROTCOM(48A401)
800010EBB0 CB1_NO_CONT CB NO contacted (phase-1)
800010EBB5 CB1_NC_CONT CB NC contacted (phase-1)
800020EBB0 DS1_NO_CONT DS NO contacted (phase-1)
800020EBB5 DS1_NC_CONT DS NC contacted (phase-1)
- 328 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4 Technical Description
- 329 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
A hardware module is made of a case and modules, together with a human machine interface
(HMI) being attached at front. An example of module structure in the 3/4×19” rack turns out
in Figure 4-1. The following modules are employed into a chassis:
* Transformer module (VCT)
* Signal processing and communication module (CPU)
* Binary input module (BI)
* Binary output module (BO)
* Human machine interface module (HMI)
* Binary input and output module 1–3 (BIO1, BIO2, and BIO3)
* Power supply module (PWS)
VCT CPU BI#1 BI#2 BO#1 BIO#1 BIO#2 BIO#3 PWS
Figure 4-1 Modules in 3/4 19” rack’s chassis (Front view, removed the front panel)
- 330 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
The hardware block diagrams using these modules are shown in Figure 4-2.
VCT CPU
Filter MPU LAN I/F Tele-

I A/D communication
CT×n system
LAN I/F
AC
input
MPU PCM Remote PC
V
VT×m
BO
Auxiliary
relay Binary output
×18
HMI
BI
LCD/MIMIC
Photo coupler Binary input
×18
LEDs
Operation keys BIO

Auxiliary
relay Binary output
Monitoring jacks ×18
Function Key
Local Photo coupler Binary input

USB ×18
PC I/F
Power
PWS
Figure 4-2 Hardware Block Diagram
- 331 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.1 IED case and module slot

4.1.1 1/1 Case for Compression-type terminal
Figure 4.1-1 shows diagrams of the IED case structure for 1/1 size: (a) IED internal structure
seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic
diagram.
(i) Viewing from the front side (Figure 4.1-1.a)

Thirteen slots are provided for mounting modules. The transformer module (VCT), the signal
processing and communication module (CPU), and the power supply module (PWS) are
mounted at predefined locations in the case. The binary IO modules (BI, BO, and BIO) are
placed in slots (IO#1 to IO#8), these slot locations are determined before factory shipment.
For detailed information on slot locations, module types and their connections for all IEDs,
see external connection figures. (See Appendix: Typical external connection).
(ii) Viewing from the rear side (Figure 4.1-1.b)

The group of terminal blocks for the 1/1 case viewed from the rear is shown. With respect to BI,
BO, and BIO, the terminal blocks are designed with both upper and lower terminals and are
labeled with alpha-numeric reference “T1”, “T2” and so on. Note that both the upper and
lower terminals are provided in the form of a single terminal block for respective BIs, BOs, or
BIOs. The terminal screw numbers for each terminal block relate to the individual circuits
and the user should check the configuration for each circuit. (For details, see section 4.4 or
later). Each slot is identified by its alpha-numeric reference (or slot reference) on the IED case.
For example, the user can identify that slot “IO#1” is linked with alpha-numeric reference
“T1”.
For PWS, note that the terminal blocks are placed on the left hand side. The user can
also find alpha-numeric reference “T9” for PWS. The PWS circuits and relevant terminals are
discussed later. (For details, see section 4.5 or later)
The communication modules, which are between the VCT slot and BIO slot, are labeled
“C11” to “C15”. These communication modules are used for LAN, IEC61850 communication,
and external devices.
(iii) Schematic figure (Figure 4.1-1.c)

The slots and terminal blocks in the IED are shown. Using this figure, the user can find the
location of VCT, BIO, and PWS. This figure is useful when the user sets binary IO modules
using the setting tables. (For setting of binary IO modules, see section 4.4)
- 332 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
a. View from front side
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C11
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 C12
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
C13
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
C14
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 C15 FG1 FG2
35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 E
39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
FG FGE FGD FGC FGB FGA
b. View from rear side
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
●FG ●FGE ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●FG2 ●E
c. Schematic diagram
Figure 4.1-1 Slots and terminal blocks in 1/1 case for Compression-type terminal
- 333 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.1.2 3/4 case for Compression-type terminal

diagram. For PWS, note that the terminal blocks are placed on the left hand side. The user
can also find alpha-numeric reference “T7” for PWS.
- 334 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

diagram. For PWS, note that the terminal blocks are placed on the left hand side. The user
can also find alpha-numeric reference “T4” for PWS.

Figure 4.1-4 shows the case structure for 1/3 ×19” rack: (a) IED internal structure seen from
the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram.
(i) Viewing from the front side (Figure 4.1-4.a)

Four slots are provided: the transformer module (VCT), the signal processing and
communication module (CPU), and the power supply module (PWS) and binary IO modules
(BI, BO, and BIO) are placed into slots. The binary IO module is located in slot “IO#1”.
(ii) Viewing from the rear side (Figure 4.1-4.b)

With respect to the binary IO modules, the terminal block is designed with both upper and
lower terminals; they are labeled with the alpha-numeric reference “T1”. Users should note
that the upper terminal and the lower terminal are provided as a single terminal block. The
terminal screw numbers relate to the binary IO module circuits; thus the user should check
the configuration of each circuit.
Note that the PWS is labeled with alpha-numeric reference “T2”.
(iii) Schematic figure (Figure 4.1-4.c)

The user can find the location of VCT, BIO, and PWS modules form the schematic diagram. It
is useful when the user wishes to set binary IO modules using their setting tables The user
can see the modules at the slot locations respectively from external connection figures (See
Appendix: Typical external connection).
- 335 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C11
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 C12
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 C13
20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 C14
26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 C15 FG1
35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38
E
39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40
FG FGD FGC FGB FGA
T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic figure
- 336 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 8 8
9 9 9
10
11
10
11
10
11
C12
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 14 14
15 15 15
16 16 16
17 17 17
18 18 18
19 19 19 C13
20 20 20
21 21 21
22 22 22
23 23 23
24 24 24
25 25 25 C14
26 26 26
27 27 27
28 28 28
29 29 29
30 30 30
31 31 31
32 32 32
33 33 33
34 34 34 C15 FG1
35 35 35
36 36 36
37 37 37
38 38 38
E
39 39 39
40 40 40
FG FGB FGA
T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
- 337 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

T2 T1
1
2
1
2
C11
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9 VC1
C12
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
C13
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25
26
25
26
C14
27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
31 31
32 32
33 33
34 34
C15 FG1
35 35
36 36
37 37
38 38
E
39 39
40 40
FG FGA
T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
- 338 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.2 Transformer module (VCT module)

The transformer module (VCT module) electrically isolates input AC signal and the protection
relay IED. Following are example of AC input signal:
 three-phase currents (Ia, Ib and Ic) for each winding
 neutral current (IN) for each winding
 phase voltage, etc.
Please refer each VCT module table for detail.
4.2.1 VCT for GRT200 model 1

The VCT type 35 is used for GRT200 model 1 (for 2 windings transformer model, input
representative voltage). Table 4.2-1 shows terminal # and correspond AC signal.
Table 4.2-1
Terminal ADC VCT: Type 35

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 1 VT V
3 4 2 – –
5 6 3 – –
7 8 4 – –
9 10 5 Ia-1CT
11 12 6 1CT Ib-1CT
13 14 7 Ic-1CT
15 16 8 Ia-2CT
17 18 9 –
19 20 10 –
21 22 11 2CT –
23 24 12 –
25 26 13 Ib-2CT
27 28 14 Ic-2CT
29 30 – – – –
- 339 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

The VCT type 44 is used for GRT200 model 2 (for 3 windings transformer model, input:
neutral point current, representative voltage). Table 4.2-2 shows terminal # and correspond
AC signal.
Table 4.2-2
Terminal ADC VCT: Type44

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 >> 1 VT V
3 4 >> 2 – –
5 6 >> 3 Ia-1CT
7 8 >> 4 1CT Ib-1CT
9 10 >> 5 Ic-1CT
11 12 >> 6 Ia-2CT
13 14 >> 7 2CT Ib-2CT
15 16 >> 8 Ic-2CT
17 18 >> 9 Ia-3CT
19 20 >> 10 3CT Ib-3CT
21 22 >> 11 Ic-3CT
23 24 >> 12 1NCT In-1NCT
25 26 >> 13 2NCT In-2NCT
27 28 >> 14 3NCT In-3NCT
29 30 – – – –
- 340 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

The VCT type 44 and type 47 are used for GRT200 model 3 (for 3 windings transformer model,
input: neutral point current, 3 phase voltage). Table 4.2-3 shows terminal # and correspond
AC signal.
Table 4.2-3

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 >> 1 VT (Not used)
3 4 >> 2 – –
5 6 >> 3 Ia-1CT
7 8 >> 4 1CT Ib-1CT
9 10 >> 5 Ic-1CT
11 12 >> 6 Ia-2CT
13 14 >> 7 2CT Ib-2CT
15 16 >> 8 Ic-2CT
17 18 >> 9 Ia-3CT
19 20 >> 10 3CT Ib-3CT
21 22 >> 11 Ic-3CT
23 24 >> 12 1NCT In-1NCT
25 26 >> 13 2NCT In-2NCT
27 28 >> 14 3NCT In-3NCT
29 30 – – – –
Table 4.2-4

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 >> 1 Va-1VT
3 4 >> 2 1VT Vb-1VT
5 6 >> 3 Vc-1VT
29 30 – – – –
- 341 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

The VCT type 44 is used for GRT200 model 4 (for 3 windings transformer model, input:
neutral point current, 3 phase voltage). Table 4.2-5 shows terminal # and correspond AC
signal.
Table 4.2-5

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 >> 1 VT V
3 4 >> 2 – –
5 6 >> 3 Ia-1CT
7 8 >> 4 1CT Ib-1CT
9 10 >> 5 Ic-1CT
11 12 >> 6 Ia-2CT
13 14 >> 7 2CT Ib-2CT
15 16 >> 8 Ic-2CT
17 18 >> 9 Ia-3CT
19 20 >> 10 3CT Ib-3CT
21 22 >> 11 Ic-3CT
23 24 >> 12 Ia-4CT
25 26 >> 13 4CT Ib-4CT
27 28 >> 14 Ic-4CT
29 30 – – – –
- 342 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

The VCT type 44 and type 48 are used for GRT200 model 5 (for 3 windings transformer model,
input: neutral point current, 3 phase voltage x 2). Table 4.2-6 shows terminal # and
correspond AC signal.
Table 4.2-6

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 >> 1 0VT (Not used)
3 4 >> 2 - -
5 6 >> 3 Ia-1CT
7 8 >> 4 1CT Ib-1CT
9 10 >> 5 Ic-1CT
11 12 >> 6 Ia-2CT
13 14 >> 7 2CT Ib-2CT
15 16 >> 8 Ic-2CT
17 18 >> 9 Ia-3CT
19 20 >> 10 3CT Ib-3CT
21 22 >> 11 Ic-3CT
23 24 >> 12 1NCT In-1NCT
25 26 >> 13 2NCT In-2NCT
27 28 >> 14 3NCT In-3NCT
29 30 – – – –
Table 4.2-7

Conn.
# CH# Analog CH
1 2 >> 1 Va-1VT
3 4 >> 2 1VT Vb-1VT
5 6 >> 3 Vc-1VT
7 8 >> 4 - -
9 10 >> 5 Va-2VT
11 12 >> 6 2VT Vb-2VT
13 14 >> 7 Vc-2VT
15 16 >> 8 - -
17 18 >> 9 Va-4VT
19 20 >> 10 4CT Vb-4VT
21 22 >> 11 Vc-4VT
23 24 >> 12 Va-5VT
25 26 >> 13 5CT Vb-5VT
27 28 >> 14 Vc-5VT
29 30 – – – –
- 343 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.2.6 Constitution of VCT

Figure 4.2-1 shows a VCT terminal block together with its schematic diagram1; the same
terminal screw numbers are shown on the terminal block and schematic diagram. The user
should note that the last terminal screw2 and FG terminal are connected with a short-wire by
default.
1Note: When the size of the IED case is 1/1, two alpha-numeric references (VC1 and VC2)
and two slot references (VCT#1 and VCT#2) are available.
2Note: In standard VCTs, the last terminal screw is designated as “No. 30”.
- 344 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
VC1
VC1
VCT
Alpha-numeric Module type
reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Short-wire1
21
22
FG1 23
24
Frame ground 25
terminal on the case
26
27
28
29
30
Short-wire1
FG1
VC1 terminal Schematic diagram
Figure 4.2-1 VC1 terminals2 (Rear view)

1Note: The connection between terminal screw 30 and FG is made with a short-wire by
the manufacturer.
2Note: This figure is used for general instruction with regard to the VCT. Thus, the
alpha-numeric reference for the VCT will depend on the IED model.
3Note: “VC2” is available for VCT#2 slot.
- 345 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.2.7 Setting VCT ratio

As input sources are transformed with various VTs and CTs in the power system, the user
shall set each VT or CT ratio at each VCT terminal.
(i) Setting a ratio for the VT

When the VT quantity applied at the VCT terminal, a ratio of the primary voltage to the
secondary voltage should be set. A voltage is applied at the first terminal (Ch1) on the VCT#1,
the user should set the ratio for the setting [AI1_Ch1_Ratio]. For example, the user is
requires to set a value ‘3636’ for the [AI1_Ch1_Ratio] when the primary is 400kV and the
secondary is 110V (i.e., 400kV/110V=3636). The channel position on the VCT is discussed in
the preceding section VCT in Type.
(ii) Setting a ratio for the CT

When the CT quantity flows into the VCT terminal, a ratio of the primary current to the
secondary current should be set. For example, the user is required to set a a value ‘4000’ for
the [AI1_Ch1_Ratio] when the primary is 4000A and the secondary is 1A (i.e., 4000/1=4000).
- 346 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) Setting list

Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200201/200202)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
VCT#1 AC1_Ch1_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#1 1.000
AC1_Ch2_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#1 1.000
VCT#2 AC2_Ch1_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#2 1.000
†Note: For more information on the IED operation, see Chapter User interface: AC analog
input.
‡Note:The number of AC analog input channels depends on the configuration of the VCT
type and the VCT slot. Thereby, the user has to set the value of the VCT ratio
corresponding to a specific auxiliary VT/CT.
- 347 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.2.8 Selection of rated current

The rated current of the auxiliary CT in the VCT module is pre-configured when the IED is
shipped from the manufacturer; the value of the rated current is set uniquely either 1 ampere
or 5 ampere for all auxiliary CTs. However, the user can independently change the value of
the rated current from the pre-configured rated current. The sections that follow explain how
the value of rated current can be individually changed; it is important that the user shall
carry out and confirm that both jumper and screen operations have been made correctly.
(i) Jumper switching

Each of the auxiliary CTs has a Jumper, and the user can select between a rated current of 1
ampere (1A) and a rated current of 5 ampere (5A) using the Jumpers. The user can select the
rated current by following the steps below with reference to Figure 4.2-2:
Step1: Open the IED front panel.
Step2: Remove the receptacle from the header when the rating requirement is for 1A.
When a rating of 5A is required, insert the receptacle into the header.
The locations of the Jumpers are designated with the marks “W1” to “W14”, which are
printed on the circuit board of the VCT. These “W*” marks correspond to the AC analog input
channel numbers discussed previously.
Front Rear
Tr.1 Tr.2
W1
W2
W3 Tr.3 Tr.4
Location of Jumpers
W4
Connector
Jumpers
W5
Tr.5 Tr.6
W6
W7
W8
W9 Tr.7 Tr.8
W10
W11
W12 Tr.9
W13 Tr.10
W14
Tr.11
Tr.12 Tr.13 Tr.14
Layout of VCT components VCT Photograph
Setting for 5 A rating Setting for 1 A rating

receptacle
header header
Figure 4.2-2 Jumpers and their locations
- 348 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii) IED screen operation

The user should keep in mind that the rated current will be changed† following jumper
switching. The table below shows the setting items for each AC analog input channel. For
example, when the user wishes to change the rated current on AC analog input channel#3 at
the VCT#1 slot, for example if the user wishes to change the rated current to 1 ampere from 5
ampere, the user should apply the setting [AI1_Ch2_Rating] 1A. Term “DEP” in the table
represents a pre-configured rated current set by the manufacturer; the pre-configured rated
current is identical to the AC rating determined in accordance with the order from the
customer. Thereby, the user should be careful not to change other setting items, which the
user does not wish to alter from the original requirements specified in the customer order.
Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200201/200202)

Default setting
Range
value
Setting item Units Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
rating rating rating rating
VCT#1 AC1_Ch1_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#1 DEP
AC1_Ch2_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#1 DEP
VCT#2 AC2_Ch1_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#2 DEP
†Note: Number of auxiliary CTs depends on the configuration of the VCT type and the
VCT slot. Thereby, the user has to set the rating corresponding to a specific
auxiliary CT. For more information, see Chapter User interface: AC analog input.
- 349 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.3 Signal processing and communication modules (CPU)

A signal-processing including communication module (CPU) consists of a main circuit board
for processing (CPU1) and ‘piggyback’ circuit boards for communication modules (COM#1 to
COM#5). The piggyback circuit boards are provided so that the IED can have the
communication with the network, time synchronization servers and others. The piggyback
circuit boards are mounted on the CPU1.
Other signal-processing modules (CPM1 and CPX1) are provided to augment the CPU
performance. The CPUs configuration depends on respective models; the arrangement of the
CPU1, CPM1, and CPX1 varies in the respective models. Figure 4.3-1 exemplifies the full
implementation for the CPU.
CPU1
CPM1 CPX1
COM#1
MPU#2
COM#2
DDR2#2
COM#3
MPU#1
COM#4
DDR2#1 MPU#3
NOR-Flash MRAM COM#5 DDR2#3
Figure 4.3-1 CPU and communication modules for the processing

Note: The implementation of the above may vary according to circumstances.
- 350 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.3.1 Communication modules

For communication, piggyback-circuit-modules are provided and these are mounted on CPU1,
as shown in Table 4.3-1. These specifications are tabulated and their symbols are also shown
in Table 4.3-1. The arrangement of these modules depends on the IED models. Thus, it is
required to refer external connection figures in order to examine which modules are used and
where they are located. The external connection figures are shown separately. (See Appendix:
Typical External connection)
Table 4.3-1 Communication modules

I/F 100BASE-FX 100BASE-TX Remote comm. IRIG-B000 GIO
Connector SC type RJ45 type ST type PCB connector D-sub 9
type
Medium Fiber optic Twist pair Fiber optic(GI) Twist pair Twist pair
Usage Substation Substation Data transfer Time Connection
automation automation (2km class)) synchronization for external
system and system and others I/O unit
others
Symbol 100BASE-TX 100BASE-TX Remote
Comm.
IRIG-B000
A1
GIO
B1 SIG
A2(Disuse)
TX RX
B2(Disuse)
A3
RX B3
TX GND
1. 100BASE-TX module (RJ-45 plug)

A twisted-pair cable is required for the LAN connection. The 100BASE-TX module is used for
the GR-TIEMS operation or the communication for remote end. Use a shielded twisted pair
cable so that electric magnetic compatibility is satisfied.
2. 100BASE-FX module (SC plug)

A fiber optic cable is required for the connection. 100BASE-FX module is used for the
communication for remote end.
3. Remote communication module (ST plug)

An optical module is used for the serial communication using an optical fiber.
4. IRIG-B000 module
IRIG-B000 module is used for the calendar clock. The data being in conformity to serial
IRIG-B000 format is sent from an external clock. This module is isolated using a photo coupler.
The user should note A2 and B2 connectors are not used.
- 351 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Top
PCB connector A1
A1 B1 B1 SIG
A2 (Disuse)
A2 B2
B2 (Disuse)
A3 B3 A3
Bottom B3 GND
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit
5. GIO module
GIO module is used to link an IED with an external I/O unit. GIO module is made with a
D-sub9 socket. It is connected using twisted pair cables. Figure 4.3-2 shows the cable
specification of GIO.
Dsub–9P (Plug) Dsub–9P (Plug)

(male) (male)
Twist pair cable
CN1 CN2
M2.6 screw M2.6 screw
CN1 Twist pair cable CN2

1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10
Figure 4.3-2 GIO cable and its structure
4.3.2 Location of communication modules

As described earlier, the user should examine the type of communication module and the
location where the module is placed. Therefore, the user is required to understand the
reference, when the user examines the connection figures. (See Appendix: Typical external
connection)
For example, Figure 4.3-3 shows a LAN (100BASE-FX) module, a Protection (ST)
module, and a GIO (D-sub) module placed at locations C11–12, C13, and C15 in the IED.
Blank panel is placed at the other location. The user can find the corresponded
communication modules located in the IED on the right side.
- 352 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Com. Slot VCT SLOT

100BASE-FX
VC1
VC1
C11 VCT
100BASE-FX
C11 100BASE-FX
Protection
C12
Port
C12 100BASE-FX
Blank panel C13

C13 Protection
C14
C14 (BLANK)
GIO
FG1
E C15
C15
GIO
FGE
FG1
Practical communication modules Schematic diagram
Figure 4.3-3 Communication module structure (an example)
353
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.4 Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO)

Binary IO modules are provided in the IED to signal a command for external devices. Binary
IO modules are also used to receive status information. Binary IO modules are connected to
external devices with signal wires using terminal blocks on the rear of the IED. There are
standard type and variable type in Binary IO modules as shown in Table 4.4-1.
Table 4.4-1 Number of input and output circuits1

Number of Number of output circuits2
Module Module
# input Fast Semi-fast Auxiliary
name3 Type4 Hybrid Form C
circuits operating operating (Normal)
1 BI1A Standard 18 0 0 0 0 0
2 BI2A Variable 12 0 0 0 0 0
3 BI3A Standard 32 0 0 0 0 0
4 BO1A Standard 0 0 6 0 12 0
5 BO2A Standard 0 0 0 16 0 0
6 BIO1A Standard 7 0 6 0 3 1
9 BIO4A Variable 6 0 0 6 1 1
1Note: One of two voltages is applied for the binary IO modules: 48Vdc (24 to 60) and
220Vdc (110 to 250). The DC voltage supplied to the IED determines the
voltage type selection; hence, a combination of different voltage types is not
possible.
2Note: For the structure and the number of binary IO modules, see section 4.4.5.
3Note: For details of the output circuits, see Table 4.4-5.
4Note: For the binary input circuits in the standard type, the user can choice either a
high voltage or a low voltage with regard to the input threshold. For the ones of the
variable type, the user itself can set a threshold value with regard to input voltage
using settings.
- 354 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.4.1 Binary input feature for Compression-type terminal

Binary input circuits have common programmable logic (CPL). Each circuit is independent,
but the circuits in the BI3A module are not independent, as shown in Table 4.4-2.
Table 4.4-2 Input circuits and features associated with binary IO module
Module Input features Example Symbols
type sign
1 BI1A - Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw number
-Polarity dependent
1
(+)
-Independent circuit 2
BI1
(−)
2 BI2A -Isolated using photo Circuit
number
coupler
Screw on terminal block
-Polarity dependent
- Independent circuit
-Variable threshold
3 BI3A -Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw
number
-Polarity dependent (+)
1
-Sharing common BI1 BI1

Circuit number
connections (+)
2
BI2
Circuit
Terminal screw
number
number
34
(+)
BI32
35
(−) Photo coupler
36
(−)
37
(−)
38
(−)
4 BIO1A
5 BIO2A Same as BI1A
Same as BI1A and BI2A
6 BIO3A
7 BIO4A Same as BI2A
The user can find the connector of binary IO modules, the terminal number and
arrangement of the binary input circuits in section 4.4.5.
- 355 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.4.2 Binary input circuit

The binary input circuit has a threshold for the input voltage and the user can regulate the
threshold using scheme switches and settings. Additionally, the binary input circuit has a
function in response to chattering signals produced by bouncing contacts, a programmable
logic for retarding and inverting the signal, and the user can set the respective features with
settings. Table 4.4-3 shows the respective settings and ranges in the standard type. Table
4.4-4 shows the ones in the variable types.
Table 4.4-3 Setting items for binary input circuits in the standard type
Units
Setting item1 Range Contents Default
THRES_Lvl Low/High – Threshold level for input voltage Low

Common
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
BI1_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BI1 Off
BI1 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the off-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BI1 signal Normal
….. ….. ….. ….. …..
BIn_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BIn Off

BIn2 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
1Note: Setting items are provided in each slot; see Figure 4.4-3. Also, see section 4.4.6 (i).
2Note: BIn_CPL and other settings are provided for all binary input circuits. For example,
the user can configure 18 CPLs in BI1A.
3Note: Each setting item above is required to set at every IO_slots.
- 356 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 4.4-4 Setting items for binary input circuits in the variable type (i.e., BI2A and BIO4A)
Units
Setting devices Range Contents Default
THRES_Grp1 10 to 220 V Input thresholds at BI1, BI2, and BI3 75

THRES_Grp2 10 to 220 V Input thresholds at BI4, BI5, and BI6 75
Common THRES_Grp3 10 to 220 V Input thresholds at BI7 to BI94 75
THRES_Grp4 10 to 220 V Input thresholds at BI10 to BIn4 75
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in
BI1_CPL Off
BI1
BI2_CPL Off
BI 2
BI3_CPL Off
BI 3
….. ….. ….. ….. …..

BIn_CPL Off
BI n
BIn4 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
4Note: BIn_CPL and other settings are provided for all binary input circuits. For example,
the user can set for 12 CPLs in BI2A and for 6 CPLs in BIO4A.
As an example, Figure 4.4-1 shows the binary input circuit of BI1A in order to help
understand the settings. BI1A consists of 18 binary input circuits and each circuit has three
settings:
Setting threshold level
Comparison feature for contact chatter
CPL switches (“Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal” and “Logic level
inversion”), used as basis of input signal characteristics.
- 357 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
From 8001001111 8001001110

External devices For Relay & and
BI1-NC Filter BI1
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8001001172 control functions
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI1 BI1-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
& 1
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BI1-CPL] Off
8101011111 8101011110
BI2-NC BI2
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8101011172
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI2 BI2-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
& 1
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8201021110 8201021110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
BI3-NC BI3 8201021172
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI3 BI3-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
& 1
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8********** BIn
BIn-NC BIn
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8**********
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BIn BIn-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
& 1
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BIn-CPL] Off
Low
High [THRES_Lvl]
R
Figure 4.4-1 Common programmable logic for BI1A
Respective element IDs (i.e., 8001001172 and others) designate respective signal
monitoring points of the binary input circuits (i.e., BI1-CPL and others). Thus, the user can
handle the signals on the binary input circuit using element ID together with function ID.
When we assume that BI1A module is at IO#1 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to
see the first circuit signal of this BI1A module, the user can identify its signal† using the
- 358 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
element ID (8001001172) and the function ID of IO#1 slot‡.
†Note:The user can see the signals of the binary input circuits on the IED screen.
Chapter User interface: Monitoring-sub menu discusses how to see the state of the
binary input circuits.
‡Note:Function IDs identify every IO slots. For example, IO#1 slot has been identified by
the function ID “200B001”. Therefore, when the user wishes to program the signal
“BI1-CPL” on BI1A at IO#1, the user should designate its signal using the function
ID “200B001” and Data ID “8001001172”. On the other hand, when the signal
“BI2-CPL” on BI1A at IO#2 is required to program, the user should designate that
signal using the function ID “200B002” and Data ID “8001001172”. For more
information with regard to the function ID and the Data ID at IO#1, see sections
4.4.6(i), 4.4.7(i), and others.
- 359 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(i) Setting threshold level

(i)-1 For Standard type (BI1A and others)
The selection switch is used to adjust the threshold of an input signal; it is designated as
[THRES_Lvl]. If an external device signal is lower than DC 110V1, the user should set Low for
scheme switch [THRES_Lvl]. Conversely if an external device signal is higher than DC 220V1,
the user should set High for the scheme switch. Note that scheme switch [THRES_Lvl] is used
to control all binary input circuits. The user must ensure that the input voltage is higher than
DC 77V1 when the setting ‘Low’ is applied; the input voltage should be higher than DC 136V1
when the setting ‘High’ is applied.
(i)-2 For Variable type (exclusive for BI2A and BIO4A)

BI2A and BIO4A have a unique feature as a substitute for setting (i)-1 in order that the user
can determine the threshold level of the input voltage as required. This unique feature is
performed with settings [THRES_Grp1], [THRES_Grp2], [THRES_Grp3], and [THRES_Grp4];
every setting is applied to a group of three binary input circuits.
Provided that the user uses BI2A, then binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the setting
[THRES_Grp1] and the user should set the value between 10 to 220V DC1 for this setting. For
the setting [THRES_Grp2] , the above mentioned value holds true for #4 to #6 binary input
circuits; similarly the setting [THRES_Grp3] is used for #7 to #9 binary input circuits; and
finally the setting [THRES_Grp4] is used for #10 to #12 binary input circuits.
On the other hand, when BIO4A is used, the binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the
setting [THRES_Grp1]; and the binary input circuits #4 to #6 follow the setting
[THRES_Grp2]. Since BIO4A has six binary input circuits, the other settings [THRES_Grp3]
and [THRES_Grp4] are not required here.
2Note: The value of the threshold is fixed for all binary IO module types with the
exception of BI2A and BIO4A where the user can set the threshold arbitrarily
between 10 to 220V DC and can regulate its threshold voltage in voltage steps. The
user should notice that “binary IO module voltage type” influences these values
(see the 1st note in Table 4.4-1). These particular values are found when 220V dc
type are used.
- 360 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii) Comparison feature for contact chatter

The input circuit incorporates a comparison feature that protects against contact chatter and
this feature is configured using the setting [CMP_NUM]. Figure 4.4-2 illustrates this feature;
the comparison feature removes contact chatter. The period ‘t’ applied for the removal of
contact chatter can be configured by setting a value for [CMP_NUM]. The formula for the
calculation of ‘t’ is,
1
[CPM_NUM]×
System Frequency×12
The setting [CMP_NUM] and the scheme switch [THRES_Lvl] is provided for all binary input
circuits.
Actual input signal
Imported signal by
binary input circuit
t
Figure 4.4-2 Chattering countermeasure (e.g. [CMP_NUM] = 4)
(iii) CPL switch

If the user needs to operate the CPL for binary input circuit #1, the user should set On for
scheme switch [BI1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for scheme switch [BI1_CPL] if
CPL is not required. Since the entire range of binary input circuits have CPLs, a setting of On
or Off is a pre-requisite for every binary input circuit. The number of CPL is equal to number
of binary input circuits: that is, if BI1A is selected, the number of CPLs is 18
(iv) Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal

Both an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in CPL; both are used to adjust
the timing for input signals, the user should set their respective time values for settings [On
Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(v) Logic level inversion

The Logic inversion function can invert the input signal and is provided for each binary input
circuit; the user can invert an input signal by setting Inverse for scheme switch
[INVERSE-SW]. A setting of Normal is also provided when inversion is not required.
- 361 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(vi) How to set the settings for binary input circuits

Figure 4.4-3 illustrates an example of the binary IO module arrangement for the binary input
circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs); it illustrates the setting targets are on BI1A at IO#1 and
BIO1A at IO#3. The user should key the settings with regard to BI1A and BIO1A using the
setting tables for IO_SLOT1 and IO_SLOT3. As the setting points are for BI1A and BIO1A at
IO#1 and IO#3, the user should take the setting table of the standard type (in section
4.4.6(i)-1 and 4.4.6(ii)-1).
IO#n
IO#5
IO#3
IO#4
IO#1
IO#2
IO_SLOT1 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (input) Setting table (in & out)
Setting targets: BI1–BI18

and Common. Setting targets: BI1–BI7
and Common.
a. Setting targets for c. Setting targets for
BI1A (IO#1) BIO1A (IO#3)
Figure 4.4-3 BO and BIO setting tables related to IO_slot1 and IO_slot3
- 362 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
This setting table (in section 4.4.6(i)-1) is available for all binary IO modules except for
BI2A and BIO4A; thus, the user should understand and select the setting points that are
relevant to BI1A. That is, for BI1A the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e.,
binary input circuits #1 to #18) from IO_SLOT1 setting table. On the other hand, for BIO1A
the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e., binary input circuits #1 to #7) from
IO_SLOT3 setting table. The IO_SLOT3 setting table for the binary input circuits are shown
section 4.4.6(ii)-1. The setting operation via the IED screen is discussed later. (See chapter
User interface: I/O setting sub-menu)
- 363 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.4.3 Binary output feature for Compression-type terminal

A binary output circuit (BO) along with the CPL drives a single contact. There are five types of
BOs; different types of BOs are provided which are suitable for controlling the speed and
capacity of current in a variety of external devices, as listed below:
(1) Fast operating
(2) Semi-fast operating
(3) Hybrid
(4) Auxiliary
(5) BO with Form-C
The arrangement of the BO types is determined for every binary IO module, as shown in
Table 4.4-1 and Table 4.4-5. The difference in the types and number of BOs are also found in
section 4.4.5.
- 364 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 4.4-5 Output circuits and features associated with binary IO module
No Type Binary output feature Example Symbol Applied
sign module
1 Fast -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BIO3A
-Dry contact BO1(F) number
operating
-Closure is the fastest 1
(F) amongst all of the BO types. 2
Type
-Make & Carry: 5A cont.
BO number
-Break: 0.15A at 290Vdc
-OP Time: 3ms (typical) N/O contact
2 Semi-fast -Normally open (N/O) BO1A

-Dry contact BO1(SF)
operating BIO1A
-Closure is faster than
(SF) normal. BIO2A
Type
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc
0.2A at 125Vdc
-OP Time: 6ms (typical)
3 Hybrid -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO2A
-Polarity dependent BO1(H) number
(H) (+) BIO4A
-Interruption capability for 1
(−)
high-current (up to 10A) 2
Type
-Consisting of an IGBT BO number
device and a contact
-Make and carry: 8A cont. N/O
-Break: 10A at 220/110Vdc
-OP Time: 1ms
4 Auxiliary -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO1A
-Dry contact BO1 number
BIO1A
-Normal speed closure 1
-Make and carry: 8A cont. 2 BIO2A

-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc BO number BIO3A
0.2A at 125Vdc
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/O contact
5 Form-C -Uses a N/C and a N/O Terminal screw number BIO2A

contact BO1
BIO3A
-Shares a common 35
connections BIO4A
37
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
36
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc N/O
0.2A at 125Vdc 38
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/C
Contact
- 365 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.4.4 Binary output circuit

Either a CPL signal or a PLC signal can be used to initiate a binary output circuit. Table 4.4-6
shows the settings summary of CPL function.
Table 4.4-6 Setting items in binary output circuits
Setting-range or
Unit
Setting items Contents Default
Data_ID
BO1_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO1 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the second input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the third input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the forth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the fifth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the sixth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the seventh input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO1. Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO1 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse s Inversion operation of BO1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO1 OFF
Logic Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Setting Off Delay Timer for Delay and Dwell 0.000
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) – Setting Data ID for Latch Not assigned1
BO2_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO2 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO2. Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO2 Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO2 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BO2 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO2 OFF
…..
BOn_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off

BOn Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BOn Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BOn Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BOn AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BOn signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BOn OFF
1Note: The user can set a reset signal and eight input signals with Data IDs. Data IDs are
listed as a signal monitoring point for each function. Setting items are summarized
in each slot. (See sections 4.4.8(i) and 4.4.8(ii))
- 366 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
As an example, Figure 4.4-4 shows the binary output circuits on BO1A in order to help
understand the settings. BO1A consists of 18 binary output circuits and every circuit has five
CPLs. The features of the CPLs are divided into the five components as listed below:
CPL switch
Selection of input signals
Logic gate switch
Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off
Logic level inversion
Logic timer switch
From relay
application and To external
control functions devices
8002001112 Contact
[LOGIC-SW] On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
t 0 0 t & ≥1 BO1
Input signal 1 DRIVER BO1
&
AND & Logic Timer ≥1 & ≥1
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 1 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8002001113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
&
Off
Inverse On
Delay &
XOR
0.000-300.000s [BO1_CPL]
≥1
Off
Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
310200E11D BO1-SOURCE
810201112 Contact
t 0 0 t & ≥1 BO2
&
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 1 0 t
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
& BO2 RB
Off
Inverse On
Delay &
XOR
0.000-300.000s [BO2_CPL]
≥1
Off
Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
820202112 Contact
t 0 0 t & ≥1 BO3
&
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 1 0 t
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
& BO3 RB
Off
Inverse On
Delay &
XOR
0.000-300.000s [BO3_CPL]
≥1
Off
Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
8********* Contact
t 0 0 t & ≥1 BOn
Input signal 1 DRIVER BOn
&
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 1 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8*********
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
& BOn RB
Off
Inverse On
Delay &
XOR
0.000-300.000s [BOn_CPL]
≥1
Off
Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
3102E**11D BOn-SOURCE
Figure 4.4-4 Binary Output Circuit for BO1A (#1 to #n=18)
In Figure 4.4-4 respective element IDs (i.e., 8002001112 and others) designate respective
signal monitoring points of the binary output circuits. The user can monitor the operations of
- 367 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
the binary output circuit using element ID together with function ID. When we assume that
BO1A module is at IO#2 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to monitor the first-circuit
in the BO1A module, the user can see the operation using the element ID (8002001112) and
the function ID† of IO#2 slot.
†Note: A function ID identifies every IO slots. For example, with regard to the function
ID and the Data ID at IO#1 slot, see section 4.4.9(i). On the other hand, for IO#2
slot see section 4.4.9(ii).
(i) CPL switch

When the user needs to operate the CPL for binary output circuit #1, the user should set On
for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for the scheme switch
[BO1_CPL] if CPL is not required. Since all binary output circuits have CPLs setting between
On and Off is required for every binary output circuit. The number of CPL is equal to the
number of binary output circuits: that is, if the BO1A module is selected, the number of CPLs
is 18. Note that the subsequent PLC settings described later require that Off be set for the
scheme switch.
(ii) Selection of input signals

Since a binary input circuit is operated by commands introduced from other functions, eight
ports for input signals are provided, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user
must ensure that input-signal1 to input-signal8 are configured with eight DataIDs. That is,
the user can select input-signals that are available from other functions, these input-signals
are designated using DataIDs. The user can key the DataIDs into settings [Input signal1] to
[Input signal8]. The DataIDs are selected from the Signal monitoring point list, which is
provided for every function.
(iii) Logic gate switch

A binary input circuit has a logic scheme for the eight input signals, and can combine the
eight input signals as required using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the user should
set either AND, OR or XOR.
(iv) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

An on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in the CPL; both are used to adjust the
timing for binary output circuits, the user should set their respective time values for settings
[On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(v) Logic level inversion

The logic inversion function can invert the input signal for each binary output circuit; the user
- 368 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
can invert an input output when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch [INVERSE-SW].
Normal setting is also provided when logic inversion is not required for processing.
(vi) Logic timer switch

In order that the binary output circuit can have a programmable reset characteristic, a
scheme switch and a setting are provided. The programmable reset characteristic consists of
four types and the user can select the type required using a scheme switch: (1) dwell type, (2)
delay type, (3) latch type, and (4) instantaneous type:
(vi)-1 Instant type

If the user requires a binary output signal without the above characteristics (vi)-3, (vi)-2, and
(vi)-4, the user should set Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
(vi)-2 Delay type

If the user requires a binary output signal with a delayed characteristic, the user should set
Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting [Logic
timer].
(vi)-3 Dwell type

For instance, if the user requires a binary output signal as a one shot pulse, the user should
set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value in the
setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other hand, if
the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width will be
equal to the width of the input signals.
(vi)-4 Latch type

If the user requires a binary output signal to be removed by a reset signal, the user should set
Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and key the Data ID of the reset signal for setting
[Reset signal]. Since the binary output signal is removed with the Data ID, the user should
determine the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the signal
monitoring point for each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
- 369 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(vii) How to set the settings for binary output circuits
IO#n
IO#5
IO#3
IO#4
IO#1
IO#2
BO1A BIO1A
IO_SLOT2 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (output) Setting table (in & out)
Setting targets: BO1–BO18 Setting targets: BO1–BO10
b. Setting targets for c. Setting targets for

BO1A (IO#2) BIO1A (IO#3)
Figure 4.4-5 BO and BIO modules and setting tables related to IO_SLOT2 and IO_SLOT3
Figure 4.4-5 illustrates an example of a binary IO module arrangement and the binary
output circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs). If the user wishes to set the binary output
circuits, the setting targets are on BO1A and BIO1A at locations IO#2 and IO#3. The user
should key the CPL settings from the setting tables for the IO2_SLOT and IO3_SLOT.
The setting table is available for all binary IO modules; thus, the user should
- 370 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
understand and select setting points that are relevant to BO1A and BIO1A. That is, for BO1A
the user should choose the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary output circuits #1 to #18)
from IO_SLOT2. On the other hand, for BIO1A, the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary
output circuits #1 to #10) are from IO_SLOT3. These setting tables are shown in section
4.4.8(ii).
(viii) PLC and the binary output circuits

The Programmable logic controller (PLC) is also available for the control of binary output
circuits as a substitute for the CPL, and is able to signal an output command directly. In the
case that the binary output circuit is controlled by the PLC, the user is required to connect the
PLC to the binary output circuit. In Figure 4.4-4, the PLC logic connection points are
designated with BO1-SOURCE, BO2-SOURCE, and others. (The PLC is discussed separately.
Note that Connection points on the PLC are shown with the DataIDs of BIO_SLOT. See
section 4.4.9(i)-3 and 4.4.9(ii)-3. (For more information of PLC function, see Chapter PLC
function)
- 371 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.4.5 Structure of binary IO Module for Compression-type terminal

Binary IO modules consist of a number of module types and the arrangement of the respective
inputs-and-outputs are particular to each binary IO module type, as shown in Figure 4.4-6 to
Figure 4.4-9. Referring to the figures on the left, the user can for example, identify the actual
terminal blocks of the binary IO module. Corresponding circuits are drawn on the right in the
form of schematic diagrams. If the wiring of BI1A is considered, the wiring objects are
designated with terminal screw numbers 1 to 40. The terminal screw numbers are shown next
to the terminal blocks. Here the user can find a slot number labeled with alpha-numeric
reference “T*”. The asterisk sign (*) is substituted for any one of the slot numbers. For the
actual implementation of a binary IO module, the user should examine the arrangement of
binary IO modules from External connection figures, which are shown separately. (See
Appendix: Typical external connection)
Note that some input and output circuits have polarity, which is designated with either a
plus sign (+) or a minus sign (−) respectively.
- 372 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Alpha-numeric reference for the BI. Sign “*”

is substituted for the actual slot location
number.
T* T* T*
Screw
S BI1A BI2A BI3A
T*
1 1 1
1 (+)
2 BI1
(+)
2 BI1
(+)
2 BI1
2 (−)
3
(−) (+)
3 BI2
3 (+)
4 BI2
(+)
4 BI3
4 (−)
5 5
(+)
5 BI4
5 (+)
6 BI3
(+)
6 BI2
(+)
6 BI5
6 (−)
7
(−)
7
(+)
7 BI6
7 (+)
8 BI4
(+)
8 BI3
(+)
8 BI7
(−) (−)
8
9
(+)
9 BI8
(+)
9
10 BI5 (+)
10 BI9
(−)
10
11 11
(+)
11 BI10
(+) (+)
11
12 BI6 12 BI4
(+)
12 BI11
(−) (−)
12
13 13
(+)
13 BI12
13 (+) (+) (+) BI13
14 BI7 14 BI5 14
(−) (−)
14
15
(+)
15 BI14
15 (+) (+) BI15
16 BI8 16
16 (−)
17 17
(+)
17 BI16
17 (+) (+)
18 BI9 18 BI6
(+)
18 BI17
18 (−) (−) (+) BI18
19
20 The same terminal screw
is denoted with the same
number.
Screw number
21 (+) 21 21
21 (+)
22 BI10 BI7
(+) BI19
22 (−) (−) 22 (+) 22
BI20
23 23 23
(+)
24 BI11
(+)
24 BI21
24 (−)
25 25
(+)
25 BI22
25 (+)
26 BI12
(+)
26 BI8
(+)
26 BI23
26 (−)
27
(−)
27
(+)
27 BI24
27 (+)
28 BI13
(+)
28 BI9
(+)
28 BI25
28 (−)
29
(−) (+)
29 BI26
29 (+)
30 BI14
(+)
30 BI27
30 (−)
31 B31
(+)
31 BI28
31 (+)
32 BI15
(+)
B32 BI10
(+)
32 BI29
32
33
(−)
33
(−)
B33
(+)
33 BI30
34
(+)
34 BI16
(+)
B34 BI11 (+)
34 BI31
35
(−)
35
(−) (+)
35 BI32
(+) (−)
36 (−) 36 BI17 36
(−)
37 (+) 37 (+) B37 (−) 37
38 BI18 BI12
38 (−) (−) B38 (−) 38
39
40
Terminal blocks Schematic figures
Figure 4.4-6 Input arrangements for BI1A, BI2A, and BI3A

Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 4.4-2 or Table 4.4-5.
- 373 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Alpha-numeric reference for BO. Sign “*” is substituted for

the slot location number.
T* T*
BO1A BO2A
T*
1 1 1
(+)
BO1(SF) 2 BO1(H) 2
2 (−)
3 3 3
(+)
BO2(SF) 4 BO2(H) 4
4 (−)
5 5 5
(+)
BO3(SF) 6 BO3(H) 6
6 (−)
7 7 7
(+)
BO4(SF) 8 BO4(H) 8
8 (−)
9 9 9
(+)
10 BO5(SF) 10 BO5(H) 10
(−)
11 11 11
(+)
12 BO6(SF) 12 BO6(H) 12
(−)
13 13 13
(+)
14 BO7 14 BO7(H) 14
(−)
15 15 15
(+)
16 BO8 16 BO8(H) 16
(−)
17 17 17
(+)
18 BO9 18 BO9(H) 18
(−)
19
20 The same terminal
screw is denoted
with the same
number.
21 21 21 (+)
22 BO10 22 BO10(H) 22 (−)
23 23 23 (+)
24 BO11 24 BO11(H) 24 (−)
25 25 25 (+)
26 BO12 26 BO12(H) 26 (−)
27 27 27 (+)
28 BO13 28 BO13(H) 28 (−)
29 29 29 (+)
30 BO14 30 BO14(H) 30 (−)
31 31 31 (+)
32 BO15 32 BO15(H) 32 (−)
33 33 33 (+)
34 BO16 34 BO16(H) 34 (−)
35 35
36 BO17 36
37 37
38 BO18 38
39
40
Figure 4.4-7 Output arrangements in BO1A and BO2A

- 374 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Alpha-numeric reference of BIO. Sign “*” is

substituted for the actual slot location number.
T* T*
BIO1A BIO2A
T* (+) 1 1
2 BI1 (+)
2 BI1
1 (−) (−)
2 (+) 3 3
4 BI2 (+)
4 BI2
3 (−) (−)
4 (+) 5 5
6 BI3 (+)
6 BI3
5 (−) (−)
6 (+) 7 7
7 8 BI4 (+)
8 BI4
(−) (−)
8 (+) 9 9
9 10 BI5 (+)
10 BI5
(−) (−)
10 (+) 11 11
11 12 BI6 (+)
12 BI6
(−) (−)
12 (+) 13 13
13 14 BI7 (+)
14 BI7
(−) (−)
14 15 15
15 BO1(SF) 16
(+)
16 BI8
(−)
16 17 17
17 BO2(SF) 18
(+)
18 BI9
(−)
18
19
20
The same terminal

21 21 21
screw is denoted with BO3(SF) 22 (+) 22 BI10
22 the same number.
23 23 (−) 23
BO4(SF) 24 (+) 24 BI11
24
25 25 (−) 25
BO5(SF) 26 (+) 26 BI12
26
27 27 (−) 27
BO6(SF) 28 BO1(SF) 28
28
29 29 29
30 BO7 30 BO2(SF) 30
31 31 31
32 BO8 32 BO3(SF) 32
33 33 33
34 BO9 34 BO4 34
35
36 35 35
37 37 37
38 BO10 36 BO5 36
39
40 38 38
Figure 4.4-8 Input and output arrangements in BIO1A and BIO2A

- 375 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Alpha-numeric of BIO. Sign “*” is substituted

for the actual slot location number. T* T*
BIO3A BIO4A
T* 1 1
(+) (+)
1
2 BI1 2 BI1
2 (−) (−)
(+) 3 (+) 3
3
4 BI2 4 BI2
4 (−) (−)
(+) 5 (+) 5
5
6 BI3 6 BI3
6 (−) (−)
(+) 7 (+) 7
7
8 BI4 8 BI4
8 (−) (−)
(+) 9 (+) 9
9
10 BI5 10 BI5
10 (−) (−)
(+) 11 (+) 11
11
12 BI6 12 BI6
12 (−) (−)
13 (+) 13
14 BI7
14 (−)
15 (+) 15
16 BI8
16 (−) 17 (+)
17 BO1(H) 18 (−)
18
19
20 The same terminal screw
is denoted with the same
number.
21 21 21 (+)
BO1(F) 22 BO2(H) 22 (−)
22
23 23 23 (+)
BO2(F) 24 BO3(H) 24
24 (−)
25 25 25 (+)
BO3(F) 26 BO4(H) 26
26 (−)
27 27 27 (+)
BO4(F) 28 BO5(H) 28
28 (−)
29 29 29 (+)
BO5(F) 30 BO6(H) 30
30 (−)
31 31
32 BO6(F) 32
33 33 33
34 BO7 34 BO7 34
35
36 35 35
37 37 37
38 BO8 36 BO8 36
39
40 38 38
Figure 4.4-9 Input and output arrangements in BIO3A and BIO4A
Note: PHOENIX CONTACT ® is the manufacturer of the terminal block. The model of
this terminal is described as “FRONT-MSTB 2.5/20-STF 5.08”. The user can
connect a cable to this terminal directly without a cable ferrule; hence, the
recommended cables are AWG12–AWG24 and their stripping lengths are 10mm.
Use “AI2.5-10BU” for AWG14 (cross section 2mm2) or “AI1.5-10BK” for AWG16
(cross section 1.25mm2) in the PHOENIX CONTACT ® when a cable ferrule is
required.
- 376 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.4.6 Settings of binary input circuits

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
(i)-1 For the standard type being furnished
Default setting
value
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low

CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
BI1 BI1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary input enable Off
On Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s On delay timer value 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s Off delay timer value 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Binary signal inversion Normal
…… …… …… …… ……

(i)-2 For the variable type being furnished

Default setting
value
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low

Threshold through BI1 to BI3
THRES_Grp1 10 - 220 V Applicable only in BI-2 module and 75
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
…… …… …… …… ……

- 377 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID:

200B02 to 200B0n)
(ii)-1 For the standard type being furnished
Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in previous section (i)-1)
(ii)-2 For the variable type being furnished

Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#2 (in previous section (i)-2)
- 378 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.4.7 Data IDs of binary input circuits

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
(i)-1 Before the filer
 Signal monitoring points (before the filter)
8001001111 BI1-NC BI1 signal without filter
8A010A1111 BI11-NC BI11 signal without filter
8B010B1111 BI12-NC BI12 signal without filter
8C010C1111 BI13-NC BI13 signal without filter
8D010D1111 BI14-NC BI14 signal without filter
8E010E1111 BI15-NC BI15 signal without filter
8F010F1111 BI16-NC BI16 signal without filter
(i)-2 After the filter

 Signal monitoring points (after the filer)
8001001110 BI1 BI1 signal with filter
8A010A1110 BI11 BI11 signal with filter
8B010B1110 BI12 BI12 signal with filter
8C010C1110 BI13 BI13 signal with filter
8D010D1110 BI14 BI14 signal with filter
8E010E1110 BI15 BI15 signal with filter
8F010F1110 BI16 BI16 signal with filter
- 379 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(i)-3 The ends of binary input circuits

 Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit)
8001001172 BI1-CPL BI1 signal with filter and programmable logic
8A010A1172 BI11-CPL BI11 signal with filter and programmable logic
8B010B1172 BI12-CPL BI12 signal with filter and programmable logic
8C010C1172 BI13-CPL BI13 signal with filter and programmable logic
8D010D1172 BI14-CPL BI14 signal with filter and programmable logic
8E010E1172 BI15-CPL BI15 signal with filter and programmable logic
8F010F1172 BI16-CPL BI16 signal with filter and programmable logic
(ii) Tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID: 200B02 to

200B0n)
(ii)-1 Before the filter
Table is the same as the table in previous section (i)-1.
(ii)-2 After the filter

(ii)-3 The ends of binary input circuits

- 380 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.4.8 Settings of binary output circuits

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID 200B01)
Default setting
Units
Setting item Range Contents Notes
value
BO1 BO1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary output enable Off

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - First Data ID as input signal #1 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Second Data ID as input signal #2 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal3 ditto - Third Data ID as input signal #3 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal4 ditto - Forth Data ID as input signal #4 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal5 ditto - Fifth Data ID as input signal #5 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal6 ditto - Sixth Data ID as input signal #6 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal7 ditto - Seventh Data ID as input signal #7 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal8 ditto - Eighth Data ID as input signal #8 for Logic gate Not assigned
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Operation selection in Logic gate AND
TIMER-SW Off / Delay / Dwell / Latch - Selection of Logic circuit Off
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.000
Reset signal (Data-ID from other FBs) - Reset signal selection for "Latch" circuit Not assigned
Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Keying Data ID#2 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
….. …… ……. ……. ……..

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
……. ……. ……. …….
- 381 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID

200B02 to 200B0n)
Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in section (i))
- 382 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.4.9 Data IDs of binary output circuits

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
(i)-1 Before the contact-driver
 Signal monitoring points (before the contact-driver)
8002001112 BO1 BO1 signal
8902091112 BO10 BO10 signal
8A020A1112 BO11 BO11 signal
8B020B1112 BO12 BO12 signal
8C020C1112 BO13 BO13 signal
8D020D1112 BO14 BO14 signal
8E020E1112 BO15 BO15 signal
8F020F1112 BO16 BO16 signal
8002101112 BO17 BO17 signal
8102111112 BO18 BO18 signal
(i)-2 After the contact-driver

 Signal monitoring points (after the contact-driver)
8002001113 BO1 RB BO1 driver read signal
8A020A1113 BO11 RB BO11 driver read signal
8B020B1113 BO12 RB BO12 driver read signal
8C020C1113 BO13 RB BO13 driver read signal
8D020D1113 BO14 RB BO14 driver read signal
8E020E1113 BO15 RB BO15 driver read signal
8F020F1113 BO16 RB BO16 driver read signal
- 383 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(i)-3 Connection points for the PLC

310200E11D BO1-SOURCE BO1 output command by PLC-logic
31020AE11D BO11-SOURCE BO11 output command by PLC-logic
31020BE11D BO12-SOURCE BO12 output command by PLC-logic
31020CE11D BO13-SOURCE BO13 output command by PLC-logic
31020DE11D BO14-SOURCE BO14 output command by PLC-logic
31020EE11D BO15-SOURCE BO15 output command by PLC-logic
31020FE11D BO16-SOURCE BO16 output command by PLC-logic
(ii) Tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID: 200B02 to

200B0n)
(ii)-1 Before the contact-driver
(ii)-2 After the contact-driver

(ii)-3 Connection points for the PLC

- 384 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.5 Power supply module (PWS)

The power supply module (PWS) consists of a DC/DC converter and line noise filters. The
input range rating of the PWS is 110 to 250 V DC.
Alpha-numeric reference of PWS. Sign “*” is
substituted for actual slot location number.4
Upper block
is designated
“1 to 20” T*
PWS
*
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
4
9
10 FAIL15
11 3
12 Terminal screw
1
13 number
14 Terminal
15 screw
16 number
17 8
18
19 10
20 Lower block
is FAIL25 9
designated
“21 to 40” 7
21
22
Terminal screw
23
24 number
25 29
26 Positive(+) DC
/
30
27
DC
28
29 Negative(−) 31
30 32
31
32 35
33 36
Short wire1 34 Short wire1
35 E 37
36
37 38
38
Short-wire2 39 Short wire2
40
FG
FG
E3
Frame earth Screw M5 screw for case earthing3
Terminal and Earthing screws Schematic diagram
Figure 4.5-1 PWS terminal block (Rear view)
PWS consists of a pair of terminal blocks4 (which are labeled with alpha-numeric
reference “T*”; a number replaces the asterisk “*” to designate the slot numbers.) The left of
Figure 4.5-1 shows the PWS terminal blocks, and the schematic figure for PWS is also shown
on the right.
Terminal screws No. 1 to 4 (FAIL1) and No. 7 to 10 (FAIL2) are provided to output the
385
6F2S1890 (0.21)
failure results of the automatic supervision function5. Terminal screws No. 29(+) and 31(−) are
linked to the power supply. Other terminal screws No. 30(+) and 31(–) are also provided for
the power terminal and are used when bus distribution is required or when the safety
improvement of the cable capacity is required because the power cable is thin. Terminal screw
No. 38 and FG, by default, are linked with a short-wire and also terminal screw No. 35 and
terminal screw No. 37. The user should connect the IED case to the earth with the earth screw.
The other terminal screws are not used.
The actual terminal slot location is also found in external connection figures. (See
Appendix: Typical External connection)
Table 4.5-1 PWS specifications

Input voltage Voltage fluctuation
Description
rating6 permissible
Input voltage (110/125Vdc, 220/250Vdc) is available
DC: 110 to 250V DC: 88 to 300V where the voltage varies in ±20% of the rated
voltage (110V× 80% to 250V×120%).
CAUTION
1Note: The connection (triplet lines) between terminal screw No. 35 and terminal screw
No. 37 is made with a short-wire, which is installed by the manufacturer. The user
should remove this short-wire when undertaking a withstand voltage test for the
IED. Remember that the user should reconnect the terminals with this short-wire
after the test.
2Note: The connection (double lines) between terminal screw 38 and screw labeled “FG” is
made with a short-wire by the manufacturer.
3Note: For installation, the user should connect the case earth screw labeled “E” to the
protective earth of the panel or others using earthing wire, such that its
cross-section is AWG9 or larger.
4Note: The terminal block is made by PHOENIX CONTACT®. This model is designated
“FRONT-MSTB 2.5/20-STF 5.08”. The user can connect a cable to this terminal
directly without a cable ferrule; hence, the recommended cables are AWG12 to
AWG24 and their stripping lengths are 10mm. Use “AI2.5-10BU” ferrule for
AWG14 (cross section 2mm2) or “AI1.5-10BK” ferrule for AWG16 (cross section
1.25mm2) when the user wishes to use a cable ferrule made by PHOENIX
CONTACT®.
5Note: See Chapter Automatic supervision function for more information.
6Note: We do not guarantee the operation for the AC power source.
386
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.6 Human Machine Interface (HMI)

4.6.1 Outlook
Figure 4.6-1 shows the outlook of human machine interface module (HMI) on the front panel.
The HMI has a screen (standard LCD or large (MIMIC) LCD), LED indicators (#1– #26),
operation keys, function keys (F1–F7), monitoring jacks (Term A/B/C) and a USB port. The
LCD/MIMIC can display information; e.g. IED operation menu, status, setting data,
monitoring, fault records and others. We shall see the menus on the display in Chapter User
interface later. A USB port in B-type is provided for the connection to the PC. Thus, the user
can connect the engineering tools (GR-TIEMS®) or the PLC editor (MULTIPLOG®) with the
IED via the USB port.
LED indicators
(#1–#26) Screen
Indicator label
Operation keys
Function keys
(F1–F7)
Monitoring jacks
(Term A/B/C) USB port
Figure 4.6-1 HMI on front panel
- 387 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.6.2 LED Indicators

The LED indicators #1 and #2 are used to indicate the IED statuses. The others (#3 to #26)
are provided to indicate statuses, which the user wishes to check; the settings or by the PLC
function can control to indicate the statuses. The user can make a new indicator label using
the label maker of the GR-TIEMS®. (See Chapter Engineering tool)
The LED indicators‡ (#3 to #26) are also provided as user-programmable indicators.
Figure 4.6-2 shows the schematic diagrams. Each LED indicator can be lit and controlled
using a logic-gate-switch setting and others. For simplicity, we discusses setting the LED
indicator #3 only, but the user can take account that setting the other LED indicators (#4 to
#26) is the same as the #3. Table 4.6-1 shows the LED indicator settings; Table 4.6-2 shows
the signal monitoring points on all LED indicator logics.
‡Note:Setting menus of the LED indicator are also discussed in Chapter User interface:
I/O setting sub-menu.
(i) Selection of input signals

The LED indicator (#3) is lit by entering signals from other functions; eight ports are provided
for the entering signals, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user should ensure
one or more DataIDs are set for the input-signal1 to input-signal8. Entering signals are
designated using DataIDs, respectively; the user should set respective DataIDs for the
settings [Input signal1] to [Input signal8].
(ii) Logic gate switch

In the LED indicator logic #3 a logic scheme is provide for the eight entering signals; the
entering signals are grouped by the selection using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the
user should set either AND, OR or XOR.
- 388 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
LED-03
3100031001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #3
t 0 0 t Normal
[Input signal 1] DRIVER
[Input signal 2] & AND ≥1 & [Logic Timer] ≥1
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s Inverse 0 t
1
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] 0.000-300.000s
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
[LOGIC-SW] Dwell & Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-04
3100041001
t 0 0 t Normal
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s Inverse 0 t
1
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] 0.000-300.000s
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-26
31001A100
t 0 0 t Normal
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s Inverse 0 t
1
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] 0.000-300.000s
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Figure 4.6-2 LED indicator logics (#3 to #26)
(iii) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

For the LED indicator logic #3 the user can use an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer; both
are used to adjust the timing for lighting the LED indicator #3. The user should set their
respective time values for settings [On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(iv) Logic level inversion

On the LED indicator logic #3 the entering signal is inverted by the logic inversion function;
inverting an entering signal is carried out when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch
[INVERSE-SW]. Set Normal for the scheme switch when logic inversion is not required.
- 389 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(v) Logic timer switch

The LED indicator #3 can have programmable reset characteristics using scheme switch
[TIMER-SW]. Four types are available: (1) dwell type, (2) delay type, (3) latch type, and (4)
instantaneous type:
(v)-1 Instant type

When required not to have the below characteristics (v)-2, (v)-3, and (v)-4, the user should set
Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
(v)-2 Delay type

If the user requires lighting the LED indicator with a delayed characteristic, the user should
set Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer].
(v)-3 Dwell type

For instance, if the user requires lighting the LED indicator as a one shot pulse, the user
should set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using
setting [Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value
in the setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other
hand, if the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width
will be equal to the width of the input signals.
(v)-4 Latch type

If the user requires lighting the LED indicator to be removed by a reset signal, the user
should set Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW]; the user should set the Data ID of the reset
signal for setting [Reset signal]. Since lighting the LED indicator is cleared with the Data ID,
the user should determine the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the
signal monitoring point for each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
(vi) Selection of the LED color

For the LED indicator #3, color selection of either RED/GREEN/YELLOW is possible using
the setting [Color].
- 390 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 4.6-1 Settings of LED indictors #3 to #26 (Function ID: 201B01))
Default setting
Setting items Range Units Contents
value
LED#3 Color RED / GREEN / YELLOW - LED#3 color selection RED

Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED3 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on LED#3 AND
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on LED#3 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on LED#3 0.00
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of LED#3 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on LED#3 Off
Logic Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.00
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) - Setting Data ID for "Latch" circuit (No Assigned)
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED#4 (No Assigned)
……….

Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED#26 (No Assigned)
- 391 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 4.6-2 Signal monitoring points on all LED indicator (Function ID: 201B01)
3100021001 ERROR Error LED
3100011001 IN SERV In service LED
3100031001 LED-03 Output signal of the LED indicator #3
31000A1001 LED-10 Output signal of the LED indicator #10
31000B1001 LED-11 Output signal of the LED indicator #11
31000C1001 LED-12 Output signal of the LED indicator #12
31000D1001 LED-13 Output signal of the LED indicator #13
31000E1001 LED-14 Output signal of the LED indicator #14
31000F1001 LED-15 Output signal of the LED indicator #15
31001A1001 LED-26 Output signal of the LED indicator #26
- 392 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.6.3 Function keys with LEDs

The function keys (F1 to F7) are provided to jump to other menus during the LCD operation;
the jump destinations are already set as factory default (see Table 4.6-3). However, the user
can program the F1 to F7 keys to jump to user-preferred menus using settings. Incidentally,
the user can program the function key so that a binary signal is generated when the user
presses the function key.
Table 4.6-3 Function keys and jump destinations (default)
Function LED lit when
Jump destination as default
Key# pressing
F1 Metering menu Yellow

F2 Fault Record menu Yellow
F3 Event Record1 menu Yellow
F6 Diagnostics menu Yellow
F7 (Not defined) Yellow
For testing, the user can also program to generate binary signals when the user presses
the F1 to F7 keys. The F1 to F7 circuits have LEDs; accordingly, the user can also program to
light the LEDs using the settings.
(i) Screen jump pressing the function key

The user can use the F1 to F7 keys as the user-preferred jump keys; nonetheless, although
their destinations have been set by the manufacture (see Table 4.6-3). Thus, e.g., when the
user wishes to use the F1 key to jump to the setting screen of the OC relay, set Screen jump
for scheme switch [Function] in the F1 key (see Table 4.6-6). Consequently the menu can be
jumped to the OC relay menu when pressing the F1 key. We shall see the setting in Chapter
User interface: Setting sub-menu: Configuration of Function keys.
(ii) Binary signal generated pressing the function key

When the user wishes to generate a binary signal upon occurrence of pressing the F1 key, set
Assign Signal for scheme switch [Function] in the F1 key. For instance, if the user wishes to
send a signal generated pressing F1 to the binary output circuit (BO1‡) at the IO#1 slot, set
the Data ID of “FUNC-KEY1(240001 310001730)” for the setting [Input signal 1] of the BO1‡
circuit. Note that the user should set On for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL] when the
connection is done using the setting [Input signal 1]. Figure 4.6-3 shows that a generate signal
is outputted at the FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL. Table 4.6-7 shows the other FUNC-KEY2 to 7
points. We shall see the setting procedure in Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu:
Signal control function.
- 393 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Function key logic for F1 Terminal and

(Function ID: 240001) BO1 circuit at IO_SLOT1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“BO1”
Setting Data ID “F1 Signal designated by
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112)
SIGNAL” for the Signal to the
[Input signal 1] device
“FUNC-KEY1” [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO1
& ≥1
Pressing the F1 key (240001_ 3100001730)
[Input signal 3]
“BO1-RB”
F1
& [BO1_CPL] On &
[Input signal 4] (200B01_8002001113)
Off
[Input signal 5]
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
“F1 SIGNAL”
Setting Data ID (240001_ 3100001737) PLC connection point in BO1
“BO1_SOURCE”
&
for the [Signal]† 200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
[Logic] Instant
Toggle
Figure 4.6-3 F1 key connected with the BO1‡

‡Note:The BO1 circuit is used just for an explanation; it is discussed in Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module.
†Note:When the user wishes to inject the signal at the PLC connection point of the
“BO1-SOURCE (200B01 31200E11D at the IO#1 slot)”, the user should set the
BO1-SOURCE (200B01 31200E11D) for the setting [Signal] of the F1 key. Then,
set Off for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]
The user can select either Toggle or Instant modes for the signal generation using
scheme switch [LOGIC], as shown in Table 4.6-4. Thus, the user can substitute “F1-SIGNAL
(240001 310001737)” for the “FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL (240001 310001730)”, provided the
Toggle mode is preferred. In the Table 4.6-7 the other FUNC-KEY2 to FUNC-KEY7 are
shown.
Table 4.6-4 Signal mode selection using setting [LOGIC]
Setting Generated signal corresponding to pressing the function key
Pressing Key
Toggle
Binary signal
Pressing Key
Instant
Binary signal
(iii) Lighting LEDs on F1 to F7

Figure 4.6-4 shows the F1 to F7 LED logics. Programing to light the LEDs (F1 to F7) is the
same as the programing of the LED indicators (#3 to #26) (for the programming, see section
4.6.2). As a default, e.g., the “FUNC-KEY1 (240001 310001730)” is set for the setting [Input
signal 1] of the F1 LED logic. The LED-F2 to F7 points are listed in Table 4.6-8.
- 394 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
31001B1001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] F1 LED logic
t 0 0 t Normal LED-F1
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s Inverse 0 t
1
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] 0.000-300.000s
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
31001C1001
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s Inverse 0 t
1
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] 0.000-300.000s
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
3100211001
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s Inverse
1 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] 0.000-300.000s
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Figure 4.6-4 LED logics on the function keys F1 to F7
Table 4.6-5 Settings of Function keys (Function ID: 240001)
Default setting
value
Screen Jump / Assign Signal /

Function - Operation mode for the F1 key Screen Jump
No Assign
F1
Signal (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the input on F1 key (No Assigned)
Logic Instant / Toggle - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 Instant
No Assign
F2
……….
No Assign
F7
- 395 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 4.6-6 Settings of LEDs on the Function keys (Function ID: 240001)
Default setting
value
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on F1 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on F1. (No Assigned)
F1 Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on F1. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 AND
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of F1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on F1 Off
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on F1 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on F1 0.00
……….
- 396 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 4.6-7 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
3100001737 F1 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F1 referring the setting [LOGIC]
3100001730 FUNC-KEY1 Signal generated directly when pressing F1
Table 4.6-8 Signal monitoring points for function LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
31001B1001 LED-F1 Signal generated during pressing the F1 key
31001C1001 LED-F2 Signal generated during pressing the F2 key
31001D1001 LED-F3 Signal generated during pressing the F3 key
31001E1001 LED-F4 Signal generated during pressing the F4 key
31001F1001 LED-F5 Signal generated during pressing the F5 key
3100201001 LED-F6 Signal generated during pressing the F6 key
3100211001 LED-F7 Signal generated during pressing the F7 key
- 397 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.6.4 Monitoring jacks

A monitoring jack including a LED is provided so that the user can monitor a binary signal on
the logic straightforwardly. For example, when the user wishes to monitor the operating state
of a relay function, set the signal number (Data ID) that the user wishes to monitor; then the
user can see lighting the LED when the relay is operated. Using with an oscilloscope, the user
can also observe the binary signal that comes from the monitoring jack; three monitoring
jacks (Term A, B, and C) are available on the front panel.
Table 4.6-9 Output terminals for signal monitoring (No default setting)
Jack Jack name LED Color Remarks
A Term A Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number

B Term B Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number
C Term C Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number
When the user wishes to test the phase-A element the OC1 relay using an oscilloscope,
for example, set the phase-A monitoring point (44001 8000011C20†) for the setting [Term A],
as shown in Figure 4.6-5. Consequently, the OC1 operating signal is outputted to the jack at
the Term A. The LED at the Term A is also lit in step with the output signal. The user can use
to monitor the phase-B and phase-C signals using by settings respective Data IDs for the
[Term B] and [Term C]. We shall see the menus for the Term A to Term C in Chapter User
interface: Setting sub-menu: Signal monitoring screen.
OC function
(Function ID: 440001) Monitoring jack (Function ID: 201301) Jacks and LEDs
Signal designated by
Term
440001 8000011C20 setting [Term A] DRIVER Signal to the
A oscilloscope
A
OC1 440001 8100011C21
B “TEST-A”
440001 8200011C22 (201B01_3100221001)
C
Term A LED
setting [Term B] DRIVER Term Signal to the
B oscilloscope
“TEST-B”
(201B01_3100231001)
Term B LED
setting [Term C] DRIVER Term Signal to the
C oscilloscope
“TEST-C”
(201B01_3100241001)
Term C LED
Figure 4.6-5 Monitoring logics A, B and C

†Note:The monitoring point is just selected for the explanation; the user can select a
monitoring point from the relay applications and the control and monitoring
applications. The monitoring points is listed as PLC monitoring points in each
function.
- 398 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 4.6-10 Settings of Monitoring jacks (Function ID: 201301)

Setting items Range Units Contents Default setting value
Term A (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term A (No Assigned)
Term B (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term B (No Assigned)
Term C (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term C (No Assigned)
Table 4.6-11 Signal monitoring points for monitoring jack LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
3100221001 TEST-A TEST-A
3100231001 TEST-B TEST-B
3100241001 TEST-C TEST-C
- 399 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.6.5 Operation keys

(i) L/R key
The IED has two LEDs on the L/R key; either LEDs is lit in response to a local mode or a
remote mode. Lighting the LED is instructed by the LOCRMT function. Table 4.6-12 shows
the signal monitoring points on the L/R LEDs.
Table 4.6-12 Signal monitoring points for L/R LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
3100251001 LOC LED Local
3100261001 REM LED Remote
(ii) Operation keys except L/R key

Like in the function keys (F1 to F7), the operation keys can provide signals when pressing the
keys; the user can monitor the signals at the signal monitoring points in Table 4.6-13.
Table 4.6-13 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
3100081730 CANCEL Key situation of CANCEL
31000E1730 CLEAR Key situation of CLEAR
31000D1730 CLOSE Key situation of CLOSE
31000F1730 DOWN Key situation of DOWN
3100071730 ENTER Key situation of ENTER
3100091730 HELP Key situation of HELP
3100111730 LEFT Key situation of LEFT
31000A1730 LOC/REM Key situation of LOC/REM
31000C1730 OPEN Key situation of OPEN
3100121730 RIGHT Key situation of RIGHT
3100101730 UP Key situation of UP
- 400 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.7 Clock function

Clock function (or time function) provides the time information for recording upon occurrence
of the fault; it includes a synchronization function when the reference clock is available out of
the IED. The clock is operated referring the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC‡) when the
UTC is selected; the clock can run in accordance with the user’s time zone and summer
time(DST)† by referring the UTC when the time zone and the DST are set. The explanation is
also found in Chapter User interface: Time sub-menu.
†Note:In other words, it is called “daylight saving time (DST)”. For setting, see section
4.7.5.
‡Note:For example, the Internet and World Wide Web standards run in the UTC. For
more information, see section 4.7.4.
4.7.1 Clock setting

The user can set the time using the time sub-menu as shown in Figure 4.7-1. The user also
can set the time using the GR-TIEMS†.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 4.7-1 Time sub-menu in Clock menu

†Note:The user should make the calibration the when the clock is set using the
GR-TIMES. This is because the transmission time is required from the PC to the
IED.
- 401 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.7.2 Time Synchronization

The synchronization function can run when a synchronized signal is provided for respective
IEDs; the user should select one of the following synchronization methods using the setting
[Time_Sync_Src]:
• SNTP method
• IRIG-B method
• Binary Input (BI) method
(i) Synchronization using SNTP

(i)-1 Example of SNTP synchronization
The SNTP method is possible when IEDs connect with time-servers. Figure 4.7-2 exemplifies
two servers are connected with the IEDs using the LAN.
Time server1 Time server2
LAN
IED_1 IED_2 …………. IED_n
Figure 4.7-2 Two time servers connected on the LAN
(i)-2 Setting procedure

The user should make the following steps in respective IEDs.
1) Set SNTP for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [SNTP].
2) Set the address of a time server using settings [Server1]. The settings [Server2],
[Server3], and [Server4] are provided for other time-servers.
3) Check to see that the SNTP is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure
4.7-3.
4) Check to see that the time zone and the DST are set correctly (see section 4.7.4 and
4.7.5).
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Check “SNTP” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
Figure 4.7-3 Time setting for SNTP
Table 4.7-1 Settings for the SNTP synchronization

Setting item Range Contents Setting example Notes
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method SNTP
- 402 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
SNTP Off /On Operation of SNTP ()On
Server1 000.000.000.000–255.255.255.255 Setting for Time server 1 197.1.23.11
(ii) Synchronization using IRIG-B

(ii)-1 Example of IRIG-B synchronization
The IRIG-B method is possible when a synchronization signal in the IRIG-B format is
provided. The synchronization signal is transferred using the IRIG-B000 module†.
IED
IRIG-B signal IRIG-B000†

generator Unit
Signal
A1
GND
A3
Figure 4.7-4 IED connected with the signal generator unit using IRIG-B000 module
†Note:For the technical information of the IRIG-B000 module, see Chapter Technical
description: Signal processing and communication module.
(ii)-2 Setting procedure

1) Set IRIG-B for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [IRIG-SYNC].
2) Check to see that the IRIG-B is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure
4.7-5.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
IRIG-B
Check “IRIG-B” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
Figure 4.7-5 Time setting for IRIG-B
- 403 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii)-3 Setting year in IRIG-B

When the IRIG-B data is generated in the IEEE C37.118 / IRIG-B000 format, the user should
set On for setting [USE_BCDYEAR]. Conversely, when the IRIG-B data with absence the
C37.118† is generated, Off should be set for the setting [USE_BCDYEAR].
†Note:The year information is generated from the IED clock itself when the C37.118 is
absent.
(ii)-4 Setting UTC/local time

When the IRIG-B data is generated in the UTC†, Off should be set for the setting
[USE_LOCALTIME].
Conversely, when the IRIG-B data is generated in the local time‡, the user should set On
for setting [USE_LOCALTIME]; the user should set Off for the setting [IS_UTC_base].
†Note:We shall see the settings of the UTS in section 4.7.4.

‡Note:In the IRIG-B signal generator unit, the DST settings should be corresponded to
the DST settings of the IED. We shall see the DST settings in section 4.7.5.
Table 4.7-2 Settings for the IRIG-B Time synchronization

Setting
example
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method IRIG-B
IRIG-SYNC Off /On Operation of IRIG-B On
USE_BCDYEAR Off / On Selection of IEEE C37.118/IRIG-B000 Off
USE_LOCALTIME Off / On Operation in the local time Off
- 404 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) Synchronization using BI signal

When accurate1Hz square-wave can be supplied as a reference clock, the clock function can
make the time synchronization. The 1Hz square-wave is transferred using a binary input
circuit (BI).
(iii)-1 Example of time synchronization via BI circuit

Figure 4.7-6 exemplifies that the 1Hz square-wave is provided via the BI1 circuit†.
IED
BI1
BI1A (200B01 8001001111)
1
2 BI1
3
4 BI2
5
6 BI3
7
8 BI4
9
10 BI5 Setting [BI_ID]
11
12 BI6
13
14 BI7
15
16 BI8
17
18 BI9 Clock
21
22 BI10
23
24 BI11
25
26 BI12
27
Signal generator 28 BI13
29
30 BI14
31
32 BI15
1Hz squire wave 33
34 BI16
35
36 BI17
37
38 BI18
IO#1
Figure 4.7-6 IED connected with the signal generator via BI module
†Note:The BI1 circuit is just used for the explanation; hence, an actual BI circuit should
be selected in accordance with wiring cables. For more information of the BI circuit,
see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module.
(iii)-2 Setting procedure

1) Set BI for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [BI-SYNC].
2) Check BI is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 4.7-7.
3) Set a Data_ID for setting [BI_ID]. For example, as shown in the Figure 4.7-6, when
the user wishes to inject the signal at the BI1 on the IO#1 slot, the user should set
- 405 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
BI1(200B01 8001001111) for the setting [BI_ID].

4) Set a time adjuster for the setting [SYNC ADJ]. For example, set a value (e.g.,
−0.050s) for setting [SYNC ADJ]. The setting is used when the clock function should
be synchronized before reaching the 1Hz square-wave due to the propagation or the
operating time on the BI circuit.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
BI
Check “BI ” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
Figure 4.7-7 Time setting for BI
Table 4.7-3 Setting items for the BI Time synchronization

TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method BI
BI-SYNC Off /On Operation of BI On
BI_ID [Preferred ID] Signal monitoring point 200B01 8001001111

−：Leading the clock
SYNC ADJ −0.050 to +0.050 Time adjust factor (in sec.) 0.000
+：Delaying the clock
- 406 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.7.3 Selection of date and time formats

The user can select user-preferred date/time format; Date_Fmt sub-menu is provided for the
selection of the format. For example, ‘March 24th 2014 10:48’ can be displayed when the
format “DDMMYYYY” is selected.
• “2014-03-24 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “YYYYMMDD”.
• “03-24-2014 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “MMDDYYYY”.
• “24-03-2014 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “DDMMYYYY”.
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 4.7-8 Setting screen of Date_fmt
- 407 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.7.4 Setting time zone

When the clock should run in the UTC, the user should set On for the setting [IS_UTC_base].
Additionally, the user should set the time zone† when the time should be displayed in the
Local standard time. The time zone is divided in every 15 minutes; the user can set it using
0.25 units (i.e., 15 min = 0.25 unit). For example, if that the IED is used in Venezuela
(UTC-04:30), the user should set “−4.50” for the setting, as shown Figure 4.7-9.
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
-4.50hour
Figure 4.7-9 Setting screen of Time zone
Table 4.7-4 Example time offsets and locations

Time offset† Example locations
UTC−10:00 United States (Hawaii)
UTC−07:00 United States (Arizona)
UTC−06:00 Canada , Costa Rica, El Salvador, Ecuador, Mexico,
UTC−05:00 Brazil (Acre), Colombia, Cuba, Jamaica, Panama, Peru
UTC−04:30 Venezuela
UTC−04:00 Bolivia, Brazil, Dominican Republic, Puerto Rico, Barbados,
UTC−03:00 Argentina, Brazil (Bahia, Pernambuco), Chile
UTC−02:00 Brazil (Fernando de Noronha)
UTC±00:00 United kingdom (DST), Iceland, Senegal, Saint Helena, Mali
UTC+01:00 Germany (DST), Hungary (DST), Italy (DST), France(DST)
UTC+03:00 Ethiopia, Iraq, Kenya, Madagascar, Russia, Saudi Arabia
UTC+04:00 Armenia, Azerbaijan, Oman, Seychelles, United Arab Emirates
UTC+05:30 India, Sri Lanka
UTC+07:00 Western Indonesia, Thailand, Vietnam, Cambodia, Laos
UTC+08:00 China, Malaysia, Philippines, Australia (Western Australia)
UTC+09:00 Japan, South Korea
UTC+10:00 Australia (Queensland)
†Note:Time zone is expressed in the difference between UTC and the local standard time.
Table 4.7-5 Setting time zone

Setting
example
IS_UTC_base On / Off Selection of either the UTC or the local time On
- 408 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.7.5 DST setting (Summer time setting)

When the summer time (DST) is applied in the clock function, the user should set the
beginning and the ending dates of the DST for the clock function. To use the DST in the clock,
the user should set On for the setting [Summer time].
Note: The clock function is not designed for particular DSTs such as they are depending
on the religious events and the astronomy.
(i) DST set by the day (Mon to Sun) of week

For example, when the DST starts at 01:00 a.m. on Sunday of the fifth week in March and it
ends at 2:00 a.m. on Sunday of the fourth week in October, the user has the following settings.
Note that transposing the calendar is required, as shown in Figure 4.7-10; accordingly the
first of the month is located at the first row and the first column of the transposed calendar.
Beginning of the DST at 01:00 a.m. in Mar. 29 Ending of the DST at 02:00 a.m. in Oct. 25
March October
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
1 1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 26 27 28 29 30
30 31
Transposed Transposed
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Setting 3 for the [Start_Month] Setting 10 for the [End_Month]

Setting 5 for the [Start_Week] Setting 4 for the [End_Week]
Setting Sun for the [Start_Wday] Setting Sun for the [End_Wday]
Setting 1 for the [Start_Hour] Setting 2 for the [End_Hour]
Figure 4.7-10 DST setting examples by the day of week
(ii) DST set by the day (1st or 15th) of month

For example, when the DST starts at 01:00 p.m. on the first day in March and it ends at 3:00
p.m. on the middle day in October; the user has the following settings.
- 409 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Beginning of the DST Ending of the DST

at 01:00 p.m. in Mar. 1 at 03:00 p.m. in Oct. 15
Setting 3 for the [Start_Month] Setting 10 for the [End_Month]

Setting 1 for the [Start_Week] Setting 3 for the [End_Week]
Setting – for the [Start_Wday] Setting – for the [End_Wday]
Setting 13 for the [Start_Hour] Setting 15 for the [End_Hour]
Figure 4.7-11 DST setting examples by the day (1st or 15th) of month
(iii) Time shift

After setting the DST, the clock is forwarded by 1 hour at the DST start; the clock is backed by
1 hour at the DST end.
Table 4.7-6 DST settings
Setting
example
Summer time On / Off Enabling DST operation On
Start_Month 1 to 12 Set the beginning of DST in the month 3
Start_Week 1 to 5 Set the beginning of DST in the week 5

–, Sun, Mon,
Start_Wday Tue, Wed, Thu, Set the beginning of DST in the day Sun
Fri, Sat
Start_Hour 0 to 23 Set the beginning of DST in 24 hour-clock 1
End_Month 1 to 12 Set the end of DST in the month 10
End_Week 1 to 5 Set the end of DST in the week 5

–, Sun, Mon,
End_Wday Tue, Wed, Thu, Set the end of DST in the day Sun
Fri, Sat
End_Hour 0 to 23 Set the beginning of DST in 24 hour-clock 2
- 410 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
4.7.6 Setting
Setting of CLOCK (Function ID: 200301)
Default setting
value
Timezone -14.00 - 14.00 hour Time zone 0.00

--- / SNTP / BI /
TimeSyncSrc - Time sync source SNTP
MODBUS / IRIG-B
YYYYMMDD /
Date_fmt MMDDYYYY / - YMD/MDY/DMY YYYYMMDD
DDMMYYYY
Date_delimiter -///. - - or / or . -
Time_delimiter :/. - : or period :
Sec_delimiter ./, - . or , .
SummerTime Off / On - Summer time enable Off
IS_UTC_base Off / On - Is setting value base on UTC? On
Start_Month 1 - 12 - Start month 3
Start_Week 1-5 - Start week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue. /
Start_Wday - Start day of week Sun.
Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / Sat.
Start_Hour 0 - 23 - Start hour 1
End_Month 1 - 12 - End month 10
End_Week 1-5 - End week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue. /
End_Wday - End day of week Sun.
Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / Sat.
End_Hour 0 - 23 - End hour 1
Setting of SNTP_SYNC (Function ID: 200A01)

Default setting
value
SNTP Off / On - On
Server1 0 - 255 - 0. 0. 0. 0
Server2 0 - 255 - 0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 0 - 255 - 0. 0. 0. 0
Server4 0 - 255 - 0. 0. 0. 0
Setting of BI_SYNC (Function ID: 202001)

Default setting
value
BI SYNC Off / On - BI sync switch Off

BI_ID [Preferred ID] - Source BI Data ID
SYNC ADJ -0.050 to 0.050 s Time adjust factor 0.000
Setting of IRIG_SYNC (Function ID: 202101)

Default setting
value
IRIG SYNC Off / On - IRIGB sync switch Off

USE_BCDYEAR Off / On - Use BCD year code Off
USE_LOCALTIME Off / On - Use local time Off
- 411 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
5 Engineering tool
- 412 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
5.1 Overview of GR-TIEMS

When engineering, monitoring, record viewing, and test support functions are required in the
IED, the user can handle these advanced and integrated functions using GR-Series Toshiba
IED Engineering and Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS). The GR-TIEMS should be installed
into a PC prior to engineering. After that, the user can view the IED states (Table 5.1-1) on a
PC screen connected with the IED. The user can also program the IED using the GR-TIEMS.
Figure 5.1-1 GR-TIEMS® screen on PC
Table 5.1-1 Information on the GR-TIEMS

Information Displaying format
Display of voltage and current waveform Oscillograph, vector display
Symmetrical component analysis On arbitrary time span
Harmonic analysis On arbitrary time span
Frequency analysis On arbitrary time span
The GR-TIEMS is software to retrieve and analyze power system quantities, fault and
event records. The user can change the settings in the respective IEDs when the PC is
connected with the IED via a USB or a LAN. For more information in the GR-TIEMS
operations, see a separate manual “Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)”.
- 413 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
5.2 Connection
The user can connect the GR-TIEMS with the IED using either the LAN or the USB, as shown
in Figure 5.2-1.
IED
LAN
USB Cable
Personal Computer
Figure 5.2-1 GR-TIEMS connected with IED
5.3 Common tools

(i) Project management
Project files are required to engage sub-engineering tolls in the GR-TIEMS. The user can
manage to read/write the project file of the IED using the project management function. The
user can also see the contents of the project files.
(ii) Comparison
When the user wishes to get the comparison between respective IEDs, using the compare
function the user can get the comparison data for Setting, Setting I/O, Setting Event List,
Disturbance record binary signal, PLC, Interlock, Large LCD (MIMIC)†, Busbar Replica†,
IEC61850, IEC60870-5-103†, Modbus† and DNP3†.
(iii) Label creation

The user can make the labels for naming of LED and Function Keys on the IED front panel.
For more information with regard the LEDs and Function keys, see Chapter Technical
description: Human machine interface.
(iv) Logging
The user can view the recorded data with regard to the logging date/time. As the user can also
find operation recorded when an operator/engineer logs into the IED, analyzing a problem is
possible when an error is detected during the IED operations.
- 414 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(v) Double command block

For controlling, there is a principle that a first receiving-command shall be carried out
primarily. In other words, succeeding receiving-commands cannot have the right to run until
the first receiving-command is not completed to operate (that is, the principle of double
command blocking (DCB) is established). The principle is significant for the device
protections; hence, the user should DCB setting. For more information with regard to set the
DCB, see Chapter Control and monitoring application: Common controls.
5.4 Monitoring tools

The user can monitor status and measurement value obtained from the IED using the
monitoring tools. All signals monitored are tabulated in the monitoring list dialog. When the
user wishes to monitor a signal, select a signal in the monitoring list dialog after the operation
of the drag-drop on the monitoring window. The monitoring tools can generate an exporting
layout file in the CSV; it also can obtain the layout file in the CSV.
5.5 Record tools

(i) Fault record
Fault records are including measuring information before and after the occurrence of the
faults. Accordingly, the user can see information before the fault so that the user can analyze
the fault more precisely. The user can select a fault from the recorded lists; the user can save
it into the fault information file in the CSV. The user can also view the fault records when the
exported data file in the CSV are retrieved into the IED.
(ii) Disturbance record

Disturbance record is a kind of module information measured so that the user can see them in
several graphs: an oscilloscope chart, a harmonic graph, a 3D harmonic graph, a vector in
relay operation analysis (ROA) chart. The user can see disturbance records when the
disturbance records file in the COM-TRADE are provided. The user can also save disturbance
records into the COM-TRADE file.
(iii) Event list

The event list is recorded events information in the IED. The user can generate events
information file in the CSV; the user can retrieve events data file into the IED to view when
the file is in the CSV.
Note: In the IED the date and time is clocked in the coordinated universal time (UTC)
when the clock is selected to operate in UTC. In the record tools within the PC the
date and time is treated in the UTC. Notice that the time in the UTC is converted
for the local time when the recording time is displayed on the PC. For the clock
- 415 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
operation if the user selects neither the UTC, the time zone or the daylight saving
time (the summer time), displaying incorrect time may result in between the IED
and the PC. For more information about the clock and time, see Chapter Technical
description: Clock function. (4.0.5)
5.6 Generic configuration tools

(i) Setting (general setting for the relay and controlling functions)
The user can make the IED settings on the GR-TIEMS; the IED settings are transferred into
the IED by the connection between the IED and the GR-TIEMS.
(ii) Setting I/O

The user can see and make the setting with regard to binary input/output circuits (BIO†), DC
analog input circuits (DCAI†), LEDs using the setting I/O function. For more information
about the BIO, DCAI†, and the LED, see chapter Technical description.
(iii) Setting event list

The user can set information with regard to the event of an IED using the event list function.
(iv) Interlock configurator

The user can program conditions for executing to control the primary equipment using the
interlock (ILK) configurator. For example, controlling a circuit breaker (open and closing) is
significant; therefore note not induce mal-operations caused by improper conditions;
otherwise a severe fault/blackout results in. The ILK configurator can provides the user to
program conditions concerning the status of the power system. For more information of the
ILK, see chapter Control and monitoring application.
5.7 IEC 61850 configuration tool

The user can configure conversion data for the IEC61850 communication†, provided the IED
exchanges the data with the SAS. The user also configures a logical device, a logical node,
Goose publish information, and Goose subscribe information. For setting and configuration
for the IEC61850 communication see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850
communication”.
†Note:The configuration of the IEC 61850 standard is dependent on the software and the
hardware configurations in the IED. Thereby, the user should understand that the
operations of the GR-TIEMS are in response to hardware/software configurations
(i.e., the configurations has been determined when the IED model is selected using
the ordering code, which is described in Appendix: Ordering code)
- 416 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
5.8 MIMIC configuration tool

When the IED has a large LCD (or MIMIC†), the user can create user-preferred screens using
the MIMIC configurator. The large LCD can display measurement values, diagrams and others.
†Note: The MIMIC tool is not available when the standard LCD is equipped for the IED.
- 417 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
6 PLC function
- 418 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
6.1 Overview of PLC function

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) software is used for configuring the Inputs/outputs
(I/Os), alarms, indications, recording and others. PLC logic consist of “timers”, “flip-flops”, and
logic gates “AND, OR, XOR, NOT”. The user can configure PLC-logic using the PLC editor
(MULTIPROG®), which should be installed in the user’s PC. Figure 6.1-1 shows the screen for
the PLC editor.
Figure 6.1-1 PC screen of MULTIPROG®
Note: For more information of PLC and MULTIPROG®, see separate manual Basic
manual: Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor (6F2S1904)).
- 419 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
6.2 Checking PLC errors

The Automatic supervision function† can report the error information when an error occurs in
the PLC logic. The error information is shown in the diagnostic sub-menu† on the IED screen
(see Figure 6.2-1); Table 6.2-1 shows the error codes and their contents. The error code
concerning the PLC is shown in the first row and the first column. When two or more errors
exist at the same time, the error code is given by the summation of the codes. That is, when
two errors (e.g., the Input DataID and the Output DataID) occur, the sum value “0x00000006”
is given on the sub-menu.
Table 6.2-1 Error code and their information

Error code Content of the error code
0x00000001 No PLC data exists in the IED.
0x00000002 Errors caused by the “Input Data ID (in the DIN function)‡
0x00000004 Errors caused by the “Output Data ID (in the DOUT function) ‡
0x00000008 Time over in the computation§
0x00000010 PLC stopped by the operation of the PLC editor
PLC data error 1/1

10:48
[Minor error]
[00000006] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
PLC error code‡
Figure 6.2-1 Error code at 1st row and 1st column on the monitoring sub-menu
†Note:The operation of the diagnostic sub-menu is discussed separately. See Chapter

User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
‡Note:The error code can be displayed when Data IDs are set erroneously.
§Note: Tasks corresponding to Main_1, Main_2, and Main_3 may be too large. (For more
information with regard to the task and the main, see Chapter PLC editing of the
separate manual)
- 420 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
6.3 PLC driver

Figure 6.3-1 illustrates that a function logic in the sub-CPU (CPM1 or CPX1) or a module is
required to operate in step with the PLC logic in the main-CPU (CPU1); hence, a PLC driver
is provided as one of coupling methods between CPUs and modules. The PLC driver is not
required to operate when both logics are placed at the same CPU (say, coupling means is
required among the main-CPU, the sub-CPU and modules). One hundred and twenty-eight
PLC drivers are provided in the function “PLC_DRV (Function ID: 230301)”; the PLC drivers
are denoted in type “BIT”.
CPU1 board Binary IO module

PLC_DRV Binary output circuits
PLC logic
programmed by BIT_xx_x
the user HMI module
LEDs
A function
PLC connection point
CPM1 or CPX1 board
Figure 6.3-1 Communication between boards operated by the BIT
- 421 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 6.3-1 PLC drivers

 Monitoring point at PLC Driver
PLC_DRV (Function ID: 230301)
Name Element ID Description
BIT_00_0 8810101BB0 Reserved for OC
BIT_00_2 8A10101BB2 Reserved for OC
BIT_00_3 8B10101BB3 Reserved for OC
BIT_00_4 8C10101BB4 Reserved for OC
BIT_00_5 8D10101BB5 Reserved for OC
BIT_00_6 8E10101BB6 Reserved for OC
BIT_00_7 8F10101BB7 Reserved for OC
BIT_01_2 8210101BBA Reserved for OC
BIT_01_3 8310101BBB Reserved for OC
BIT_01_4 8410101BBC Reserved for OC
BIT_01_5 8510101BBD Reserved for OC
BIT_01_6 8610101BBE Reserved for OC
BIT_01_7 8710101BBF Reserved for OC
BIT_02_0 8810111BB0 Reserved for EF
BIT_02_2 8A10111BB2 Reserved for EF
BIT_02_3 8B10111BB3 Reserved for EF
BIT_02_4 8C10111BB4 Reserved for EF
BIT_02_5 8D10111BB5 Reserved for EF
BIT_02_6 8E10111BB6 Reserved for EF
BIT_02_7 8F10111BB7 Reserved for EF
BIT_03_2 8210111BBA Reserved for EF
BIT_03_3 8310111BBB Reserved for EF
BIT_03_4 8410111BBC Reserved for EF
BIT_03_5 8510111BBD Reserved for EF
BIT_03_6 8610111BBE Reserved for EF
BIT_03_7 8710111BBF Reserved for EF
BIT_04_0 8810121BB0 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_1 8910121BB1 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_2 8A10121BB2 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_3 8B10121BB3 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_4 8C10121BB4 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_5 8D10121BB5 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_6 8E10121BB6 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_04_7 8F10121BB7 Reserved for EFIn
BIT_05_0 8010121BB8 Reserved for OCN
- 422 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

BIT_05_1 8110121BB9 Reserved for OCN
BIT_05_2 8210121BBA Reserved for OCN
BIT_05_3 8310121BBB Reserved for OCN
BIT_05_4 8410121BBC Reserved for OCN
BIT_05_5 8510121BBD Reserved for OCN
BIT_05_6 8610121BBE Reserved for OCN
BIT_05_7 8710121BBF Reserved for OCN
BIT_06_0 8810131BB0 (not used)
BIT_06_2 8A10131BB2 (not used)
BIT_06_3 8B10131BB3 Reserved for CBF
BIT_06_4 8C10131BB4 Reserved for CBF
BIT_06_5 8D10131BB5 Reserved for CBF
BIT_06_6 8E10131BB6 Reserved for CBF
BIT_06_7 8F10131BB7 Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_0 8010131BB8 Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_2 8210131BBA Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_3 8310131BBB Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_4 8410131BBC Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_5 8510131BBD Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_6 8610131BBE Reserved for CBF
BIT_07_7 8710131BBF Reserved for CBF
BIT_08_2 8A10141BB2 Reserved for CBF
BIT_08_3 8B10141BB3 Reserved for CBF
BIT_08_4 8C10141BB4 Reserved for CBF
BIT_08_5 8D10141BB5 Reserved for CBF
BIT_08_6 8E10141BB6 Reserved for CBF
BIT_08_7 8F10141BB7 Reserved for CBF
BIT_09_2 8210141BBA Reserved for CBF
BIT_09_3 8310141BBB (not used)
BIT_09_4 8410141BBC (not used)
BIT_09_5 8510141BBD (not used)
BIT_09_6 8610141BBE (not used)
BIT_09_7 8710141BBF Reserved for FRQ
BIT_10_0 8810151BB0 Reserved for FRQ
BIT_10_2 8A10151BB2 Reserved for FRQ
- 423 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

BIT_10_3 8B10151BB3 Reserved for FRQ
BIT_10_4 8C10151BB4 Reserved for FRQ
BIT_10_5 8D10151BB5 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_10_6 8E10151BB6 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_10_7 8F10151BB7 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_11_0 8010151BB8 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_11_2 8210151BBA Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_11_3 8310151BBB Reserved for FRQ
BIT_11_4 8410151BBC Reserved for FRQ
BIT_11_5 8510151BBD Reserved for FRQ
BIT_11_6 8610151BBE Reserved for FRQ
BIT_11_7 8710151BBF Reserved for FRQ
BIT_12_2 8A10161BB2 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_12_3 8B10161BB3 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_12_4 8C10161BB4 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_12_5 8D10161BB5 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_12_6 8E10161BB6 Reserved for DFRQ
BIT_12_7 8F10161BB7 Reserved for VPH
BIT_13_0 8010161BB8 Reserved for VPH
BIT_13_2 8210161BBA (not used)
BIT_13_3 8310161BBB (not used)
BIT_13_4 8410161BBC (not used)
BIT_13_5 8510161BBD (not used)
BIT_13_6 8610161BBE (not used)
BIT_13_7 8710161BBF (not used)
BIT_14_2 8A10171BB2 (not used)
7 Recording Function
- 424 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
The IED provides the following recording functions:

Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
In addition to being able to display these records on the IED screen they can also be
displayed on a local or remote PC. In a later chapter, the procedure used to view record data is
discussed. (See chapter User interface.)
7.1 Fault Recording

Fault recording is initiated by tripping commands generated by the IED. Fault recording can
also be started by a tripping command from an external main protection or PLC command by
user setting. Fault recording captures the following items for each fault:
Date and time of fault occurrence
Faulted phase
Operating mode
Fault location
Power system quantities
Up to eight most recent, faults are stored as fault records. After eight faults have been stored,
the oldest fault record is deleted and the latest fault record is then stored
Fault recording provides the following items for each fault:
Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock.
Faulted phase
The faulted phase is displayed when tripping by a distance-measuring relay; the faulted
phase is recorded.
Tripping phase
“Tripping phase” is displayed as the tripped pole of circuit breaker when a trip command is
issued.
Operating mode
Operating mode shows the element names of the protection function, which outputs the
tripping commands. The protection function can be selected by user setting.
- 425 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Power system quantities

The following power system pre-fault and fault quantities are recorded. (However, power
system quantities are not recorded for evolving faults.)
- Magnitude and phase angle of the phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc)
- Magnitude and phase angle of the phase-to-phase voltages (Vab, Vbc, Vca)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltages (V1, V2, V0)
- Magnitude and phase angle of the phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic)
- Magnitude and phase angle of the phase-to-phase currents (Iab, Ibc, Ica)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component currents (I1, I2, I0)
- Magnitude of phase of differential currents (Ida, Idb, Idc)
- Magnitude of residual differential current for REF (Id0)
- Phase of restraint currents for 87T and REF (Ira, Irb, Irc)
- Magnitude of residual restraint currents for 87T and REF (Ir0)
- Resistive and reactive component of phase impedances (Ra, Rb, Rc, Xa, Xb, Xc)
- Resistive and reactive component of phase-to-phase impedances
(Rab, Rbc, Rca, Xab, Xbc, Xca)
- Active power (P)
- Reactive power (Q)
- Active energy (Wh)
- Reactive energy (varh)
- Power factor (PF)
- Frequency (f)
- Frequency rate-of-change (Hz/s)
- Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)
- Apparent Power (S)
Recording pre-fault quantities in power system are performed at pre-defined time before
tripping (resetting); the user can set the pre-defined time. “10 seconds” is set as a default
value.
7.2 Event Recording

The “Event Record” menu has three parts: “Event Record1”, “Event Record2” and “Event
Record3”. In each “Event Record” menu, any event that occurs in the IED (such as controlling,
alarm, etc.) is recorded.
With the IED screen, the user can assign Data IDs to the event triggers and set the
- 426 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
status of the trigger response. It is possible to separate all events into the three menus by
using GR-TIEMS1. It is also possible to set the name of the event and other information.
1Note: For further information on GR-TIEMS, see the separate instruction manual
"GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)".
Each “Event Record” menu displays the date and time of the event occurrence. The
details of the operation are also displayed. In each “Event Record” menu, up to 256 items can
be set and up to 1024 records can be stored. If more than 1024 event records occur, the oldest
event record is deleted and the latest event record is stored. All the events are recorded in
milliseconds. A data ID can be assigned to an event trigger. The event trigger is responds to
the change in status of the data ID, such as on/off, open/close,
travelling0/travelling1/travelling2, etc.
The user can clear “Event Record1”, “Event Record2”, and “Event Record3”. Note that
the user should clear these records individually when they wish to clear2. That is, it is not
possible to remove all three-event records at once. (See chapter User interface: Display of
Event Records.)
2Note: When the user selects bulk clearing, it removes all records (including fault records
and disturbance records) at once.
7.3 Disturbance Recording

Disturbance recording can commence when either of the following three states occurs: (1) the
issue of a trip command, (2) the operation of the OC relay, or (3) triggers fed by user settings
(up to four triggers are available).
The disturbance recording can acquire both analog items and binary times. These items
are stored in the IED based on sampling resolution. (The number of samples per cycle is
either 24 or 48; the user can set this number.)
The number of binary items can be up to 256. The user can set the number as required.
The user can assign any binary item to disturbance recording. The binary item relates to a
Data ID. The Data ID can be set from the IED screen or by using GR-TIEMS. The user can
also change the name of the binary item using GR-TIEMS.
The IED screen can display the analog items. It is possible to configure the IED screen
so that it does not display the analog items.
- 427 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
The IED screen shows the number of disturbance records, whereas the user can see the
detail of the disturbance records using GR-TIEMS. The information displayed includes the
following data: the records that have occurred, maximum number of stored records, date and
time when the disturbance recording occurs. The data is stored is in COMTRADE format.
The recording time can be set from 0.1s to 10.0s and the default setting time is 3.0s. The
pre-fault recording time can be set from 0.1s to 10.0s and the default setting time is 0.3s. The
pre-fault recording time is included in the recording time and the user can obtain the pre-fault
records as required.
The number of analog items, binary items, and the recording time limits the number of
disturbance records. The user can set this number. The default number of disturbance records
differs depending upon power system frequency, as shown in Table 7.3-1.
Table 7.3-1 Number of binary items and recording time
Number of Recording Number of Stored Records
Number of
Analog Items Binary Items Time 50Hz 60Hz
1s 220 180
10 (≤)256 3s 70 60
5s 40 35
Note: If the number of analog items and recording time setting are changed, the records
stored so far are deleted.
- 428 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
7.4 Data ID
FAULT_RECORD (Function ID: 200602)
ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 802000E001

FAULT_RECORD (Function ID: 200602)
ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 8020001001
FAULT RECORD TRIG1 8000011001
FAULT RECORD TRIG3 8200031001
FLTRCDING 8020101001
FR_CLR 3000001001

DISTURB_REC (Function ID: 200401)
DSTRING 80A0041001
DSTR_CLR 30A0001001
DSTR_MADE 80A0031001
DSTR_MAX 32A0011001
DSTR_NUM 32A0021001

EVENTRECORD (Function ID: 200710)
ER1_CLR 3001001001
ER2_CLR 3002001001
ER3_CLR 3003001001
- 429 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
8 Metering Function
- 430 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
The metering function examines the values of present current. These data examined are
displayed on the IED screen or on a maintenance PC.
8.1 Display of current metering

The AC analogue input data is continuously monitored in the IED. The following data is
displayed on the IED screen. The user can monitor the data using a local/remote PC. The data
is updated every second. Minimum, maximum and mean values of these can also be
monitored.
 Voltages1
 Currents1
 Active/reactive/apparent power2
 Phase factor
 Frequency
 Wh, varh2
 Differential and restraint currents for 87T and REF1
1Note: The user can select to display values based on either the primary side or the
secondary side of the VCT. Screen menu “Setting–>Metering–>Display value” is
provided to select primary or secondary values. For the procedure used for
selection, see Chapter User interface: Setting submenu.
2Note: A displayed value is based on the primary side only.
- 431 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9 Automatic supervision
- 432 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.1 Outline of automatic supervision

In the power system the protection function is not required to be operating during unfaulted
conditions. That is, the protection function should be in calm for the unfaulted conditions, but
it has got to start its function immediately upon occurrence of the fault. Therefore, as for the
operation of the protection system, the detection of an unhealthy state, such as malfunction or
errors in the hardware or the software, is requisite within the IED. The automatic supervision
function is designed to detect the unhealthy state within the IED; the following concepts are
taken into account:
 The operation performance in the protection system should not be distorted.
 Supervision should be carried out by itself without a failure whenever possible.
 A failure should be identified straightforward upon occurrence of the failure.
(i) Error levels

In the applications and the hardware, a number of items are supervised as for detecting the
operation failure; hence, the results of the supervision function have got to be grouped and
they should be classified into five error-levels to identify the error degree straightforward:
warning (level 5=the minor error) to the serious error (level 1=the crucial error). Incidentally,
zero (level 0) can be identified as no error. Table 9.1-1 shows the errors grouped by the error
degree. As settings for grouping are provided, the user can also select a user-preferred degree
for each error arbitrarily. If a number of failures occur on several levels at the same time, the
automatic supervision function picks the heaviest error among them to represent the error
inside of the IED.
Table 9.1-1 Meanings and error degree in the supervision function

Levels Degree of error Example failures and errors
1 Serious error Fatal failures such as the memory errors within the IED
2† Serious error (Comm.) Failures on the communication
3† Minor error Failure on the LAN (Ethernet) communication
4 Alarm Minor errors such as erroneous settings performed by users
5 Warning Detection of warnings classified by the user using settings
(0) (No error) (No error exists)
†Note:Level 2 and level 3 are shown, but the difference between the level 2 and the level 3
not given; thus, we can take the both having the same degree.
(ii) Error outputs by the LED and the screen

The IED has LEDs and the LCD screen† so that the automatic supervision function issues a
result for the LEDs and the LCD screen. When the IED is linked with the SAS, it is possible to
transfer the result for it using the communication system. Table 9.1-2 shows that which
indicators are used for results generated within the automatic supervision function.
- 433 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 9.1-2 Displays on LEDs, LCD, and SAS

Levels “In service” LED “Error” LED Error message on LCD
1 Off On Displayed by the level
5 On Off Displayed by the level
0 On Off (Not displayed)
†Note:For more information, see Chapter User interface: Outline and Diagnostics.
‡Note:It is depending on the degree of the communication failure.
The detail information, if provided, is also shown in Diagnostics of the Monitoring

sub-menu† on the LCD screen† (see Figure 6.2-1); Table 6.2-1 exemplifies six detail
information, which the user can examine carefully using the hexadecimal number.
CP1M(ROM/RAM) error 1/1

10:48 Error indicted by the automatic supervision
[Serious error]
[00000011] [01234567] Error degree (level) displayed

[01234567] [01234567]
Detailed information in Hexadecimal dump
[01234567] [00000000] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
[ “Top left” ][ “Top right” ]
[ “Middle left” ][ “Middle right” ]
[ “Bottom left” ][ “Bottom right” ]
Figure 9.1-1 Example error codes and detailed information on Diagnostics sub-menu
†Note:The operation of the diagnostic sub-menu is discussed separately. See Chapter
User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Diagnostics.
Table 9.1-3 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in the ROM and the RAM error (example)
Display area Meaning of the information
Top left Bit 0: Read error in ROM. Bit 1: Mismatch exists in both ROM and RAM
Top right Address in ROM
Middle left Address in RAM
Middle right Value in ROM
Bottom left Value in RAM
Bottom right (No message is displayed)
- 434 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) Error outputs using binary output circuits

The automatic supervision function drives a contact of the power supply module (PSW†) when
errors without the warning occur; additionally, binary output circuits (BOs‡) will be locked
out to drive once the serious error (level 1=the crucial error) is detected, as shown in Table
9.1-4.
Table 9.1-4 Contact states on the PSW and BO
Levels FAIL outputs on the PSW† Operation of the BO‡ being locking out
1 Closed (at N/C contact ) Locked out (the last state are kept)
2 Closed (at N/C contact ) Not locked out
5 Open (at N/C contact) Not locked out
0 Open (at N/C contact) Not locked out
(iii)-1 Contact outputs by the PSW†

If errors on the level 1 to 4 are detected by the automatic supervision function, the
normally-closed-contact (N/C) on FAIL1 and FAIL2 terminals are closed. On the other hand,
the N/O contacts are not closed on the level 5 (including the level 0), as shown in Table 9.1-4.
(iii)-2 Locking out of the BO circuit‡

The BO is locked out to operate when the error on the level 1 occurs. Note that the trip signal
generated with the BO circuit will be stopped for the error level 1; it the error removed, the
operation is recovered.
†Note:The PSW are discussed in Chapter Technical description: Power supply module.
‡Note:BO is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Binary output circuit.
(iv) Affection of the application operation by the error levels

Table 9.1-5 shows that the error levels influence both the relay application and the control
and monitoring application.
Table 9.1-5 Operation states in the IED applications affected by the error levels
Levels Relay applications Control and monitoring applications Notes
1 Stopped Stopped
2 Not affected† Not affected
3 Not affected Stopped
4 Not affected Not affected
5 Not affected Not affected
0 (Nothing) (Nothing)
†Note:The level2 is just provided for the application using the communication.
- 435 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2 Generic supervision tasks

Displaying errors regarding to common problems are summarized in Table 9.2-1; the error is
cleared when recovered
Table 9.2-1 Supervision items and error levels for generic

Err. LED
Sec. No. Supervision items(Screen message) LVL. In ERR
9.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM (ROM/RAM error) 1 Off On
9.2.2 Check-sum error (SUM error) 1 Off On
9.2.3 Verifying program codes (CPU error) 1 Off On
9.2.4 Monitoring interruption (NMI error) 1 Off On
9.2.5 Supervision of RAM (RAM error) 1 Off On
9.2.6 Supervision of ECC memory (ECC error) 1 Off On
9.2.7 Sampling error (SMP error) 1 Off On
9.2.8 Detection of sub-CPU not operated (Stopped error) 1 Off On
9.2.9 Supervision of A/D accuracy on VCT (ACC) 1 Off On
9.2.10 Supervision of MRAM memory (MRAM) 1 Off On
9.2.11 Failure on binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error) 1 Off On
9.2.19 Malfunction on the human machine interface (HMI error) 1 Off On
9.2.20 Parameter error in the settings (Setting error) 1 Off On
9.2.21 Verification of DPRAM on sub-CPU (DPRAM error) 1 Off On
9.2.22 Clock error (RTC error) 3 Off On
9.2.23 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error) 3 Off On
9.2.24 Detection of a failure in the circuit breakers (CB fail) 3 Off On
9.2.25 Failure in the disconnectors (DS fail) 3 Off On
9.2.26 Data error in PLC function (PLC data error) 3 Off On
9.2.27 Pinging problem for the first address (LAN1 ping error) 3 Off On
9.2.28 Pinging problem for the second address (LAN2 ping error) 3 Off On
9.2.29 Irregular data in the 61850 settings (Data(commslv) error) 3 Off On
9.2.30 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) 3 Off On
- 436 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM (ROM/RAM error)

The ROM and RAM on the CPU module is verified every around two minutes; the error
message is displayed when the error is found by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on
the RAM and the ROM is carried out cyclically. If the error is detected, the IED begins to
restart its operation automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU
modules1; hence, the error detection is carried out in each CPU module.
1Note: The kinds of the CPU modules are discussed in Chapter Technical description:
Signal processing and communication module: Processing module.
(ii) Error message

When the function operates and detects errors, an error message can be shown at the LED
and the LCD.
Table 9.2-2 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ROMRAM
Message and level Meaning of the information
Mismatch between the RAM and ROM detected on the
following module instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP*_ (ROM/RAM) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Error level Serious error (Level 1)
Table 9.2-3 Detailed information in CHK_ROMRAM

Display area Meaning of the detailed information
Digit 0: ROM read error
Top left
Digit 1: ROM RAM mismatch
Top right ROM address
Middle left RAM address
Middle right ROM value
Bottom left RAM value
Bottom right (No information displayed)
- 437 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.2 Check-sum error (SUM error)

The check sum in the memory on the CPU module is verified every around four minutes; the
error message is displayed when the error is found by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; the check-sum
errors on the memory is carried out cyclically. If the error is detected, the IED begins to
restart its operation automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU
modules1; hence, the error detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error
message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-4 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SUM
Sum error in the memory detected on the following CPU
module:
CP*_ (SUM) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 9.2-5 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_SUM

Bit 0: ROM read error
Top left
Bit 1: ROM RAM mismatch
Top right Sum value calculated
Middle left Sum value pre-programmed
Middle right Address information that read error occurs in the ROM
Bottom left (No information displayed)
- 438 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.3 Verifying program codes (CPU error)

The program code in the ROM and RAM on the CPU module is verified every times; the error
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; detecting Program
errors on the RAM and the ROM is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED
begins to restart its operation automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU
modules1; hence, the error detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error
message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-6 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PROGRAM
Error detection in the RAM and ROM located on the following
CPU module:
CPxx(CPU) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 9.2-7 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PROGRAM

Display area. Meaning of the detailed information
Bit 0: Address
Bit 1: Sub
Top left
Bit 2: Mul
Bit 3: Div
The others (No information displayed)
- 439 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.4 Monitoring interruption (NMI error)

The occurrences of non-maskable-interruptions (NMIs) on the CPU module are examined
every times; the interruption message is displayed when the interruption is triggered and
detected.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; detecting the
interruption carried out at any time. If the interruption is detected, the IED begins to restart
its operation automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU modules1; hence,
the detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made promptly
when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-8 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_NMI
Interruptions occurs on the following module instructed with
“CP*_” as follows:
CPxx(NMI) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 9.2-9 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in NMI

Top left NMI code
Top right LR register
Middle left SRR0 resister
Middle right SPP1 resister
Bottom left Stack pointer
Bottom right FRSCR register
- 440 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.5 Supervision of RAM (RAM error)

The read-write operation on RAM circuit of the CPU module is verified at any time; the error
(i) Error level

the RAM is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED begins to restart its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU modules1; hence,
the error detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made
promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-10 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RAM
Error detection in the RAM located on the following module
instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CPxx(RAM) error 1M: CPU1 module (main CPU)
1S: CPM1 module (sub CPU)
2M: CPX1 module (another main CPU)
Table 9.2-11 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_RAM

Top left Read value
Top right Write value
Middle left Error address
Middle right (No information displayed)
- 441 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.6 Supervision of ECC memory (ECC error)

The error detection on the error-correcting code memory (ECC memory) of the CPU module is
verified at any time; the error message is displayed when the error is found by the supervision
function.
(i) Error level

the ECC is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED begins to restart its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU modules1; hence,
the error detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made
promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-12 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ECC
Error in the ECC is detected on the following module instructed
with “CP*_” as follows:
CP*_ (ECC) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 9.2-13 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ECC

Top left 0080H (err_cnt)
Top right LR register
Middle left SRR0 register
Middle right ADDR
Bottom left DATA (H)
Bottom right DATA (L)
- 442 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.7 Sampling error (SMP error)

The sampling error is verified at any time; the error message is displayed when the error is
found by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; sampling errors is
checked every seconds. If the error is detected, the IED begins to restart its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs in respective CPU modules1; hence, the error
detection is carried out in each CPU module. Clearing the error message is made in a second
when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-14 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SMP
Sampling error detected on the following module instructed
with “CP*_” as follows:
CP*_ (SMP) error CP1M: CPU1 module
CP1S: CPM1 module
CP2M: CPX1 module
Table 9.2-15 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_SMP

Top left 1
Top right Diff time
Middle left Current timing
Middle right Pervious timing
Bottom left (No information is displayed)
Bottom right (No information is displayed)
- 443 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.8 Detection of sub-CPU not operated (Stopped error)

The operation on the sub CPU is monitored every five minutes; the error message is displayed
when the sub CUP is stopped.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; the detection is
carried out cyclically. If the error is detected, the IED does not restart its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs for respective sub CPU modules1; hence, the
error detection is carried out in each sub CPU module. Clearing the error message is made in
a second when the sub CPU runs again.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-16 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SUBCPU
Stopping detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ stopped error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1S: CPM1 module
Table 9.2-17 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_SUBCPU

Top left 1: Failure exists
Top right Value of the counter to check the renewal not being occurred
Middle left Value of the counter when stopped
- 444 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.9 Supervision of A/D accuracy on VCT (ACC)

It is possible to detect the deterioration of the analog to digital conversion in the VCT
module†.
†Note:For more information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module for AC analog input. The function can operate for respective
VCTs.
(i) Error level

For the operation, the user can set the error level when the function detects the error
concerning the operation. Generally, the error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1), as
default. For example, the user can program the level using setting [CHK_ACC1:LVl] when the
VCT module at the VCT#12 slot should be supervised. Set On for the settings
[CHK_ACC1:Sw]. One (1) second is defined to detect the failure by the manufacture; resetting
is performed in a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: The entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly when the error is detected.
2Note: For the slot location, see Chapter Technical description: IED case and module slot.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-18 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ACC
AI#x(ACC) error Detection of the VCT deterioration at #x slot
Table 9.2-19 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ACC

Bit 0: P error
Bit 1: N error
Bit 2: Neg error
Top left
Bit 4: P(H) error
Bit 5: N(H) error
Bit 6: Neg(H) error
Top right Plus value / Minus value
Middle left Plus rev value / (none)
Middle right Plus value / Minus value
Bottom left Plus rev value
Bottom right (No message displayed)
- 445 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.10 Supervision of MRAM memory (MRAM)

The error detection on the Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory (MRAM memory) of the
CPU module is verified every 1 second; the error message is displayed when the error is found
by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

the ECC is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED begins to restart its
operation automatically. The function supervise for the MRAM on the main CPU module1.
Clearing the error message is made in 1 second when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-20 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_MRAM
Error detection in the MRAM located on the following CPU
CPxx(MRAM) error module:
1M: CPU1 module (main CPU)
Table 9.2-21 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_MRAM

Top left Address at error occurs
Bit 0: Error detected with 0xaaaaaaaa
Top right
Bit 1: Error detected with 0x555555555
Middle left (No message displayed)
Middle right (No message displayed)
Bottom left (No message displayed)
Bottom right (No message displayed)
- 446 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.11 Failure on binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error)

To detect the operation failure in the first binary IO modules (BIO)†, a supervision function is
provided.
†Note:The function can operate for respective BIO modules mounted in the IED; the user
should have settings in them, which are located at the IO slot identified with the
number.
(i) Error level

default. For example, the user can program the level using setting [CHK_BIO1:LVl] when the
BIO module at the IO#12 slot should be supervised; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_BIO1:Sw]. One (1) second is defined to detect the failure by the manufacture; resetting
2Note: The location of the VCT slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description: IED
case and module slot.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-22 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO

BIO#1 error Detection of the BIO failure at IO slot#1
Table 9.2-23 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_BIO

Bit 0: CRC error
Top left Bit 1: Connection error
Bit 2: Read-back error
Top right Count number by the CRC error
Middle left Count number by the connection error
Middle right Count number by the read-back error
The others (No message displayed)
- 447 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

To detect the operation failure in the second binary IO modules (BIO)†, a supervision function
is provided.
number.
(i) Error level

(ii) Error message

and the LCD.


Bit 0: CRC error
- 448 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

To detect the operation failure in the third binary IO modules (BIO)†, a supervision function is
provided.
number.
(i) Error level

(ii) Error message

and the LCD.


Bit 0: CRC error
- 449 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

To detect the operation failure in the fourth binary IO modules (BIO)†, a supervision function
is provided.
number.
(i) Error level

(ii) Error message

and the LCD.


Bit 0: CRC error
- 450 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

To detect the operation failure in the fifth binary IO modules (BIO)†, a supervision function is
provided.
number.
(i) Error level

(ii) Error message

and the LCD.


Bit 0: CRC error
- 451 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

To detect the operation failure in the sixth binary IO modules (BIO)†, a supervision function is
provided.
number.
(i) Error level

(ii) Error message

and the LCD.


Bit 0: CRC error
- 452 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

To detect the operation failure in the seventh binary IO modules (BIO)†, a supervision
function is provided.
number.
(i) Error level

(ii) Error message

and the LCD.


Bit 0: CRC error
- 453 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

To detect the operation failure in the eighth binary IO modules (BIO)†, a supervision function
is provided.
number.
(i) Error level

(ii) Error message

and the LCD.


Bit 0: CRC error
The others 5 (No message displayed)
- 454 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.19 Malfunction on the human machine interface (HMI error)

Supervising the failure in the human machine interface (HMI) is provided.
(i) Error level

concerning the operation. Generally, the error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error1), as
default. However, the user can program the level using setting [CHK_HMI:LVl]; then, set On
for the setting [CHK_HMI:Sw]. Ten (10) seconds is defined to detect the failure by the
manufacture; resetting is performed in ten seconds when the failure is cleared.
2Note: The functions of the HMI is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Human
machine interface.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-38 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_HMI
HMI error Detection of the HMI failure
Error level Minor error (Level 3)
Table 9.2-39 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_HMI

Bit 0: Occurrence of the timeout for the LCD communication
Top left Bit 1: Format error in the format of the LCD communication
Bit 2: Communication error for the large (MIMIC) LCD
Top right Culminated value for the timeout
Middle left Counted value for the format error
Middle right Counter of the communication for the MIMIC
- 455 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.20 Parameter error in the settings (Setting error)

The values of the Settings are checked every 1 second; the error message is displayed when
the erroneous value is found.
(i) Error level

carried out cyclically. If the error is detected, the IED does not try to restart its operation
automatically. The function runs for the settings saved in the main CPU module1. Clearing
the error message is made in a second when the erroneous setting is removed.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-40 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SETTING
Setting error detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ (Setting) error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU1 module
Table 9.2-41 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_SETTING

Bit 0: Failure exists in the common settings
Top left Bit 1: Failure exists in the group setting
Bit 2; Erroneous data found in the initial setting
Top right Offset address corresponding to the failure in the common settings
Middle left Offset address corresponding to the failure in the group setting
Bit 0: Exec_tbl.cnf
Bit 1: Lcd_conf.cnf
Bottom left
Bit 2: g2minic.dat
Bit 3: guidance.dat
- 456 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.21 Verification of DPRAM on sub-CPU (DPRAM error)

The state of the dual-ported RAM (DPRAM) is checked every 20 seconds; the error message is
displayed when the erroneous state is found.
(i) Error level

carried out cyclically. If the error is detected, the IED does not try to restart its operation
automatically. The function runs for the DPRAM on the main CPU of CPU1 module1. Clearing
the error message is made in a second when the erroneous state is removed.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-42 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_DPRAM
Detection is performed o detected on the following module
CP*_ (DPRAM) error instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU1 module
Table 9.2-43 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_DPRAM

Top left Value of the counter to check the renewal not being occurred (=64H)
Top right Checked data
Middle left Inverted data retrieved from the opposite circuit module
- 457 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.22 Clock error (RTC error)

The state of the real time clock (RTC) is checked every five minutes; the error message is
displayed when the clock stops.
(i) Error level

concerning the operation. Generally, the error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), as
default, but the user can program the level using setting [CHK_RTC:LVl]; then, set On for the
setting [CHK_RTC:Sw]. Five (5) minutes is set to detect the failure by the manufacture;
resetting is performed in five minutes when the clock starts to operate again.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-44 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RTC
Error detection is performed on the RTC on the following CPU
CP*_ (RTC) error module:
CP1M: CPU1 module (main CPU)
Table 9.2-45 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_RTC

Top left “1” shows that the error exists in the RTC
Top right Time in the second when the RTC stopped
Middle left Time in the minute when the RTC stopped
- 458 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.23 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error)

The CT supervision is to examine whether the three-phase currents are balanced and the
current in zero-sequence is small very much. It secures the operation of the CT circuits†. By
monitoring of the currents flowing in the AC analog input circuits, it is also applicable to
detect the failure in the CT circuit securely. The failure is determined as Equation (9.2-1) is
satisfied.
Max(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) − 4 × Min(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) ≥ k 0 (9.2-1)
where,
Max (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): The largest amplitude among Ia, Ib, and Ic
Min (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): The smallest amplitude among Ia, Ib, and Ic
k0: 20% of the rated current†
†Note:As a couple of AC currents enter into the VCT module, the CT supervision may be
required to operate for respective CT circuits. The rated current above the equation
is defined with the setting of the VCT. For more information regarding the VCT,
see Chapter Technical description: Transformer module for AC analog input.
Setting is required to respective groups of the three-phase currents.
(i) Error level

default, but the user can program the level using settings [CHK_CT1:LVl] and the others; then,
set On for the setting [CHK_CT1:Sw] or whatever required. The time to detect can be
programmed using [CHK_CT1:Timer], etc., which can be set for 15 seconds as default. After
the error is cleared, resetting is carried out in the time that is the same as the setting time to
the detection.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-46 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CT
CTx error the extraordinary current flowing located at CTx
Table 9.2-47 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CT

N/A (No information is displayed)
- 459 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.24 Detection of a failure in the circuit breakers (CB fail)

Detecting the operation failure in the CB is achieved by the operation of the protection
common function (PROT_COMM†). Thus, the failure signal in the PROT_COMM is
transferred to the automatic supervision function and it is grouped into the error level
together with other error signals.
†Note:For more information about the PROT_COMM function, see Chapter Relay
application: Protection common. The function can operate for a couple of CTs.
(i) Error level

default, but the user can program the level using settings [CHK_CB1:LVl], etc.; then, set On
for the settings [CHK_CB1:Sw] or whatever required. The time to detect can be set using
[TCBSV], which is provided in the PROT_COMM function. If the error is cleared, resetting is
performed instantly.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-48 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CB
CBx fail Detection of the failure in the CBx
Table 9.2-49 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CB

- 460 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.25 Failure in the disconnectors (DS fail)

Detecting the operation failure in the DS is achieved by the operation of the protection
common function (PROT_COMM†). Thus, the failure signal in the PROT_COMM is
transferred to the automatic supervision function and it is grouped into the error level
together with other error signals.
†Note:For more information about the PROT_COMM function, see Chapter Relay
application: Protection common. The function can operate for a couple of DSs.
(i) Error level

default, but the user can program the level using settings [CHK_DS1:LVl] the others; then, set
On for the setting [CHK_DS1:Sw] or whatever. The time for the detection can be set using
[TDSSV], which is provided in the PROT_COMM function. After the error is cleared, resetting
is performed instantly.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-50 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_DS
DSx fail Detection of the failure located in the DSx
Table 9.2-51 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_DS

- 461 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.26 Data error in PLC function (PLC data error)

The error of the PLC function† is detected when the data coded by the PLC editor has an
error.
(i) Error level

default, but the user can program the level using setting [CHK_PLC_DAT:LVl]; then, set On
for the setting [CHK_PLC_DAT:Sw]. One-hundred-twenty (120) second is set to detect the
failure by the manufacture; resetting is performed in 60 seconds when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-52 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PLC_DAT
PLC data error Detection of the failure in the PLC function
Table 9.2-53 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ PLC_DAT

Top left †See chapter PLC function: Checking PLC errors.
The others (No information is displayed)
- 462 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.27 Pinging problem for the first address (LAN1 ping error)
Communication error on the LAN† is detected by pinging for the addresses instructed.
†Note:For more information about the LAN, see Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN
communication. For the information about the LAN hardware, see Chapter
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module. When two
LAN modules operates, the message is provided for the both.
(i) Error level

default, but the user can program the level using settings [CHK_PING1:LVl]; then, set On for
the settings [CHK_PING1:Sw]. One-hundred (100) second is set to detect the failure by the
manufacture; resetting is performed in 20 seconds when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-54 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PING
LAN1(ping) error Detection of the failure at the LAN module #1
Table 9.2-55 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PING

Top left Destination address for pinging
- 463 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.28 Pinging problem for the second address (LAN2 ping error)
Communication error on the other LAN† is detected by pinging for the addresses instructed.
†Note:For more information about the LAN, see Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN
communication. For the information about the LAN hardware, see Chapter
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module. When two
LAN modules operates, the message is provided for the both.
(i) Error level

default, but the user can program the level using settings [CHK_PING2:LVl]; then, set On for
the settings [CHK_PING2:Sw]. One-hundred (100) second is set to detect the failure by the
manufacture; resetting is performed in 20 seconds when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-56 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PING
LAN2(ping) error Detection of the failure at the LAN module #2
Table 9.2-57 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PING

Top left Destination address for pinging
- 464 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.29 Irregular data in the 61850 settings (Data(commslv) error)

The error† is detected when an inconsistency is found in the 61850 settings. Note that the
information for the error may vary on the communication protocol. Thus, the user should
figure out the irregular settings. The reasons for the error are shown below:
Table 9.2-58 Error reasons detected by the supervisor in CHK_CMLV
Reasons of errors
Function error found
Failure occurred on going through the selection process with regard to the protocol
Failure occurred on the initialization in the protocol process
Failure for opening file
Failure of access
No space left in the buffer
No space left in the buffer provided for the SSP mapping
Failure of memory allocation in the memory dynamically
Check sum errors
Not unfound about the searching object
Failure of the defining of data type
Erroneous index being used in the data for the protocol stack designated
Time out
Going through the process
Found invalid arguments
Found the data type not being supported
Failure of the acquisition of the authority right
Failure occurred on the setting process
Failure of the event registration
No event occurred
Restarting
Communication error
(i) Error level

default, but the user can program the level using setting [CHK_CMLV:LVl]; then, set On for
the setting [CHK_CMLV:Sw]. The error can be detected in two minutes after the IED is turned
on.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-59 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CMLV
Data(cmmslv) error Detection of the failure in the settings
Table 9.2-60 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CMLV

Top left Displaying the Data ID relating to erroneous mapping
Displaying the LN, DO, DA name in characteristic code having
Top right
erroneous mapping
Others No information displayed
- 465 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.30 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error)

Publishing error in the IEC 61850 communication† is detected when a GOOSE message is not
received.
†Note:For more information about GOOSE, see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC
61850 communication.
(i) Error level

default, but the user can program the level using setting [CHK_GOOSERCV:LVl]; then, set On
for the setting [CHK_GOOSERCV:Sw]. Detecting the error is expressed in five-minutes when
the IED detects no reception of the GOOSE. Resetting is performed in one-minute when the
GOOSE is stated to receive.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-61 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_GOOSERCV
LAN(GOOSE) error Detection of the failure in GOOSE
Table 9.2-62 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_GOOSERCV

Top left Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE subscribe information#1†
Top right Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE subscribe information#2†
Middle left Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE subscribe information#3†
Middle right Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE subscribe information#4†
Bottom left Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE subscribe information#5†
Bottom right Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE subscribe information#6†
†Note:“c000” is shown when no reception.
- 466 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.31 Detection of erroneous differential current in the DIF (Id)

Erroneous operations are monitored by the operation of DIFL-SV element† in the current
differential function (DIF); the automatic supervision function can alarm its erroneous
operation by the notification from the DIF function.
†Note:The DIF function has the supervision feature itself; hence, the user can program
the criteria for the supervision using settings [DIFL-IdSV] and [TDIFL-IdSV]; then
set On for the scheme switch [DIFL-IdSV-EN]. For more information about the DIF
supervision, see Chapter Relay application: Current differential protection for the
line: Differential current monitor.
(i) Error level

concerning the operation. Generally, the error level is set at level 3 (Minor error), as default,
but the user can program the level using setting [CHK_ID:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_ID:Sw]. The time for the detection can be set using [TDIFL-IdSV], which is set for 10
seconds as default. After the error is cleared, resetting is performed instantly.
(ii) Error message

and the LCD.
Table 9.2-63 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ID
Id error Detection of the erroneous differential current
Table 9.2-64 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ID

- 467 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.32 Setting
Setting of CHK_SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701)
Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes
CHK_SPSYNC1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

--- / Serious error / Serious error(Comm) /
CHK_ SPSYNC1:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Minor error / Alarm/ Warning
CHK_SPSYNC2:Sw Off / On Enable switch On
CHK_ SPSYNC2:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Setting of CHK_ACC (Function ID: 220E01)

CHK_ACC1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ ACC 1:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_ACC (Function ID: 220E01 and 220E02)


CHK_ ACC1:Lvl Error level Serious error

CHK_ ACC2:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221108)

CHK_BIO1:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#1 On

CHK_ BIO 1:Lvl Error level at BIO#1 Serious error
… … … …
CHK_ BIO8:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#8 On

CHK_ BIO8:Lvl Error level at BIO#1 Serious error
Setting of CHK_BIO (Function ID: 221104 to 221106)

CHK_BIO4:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#4 On

… … … …
CHK_ BIO8:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#8 On

- 468 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Setting of CHK_HMI (Function ID: 221301)

CHK_HMI:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ HMI:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701)

CHK_RTC:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_RTC:Lvl Error level Minor error
Minor error / Alarm / Warning
Setting of CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801 to 221804)

CHK_CT1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CT1:Lvl Error level Serious error
CHK_CT1:Timer 10 – 60 seconds Checking timer 15 seconds
CHK_CT4:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CT4:Lvl Error level Serious error
CHK_CT4:Timer 10 – 60 seconds Checking timer 15 seconds
Setting of CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)

CHK_POWER:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_POWER:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_CB (Function ID: 222001 to 222004)

CHK_CB1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ CB1 1:Lvl Error level Minor error
…. …. …. ….
CHK_ CB4:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ CB4:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_DS (Function ID: 221101 to 221104)

- 469 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Setting of CHK_DS (Function ID: 221101 to 221104)

CHK_DS1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_DS1:Lvl Error level Minor error
… …. …. ….
CHK_DS4:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_DS4:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_PLC_DAT (Function PLC_DAT: 223201)

CHK_PLC_DAT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_PLC_DAT:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_PING (Function ID: 223601 and 223602)

CHK_PING1:Sw Off / On Enable switch Off

CHK_PING1:Lvl Error level Minor error
PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192
PING_IP_ADRS2 0 - 255 168

Ping target IP address
CHK_PING2:Sw Off / On Enable switch Off

CHK_PING2:Lvl Error level Minor error
PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192

Ping target IP address
Setting of CHK_CMLV (Function ID: 224001)

CHK_CMLV_DAT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CMLV_DAT:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_GOOSERCV (Function ID: 223501)
- 470 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
CHK_GOOSERCV:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_GOOSERCV:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_DCAIO (Function ID: 222E01 and 222E08)

CHK_DCAIO1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ DCAIO 1:Lvl Error level Serious error
… …. …. …
CHK_ DCAIO8:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ DCAIO8:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_ID (Function ID: 221401)

CHK_ID:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ID:Lvl Error level Minor error
- 471 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
9.2.33 Data ID
CHK_ROMRAM (Function ID: 220601)
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT Executing counter
3210001001 RESULT Check result
3210011001 RES_INST Check result (instant)

CHK_SUM (Function ID: 220201)
3210101001 CHECKSUM
3210111001 CHECKSUMC
32E0001001 CHK_POINT
3210201001 LOADERSUM
3210121001 PROG_SIZE

CHK_PROGRAM (Function ID: 220301)
30E0001001 CHKPOINT test point1
30E0011001 CHKPOINT2 test point2
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter
3210001001 RESULT check result
3210011001 RES_INST check result(instant)

CHK_NMI (Function ID: 220401)

CHK_RAM (Function ID: 220601)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point
3210021001 ECC_SECNT ECC single error cnt
- 472 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

CHK_ECC (Function ID: 220602)

CHK_ SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701)

CHK_SUBCPU (Function ID: 220901 and 220902)

CHK_ ACC (Function ID: 220E01 and 220E2)
3210021001 RES_FAST check result(fast)

CHK_MRAM (Function ID: 220F01)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point

CHK_ BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221108)

CHK_ HMI (Function ID: 2201301)
- 473 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)


CHK_SETTING (Function ID: 221501)

CHK_DPRAM and CHK_EXDPRAM (Function ID: 221601 and 221602)

CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT Test point

CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801 to 221804)

CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)

CHK_CB (Function ID: 222001 to 222004)
- 474 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

CHK_CB (Function ID: 222001 to 222004)

CHK_DS (Function ID: 221101 to 222104)

CHK_PLC_DAT (Function ID: 223201)

CHK_PING (Function ID: 223601 and 223602)
EXEC_CNT 32FFFF1001 execute counter
RESULT 3210001001 check result
RES_INST 3210011001 check result(instant)

CHK_ CMLV (Function ID: 224001)

CHK_DCAIO (Function ID: 222E01 and 222E08)
311000131F ACC_ERR Executing counter
311000111A CONN_ERR
3110001215 CORDATERR
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT

CHK_ID (Function ID: 221401)
- 475 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

CHK_ID (Function ID: 221401)
- 476 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
10 Communication protocol
- 477 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
10.1 LAN communication

When LAN module(s) are provided in the IED, the IED can operate with LAN
communications using the “Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”. Thus,
the user should set IP addresses and other information in accordance with the requirements
of TCP/IP. Two communication features are provided within TCP/IP: Hot-standby
communication and LAN monitoring. The two features are discussed later.
10.1.1 Setup
(i) How to set the local IP address
Table 10.1-1 shows a summary of the setting items provided within the LAN module. The user
can set an IP address, subnet mask and gateway addresses in the IED†.
Table 10.1-1 TCP/IP setting of LAN module

Setting items Range Setting meaning Default value
IPADDRESS1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 IP address 192.l68.1.11
SUBNETMASK1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
GATEWAY1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
When the wishing to change addresses, the user can use this setting menu. Figure
10.1-1 shows the setting menu provided to change the addresses‡.
LAN
10:48 1/6
IPADDRESS1 +
192. 168. 1. 11
SUBNETMASK1 +
255. 255. 255. 1
GATEWAY1 +
192. 168. 1. 1
Figure 10.1-1 Local LAN setting menu (on IED screen)
†Note:For more information with regard to the communication modules, see Chapter
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module.
‡Note:Although the IED can support either one or two LAN modules, the user should
assign a single IP address for the IED. (Incidentally, subscript ‘1’ of “IPADDRESS1,
SUBNETMASK1, and GATEWAY1” is not relevant in this case.)
‡Note:Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu describes how to set the address on the
IED screen.
- 478 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii) How to set Hot-standby communication

Redundant communication (i.e. “Hot-standby”) is designed to provide additional security if a
communications failure should occur on the LAN network. The “Hot-standby” function is
implemented using two LAN modules in the IED.
For the Hot-standby communication, the first LAN module is used as the primary port,
(i.e. LAN#1 port) while a second LAN module, (i.e. LAN#2 port) is used as a secondary port;
the IED will communicate using the LAN#1 port for normal operation. If a communications
failure occurs at the LAN#1 port, the IED can automatically switch communication from the
LAN#1 to the LAN#2 port.
When the IED detects the occurrence of a communications failure, for which the LAN
module is unable to respond to the IED (i.e. a communications link is down), the IED starts a
timer. When the timer exceeds a setting [DownTime], the IED will switch ports. Thus, LAN#2
is then used for communications. (Note that LAN#1 can be determined to be the secondary
port on the occurrence of the failure. If LAN#2 is unable to continue to operate, then LAN#1
will be re-switched to run after a predetermined setting [UpTime]. Then, LAN#2 will be
discriminated as the secondary port.)
(ii)-1 Setting for redundant mode

The Hot-standby function runs when the user sets Hot_Standby for scheme switch
[RedundantMode]. If the user does not wish to run the Hot-standby function, set Fixed for the
scheme switch [RedundantMode]. In this case, LAN#2 will not function even though dual
LAN ports are provided by the IED.
(ii)-2 Selection of any one of ports as the primary port

The user can select any one of the ports to be the primary port although the LAN#1 port is
normally used as the primary port. For example, provided that both the LAN#1 port and the
LAN#2 port are physically connected to the LAN, when the user wishes to use LAN#2 as the
primary port, the user should set Port2 for scheme switch [PrimaryPort]. If the user wishes
not to select the primary port, set None for scheme switch [PrimaryPort].
(ii)-3 Setting of link-down timer

As mentioned earlier, the occurrence of a communication failure is determined when the timer
exceeds the setting [DownTime]. Thus, the user should set a time setting for this decision.
(ii)-4 Setting of link-up timer

Another timer is provided in the Hot-standby function. Let us assume that the
communication on LAN#1 is changed to LAN#2. If the failure of LAN#1 is removed after
- 479 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
changing to LAN#2, the IED will try to re-start using LAN#1 as the primary port. In this case,
the user can define a time to revert to the original port and re-start communication on the
original port by applying a re-start time for setting [UpTime].
Table 10.1-2 Summary of Hot-standby communication setting

Setting Items Range Meaning Default
Fixed / Fixed: LAN#2 not used.
RedundantMode Fixed
Hot_Standby Hot_Standby: Hot-standby activated.
A timer starts upon the occurrence of the communication
DownTime 0–10000ms failure (link down). The standby port commences 5ms
communication in the DownTime.
Selection of priority port
None / Port1 / None: No selection for the priority port.
PrimaryPort None
Port2 Port1: LAN#1 selected as the priority port.
Port2: LAN #2 selected as the priority port.
A timer starts when the primary port is ready to
UpTime 0–10000ms 5ms
commence communication after switching port.
The user should be aware of the following three facts prior to the Hot-standby operation:
1 The IED uses the IP/MAC address of LAN#1 for the Hot-standby operation. The
IP/MAC address of LAN#2 is not used even if communication is carried out on
LAN#2.
2 The user should ensure that an optical fiber is correctly connected when a
100Base-FX module is used in the IED, otherwise a repeat communication failure
(link-down) will be experienced continuously. If the period for which the link-down
is shorter than the setting [DownTime], another LAN port cannot be switched as
the primary port. Thus, the user should determine the setting to be applied for
[DownTime] on the basis of the system requirement. It is allowable for the user to
apply a setting of zero for [DownTime] so that the switching of ports will be
performed immediately; conversely, the user can set any value less than 3000ms in
order that the system would negate chattering failures if the optical fiber were not
connected securely. Switching between the primary and secondary ports is not
performed when the user is keying a value for the setting [DownTime]. The user
should consider the setting approach for [UpTime] in the same manner as when
setting [DownTime].
3 The auto-negotiation function is executed when the 100Base-TX modules establish
communication over the communications network. The auto-negotiation function
selects a mode for communication; the auto-negotiation function adjusts the
communication speed. In the case of a link-down condition, the auto-negotiation
function will run again immediately. The link-down condition continues until
auto-negotiation has been completed (it may continue for 1 or 2 seconds). The user
can apply a setting for [DownTime] for any value of time less than that required by
- 480 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
the auto-negotiation function in response to the system requirement (i.e. the user
can set [DownTime] to be zero milliseconds). In this case, switching between the
primary and secondary ports is performed immediately i.e. prior to the
auto-negotiation function running. If switching between ports is not required
before the completion of the auto-negotiation function, the user can set the setting
[DownTime] longer than the time required by the auto-negotiation function. The
user can consider the setting for [UpTime] in the same manner as when setting
[DownTime].
(ii)-5 Switching using PLC signals

Compulsory signals may be used to switch the LAN ports. For example, if a compulsory signal
is issued via PLC connection point “CH1_CH_CHG”, communication is switched from the
LAN#1 to the LAN#2 port. On the other hand, changing from the LAN#2 to the LAN#1 port
can be executed upon the reception of a signal via PLC signal “CH2_CH_CHG”.
- 481 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) Network monitoring during Hot-standby operation

The Hot-standby function can send PING packets to remote devices thus enabling the
Hot-standby function to monitor the state of the network. The Hot-standby function checks for
a response signal from the remote device. If the Hot-standby function does not receive a
response signal, the Hot-standby function will switch to the other LAN port. The operation is
performed when the user sets the scheme switches [RedundantMode] Hot_Standby and
[NetMonitor_EN] On.
Settings [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP12] are provided in the Hot-standby function for the
monitoring of remote devices on the network. When the user sets plural remote IP addresses
for the settings [Ping_IP*], and if the Hot-standby function does not receive a response from
any one of these remote devices, the Hot-standby function determines that a communication
failure has occurred. Table 10.1-3 shows the network monitoring settings for Hot-standby
operation.
Table 10.1-3 Settings network monitoring on Hot-standby
Setting items Range Meaning Default
NetMonitor_EN Off/On Enabling switch for monitoring Off
The user can set twelve IP addresses at 12 remote
Ping_IP1
terminals.
to 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
Value “0.0.0.0”should be set respectively when the
Ping_IP12
remote IP addresses are not provided.
Waiting time to PING response; if any one of the
responses is not received, after the setting time
Ping_Wait 1–10 (sec) 1
has elapsed, the function will determine that there
has been no-response.
Interval of PING send; a PING packet is sent
Ping_Interval 1–120 (sec) 5
sequentially in accordance with this setting.
Number of PING packets for checking; the
“no-response “condition is determined when the
IED is unable to obtain a number of responses from
Chk_Count 1–10 the same IP address. The user can set the number 3
of responses required to determine the
“no-response” condition using the setting
[Chk_Count].
The user should note that the use of network monitoring could increase the burden on
the network. This is because a number of PING packets are repeatedly transmitted over the
network. Thus, the user should choose the setting values carefully in accordance with the
network capacity, the burden, and the required time. Examples 1 and 2 below show the
respective results using the network monitoring function with for different settings.
- 482 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii)-1 Example operation 1

There is a remote device on the network with the address Ping_IP1. The Hot-standby function
sends ping packets to the remote device every five seconds; then the Hot-standby function
waits for one second until the Hot-standby function receives a response signal from the
remote device. The Hot-standby function will determine that a communication failure has
occurred if two sequential response signals are not received from the remote device.
Subsequently, the Hot-Standby function will switch from one LAN port to the other LAN port
(See Figure 10.1-2). The following settings are required in this example 1:
・ The IP address of the remote device1 is set for setting [Ping_IP1]. (the setting of IP
addresses in the other remote devices is not required.)
・ One second is set for setting [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “2” is set for [Check_Count].
Remote device with

Local IED Ping_IP1 address
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.
: 5sec : 1sec
OK: Response received
1sec
5sec NG: due to delayed response
1sec
5sec
NG: due to no response
Switching LAN ports is
performed if a response signal is
not received for setting
[Chk_Count]. 1sec
5sec
Figure 10.1-2 Time chart for Example 1
- 483 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii)-2 Example operation 2

In Example 2 it is assumed that there are three remote devices on the network: Ping_IP1,
Ping_IP2, and Ping_IP3. The Hot-standby function sends a Ping packet to each of the
respective remote devices alternately every 10 seconds (i.e., the IED sends ping packets to the
same remote device every 30 seconds). Since “1” is set for [Check_Count], the Hot-standby
function will determine that a communication failure has occurred after 30 seconds if any one
of the remote devices is unable to send a response. Figure 10.1-3 shows the operation of the
Hot-standby function for Example 2; first switching of the LAN ports is not executed as shown
in the figure. This is because a response has not been confirmed from one of the remote
addresses. In other words, switching of the LAN ports is only applicable when all responses
from all remote devices are not confirmed.
・ The IP addresses of the remote devices are set for [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP3]. (Setting IP
addresses for other remote devices is not required.)
・ 10seconds is set for [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “1” is set for [Check_Count].
- 484 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Device with Ping_IP3
Device with Ping_IP2
IED Device with Ping_IP1

Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 10sec
OK: Response received
5sec
10sec OK: Response received
5sec
10sec NG: due to no response
LAN switching is not performed because the IED has not confirmed a response from the IP3.

10sec
5sec
5sec
LAN switching is performed because the IED has not confirmed all response.
Figure 10.1-3 Time chart for Example 2
- 485 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
10.1.2 Settings
Setting of TCP/IP (Function ID: 230201)
Default setting
value
IPADDRESS1 0 – 255 – First decimal in IP at local IED 192

IP IP1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal in IP at local IED 168
IP1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal in IP at local IED 1
IP1_4 0 – 255 – Forth decimal in IP at local IED 11
SUBNETMASK1 0 – 255 – First decimal in subnet mask 255
SUB SM1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal in subnet mask 255
NET SM1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal in subnet mask 255
SM1_4 0 – 255 – Fourth decimal in subnet mask 1
GATEWAY1 0 – 255 – First decimal in gateway 192
GATE GW1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal in gateway 168
WAY GW1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal in gateway 1
GW1_4 0 – 255 – Fourth decimal in gateway 1
Setting of Net_MONITOR(Function ID: 351001)

Default setting
value
NetMonitor_EN Off / On – Enable switch for net monitoring Off

Ping_IP1 0 – 255 – First decimal address in IP1 0
IP1 Ping_IP1_2 0 – 255 – Second decimal address in IP1 0
Ping_IP1_3 0 – 255 – Third decimal address in IP1 0
Ping_IP1_4 0 – 255 – Fourth decimal address in IP1 0
- 486 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Setting of Net_MONITOR(Function ID: 351001)

Default setting
value

Ping_Wait 1 – 10 sec Ping packet waiting time 1
Ping Ping_Interval 1 – 120 sec Ping packet interval time 5
Chk_Count 1 – 10 sec Number of ping check count 3
Setting of REDLAN(Function ID: 340001)

Default setting
value
RedundantMode Fixed / Hot_Standby – Selection of Hot-standby Fixed
Setting of HOTST(Function ID: 341001)

Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents value Notes
Selection of any one of the actual ports

PrimaryPort None / Port1 /Port2 – None
as the primary port
DownTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-down 5
UpTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-up 5
- 487 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
10.1.3 Data ID
 Signal monitoring points
TCPIP_DRV (Function ID: 230201)
3010001150 MAC1_OCT1 MAC1 address octet 1
3110111001 RX1ER_CNT receive error counter
3110101001 RX1_CNT receive packet counter
3111111001 RX2ER_CNT
3111101001 RX2_CNT
3110211001 TX1ER_CNT send error counter
3110201001 TX1_CNT send packet counter
3111211001 TX2ER_CNT
3111201001 TX2_CNT

NET_MONITOR (Function ID: 351001)
3121001001 NETMONITOR Change to Network monitoring function
3120001460 Ping_IP1 Decision output of PING1 response w.r.t IP1 address
31200A1460 Ping_IP11 Decision output of PING11 response w.r.t IP11 address
31200B1460 Ping_IP12 Decision output of PING12 response w.r.t IP12 address

HOTST (Function ID: 341001)
3100061001 Port1_Link Port1 Link Status
3100071001 Port2_Link Port2 Link Status
- 488 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

3100081001 Using_CH Using channel information

310000E001 CH1_CH_CHG Change to CH1 from CH2
310001E001 CH2_CH_CHG Change to CH2 from CH1
- 489 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
10.2 IEC 61850 communication

Figure 10.2-1 shows a substation automation system (SAS) and a number of IEDs connected
via a Ring LAN (100BASE-FX). The IEDs can have communication with other devices using
the international standard protocol (IEC 61850 standard‡); additionally, the ring network
topology is used to achieve network redundancy in the system. The user should use the
GR-TIEMS to configure the protocol in the IEC 61850 standard. That is, the functions for the
protection, the measurement, monitoring at local and remote, controlling and logging the data
are required to program in the IEC 61850 standard.
Remote
Monitoring
GPS
Communication Substation
Operator Network
Workstation Computer
Engineering
Workstation Printer Router/
Modem
SNTP Ethernet LAN (TCP/IP)
Fiber Optic Ring: 100BASE-FX

CONTROL
MEASUREMENT
GBU GRT GRG GBU GRL GRB GBU GRG GRZ GBU GRT GRL
GOOSE
Figure 10.2-1 SAS network using IEC 61850 protocol
†Note:When applying IEC 61850 communications, the user should map application
signals with the required logical-nodes (LNs) within the IED. In this manual, we
show the application signals as Data IDs; hence, the user is able to connect the
Data IDs with the required LNs using the engineering tool (GR-TIEMS) provided
by TOSHIBA. For the GR-TIEMS, see Chapter Engineering tool.
‡Note:Before using the IEC 61850 communications feature provided within the IED, the
user should verify its IEC 61850 capability by reviewing both the
protocol-implementation-conformance-statement (PICS) and the
- 490 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
model-implementation-conformance-statement (MICS). The MICS provides the

user with information for the LNs provided within the IED; the PICS provides the
user with information to enable the IED to communicate with both SAS and other
devices. See appendices in this manual explaining how the user can obtain this
information.
When TCP/IP operates, the IEDs can communicate with SAS computer, operator
workstation (OWS), engineering workstation (EWS), remote monitoring system, SNTP server.
In the SAS, the communication is served with the method of data transfer:
• Report method of sending event messages like measurement, status, alarm and so on
• GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) method of communication
between IEDs like interlock
• Control method like controlling the circuit breaker (CB), the disconnector (DS), the
selector device (43), the transformer tap (TAP) and so on
- 491 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
10.2.1 61850 protocol

The IED dynamically generates Logical Nodes, Data sets and control blocks defined in CID
file upon boot-up. We shall discuss the configuration procedure to set the data in CID files
later.
For the IEC 61850 communication, the IED consists of multiple logical devices and
logical nodes. The user should configure the 61850 Data Model to perform a required function
for the protection and control.
Modular approach achieves data transfer between devices in the IEC 61850 standard.
All function in the IEC 61850 network are grouped into smaller objects called Logical Nodes
(LNs), which contains process objects related data and attributes of a logical device protection
and control function. Logical Node Zero (LLN0) represents specific information of the logical
device. Logical Node Physical Device (LPHD) represents specific information of a physical
device. A generic device is called Physical device (PD). The LPHD contains the properties of
the PD. A specific function in the IED is represented as domain specific LN. The domain
specific LN contains the essential function for target devices in the IEC 61850 network.
LN data model defines the abstract syntax and semantics of the information exchanged
between PDs. The relation between data object classes, data types, data attributes and
abstract data objects are provided in the LN data model. The LN data model is mapped to
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) and Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
(GOOSE) functions. Table 10.2-1shows the description of LNs.
Table 10.2-1 LN descripion

Actual device
LN Description
corresponding to LN
Logical node zero represents logical device specific Operation state of BCU
LLNO
information State of 43 switch
Logical node physical device represents physical device BCU,BCPU
LPHD
specific information
Domain Domain specific LN represents protection relay specific XCBR,CSWI
specific LN function
Generic input output logical node is used if essential Based on client
GGIO
signals are not defined in the extended logical nodes. requirements
All LN classes (LLN0 and domain specific LN) receive the mandatory data of the
common LN except LPHD. Table 10.2-2 exemplifies Function, Logical node and
Communication service used in the IEC 61850 communication.
- 492 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 10.2-2 Function groups in 61850

Examples of IED applications Logical node
Functions grouped in Communication methods
to provide protection/control defined in
61850 serviced in 61850
functions for the power system 61850
Overvoltage relay (OV) PTOV Buffered Report
Overcurrent relay (OC) PTOC Buffered Report

Monitor
Trip circuit (TRC) XCBR GOOSE
Generic functions SIMG GOOSE

Control SPOS etc. CSWI Enhanced-security Control
Measurement MMXU Unbuffered Report
Measurement
Harmonics MHAI Unbuffered Report
Time Synchronization Simple Network Time Protocol NA SNTP
Figure 10.2-2 exemplifies Physical Model, which is equivalent to the IEC 61850 Model.
The Physical Model illustrates that both the IED and its functions are communicating with
the SAS using the Ethernet. The equivalent IEC 61850 Model represents communication at
LNs in both the PD using different Communication services, which we shall discuss in section
10.2.2.
- 493 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Monitoring
x
Control
IED SAS
CB Open/Close Over current

CB Status relay
Measuring
Monitoring Under voltage Server / Work

Substation
relay Ethernet
station
Harmonics
measurement
Measuring
Control / Monitoring Protection function
Physical Model
“Logical Node” “Communication Service”
IEC 61850 Model Physical Device
LN Physical Device
LN LPHD LN
GOOSE
CB XCBR CALH
LN
Enhanced-security LN
CSWI
IHMI
LN Buffered Report
LN
CT PTOC
LN IARC
GOOSE
PTRC
LN
VT Buffered Report
PTUV
LN Unbuffered Report
MHAI
LN
Binary GOOSE
Input SIMG
Figure 10.2-2 Example of Physical model and its equivalent IEC 61850 model
- 494 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
10.2.2 Communication service

.
All essential data transmission methods are summarized in Abstract communication service
interface (ACSI); the IED application from communication stack is separated by the ACSI.
The user can map an interface to a communication stack using Specific communication
service mapping (SCSM).
The LN contains data list with their attributes based on their functionality in SAS. A
data has a well-defined structure and information of SAS. The data and attributes of the LN
in a logical device are exchanged by the communication services according to IEC 61850
protocol. The communication services are implemented by SCSM using Ethernet TCP/IP
protocol.
(i) Report for SAS

In the IED, ‘report’ is a method of sending status data, alarm data, measurement data and so
on. Using server-client communication, ‘Report’ is a ‘data set’ transferred from the IED to the
SAS. The ‘reports’ generated by the predefined ‘triggers’ are issued regularly in interval; the
‘reports’ are also generated upon a change in the event. The ‘reports’ are grouped into two
types: (1) Buffered-report-control-block and (2) Unbuffered-report-control-block. Note that the
system achieved by the unbuffered-report-service cannot start an event recover function
during the communication failure.
(ii) GOOSE for peer-to-peer communication

‘Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) ’ is a faster method to transfer the data
in ‘Generic substation event (GSE)’ between IEDs. In all IEDs, multicast GOOSE message is
published from the ‘GOOSE_control_block (GCB)’. The GOOSE communication methods are
grouped into two: (1) GOOSE publish and (2) GOOSE subscribe.
The data structures of the GOOSE are illustrated in Table 10.2-3; they are grouped for
the system (say, SAS) and other logical devices (say, a relay); they are used in the applications
in the SAS and the IED.
- 495 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 10.2-3 Data structures in the GOOSE

Logical Device
Category “System” Other Logical device (e.g., “Relay”)
Data Model System Relay
DataSet “GOOSEDS” LLN0
GGIO1 Ind1..16 GoCB
LLN0 LPHD1
GoCB PTRC
The DataSet “GOOSEDS” is fixed ….
LPHD1
GGIO
Data set Fixed (Not configurable) Configurable
Performance GOOSE data sent communication time GOOSE data sent, communication
is < 3msec time is around 3msec
(iii) System
The data model in the LN named “System” is not allowed to modify (that is, a data model is
fixed; other LN data models are configurable to meet the system requirement). Mapping
signals to the GGIO1 is required when the GOOSE should send data faster.
(iv) Control mode using GOOSE

In the IED, signals generated on the binary output circuit (BO) can be controlled by the SAS,
if the user makes the link between a reviving control message and a control function block
that changes the state of the output element. Four control modes are provided:
DOes: Direct control with normal security (direct-operate)
SBOns: SBO control with normal security (operate-once or operate-many)
DOes: Direct control with enhanced security (direct-operate)
SBOes: SBO control with enhanced security (operate-once or operate-many)
(v) Time synchronization using IEC 61850 protocol / SNTP

SNTP (Simple network time protocol) is used to synchronize clocks of all IEDs in SAS. Time
synchronization is required to maintain common time across all IEDs in the network. This
makes it easier to analyze the Time stamped event data generated by the IEDs in
chronological order. In the system, IEDs are synchronized with the device having precision
time source (for example, GPS).
(vi) File transfer (COMTRADE)

To send data of the disturbance records, file transfer service is used, which is the operated in
COMTRADE format.
- 496 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(vii) Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS)

MMS is an application layer protocol that provides data transmission between IEDs, which
performs monitoring and controlling; it can provide reliability for the data transmission. The
MMS operates in the international standardized messaging system that are made of TCP/IP
and Ethernet.
(viii) Generic Substation Events (GSE)

GSE is a control model defined in the IEC 61850 standard; it provides a fast and reliable
method for transferring the event data over the SAS. The GSE provides facility to transfer the
same event message to multiple physical devices using multicast or broadcast service.
- 497 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
10.2.3 Engineering in 61850 communication

An IED can have multiple logical devices, which represents protection and control functions.
Each logical device has Logical Nodes (LN), Datasets, Report Control Block (RCB), GOOSE
Control Block (GCB), GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe function. Figure 10.2-3
illustrates the data structure in the IED.
IED
*IEC 61850-7-4
Logical device1 CONTROL
Logical Node
*Set of LN variables REPORT

Logical Node (Event,
VCT Report Measurement)

DataSet
Voltage Control Block
Logical Node
Input / Output Signals
Current
Application
Data Logical device2
BIO ・・・ GOOSE GOOSE
DataSet
Binary
Control Block (outgoing)
Logical Node
Input
Binary
Input
2. Mapping 1. icd(cid)
data
GOOSE
GOOSE subscribe function
(incoming)
3. GOOSE subscribe
Figure 10.2-3 IED Data Structure
To configure the data structure of an IED, the user needs to edit the following items
using the GR-TIEMS. Figure 10.2-4 shows the flow diagram for IEC 61850 configuration
using GR-TIEMS.
• Edit Signal mapping
• Edit Logical Node
• Edit DataSet
• Edit Report Control Block
• Edit GOOSE Control Block
• Edit GOOSE Publish
• Edit GOOSE Subscribe
• Edit Control function
- 498 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Connect IED and workstation installed with GR-TIEMS tool
Login to GR-TIEMS
Add Substation, Voltage level, Bay and IED to the project tree
Select an IED and Click IEC 61850 under Configuration Tools
Import ICD/CID file from the selected IED
Map the signals to Logical Nodes
Edit Data set, RCB and GCB
Edit signals for GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe
Write configured data to IED
Figure 10.2-4 Flow diagram
- 499 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(i) Creating and opening project

In the operation of the GR-TIEMS, the user can find an existing project or create a new
project. Figure 10.2-5 shows the ‘File Menu’, where the user can open an existing project or
create a new project.
Figure 10.2-5 File menu
- 500 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Once the project is created, the user can add IEDs in the project tree structure as shown in
Figure 10.2-6.
Figure 10.2-6 Adding IED

Select the IED in the project tree structure and Click IEC 61850 under Configuration Tools as
shown in Figure 10.2-7.
Figure 10.2-7 GR-TIEMS main screen
- 501 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Click ‘IEC 61850’, then check to see that four engineering screens are appeared:
• Logical Node Screen
• Signal List Screen
• GOOSE Publish Screen
• GOOSE Subscribe Screen
Figure 10.2-8 IEC 61850 Main screen
(ii) IEC 61850 configuration files

Substation configuration language (SCL) files are generated by the configuration in the IEC
61850 protocol. The SCL files are used to exchange the configuration data in different
manufacture tools. Two types of files are used for exchanging data in Table 10.2-4.
Table 10.2-4 Types of SCL files

SCL file Description
.ICD This file describes the capabilities of an IED. It contains the
IED Capability Description communication data and function of LN in an IED.
.CID Every device configured for IEC 61850 in the GR-TIEMS tool
Configured IED Description generates a CID file. This file is then written to the IED. This
file contains configuration information of the IED to which it is
connected.
- 502 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii)-1 Exporting and Importing CID/ICD file

The user can export or / import a CID/ICD file as a CSV file. The user can edit the exported
CSV file using the MS-EXCEL®; the user can import the edited CSV file back to the
GR-TIEMS. Figure 10.2-9 shows the options available to import/export CID/ICD file. The user
can either click the icons on the menu bar or select the required option form the File menu
drop down list.
Import CID/ICD
Export CID
Export ICD
Figure 10.2-9 Export / Import of CID / ICD file
(ii)-2 Manage third party CID file

The GR-TIEMS can have third party CID file. In the project tree of the GR-TIEMS, the user
can use the device information for creating a third Party IED. To configure dataset, RCB,
GCB, GOOSE publish and GOOSE subscribe settings and so on, the data attributes are used
after the creation of the data.
(ii)-3 Mapping application data in IEC 61850

For any IED, the IEC61850 configuration* is available by default. The user should check
whether the required signals are mapped in the default configuration.
*Note: There is no default configuration for GOOSE subscription. If GOOSE subscribe

function is required, then a new configuration has to be done.
To verify the signals configured for the IEC 61850 protocol, the user should check the
mapped data, Dataset or Report Control list. If they have existed, the signals in the signal list
should be matched with the attributes of LNs.
- 503 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Figure 10.2-10 shows an example to check if the signals are mapped in default
configuration. For example, to check for mapping of the primary element signal in earth fault
protection (EF1), follow the steps below:
1. To check if the EF1 signal is already mapped in the LN, key ‘EF1’ under Signal
Name in the Signal List screen.
Mapped data
“EF1” in signal list
Figure 10.2-10 Signal mapping
As shown in the above figure, the “EF1” signal is already mapped to LN attribute
Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general.
- 504 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
2. To check if “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already added in Dataset. Right

click on “LLN0” and select Edit DataSet, then DataSet List screen appears as shown
in Figure 10.2-11.
Figure 10.2-11 DataSet list
As shown in the above figure, “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already mapped in the

Dataset “STAT1”.
- 505 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3. To check, if the DataSet is already assigned to RCB, Right click on “LLN0” and
select Edit Report Control, then Report Control List screen appears as shown in
Figure 10.2-12.
Figure 10.2-12 Report Control List

As shown in the above figure, the DataSet “STAT1” is already assigned to RCB
“brcbST-A”.
- 506 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) Mapping signals in signal list to Logical Nodes

The user can add or modify signal mapping to the LN variable. The following section describes
how to modify the mapped data if the user wants to add signals, which are sent using Report
or GOOSE.
(iii)-1 Edit Mapping Data

1. Search the signal to be sent from the Signal List window as shown in Figure
10.2-13.
2. Drag and Drop the selected signal to the logical node variable.
Mapped data
Drop
Drag
Signals
Figure 10.2-13 Signal mapping

Note: To optimize the performance of the IED, “Period” should be 100 if the signal is not
required to be sent immediately.
“301001 3110041005 (Qual_Validity)” should be mapped to “q” with Period=100.
“200301 9010001006 (SYS_TIME)” should be mapped to “t”.
(iii)-2 Export / Import Mapping Data

The user can export mapped data in the CSV file; the user can edit the exported CSV file by
the MS-Excel® and import back into the GR-TIEMS. Figure 10.2-14 shows the export / import
options.
Export Mapping Data

Import Mapping Data
Figure 10.2-14 Export / Import mapping data
- 507 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii)-3 Edit Logical Node

If the required LN or variable is not available in the IED, the user should follow the steps
below to add or modify the Logical Node:
1. To add new LN or to edit the variable of an existing LN, Right click Prot and select
Add Logical Node or select Edit Logical Node.
2. In the Edit Logical Node screen, select LN Class, Prefix and LN Instance and check
the required variable check boxes as shown in Figure 10.2-15 below.
To Add Logical Node
To add optional variable

To choose a proper Logical Node*
Figure 10.2-15 Add or Edit Logical Node
*Note: Refer to IEC 61850-7-4 to choose a proper Logical Node.
- 508 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii)-4 Edit DataSet

Dataset can be edited or a new dataset can be added for the LNs as shown in Figure 10.2-16.
For editing the DataSet, follow the steps below:
1. Right click LLNO and select Edit DataSet, DataSet List window appears as shown in
Figure 10.2-16.
2. Choose the variables to be added to the DataSet and click OK.
Users can choose the existing

Dataset*, or enter a new
DataSet name.
Figure 10.2-16 Edit DataSet screen
*Note: 100 DataSets can be added in the DataSet List and each DataSet can have
maximum of 32 elements.
- 509 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii)-5 Edit Report Control Block (RCB)

Report Control Block (RCB) is used to send report from IEDs to client. If the user wishes to
assign the DataSet to Report Control Block, follow the steps below:
1. Under the LN tree structure, select Prot, Right click LLN0 and select Edit Report
Control. Report Control List screen appears as shown in Figure 10.2-17.
2. Click Add or Edit to add a new dataset or to edit the existing dataset in the Report
Control List window as shown in Figure 10.2-17.
Figure 10.2-17 Edit Report Control screen
- 510 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii)-6 Edit GOOSE Control Block

GOOSE control block is used to exchange information between IEDs. GOOSE messages are
used for interlock operation between IEDs in order to protect the electrical system. GGIO1 is
used for sending high-speed GOOSE messages. The DataID assigned to GGIO1 is sent within
3ms.
If the user wishes to assign the DataID for GOOSE operation, follow the steps below:
1. Click GGIO1 and select Ind1 as shown in Figure 10.2-18.
2. Drag and Drop the required signals to be sent by GOOSE.
Note: The user can assign any signal to GGIO1->Ind1~16 for high-speed GOOSE, as
required.
Drop
Drag
Figure 10.2-18 Signal mapping for high speed GOOSE
As shown in the above figure, signals are assigned to “System/GGIO1$Ind1”. The user
can assign signals to other GGIOs (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3 and so on) which are not
meant for high-speed GOOSE operation.
- 511 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii)-7 Edit GOOSE Publish

The signals assigned to GGIO1 variables are published automatically by default. The GGIO1
data set is fixed and is pre-configured in GOOSE Publish screen. If the user assign signals to
other GGIO variables (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3) for GOOSE publish operation, then the
user needs to add those variables in the GOOSE Publish screen.
Figure 10.2-19 shows the GOOSE Publish screen, where “System” is fixed and is not
configurable for GGIO1, whereas “Ctrl” (Control) and “Prot” (Protection) are configurable. The
user can add new variables from the “Logical Node” screen to the GOOSE Publish screen
using drag & drop* method. Figure 10.2-19 shows an example for GOOSE Publish, where
“System/GGIO2$Ind1$stVal” is added to the GOOSE Publish screen.
*Note: Only “stVal” and “q” variables can be added to GOOSE Publish screen.
Fixed
Figure 10.2-19 GOOSE Publish
- 512 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii)-8 Edit GOOSE subscribe

GOOSE subscribe function is configured to receive GOOSE messages published by other IEDs.
Figure 10.2-20 exemplifies the GOOSE Subscribe screen; the user can select the necessary
signals to be added. For example, “Bay1 GBU200” is the current IED; “Bay2 GRZ200” is the
other IED. “List 1” is GOOSE publisher of GRZ200; “List 2” is GOOSE subscriber for GBU200.
The user can select the GOOSE publisher from GRZ200 and add to the GOOSE subscriber of
GBU200.
In the example shown below, select the required variable and click Add. Similarly, the
user can delete the variables.
When the user adds a signal to the GOOSE subscribe list from the other IED, then the
same signal is automatically added in the Signal List of the current IED.
List 2
List 1 List 2
Figure 10.2-20 GOOSE Subscribe
(iii)-9 Edit Control function

The Data IDs (i.e., Signal Number) starting with “5” is used for control function when the IED
has the control function by default. The user should check whether the required signals are
mapped in the default configuration. The user can edit and add the control signals to the LN
as described in section 10.2.3(iii).
In an IED, usually an output Data ID of a protection function is assigned to LN variable.

However, for the control application, the IED is capable of receiving command from the SAS
server. To control a device (such as a circuit breaker), the input point* (Data ID) in the control
application should be configured to receive commands from the SAS sever (that is, selecting,
operating or cancel command).
For example, to let a device execute “Select”, “Operate” and “Cancel” commands from the
sever through “CSWI4” and transmit the information to an IED, the user should map an
input point (Data ID) to several variables of “CSWI4” (See Figure 10.2-21). Mapping period for
- 513 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Control shall be 100.
*Note: For more information of the input points, see chapter General control function or
Control and monitoring application, if available.
SBOW
Input DataID
Mapping
DEV01_CONTROL_REQ
Oper
Cancel
Figure 10.2-21 Control function mapping

To complete the setting for control function, after mapping data, the user needs to set BI,
BO† in the GR-TIEMS ->Setting.
†Note:For more information for the BI, BO, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO
module.
- 514 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iv) Writing the configuration file to IED

After completing the IEC 61850 configuration, follow the steps below to download the CID file
for the IED.
1. Save the project.
2. Right click on the required IED and select Write to IED.
3. Configure the parameters in the Connection Method window to connect the IED (If
needed).
4. Select the writing items (IEC 61850-CID File and IEC 61850-Mapping Data) to be
written into the IED and click Write to download the IEC 61850 configuration. If
GOOSE subscribe operation is required, then select writing items Signal List and
GOOSE Subscribe before clicking Write.
Figure 10.2-22 Write to IED
- 515 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
10.2.4 Setting for IED

(i) Setting time for re-sending GOOSE subscribe information
The user can configure the maximum duration time for the case when the IED fails to re-send
GOOSE subscribe information. Set the time in seconds using setting [GOINT].
(ii) Setting for 61850 authentication

When the IED is to be authenticated for starting the IEC 61850 communications, the user
should set scheme switch [850AUT] On.
(iii) Blocking 61850 communication

If the user does not want the IED to start the IEC 61850 communications, the user should set
scheme switch [850BLK] On.
(iv) Setting ‘keep-alive’ time for TCP

When applying IEC 61850 communications with TCP/IP, the user should set a time for the
‘keep-alive’ signal. The user should set the time in seconds using the setting [850KEEPALIVE].
(v) Setting ‘CommTerm’

If the user wishes to receive a ‘CommTerm’ signal carrying an actual operation time from a
device outside the IED, the user should set scheme switch [TCMD] On. Note that the
‘CommTerm’ signal† will not conform to the IEC 61850 standard when the user turns on this
function. That is, this function can be availed on the server communication provided by
TOSHIBA.
†Note:For example, Figure 10.2-23 shows the signal flow between a substation computer
(SC), an IED and a target device (e.g. CB). If the requirement is to close the CB on
request of the SC, the SC will send the operation command “Operate” to the IED;
the time information (T) is also sent along with the operation command. When
receiving the operation command and observing that the CB has closed, the IED
will send a response signal “CommTerm” to the SC along with the time information.
However, this time information is not the actual operation time of the CB, but the
same time information originally sent with the operation command. The IEC
61850 standard defines this rule; hence, general operations in the IEC 61850
standard are subject to this rule. However, the server communication provided by
TOSHIBA is able to accept the actual operation time; hence, the setting
‘CommTerm’ is required for the TOSHIBA communication. The user should also
note that Off is set for the scheme switch [TCMD] as the default setting.
- 516 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Process Station Target device (e.g. CB)

computer (SC) IED
Command
“CB closed”
Command Open
Response Closed
Figure 10.2-23 Example of CB operation flow
(vi) Setting test mode

With regard to the reception test for GOOSE subscribe information, the user can simulate a
bad condition passively by using both GOSNDBLK and GOSUBBLK functions†.
(vi)-1 GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

For the test using the GOOSE sending block function (GOSNDBLK), the user can disable the
IED so that it does not send the GOOSE message. The GOSNDBLK function is useful when
there is a conflict in the communication with another active IED on sending a GOOSE signal.
To block the sending of the GOOSE message, the user should set On for scheme switch
[GOSNDBLK].
(vi)-2 GOOSE receive block (GOSUBBLK)

Suppose the user wishes to simulate a bad reception condition with regard to the GOOSE
signal, the user can apply a setting that will prevent an IED from receiving the GOOSE
message from another IED using this test. The user can perform this test using the test
setting On for scheme switch [GOSUBBLK]. Consequently, the IED rejects the GOOSE
messages from other IEDs. The GOOSE receive block function (GOSUBBLK) is also useful for
the validation of switchgear interlocking determination.
†Note:The user may wish to perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using the
GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a remote
terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid the influence, we recommend the user to test bad receptions for a particular
IED using the GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the
particular IED under test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the tests.
- 517 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
10.2.5 How to monitor 61850 communications

The IED can monitor the status of the IEC 61850 communications. Discussions on IEC 61850
communications status monitoring are provided separately. (See Chapter Automatic
supervision)
- 518 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
10.2.6 Setting
Setting of 61850(Function ID: 301001)
Default setting
value
GOINT 1 to 120 sec. Maximum GOOSE resend interval 2

850BLK Off/On IEC 61850 enable/disable Off
850AUT Off/On Authentication of IEC 61850 association Off
850KEEPALIVE 1 to 120 sec. TCP ‘KeepAlive’ time for IEC 61850 20
GOSNDBLK Off/On GOOSE publishing block Off
GOSUBBLK Off/On GOOSE subscription block Off
TCMD Off/On Set ‘T’ in ‘CommTerm’ as actual Time Off
10.2.7 Data ID
 Monitoring point
61850 (Function ID: 301001)
0010001001 61850STAT Status of IEC 61850(T:Running, F:Stop)
3100001440 INCOMINGPKT#0 Incoming packet number from IEC 61850 client#0
3100001441 OUTGOINGPKT#0 Outgoing packet number to IEC 61850 client#0
3100001001 REMOTEPORTNUM#0 Port number of IEC 61850 client #0
GOOSE (Function ID: 301101)
3110001001 GOOSESUB_STATUS 0 if all GOOSE being subscribed are not subscribed.
3100001001 SUB_QUAL#0 GOOSE subscription quality for record #0
- 519 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
GOOSE (Function ID: 301101)
31000A1001 SUB_QUAL#10 GOOSE subscription quality for record #10
……. ……….. ………………
31013E1001 SUB_QUAL#318 GOOSE subscription quality for record #318
31013F1001 SUB_QUAL#319 GOOSE subscription quality for record #319
- 520 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
10.3 USB communication

The USB port has a B-type connector, with which a PC can be connected to the IED. By using
the USB port on the front panel, with a PC connected to the IED, the user can operate the IED
through the PC. The communication is provided by the mean of the serial transmission; its
speed is fixed at 115.2kbps.
- 521 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
11 User interface
- 522 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
11.1 Outline
Users can perform maintenance on the IED from the front panel. Monitoring is also possible
locally by using a PC connected through a USB port provided on the IED. This section
discusses the configuration of the front panel and the basic configuration of the screen-menu
hierarchy of the Human Machine Interface (HMI).
(i) Front Panel

As shown in Figure 11.1-1, the front panel is provided with a screen (LCD Screen), 26 light
emitting diodes (LEDs), 11 operation keys, seven function keys (in the later section the
function keys are referred to as F1 to F7.), monitoring jacks and a USB port.
LEDs
LCD screen
Operation keys
Function keys
with LEDs
Monitoring jacks with USB

LEDs (A, B, and C)
Figure 11.1-1 Front Panel

(ii) LCD screen
The LCD screen provides the user with detailed internal information provided by the IED
such as records, monitoring and settings. Normally, the LCD screen appears blank unless an
operation key is pressed, by pressing any of the operation keys, the LCD screen will display
the top menu.
If the top menu is shown on the LCD screen, the user can turn off the screen backlight
by pressing the operation key ◄. When operation is idle for some time, the screen backlight
turns off. By pressing any key except the CLEAR key, the backlight turns on, and the previous
menu will be displayed on the LCD screen.
- 523 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) LEDs
As shown in Table 11.1-1, 26 LEDs, each having signal labels and colors, are defined:
Table 11.1-1 LED labels and their color
LED User configurable
Label Color Remarks
No. setting2
Lit up when the IED is
1 IN SERVICE Green N/A
in service.
Lit up when an error
2 ERROR Red N/A
is occurred.
31 N/A N/A ✔
41 TRIP Red ✔ Default

51 N/A N/A ✔
61 TEST Yellow ✔ Default

71 N/A N/A ✔
. N/A N/A ✔ .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
261 N/A N/A ✔
1Note: LED #3 to LED #26 is user-configurable LEDs. User can assign a signal with or
without latch function.
2Note: For setting LEDs, see section 11.6(iv).
(iv) Monitoring jacks

There are three monitoring jacks on the front panel; the three monitoring jacks have LEDs, A,
B, and C respectively. For example, if the user wishes to undertake test work1, two
monitoring-jacks (A and B) are available for use. By selecting the Data ID of an object signal
from the Data ID list, and by keying this Data ID into the IED, the object signal can be
displayed on the selected LEDs (A and B). The user can also observe this object signal at the
output of the monitoring jacks (A and B) on an oscilloscope.
- 524 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(v) Function keys

The IED provides seven function keys (F1 to F7) with the following two features; a LED is
attached on each function key. Table 11.1-2 shows the features for these keys.
 Skip to a specific screen directly, set by the user.
Used for skipping to a set page by pressing the function keys. Press again to return to the
previous page. Set by pressing the function key for 2 seconds on the selected page. (See section
11.5(vi))
 Control the signal setting easily.
A convenient method that can be used for operating binary signals. Set by assigning the signal
in the settings menu. (See section 11.5(vii))
Table 11.1-2 Features of Function keys (F1 to F7)

Labels on Keys Feature and Remark
LED† Skip to a specific screen directly.

Control for the operation of pre-assigned
F1 to F7 binary signals.
†Note: Like in the LEDs of Table 11.1-1, the user can set to light the above LEDs by itself.
Setting the above LEDs are the same as the ones of the Table 11.1-1 (For setting,
see section 11.6(iv)). Note the manufacture programs to light the respective LEDs
in default prior to shipping.
- 525 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(vi) Operation keys

By using the operation keys, the user can display records, relay status etc. Input of setting
values is performed using these keys. The operation keys are tabulated in Table 11.1-3.
Table 11.1-3 Features of operation keys
Label Functions and Remarks
Move the cursor up / Scroll up / Count up1
Move the cursor down / Scroll down / Count down1
Previous page / Move to the left digit.
Next page / Move to the right digit
ENTER Enter edit mode, if item is active / Executive operation / Accept alarm
message.
CANCEL Exit edit mode / Cancel operation.
CLEAR Clear all latched LEDs (Except [In service] and [Error] LEDs).
HELP Display the help message, for cases where the active item has a help
function.
L
R
Switch between Local mode and Remote mode.
I Control key. (Close)
O Control key. (Open)
MENU Switch for using MIMIC2 mode or for returning back to the menu screen.
MIMIC
This key is only provided for MIMIC2.
1Note: To scroll up or scroll down quickly, press keys ▲ or ▼ respectively along with key
►.
2Note: MIMIC is the reference for the large LCD screen that is provided when a customer
orders it in place of the standard LCD screen; MIMIC is provided with the
mode/key. Note that the MIMIC key is not provided when the IED does not have
the large LCD screen.
- 526 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
11.2 HMI operation

By using the IED screen, the operation keys and the function keys, user can access functions
such as recording, monitoring, relay setting and testing.
Note: The operation of the IED screen is more or less common in all IED models. However,
the contents of IED screen depend on IED models.
(i) Screen and LEDs during normal HMI operation

When the IED operates normally, the green LED "IN SERVICE" is lit. Press any key except
the key CLEAR; and then the backlight of the IED screen turns on1.
If the IED detects a fault, the fault message will appear in a pop-up screen. At the same
time, the LED “TRIP”2 is lit.
1Note: If another fault occurs during the previous fault pop-up screen is displayed, the
latest fault information will be overwritten by the new fault on the pop-up screen.
Press the key CANCEL to remove the pop-up screen of “Latest Fault”, and return
to the previous screen.
2Note: Press the key CLEAR to turn off the LED.
(ii) Main-menu and Sub-menu

(ii)-1 Menu hierarchy
Figure 11.2-1 shows the menu hierarchy. The menu consists of Main-Menu and several
Sub-menus. Table 11.2-1 shows the configuration of Main-menu.
- 527 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu

Main Menu Record Fault Record
Event Record 1
Event Record 2
Event Record 3
Disturbance Record
Clear All Records
Monitoring Metering
KCT
Binary I/O
Communication
Relay Element
Statistics
GOOSE Monitoring
Diagnostics
Setting Recor
Meterin
Communication
Protection
Contro
Counter
Function Key
Diagnostics
I/O Setting AC Analog Input
Binary Input
Binary Output
LED
Time Clock
Time Zone
Time Sync2
Display Format
Summer Time
Tes Test Mode
Mode change
Information Signal Monitoring
Security setting Change Password
Security
Login / Logout
Figure 11.2-1 Menu hierarchy
- 528 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 11.2-1 Outline of Main-menu and their purposes

Sub-menu Purpose and functions
Record The "Record" sub-menu provides fault record, event record and disturbance
record. User can erase the record by unit, or can clear all records at the same
time. User can assign event records to distribute into three “Event Record”
sub-menus as needed.
Monitoring The "Monitoring" sub-menu displays all the status of an IED, such as
Metering, Binary I/O, Communication, Relay Element, Statistics, Interlock,
GOOSE Monitoring, and Diagnostics.
Setting The "Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings: Record,
Metering, Communication, Protection, Control, Counter, Function Key and
Diagnostics.
I/O Setting The "I/O Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings of inputs,
configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs, and configurable
LEDs.
Time The "Time" sub-menu provides settings for calendar clock, time zone, source
of time synchronization and the display format of calendar clock.
Test The "Test" sub-menu is used to set and to test the following: a trip circuit,
forcible operation of binary output from the IED, time measurement of
variable timer, and observation of the binary signals on the logic circuit.
Information The "Information" sub-menu displays the data of an IED such as hardware,
software, communication, etc.
Security Setting The "Security Setting" sub-menu is used to change the password and access
level, and provides high security for users of different access level.
Login/Logout When the "Security Setting” sub-menu is ON, the “Login/Logout” sub-menu
is displayed.
- 529 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii)-2 Outline of IED screen

 Main-menu
When the IED screen is turned off, press any key except the key CLEAR, then the
“Main-Menu" appears on the IED screen as shown in Figure 11.2-2. To go to the next
hierarchy, press the key ►.
Main Menu
10:48 1/8
_Record >
Monitoring >
Setting >
I/O Setting >
Time >
Test >
Figure 11.2-2 Display of Main Menu
 Sub-menu
An example of setting sub-menu screen is shown Figure 11.2-3. By using the key ▼
and the key ▲, user can move the cursor downward or upward to view all the items.
By using the keys ◄ ►, user can return to previous hierarchy or go to the next
hierarchy.
OC
10:48 2/4
OC1-EN +>
On
_OC2-EN +>
On
OC3-EN +
Off
OC4-EN +
Off
Figure 11.2-3 Display Example of Sub-Menu (OC setting)
 Screen structure
IED screen is composed of title area and data area. The title area is fixed on top two
- 530 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
lines. The first line displays the screen title. The second line at the left side displays
local time, whereas the right side displays either current line number, cursor position
number and the maximum page number, or item number. For example, the display
“2/4” means the current cursor position, which is at second item of the maximum four
items.
- 531 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
11.3 Record sub-menu

In the Record sub-menu, the user can see the recorded list such as fault or event from each
sub-menu. In each sub-menu, there are record lists and clear records, with which user can
clear each kind of record separately.
Record
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record1 >
Event Record2 >
Event Record3 >
Disturbance Record >
Clear All Records +
Figure 11.3-1 Example of Record
Table 11.3-1 Operation and display in Record sub-menu

Display Operation Remark
key
[>] ► Press the key ► to go to the sub-menu
[+] ENTER Press the key ENTER for executing “Clear all records”. After
executing, a confirmation dialog screen is displayed.
(i) Fault Record

The “Fault Record” sub-menu displays the date and time of fault occurrence, fault phase,
tripping mode, and the power system quantities, as shown in Figure 11.3-2.
Fault Record Fault Record#1

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/222
#1 2012-07-25 > 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223 10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 > Phase AB
01:15:55.018 Trip 1,2,3,4,5,6
#3 2012/07/21 > OC1
13:11:29.621 2012-07-25
Fault Record List Details of Fault Record
Figure 11.3-2 Example of Fault Record
- 532 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(i)-1 Display fault record

The following shows how to see the screen of fault record list and the details.
Record 1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record 2). Fault Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List
10:48 1/2
_Record List > sub menu.
Clear Records +
Fault Record 3). Fault record list in the Fault Record screen is displayed. Move
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25 > cursor to a desired item by ▲ or ▼ and press ►.
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 >
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/20 >
13:11:29.621
Fault Record#2 4). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.

10:48 1/222
2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
Phase AB
Trip AB
OC1
53.4km (23%)
(i)-2 Clear fault record

The user can delete the fault records using this function. Once records are deleted, the user
cannot retrieve the deleted records. The following shows the steps to erase the fault record
list.
- 533 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Record 1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record 2). Move cursor to Clear Records and press ENTER.
10:48 1/2
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Fault Record 3). Clear records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of “Fault
Clear records?
Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
(ii) Event Record

The “Event Record” sub-menu provides three parts namely, “Event Record1”, “Event Record2”
and “Event Record3”. In each Event Record sub-menu, the data and time, device name, and
the operation of the device are displayed as shown in Figure 11.3-3.
Event record1
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set.Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:21.021
Figure 11.3-3 Example of Event Record
- 534 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii)-1 Display of Event Record

The following shows the steps to display event records.
Record
10:48 2/6 1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List

Event Record1
10:48 1/2
_Record List > sub menu.
Clear Records +
Event Record1
10:48 1/3 3). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set. Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:11.021
- 535 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii)-2 Clear of Event Records

The user can delete the event records using this function. Once records are deleted, the user
cannot retrieve the deleted records. The following shows the steps to display and erase event
records.
Record 1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Event Record1 2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the Clear
10:48 1/2
Record List > Records sub menu.
_Clear Records +
Event Record1 3). Clear all Event records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of
Event Record directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
(iii) Disturbance Record

Disturbance Records can be displayed graphically on the PC screen by using GR-TIEMS. The
IED screen displays only the recorded date and times, which are stored in the IED as the
entire disturbance data, as shown in the Figure 11.3-4.
Disturbance record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:04.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Figure 11.3-4 Example of Disturbance Record
The following shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records. To erase all records,
refer to (iv) Clear all information in Record.
- 536 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii)-1 Display of disturbance Record

The following shows the steps to display and erase event records.
Record
10:48 2/6 1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the

Disturbance Record
10:48 1/2
_Record List > Record List sub menu.
Clear Records +
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/6 3). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
- 537 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii)-2 Clear of Disturbance Records

The user can delete the disturbance records using this function. Once records are deleted, the
user cannot retrieve the deleted records. The following shows the steps to display and erase
disturbance records.
Record
10:48 2/6 1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/2 2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the
Record List > Clear Records sub menu.
_Clear Records +
Disturbance Record 3). Clear all Disturbance records if ENTER is pressed. Back to
display of “Disturbance Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
- 538 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iv) Clear all information in Record

The user can delete the all records using this function. Once records are deleted, the user
cannot retrieve the deleted records. The following shows the steps to clear all the records in
the Record sub-menu.
1). Move cursor to the Clear all Records sub menu and press
Record
10:48 1/6
Fault Record > ENTER.
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Clear all Records +
Clear Records 2). Clear all records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of
“Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear All records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
- 539 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
11.4 Monitoring sub-menu

The “Monitoring” sub-menu is used to display the current status of the IED. The data is
updated every second on the LCD screen. The user can view the following functions from the
Monitoring sub-menu:
i. Metering sub-menu
ii. KCT
iii. Binary I/O sub-menu
iv. Communication sub-menu
v. Relay Elements sub-menu
vi. Statistics sub-menu
vii. GOOSE Monitoring sub-menu
viii. Diagnostics sub-menu
(i) Metering
In the “Metering” sub-menu, the value and direction of current, voltage etc. can be displayed.
The user can change the units as required by using the appropriate setting. Figure 11.4-1
shows the example of Metering sub-menu.
Metering
10:48 1/58
_Va
23.231kV 121.34deg
Vb
23.200kV 120.14deg
Vc
22.713kV 121.50deg
Figure 11.4-1 Display of Metering
Figure 11.4-2 shows the steps to display metering data on the IED screen.
- 540 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Main Menu Monitoring Metering

10:48 2/9 10:48 1/8 10:48 1/25
Va
Record >
[►] _Metering > [►]
_Monitoring > KCT > 23.231kV 121.34deg
[◄]
Setting > Binary I/O > Vb
IO Setting > [◄] 23.200kV 120.14deg
Communication >
Time > Relay Element > Vc
Test > Statistics > 22.713kV 121.50deg
[▼] [▲]
Metering
10:48 2/25
Va
23.231kV 121.34deg
Vb
23.200kV 120.14deg
Vc
22.713kV 121.50deg
Figure 11.4-2 Steps to display metering data
(ii) KCT
The “KCT” sub-menu displays the respective statuses of KCT (coefficient for CT). Figure
11.4-3 shows the example of KCT sub-menu.
KCT
10:48 1/12
KCT1_DIF
****.***
KCT2_DIF
****.***
KCT3_DIF
****.***
KCT1_REF_P
****.***
KCT2_REF_P
****.***
KCT3_REF_P
****.***
Figure 11.4-3 Display of KCT status
(iii) Binary I/O

The “Binary I/O” sub-menu can be used to display the respective status of the binary IO
module circuits. Each line on the IED screen displays the binary input or output signal
number, the signal name1 assigned to the circuits of the binary IO modules and their status.
The status is shown as logic level “1” or “0” for the binary output circuit. Figure 11.4-4
provides an example for binary IO module at IO#1 (Slot#1).
- 541 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Slot#6
10:48 1/16
BI1 0 #6_BI1
BI2 0 #6_BI2
BI3 0 #6_BI3
BI4 0 #6_BI4
BI5 0 #6_BI5
BI6 0 #6_BI6
BI7 0 #6_BI7
BI8 0 #6_BI8
BO1 0 #6_BO1
BO2 0 #6_BO2
BO3 0 #6_BO3
BO4 0 #6_BO4
BO5 0 #6_BO5
Figure 11.4-4 Display of Binary I/O status
1Note: The binary signals can be named using GR-TIEMS.
- 542 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Figure 11.4-5 shows the steps required to display the status of the binary inputs and
outputs.
Main Menu Monitoring Binary I/O

10:48 2/9 10:48 3/8 10:48 1/4
Record > [►] Metering > [►] _Slot#1 >
_Monitoring > KCT > Slot#2 >
Setting >
IO setting >
[◄] _Binary I/O >
[◄] Slot#3 >
Communication > Slot#4 >
Time > Relay Element >
Test > Statistics >
[►] [◄]
Slot#1 Slot#1
10:48 1/16 10:48 1/16
BI1 0 #1_BI1 [▲] BI1 0 #1_BI1
BI2 0 #1_BI2 BI2 0 #1_BI2
BI3 0 #1_BI3 BI3 0 #1_BI3
[▼]
BI4 0 #1_BI4 BI4 0 #1_BI4
BI5 0 #1_BI5 BI5 0 #1_BI5
BI6 0 #1_BI6 BI6 0 #1_BI6
Figure 11.4-5 Steps to display Binary I/O status
(iv) Communication
The “Communication” sub-menu provides several sub-menus as shown in Figure 11.4-6.
Sub-menu sub-menu sub-menu

Monitoring Communication LAN
61580STAT
Figure 11.4-6 Menu hierarchy of Communication sub-menu
The display structure for each sub-menu is explained in the following sections:
- 543 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iv)-1 LAN sub-menu

In the “LAN” sub-menu, the communication port name and status are shown on one line.
When an IED model has one LAN port, or when the setting of dual-port communication is set
to non-operation (Off is set for scheme switch [RLNSCH]), the communication port status will
be as shown in Figure 11.4-7.
The “LAN” sub-menu can display “PortStatus” and “NetMonitor status”. If “NetMonitor”
is running (active), the LCD screen will display a “>”mark.
LAN
10:48 1/2
PortStatus >
NetMonitor Inactive
Figure 11.4-7 Display for LAN
If the status of a port is “UP”, it means that the communication link is working; if the
status of a port is “DOWN, it means that the LAN cable is not connected to the port.
As shown in Figure 11.4-8, the following two sub-menus are displayed to show the
communication status for a model with dual LAN ports. The setting of dual-port
communication should be set to “Enable”.
PortStatus PortStatus
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*Port1_Link UP *Port1_Link UP
Port2_Link DOWN Port2_Link UP
One port is connected. Two ports are connected.
Figure 11.4-8 Communication status
(iv)-2 IEC61850 sub-menu

In the “IEC61850” sub-menu, IP addresses of the devices connecting using IEC61850 are
shown in one line. Configurations of those IP addresses are available from GR-TIEMS.
- 544 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
61850STAT
10:48 1/6
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
Figure 11.4-9 Display of IEC61850
(v) Relay Elements

In the “Relay Element” sub-menu, the name of relay element and the operation status are
shown in one line. The following figure shows the example of OC elements screen. In order to
view all of the relay elements, the user has to press keys ▲ and ▼.
OC
10:48 1/24
OC1-A 0
OC1-B 0
OC1-C 0
OC2-A 0
OC2-B 0
OC2-C 0
OC3-A 0
OC3-B 0
OC3-C 0
OC4-A 0
OC4-B 0
OC4-C 0
OC5-C 0
Figure 11.4-10 Display of Relay Element
Figure 11.4-11 shows the steps to display the status of measuring elements on the IED
screen.
- 545 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Main Menu Monitoring Relay Element

10:48 2/9 10:48 4/8 10:48 3/6
Record > [►] Metering > [►] DIF >
_Monitoring > KCT > REF >
Setting > Binary I/O > _OC >
IO setting >
[◄] Communication > [◄] EF >
Time > _Relay Element > EFIn >
Test > Statistics > ICD >
[►] [◄]
OC
10:48 1/24
OC1-A 0
OC1-B 0
OC1-C 0
OC2-A 0
OC2-B 0
OC2-C 0
Figure 11.4-11 Steps to display status of measuring elements
- 546 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(vi) Statistics
The “Statistics” sub-menu is provided with several sub-menus, as shown in the following
figure.
Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu

Monitoring Statistics Counter
Accumulated Time
Figure 11.4-12 Menu hierarchy in Statistics
For each statistical item, with the exception of displaying their status, the data can be
reset or revised. The display structure of each sub-menu is shown in the following sections:
(vi)-1 Counter sub-menu

For each item in the Counter sub-menu, the name and number of statistical items are shown
in two lines. When an item is revised, a [+] mark is shown at the end of the first line.
Counter
10:48 1/8
COUNT1 (No Assign) +
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 11.4-13 Display of Counter
To change the number of the counter, follow the steps as shown in Figure 11.4-14.
- 547 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Main Menu Monitoring Statistics

10:48 2/10 10:48 1/8 10:48 1/2
Record > [►] Metering > [►] _Counter >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O > Accumulated Time >
Setting > Communication >
[◄] [◄]
IO Setting > Relay Element >
Time > _Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
[►] [◄]
Counter Counter Counter

10:48 1/8 10:48 1/8
Change? [ENTER] ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND + [ENTER] ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No 0 0
ARC1_SPAR + ARC1_SPAR +
1 0
ARC1_TPAR + ARC1_TPAR +
0 0
Revise the data
[CANCEL] Counter
[ENTER] 10:48 1/8
ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND +
0
ARC1_SPAR +
The data is revised. 0
ARC1_TPAR +
0
Figure 11.4-14 Steps for changing the number of counter
(vi)-2 Accumulated Time sub-menu

In the “Accumulated Time” sub-menu, the name and the total time over which the statistical
item has run are shown in two lines. The total time is displayed for each statistical item in “d
(date) h (hour) m (minute)” format. The user can clear each value of accumulated time using
the clear step (reset) is shown in Figure 11.4-15.
Accumulated Time Accumulated Time
10:48 1/1
_ACT_TIME +
[CANCEL] Reset?
234d 21h 34m ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
[ENTER]
Figure 11.4-15 Display of Accumulated Time
- 548 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(vii) GOOSE monitoring

Statuses of the GOOSE subscription information are shown in each record-unit, as shown in
Figure 11.4-16. Each IED name (for example, “GRT200-11-603”) has been defined in GOOSE
subscription information..
GOOSE Monitoring
10:48 1/3
GRZ200-11-603 OK
GRL200-21-603 OK
GRT200-31-603 NG
Figure 11.4-16 Display of GOOSE Monitoring
(viii) Diagnostics
Errors are shown in each monitoring elements. If there are no errors, error message is not
displayed.
Diagnostics
10:48 1/2
AI#1(ACC) error >
CP1M(SUN) error >
Figure 11.4-17 Display of Diagnostics
- 549 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
11.5 Setting sub-menu

The "Setting" sub-menu is used to view and change settings for the following functions:
Recording, Metering, Communication interface, Relay application, and Monitoring. In this
section, we show the “Setting method for elements, switches, and list selection”, “Protection
setting”, and others.
Furthermore, this section describes the confirmation of setting, and the “On/Off”
function that is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figures in this chapter are examples only. The user should confirm
setting values after their values are changed.
(i) Setting method

In “Setting” sub-menu, four setting modes are provided as follows:
1. Element Setting Mode
2. Switch Setting Mode
3. List Selection Mode (items selection)
4. Signal Selection Mode (signal selection)
(i)-1 Element Setting Mode

The “Element Setting Mode” is used for setting numerical values. For each setting, the setting
name, setting value and the unit are displayed in two lines. Figure 11.5-1 provides an
example of the element setting mode.
OC1 OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + *OC1-b +
123.00000 124.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
Before Changing Setting After Changing Setting
Figure 11.5-1 Example of Element Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting has been changed,
the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. Once the change is canceled or
confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. For the setting of a value, follow the
steps as shown in Figure 11.5-21:
- 550 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
OC1 OC1 OC1

10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + [ENTER] OC1-b + [◄] x 5 OC1-b +
123.00000 123.00000 123.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c + OC1-c +
1.00000
[CANCEL]
1.00000 [►] x 5 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg 45 deg
[▲] [▼]
[CANCEL] [CANCEL]
OC1 OC1
OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
10:48 2/8
*OC1-b + [▼] *OC1-b + [ENTER]
*OC1-b +
124.00000 124.00000
124.00000
_OC1-c + [▲] OC1-c +
OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000 [ENTER] 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
45 deg
Figure 11.5-2 Steps for setting the value

1Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figure above is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
the setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer
to “Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
2Note: The operation keys have several features enabling the user to key values for
setting items. Table 11.5-1 shows values that have been changed before and after
the user presses the operation keys.
- 551 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 11.5-1 Operation example when the operation keys are pressed.
Before Key After
1 2 6 7 9 1 2 6 8 0
[▲]
9 1 7 1 0 1 7
9 1 7 [▼] 1 0 9 1 7
9 . 1 1 0 9 . 1
6 7 5 6 7 5
[◄]
1 . 7 5 1 . 7 5
[►]
2 1 : 2 3 2 1 : 2 3
(i)-2 Switch Setting Mode

The “Switch Setting Mode” is a setting used for the selection of two modes. Figure 11.5-3
provides an example of the switch setting mode. For each setting, the setting name and the
selected item are displayed on two lines.
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
Before Changing Setting After Changing Setting
Figure 11.5-3 Display Example of Switch Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting is changed, the [*]
mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. When the change is canceled or confirmed,
the [*] mark will disappear automatically. Figure 11.5-4 shows the operation of the switch
setting mode.
- 552 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
OC1 OC1 OC1

10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56 [►] / [▼] / 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + [ENTER] OC1-VTFBlk + [▲] / [◄] *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
[CANCEL]
Trip Trip [►] / [▼] / Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD + [▲] / [◄] OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR 3POR
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
*OC1-2fBlk + *OC1-2fBlk +
[▼]
Block Block
_OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip [▲] Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
Figure 11.5-4 Operation of Switch Setting Mode

Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The above figure is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer to
“Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
(i)-3 List Selection Mode

The “List Selection Mode” is composed of main-setting-screens and selection-list-screens as
shown in Figure 11.5-5. In the main-setting-screen, the setting name and the selected item
are displayed. Press the key ENTER to begin the setting process; the screen for selection list
will appear. Once a setting has been changed, the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of
the setting. When the change is canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear
automatically.
- 553 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
OC1 OC1-2fBlk OC1-2fBlk

10:48 23/56 10:48 1/3 10:48 2/3
_OC1-2fBlk + [ENTER] _Non [▼] Non
Non Block-3P _Block-3P
OC1-VTFBlk + Block-PerP Block-PerP
[CANCEL]
Non [▲]
OC1-UseFor +
Trip
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 23/56 10:48 23/56
*OC1-2fBlk + [▼] *OC1-2fBlk +
Block-3P Block-3P
_OC1-VTFBlk + OC1-VTFBlk +
Non [▲] Non
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
Figure 11.5-5 Operation of List Selection Mode
(i)-4 Signal Selection Mode

Figure 11.5-6 shows the steps to select a signal.
F1 Key Select Function Select Element

10:48 1/2 10:48 2/128 10:48 2/128
_Signal + [ENTER] No assign [►] No assign
Assign Signal _423100 > _AF00001001
Logic + 423101 > AF00002001
[CANCEL]
Toggle 423102 > [◄] AF00003001
423103 > AF00004001
423104 > AF00005001
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
F1 Key
10:48 1/2
*Signal +
423100 AF00001001
Logic +
Toggle
Figure 11.5-6 Operation of signal selection
- 554 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii) Confirmation dialog in each sub-menu

In “Setting” menu, a confirmation dialog #1 and #2 appears in the sub-menu and lower-level
menu, as shown in Figure 11.5-7
Sub-menu Sub -menu Sub -menu

Case2
Setting Record
Metering
Communication
Protection Active Group
： Copy gr.(A->B).
Confirmation
Group 1 Dialog #1
Group 2
Confirmation ：
Case1
Group 8
Dialog #2
Trip
Figure 11.5-7 Confirmation dialog setting
 Case1: Confirmation dialog #1

When a setting within each group is changed; the confirmation dialog will
appear when returning to the screen of the “Protection” sub-menu, as shown
in Figure 11.5-8.
 Case2: Confirmation dialog #2
When a setting is changed; the confirmation dialog will appear when
returning to the “Main Menu”, as shown in Figure 11.5-9.
- 555 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Setting Protection Group 1

10:48 4/7 10:48 3/10 10:48 2/3
Record > [►] Active group >
[►] Telecommunication >
Metering > Copy gr.(A->B) > *Trip >
Communication > _Group 1 > Autoreclose >
_Protection > [◄] Group 2 > [◄]
Counter > Group 3 >
Function key > Group 4 >
[►] [◄]
OC OC Trip
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 1/12
*OC1EN +> [ENTER] *OC1EN + [►] *OC >
On On UV >
OC2EN + OC2EN + ZS >
Off [CANCEL] Off [◄] ZG >
OC3EN + OC3EN + EF >
Off Off DIFF >
[►] / [▼] / [►] / [▼] /

[▲] / [◄] [▲] / [◄]
OC [CANCEL] OC Group1
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 2/3
*OC1EN +> *OC1EN +> [◄] x 2 Telecommunication >
Off Off *Trip >
OC2EN + [ENTER] OC2EN + Autoreclose >
Off Off
[►] x 2
OC3EN + OC3EN +
Off Off
[◄]
Protection Protection
[ENTER]
10:48 3/10 The changed Setting
Active group > Change setting?
is confirmed. ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Copy gr.(A->B) >
_Group 1 >
Group 2 > The changed Setting
Group 3 > [CANCEL]
Group 4 >
is canceled.
Figure 11.5-8 Setting example in case #1
- 556 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Main Menu Setting Communication

10:48 3/9 10:48 3/7 10:48 2/5
Record > [►] Record > [►] LAN >
Monitoring > Metering > _IEC61850 >
[◄]
_Setting > _Communication > IEC103 >
IO Setting > Protection >
[◄]
Modbus >
Time > Counter > DNP >
Test > Function key >
[►] [◄]
IEC61850 IEC61850 IEC61850

10:48 1/6 [►] / [▼] / 10:48 1/6 10:48 1/6
*850BLK + [▲] / [◄] [ENTER] _850BLK +
850BLK +
Block Normal Normal
GSECHK + GSECHK + GSECHK +
ON [CANCEL] ON [CANCEL] ON
SI1-1 + SI1-1 + SI1-1 +
254 254 254
[ENTER] [CANCEL]
IEC61850 Setting
Communication
10:48 1/6 10:48 2/5
*850BLK + [◄] [◄] Change setting?
LAN >
Block ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
*IEC61850 >
GSECHK + IEC103 >
ON
[►] Modbus >
SI1-1 + DNP >
254
Setting [ENTER]
The changed setting is
10:48 3/7
Record > confirmed.
Metering >
_Communication >
Protection > The changed setting is
Counter >
[CANCEL]
canceled.
Function key >
Figure 11.5-9 Setting example in case #2
- 557 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) On/Off function

When the “Setting->Protection->Group (1 to 8)” sub-menu is displayed, the “On/OFF function”
is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
“On” indicates that the setting is enabled; the mark [>] will appear. More detail of the
settings provided within the hierarchy are described later.
“Off” indicates that the setting is disabled; the detailed settings are hidden, the mark [>]
is not indicated. The following figure shows the usage of On/Off function.
OC OC OC
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4
[►] / [◄] /
10:48 1/4
*OC1EN +>
[ENTER] *OC1EN +>
[▲] / [▼]
*OC1EN +
On On Off
OC2EN + OC2EN + OC2EN +
Off [CANCEL] Off [►] / [◄] / Off
OC3EN + OC3EN + [▲] / [▼] OC3EN +
Off Off Off
[ENTER]
Protection OC
10:48 1/4
Change setting? *OC1EN +
The changed setting [ENTER] ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Off
OC2EN +
is confirmed. [◄] x 3
Off
OC3EN +
Off
Protection OC
10:48 3/10 10:48 1/4
Active group > *OC1EN +
Copy gr.(A->B) >
Return to the “OC” Off
_Group 1 > setting screen. OC2EN +
Group 2 > Off
Group 3 > OC3EN +
Group 4 > Off
Figure 11.5-10 Operation of On/Off function
Table 11.5-2 Explanation of [+>] mark in On/Off function

Display Operation Remark
[+>] ► Go to the sub-menu
ENTER Change setting.
(iv) Protection group setting

The IED provides eight setting groups for the protection of the power system; the user can
choose an alternative setting group from one of the eight groups in response to a change in the
- 558 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
operation of the power system. In the “Protection” sub-menu, the user can change the active
group and can copy the group settings. However, it is not possible to set the protection
function in the “Protection” sub-menu.
(iv)-1 Change active group

An example for changing the active group is shown in the following figure.
Protection Protection Protection

10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11
Common [▲] x 4 Common [►] Common
Active Group + Active Group + Active Group +
3
3 [◄] 3
Copy Group (A->B) > [▼] x 4 Copy Group (A->B) > Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 1 > Group 1 >
Group 2 > Group 2 > Group 2 >
Refer to “Note: 1)”
[▲] x 2 [▼] x 2
Protection
Protection
10:48 5/11
Common
Change Setting? [ENTER]
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Active Group +
1
Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Protection
10:48 1/10
Common
The changed setting [►]
Active Group >
is confirmed. Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Group 3 >
†Note: When the screen moves to the “Protection”

sub-menu from the “Setting” sub-menu, the cursor will
appear alongside the current active group.
Figure 11.5-11 Operation of changing active group
(iv)-2 Copy group setting

The user can copy an active setting from one group to another group. As an example, in the
following figure “Group3” will be copied to “Group2”, as shown in Figure 11.5-12.
Note: In the “Copy Group (A->B)” screen, the number displayed at A is the current active
group number.
- 559 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Protection Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group (A->B)

10:48 1/11 10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
Common
[►] _A (1 – 8): + [▼] A (1 – 8): +
3 3
Active Group +
1 [◄]
B (1 - 8): +
[▲] _B (1 - 8): +
1 1
*Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group(A->B)

10:48 1/2
[ENTER]
10:48 1/2 [▲] 10:48 1/2
A (1 – 8): + A (1 – 8): + A (1 – 8): +
3 3 3
*B (1 - 8): + *B (1 - 8): + [► B (1 - 8): +
2 2 ] 1
[◄]
Protection
Copy Group? [ENTER]

ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No The changed setting
is confirmed.
Protection
10:48 1/11
Common
Active Group >
1
Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Figure 11.5-12 Copy group setting
(iv)-3 Change group settings

Upon shipment from the factory, the default settings are set. Therefore, in each group, the
user can change the settings of the protection functions and other features. To change the
settings in each group, refer to the setting method discussed in section 11.5(i).
(v) Configuration of Function keys

Function keys (F1 to F7) on the IED front panel provide a feature to navigate to a specific
screen, which is configurable by the user. This key can also control a particular signal, which
- 560 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
turns on the LED light. The signal can be selected through operation of the HMI or
GR-TIEMS. Six screens are configured for six of the function keys (F1 to F6), respectively, as
the default settings shown in Table 4.6-3.
Table 11.5-3 Function keys which are configured to navigate a menu

Function Key configured Menus
F1 Metering
F2 Fault Record
F3 Event Record1
F4 Event Record2
F5 Event Record3
F6 Diagnostics
(vi) Screen jump function

To navigate to another screen, press a function key; a configured screen will be displayed
directly. The configuration “Screen Jump” can be selected from seven function keys. When the
user configures a function key as “Screen Jump”, this function key will be activated. Any
screen, which appears within three seconds when pressed, can be chosen as “Screen Jump”,
except the confirmation dialog screen.
Note: There may be a function key that has not been is assigned. To avoid confusion,
momentarily press a function key; the screen that is set will appear.
To configure the screen jump function, follow the steps as shown in the figure below.
- 561 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Function Key F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key >
[◄]
Signal +
[CANCEL] _No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[ ]x2 [▼] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 10:48 1/3
[◄] x 2 [ENTER]
Change Setting? *Function + *Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Screen Jump Assign Signal
Signal + No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
[ENTER]
[An Example]
OC F1 Key
The “Screen Jump”
10:48 1/4 Push [F1]
setting is _OC1EN +> for 3s. Register this screen
On to F1 Kye?
confirmed. Do the
OC2EN +> ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
next step to select On
OC3EN +
a screen.
Off
[ENTER]
The selected screen
is assigned to [F1].
Figure 11.5-13 Operation of screen jump setting
On any screen, press the screen-jump function key to display a screen, refer to the
following figure:
Main Menu OC
10:48 2/8 10:48 1/4
Record > [F1] _OC1EN +>
_Monitoring > On
Setting > OC2EN +>
[F1]
IO setting > On
Time > OC3EN +
Test > Off
Figure 11.5-14 Operation of screen jump function
To cancel the screen-jump function, follow the procedure provided in Figure 11.5-15.
Note: 1) Once a screen is configured to a function key, it will not be deleted until a new
- 562 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
screen is configured for the same function key.

2) If a configured screen is disabled by “On/Off Function” setting (refer to section
11.5(iii)), the screen jump function is also disabled for the function key.

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/3
F1 Key > [►] Function + [ENTER] *Screen Jump
F2 Key > Screen Jump Assign Signal
F3 Key >
[◄]
Signal + [CANCEL] No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▼] x 2 [▲] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
[◄] x 2 [ENTER]
Change Setting? *Function + Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No No Assign Assign Signal
Signal + _No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
[ENTER]
The “Screen Jump” function is
canceled on F1 key.
Figure 11.5-15 Cancelling screen jump function
(vii) Signal control function

The user can control to generate a binary signal when the signal should forcibly to injected at
the PLC connection point†. Table 4.6-4 shows two generated signals for the PLC connection
point; the signal is generated in response to the input operation of the function key. The user
can select either “Toggle” or “Instant” signal type using setting “Logic” for the generation.
Figure 11.5-16 shows how to select a signal type using the menus.
Table 11.5-4 Signal generated using setting
Setting Generated signal corresponding to pressing the function key
Key input
Toggle
Binary
Signal
Key input
Instant Binary
Signal
†Note:The user should note that the signal control function is not designed to control
- 563 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
signals at signal monitoring points.
To assign a signal to a function key, follow the steps as shown in Figure 11.5-16.

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key >
[◄]
Signal +
[CANCEL] _No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▲] [▼]
F1 Key F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2 10:48 2/3
[ENTER]
*Function + [▼] *Function +> Screen Jump
No Assign Assign Signal *Assign Signal
*Signal + [▲] LED > [ENTER] No Assign
123101AF00001001
Logic +
Instant
[ENTER]
Select Function Select Element Select Element

10:48 1/25 10:48 1/128 10:48 3/128
_123100 >
[►] _AF00001001 [▼] x 2 AF00001001
123101 > AF00002001 AF00002001
123102 > AF00003001 _AF00003001
123103 > [◄] AF00004001 [▲] x 2 AF00004001
123106 > AF00005001 AF00005001
123107 > AF00006001 AF00006001
[ENTER]
Setting F1 Key
[ENTER] [◄] x 2 10:48 1/3
The changed setting Change Setting? *Signal +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No 123101AF00003001
is confirmed.
Logic +
Instant
Figure 11.5-16 Assigning a signal to the function key
- 564 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
11.6 I/O setting sub-menu

The “I/O Setting” sub-menu is used to set or change settings of the following items:
(i) AC Analog Input
(ii) Binary Input
(iii) Binary Output
(iv) LED
This section explains the details of setting method.
(i) AC analog input

For the AC analog inputs in the VCT module, the user can configure a ratio for each AC
analog channel. With regard to the ratio, the user can key the value of the ratio from the
sub-menu.
(i)-1 Selection of ratio

For example, Figure 11.6-1 shows how the channel selection is made for the AC analog input
on a VCT module (AI#1 = VCT#1). Move the cursor by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press
key ►to go to the next level in the hierarchy.
AC Analog Input AI#1

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/12
AI#1 > [►] CH1 >
AI#2 > CH2 >
CH3 >
CH4 >
CH5 >
CH6 >
[►]
AI#1
10:48 1/2
AI1_Ch1_Ratio +
2000
AI1_Ch1_Rating +
DEP
Figure 11.6-1 AC analog input screens

Note: This screen is a sample. The AI numbers displayed are dependent upon the
configuration of VCT modules in each IED.
(i)-2 Set of rating

Figure 11.6-2 is an example of rating in channel#1. From this screen, the user can select a
- 565 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
rating for each channel.
CH1 AI1_Ch1_Rating
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/3
AI1_Ch1_Ratio + DEP
2000.000 1A
AI1_Ch1_Rating + 5A
DEPAI#1
[►]
10:48 1/10
[►]
CH1 >
CH2 >
CH3 >
CH4 >
CH5 >
CH6 >
Figure 11.6-2 Selection of rating

Note: Term “DEP” means that a rating value follows the default setting at the
manufacture when it is carried out customer’s ordering. For more information of
ordering, see Appendix: Ordering.
(ii) Binary input

All binary input circuits provided in the IED are user-configurable; the user can set common
programmable logic (CPL) for each binary input circuit. (For more information of CPL, see
Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module: Binary input circuit)
The user can activate or turn off the above timers and switches using the setting
function. To configure the binary input circuits, the user should follow the procedure in steps
((ii)-1 and (ii)-2)
(ii)-1 Selection of binary input circuit

For example, Figure 11.6-3 illustrates the selection of a binary input circuit on a binary IO
module. Move the cursor by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press key ►to go to the next
hierarchy.
- 566 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Binary Input Slot#6

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/9
Slot#4 > [►] _Common >
_Slot#6 > BI1 >
BI2 >
BI3 >
BI4 >
BI5 >
Figure 11.6-3 Selection of slot and binary input circuit

Note: This screen is a sample. The slot numbers displayed depend upon the configuration
of the binary IO module in each IED.
(ii)-2 CPL setting

Figure 11.6-4 is an example of a “Common” setting. From this screen, the user can set a
threshold level and the number of comparisons feature for contact chatter for all binary input
circuits.
Common
10:48 1/2
THRES_Lvl +
Low
CMP_NUM +
4
Figure 11.6-4 Common screen
For example, Figure 11.6-5 shows the CPL setting for binary input circuit (BI1). The
timer and the inverse switch can be activated when On or Off is set for setting [BI1_CPL].
Press key ENTER to commence the setting of a switch or parameter.
- 567 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
BI1
10:48 1/1
BI1_CPL +
Off
Figure 11.6-5 CPL setting

Note: Setting items “On Delay timer and others” are displayed when the user sets
[BI*_CPL] On.
(iii) Binary output

All binary output circuits provided in the IED are also user-configurable; the user can
configure timers and switches using CPL settings. (For more information of CPL, see Chapter:
Binary IO module: Binary output circuit)
(iii)-1 Selection of binary output circuit

For example, Figure 11.6-6 illustrates the selection of a binary output circuit on a binary IO
module. Move the cursor by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the next level in the
hierarchy.
Binary Output Slot#6
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/8
Slot#5 > [►] _BO1 >
_Slot#6 > BO2 >
BO3 >
BO4 >
BO5 >
BO6 >
Figure 11.6-6 Selection of slot and binary output circuit

Note: Those screens are samples. The slot numbers screend are depend on the
configuration of binary IO module in each IED case.
(iii)-2 CPL Setting

For example, Figure 11.6-7 illustrates the setting of a binary output circuit (BO1). Using
- 568 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
setting [BI1_CPL] On, the CPL logic in BO1 is available. Similarly, assigned signals, timers
and switches can be set in this menu. Note that detailed setting items are shown when On is
keyed into setting [BI*_CPL].
BO1
10:48 1/17
BO1_CPL +
Off
Input signal1 +
No Assign
Input Signal2 +
No Assign
Input Signal3 +
No Assign
Signal8 +
No Assign
LOGIC-SW
AND
On Delay Timer +
0.000 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.000 s
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
Logic Timer +
0.000 s
FF-SW +
Off
Reset Signal +
No Assign
Figure 11.6-7 Binary output setting
- 569 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Figure 11.6-8 shows how to assign a signal:
BO1 Select Function Select Function

10:48 2/17 10:48 1/127 10:48 2/127
BO1_CPL + [ENTER] _No Assign [▼] No Assign
On ARC 4A6001> _ARC 4A6001>
_Signal1 +
[CANCEL] BCD 452001> BCD 452001>
No Assign BIO_Slot1 200B01> BIO_Slot1 200B01>
Signal2 + BIO_Slot2 200B02> BIO_Slot2 200B02>
No Assign BIO_Slot3 200B03> BIO_Slot3 200B03>
[►] [CANCEL]
Select Element
10:48 2/155
No Assign
_CO-OC-A 8000001B60
CO-OC-B 8100001B61
CO-OC-C 8200001B62
CO-EF 8300001B63
EXT.ARC_S 8300001B64
Figure 11.6-8 Assigning a signal

Note: “No Assign” is always displayed on the first line, even when the page is changed.
(iv) Selection and setting of LED

As shown in Figure 11.1-1, the IED provides 26 LEDs and 7 function-keys. The user can
configure LEDs (“LED#3” to “LED#26”) and the function key LEDs (F1 to F7; each has a
LED). Each LED is driven via a logic gate which can be programed to be an AND gate, OR
gate or XOR gate operation. Furthermore, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic,
settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. One or up to eight signals can be
assigned to a single LED with selectable LED color.
(iv)-1 Selection of LED

Figure 11.6-9 shows the LED selection screen; the user can select a setting item by pressing
keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the next level in the hierarchy
- 570 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
LED
10:48 1/31
_LED3 >
LED4 >
LED5 >
LED6 >
LED7 >
LED8 >
LED26 >
F1 Key >
F2 Key >
Figure 11.6-9 LED selecting screen
(iv)-2 LED Setting

As shown in Figure 11.6-10, the user can set the logical gate, timer, color of LED and assign
signals in this screen.
LED3
10:48 1/16
Color >
RED
Input signal1 +
No assign
Input signal 2 +
No assign
Input signal 8 +
No assign
Reset signal +
No assign
LOGIC-SW +
AND
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
On Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Logic Timer +
0.00 s
Figure 11.6-10 LED setting screen
- 571 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
11.7 Time sub-menu

In the Time sub-menu, the user can change settings of time function, such as time zone, time
synchronizing source, format of time display and so on. Figure below shows the Time
sub-menu.
Time
10:48 1/5
Clock >
Time Zone >
Time Sync >
Display Format >
Summer Time >
Figure 11.7-1 Time function screen
(i) Clock
The clock can run locally or synchronize with the external time source shown in
[ActiveSyncSrc] menu. Figure 11.7-2 shows the Clock screen:
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 11.7-2 Clock screen

The Clock sub-menu is composed of the [Time] menu, [Format] menu and [ActiveSyncSrc]
menu. Time for the IED can be set in the screen. When the active synchronizing source is
SNTP, the user can go to another sub-menu to check the current active SNTP server.
The following shows how to operate in this screen.
(i)-1 Time menu

Time can change by the following procedure.
Clock (1) Move cursor to the Time menu and press ENTER.
10:00 1/2
_[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
- 572 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Clock (2) Current time can be changed to press ▲ or ▼.

10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:05:00
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(i)-2 ActiveSyncSrc menu

ActiveSyncSrc can be shown by the following procedure.
Clock (1) Move cursor to the [ActiveSyncSrc] menu and press ►.

10:00 1/2
[Time] +
*Note: When the active synchronizing source is not SNTP, the >
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss is not shown in the screen.
_[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
ActiveSyncSrc (2) The ActiveSyncSrc screen shows the active IP address of

10:48
192. 168. 0. 100 active SNTP server.
192. 168. 0. 101
*192. 168. 0. 102
192. 168. 0. 103
(ii) Time zone

The user can input time zone designated by UTC in Time zone screen. Time zone according as
local area for the IED should be set.
Figure 11.7-3 shows the Time Zone screen:
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
0.00hour
Figure 11.7-3 Time zone setting screen

The following shows how to operate using this screen.
- 573 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii)-1 Time zone menu

Time zone can be changed by the following procedure.
Time Zone (1) Move cursor to the Time zone menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/1
_Time zone + Time zone can be set by 0.25 hour. The user has to fill the Time
0.00hour
zone in accordance with UTC (Coordinate Universal Time).
(iii) Time synchronization

Time synchronization source can be selected in Time synchronization screen. The
synchronization function can be activated by configuration of the On/Off switch in this menu.
Figure 11.7-4 shows the configuration screen for the time synchronization function:
Time Sync
10:48 1/4
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
Figure 11.7-4 Time synchronization setting
The following shows how to operate in this screen.
(iii)-1 TimeSyncSrc menu

Time SyncSrc (Time Synchronization Source) can be changed by the following procedure.
Time Sync 1) Move cursor to the TimeSyncSrc menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/4
_TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
TimeSyncSrc 2) The TimeSyncSrc menu is composed of “---”, SNTP, BI,

10:48 1/5
--- MODBUS and IRIG-B.
_SNTP
BI
MODBUS
Note: When “---” is selected, it means that time synchronization is
IRIG-B
not operated.
- 574 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
By using time synchronization via Ethernet with a SNTP server, the user can connect up
to a maximum of four SNTP servers. If more than one SNTP is used, the priority of the
servers can be decided in ascending order of synchronized stratum value (in order of
higher-accuracy) and select the server with the smallest value.
(iii)-2 SNTP menu

IP address of SNTP server can be set by the following procedure.
Time Sync
10:48 1/4 1) To confirm that the SNTP synchronization function is set for
TimeSyncSrc + On. Subsequently move cursor to the SNTP menu and press ►.
SNTP
_SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
SNTP 2) Move cursor to desired server number and press ENTER.

10:48 1/4
_Server1 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
SNTP 3) The user can set IP address using ▲ or ▼ by each digit.

When the user has finished setting IP address of the server, press
10:48 1/4
Server1 +
0. 0. 0.176 ENTER.
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
(iii)-3 BI SYNC menu

When the “BI SYNC” is set to On in BI SYNC menu, the user can assign a binary signal data
ID as a synchronization standard. An adjustment setting ‘SYNC_ADJ’ is provided for the time
standard.
Binary synchronization function can be set by the following procedure.
BI SYNC 1) First of all, to select slot ID of IED

10:48 1/2
BI_ID +
No Assign
SYNC_ADJ +
0.000 s
- 575 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
The “IRIG SYNC” setting is similar to activate by using the On/Off switch.
(iv) Display format

Display format of time in the IED can be selected in Display format screen. All time formats
will be displayed according to Date_fmt setting. The IED provides different formats to display
the date. Figure 11.7-5 shows an example of display format:
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 11.7-5 Display format

Display Format sub-menu is composed of Date_fmt menu, Date_delimiter menu
Time_delimiter menu and Sec_delimiter menu.
(iv)-1 Date format menu

Date display format can be changed by the following procedure.
Display Format (1) Move cursor to the Date_fmt menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/4
_Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Date_fmt (2) Date display format can be selected by moving cursor to the
10:48 1/3
_YYYYMMDD desired format type.
MMDDYYYY
DDMMYYYY
- 576 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iv)-2 Date delimiter menu

Date delimiter can be changed by the following procedure.
Display Format (1) Move cursor to the [Date_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
_Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Date_delimiter (2) Date delimiter can be selected by moving cursor to the desired
10:48 1/3
_- format type.
/
.
(iv)-3 Time delimiter menu

Time delimiter can be switched by the following procedure.
Display Format (1) Move cursor to the [Time_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
10:48 3/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
:
Display Format (2) The time delimiter mark is switched.

10:48 3/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
.
- 577 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iv)-4 Second delimiter menu

Second delimiter can be switched by the following procedure.
Display Format (1) Move cursor to the [Sec_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
.
Display Format (2) The second delimiter mark is switched.

10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
,
(v) Summer time

The IED provides summer time configuration. In this screen, summer time of each area using
the IED can be set. When the Summer Time configuration is On, the details for summer time
can be set as shown in Figure 11.7-6:
Summer Time
10:48 1/13
Summer time +
Off
Figure 11.7-6 Summer time

Summer time sub-menu is composed of Summer time menu.
(v)-1 Summer Time menu

The user should notice that summertime can be set by the following procedure if the IED is
used in summertime clock.
If summertime is started or ended in the last week of the month, Start_Week and End_Week
must be filled “5”. The IED controls starting or ending summer time day to set last week of
the month on Start_Week or End_Week automatically.
Note the user have to change Summer time mode to On before setting summer time.
- 578 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(1) Move cursor to the [Summer time] menu and press ENTER.
Summer Time
10:48 1/13
_Summer time + Summer time mode can be switched On/Off by pressing ► or ◄.
Off
After Summer time mode is set to On, the user can set summer
time in detail.
Summer Time (2) In this screen, details of summer time setting can be set.
10:48 1/9
IS_UTC_base +
On
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
The user can set the starting date and ending of summer time.
The following procedure is a case of starting weekday setting.
Summer Time
10:48 4/9 (1) Move cursor to the [Start_Wday] menu and press ►.
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
Start_SM(Wday) (2) Move cursor to the desired weekday and press ENTER.
10:48
1/8
---
_Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Summer Time
10:48 4/9 (3) Starting weekday is set.
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
- 579 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
11.8 Test sub-menu

Test functions can be operated from the test screen available on the front panel of the IED.
(i) Test screen

The Test screen has functions such as Test Mode, Test Flag, Mode Change and Signal
Monitoring. The user can select any of these test functions using the following test screen.
Test
10:48 1/4
Test Mode +
Off
TestFlag-EN +
On
Mode Change >
Single Monitoring >
Figure 11.8-1 Test screen
(ii) Test mode screen

The Test Mode screen is shown in Figure 11.8-2. The Test Mode screen has four functions, Test
Option, Function Test, Binary Input and Binary Output.
Test Mode
10:48 1/4
Test Option >
Function Test >
Binary Input >
Binary Output >
Figure 11.8-2 Test Mode screen

(ii)-1 Test option screen
The Test Option screen, shown in Figure 11.8-3, is used to select the following functions and
perform a Test flag forced reset.
Test Option
10:48 1/65
S-TestFlagCancel +
Off
GOSNDBLK +
Off
GOSUBBLK +
Off
Figure 11.8-3 Test Option screen
- 580 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
• Test flag cancel (S-TestFlagCancel)

This function is used to forcibly reset the Test flag in the communication packet. The Test flag
is set to OFF by default. The Test flag is used in combination with another device in the Test
mode. When this option is selected, the Test flag in the communication packet is reset
temporarily to reproduce a pseudo-operation condition.
• GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

This function is used for selecting or disabling the GOOSE sending information in Test mode.
This function is used when there is a conflict in communication with another active IED while
sending a GOOSE signal. (This function is available only for use in a CU.)
• GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK)

This function is used for receiving or rejecting GOOSE subscription information from another
IED in Test mode. This function is used for testing in case of bad reception (For example,
Validation of Interlock determination). The user can simulate a bad reception condition
passively by using two GOOSE Sending Blocks. (This function is available only for use in a
CU.)
Note: The user may perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using the
GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a remote
terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid this the user can simulate bad reception tests for a particular IED using the
GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the particular IED under
test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the tests.
(ii)-2 Function test screen

Function test screen is used for IED test or for configuring the test environment. This function
is used to configure the available test operations implemented in the protection and control
functions. Figure 11.8-4 shows one example; the actual screen will vary according to IED
model. For example, automatic monitoring function (A.M.F.†) can be found at the top of Figure
11.8-4. The user can block this function when the A.M.F is set to Off..
- 581 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Function Test
10:48 1/65
A.M.F. +
On
BU1_Exclusion +
Off
BU2_Exclusion +
Off
Figure 11.8-4 Function test menu (an example)
(ii)-3 Binary input test screen

The user can apply a virtual signal to a binary input circuit using the binary input test screen.
Figure 11.8-5 shows an example; the user can select IO#1 or IO#3. (Actually, the content
displayed will differ depending upon the binary IO module inserted. Refer to Chapter CU
feature: Technical description: Binary IO Module)
Binary Input
10:48 1/2
Slot#1 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 11.8-5 Binary input menu
Figure 11.8-6 is a case when IO#3 (Slot#03) is selected.
Slot#3
10:48 1/19
BIF OP +
Slot3-BIO1-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BIO2-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BI03-SET +
Figure 11.8-6 Setting menu for Slot #3 module
For example, if the user wishes to simulate binary input circuit #1 (BI01) in the BIO1A
module (BIO1A) at IO#3 slot, the user can select SLOT3-BI01-SET screen, as shown in Figure
11.8-6).
- 582 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Slot3-BIO1-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 11.8-7 Setting menu after selecting “Slot #3-BIO1-SET”
The user can then make the following selections on the screen and configure the items
required for simulation.
• ON: BI01 circuit is forced to ON(1) regardless of the actual input signal.
• OFF: BI01 circuit is forced to OFF regardless of the actual input signal.
• Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
Use the screen shown in Figure 11.8-7 only to configure the BI signals for the simulation
test. This does not start the simulation.
The setting menu is shown in the manner of the screen illustrated in Figure 11.8-7, if the
user needs to configure an Input Circuit other than BI01 (BI02 to BI18 in the screen shown in
Figure 11.8-6); the user can configure each BI signal in a manner similar to that described for
BI01.
Upon selection of BI3F OP in Figure 11.8-6, use the following screen to initiate the
simulation test.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Press <- to return
To previous page
Figure 11.8-8 Execution menu of BI test
If key ENTER is pressed in Figure 11.8-8, the status will change to test status. The
following screen will be displayed after pressing the key ENTER. Figure 11.8-9 shows that the
IED is in simulation test mode.
- 583 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Operating..
Press <- to return

To previous page
Figure 11.8-9 Running test menu
Note: The user has to continue to depress the key ENTER on the IED front panel during
the simulation test period. The simulation status will be released if key ENTER is
not pressed.
(ii)-4 Binary output test screen

This function can be enabled to control a binary output circuit using GR-TIEMS. The signals
used for the binary outputs can be simulated.
Figure 11.8-10 is an example of how to select a binary output from the Test Mode screen.
(Figure 11.8-2. This figure shows the binary output circuits at IO#2 and IO#3.)
Binary Output
10:48 1/2
Slot#2 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 11.8-10 Binary output menu
Figure 11.8-11 shows selection of IO#2 (Slot #2).
Slot#2
10:48 1/19
BO2F OP +
SLOT2-BO01-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Figure 11.8-11 Setting menu for Slot #2 module
Figure 11.8-12 shows the Output Circuit configuration of BO01 at IO#2 (Slot#2). The
- 584 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
procedure for operation is similar to the operation of the binary input circuit. (Refer to Figure
11.8-7 to Figure 11.8-9)
SLOT2-BO01-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 11.8-12 Setting menu after selecting “SLOT2-BO01-SET”
The user can configure the required settings for the simulation test of the binary output
circuit.
• ON: Output signal for simulation test is ON
• OFF: Output signal for simulation test is OFF
• Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
(iii) TestFlag-EN screen

This function can set all communication protocol Test flags to Test mode. The user should
select TestFlag-EN in Figure 11.8-1 and select On or Off.
(iv) Mode change screen

When the user selects “Mode Change” from the Test sub-menu shown in Figure 11.8-1, the
following Mode change screen is displayed (Figure 11.8-13). This allows control from a remote
device (For example, SAS server) by configuring the MDCTRL-EN setting.
Mode Change
10:48 1/3
MDCTRL-EN +
Off
MDCTRL-SELRST +
30 s
MDCTRL-EXERST +
30 s
Figure 11.8-13 Mode Change sub-menu
(v) Signal monitoring screen

Figure 11.8-14 shows that the user can assign signal-monitoring points to the monitoring
jacks (A, B, and C) on the IED front panel. Incidentally, points have not been assigned for the
monitoring jacks in the menu below.
- 585 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Signal Monitoring
10:48 1/3
Term A +
No Assign
Term B +
No Assign
Term C +
No Assign
Figure 11.8-14 Signal monitoring sub-menu
When the user wishes to use monitoring jack A to monitor a signal-monitoring point,
select “Term A” in the signal monitoring sub-menu (Figure 11.8-15). The user can then assign
the signal monitoring point for Term A.
10:48 1/3
Input signal +
No Assign
Figure 11.8-15 Selection menu
- 586 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
11.9 Information sub-menu

In the information sub-menu, the user can see the information about the IED. Those of the
information are set in a factory, and not changed by the user. Figure 11.9-1 shows the
Information sub-menu. Table 11.9-1 shows detail of information that is displayed in this
screen.
Information
10:48 1/9
[IED TYPE]
Gxx*00
__-00-111-22-33-44-555
__-6666-777-88
[Serial No.]
Figure 11.9-1 Information screen
Table 11.9-1 Information details

Display item Remark
[IED TYPE]
Gxx*00 Product name
-**-***-**-**-**-*** Hardware section information of ordering number
-****-***-** Software section information of ordering number
[Serial No.]
********** Product serial number
[Plant Name]
No name Plant name which is input from GR-TIEMS by the user
[Description]
Information of the IED which is input from GR TIEMS by the
No name
user
[CP1M Software]
************ Name and version number of Main CPU Software
[CP1S Software]
************ Name and version number of Sub CPU Software
[CP2M Software]
************ Name and version number of extra CPU Software(This item is
displayed in case of extra CPU implemented model only)
[IEC61850 eng]
********* Name and version number of IEC61850 engine (This item is
displayed in case of IEC61850 implemented model only)
[IEC61850 Date Model]
************ Name and version number of IEC61850 Data Model (This item is
- 587 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Display item Remark

[IEC61850 Mapping]
************ Name and version number of IEC61850 Mapping (This item is
[GOOSE Subscribe]
No Data GOOSE Subscript (This item is displayed in case of IEC61850
implemented model only)
Interlock Data
******************** Setting data of interlock (This item is displayed in case of
interlock function implemented model only)
[PLC Date]
************ PLC Data name and version number
[Command Block Data]
******************** Double command block data
- 588 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
11.10 Security setting sub-menu

The Access control function is accessed using the Security Setting sub-menu. Passwords,
active or inactive and several allowed operations can be set for each user ID. Table 11.10-1
shows the settings of the configurable access control function. Table 11.10-2 shows the allowed
operation items.
Table 11.10-1 Access control function settings

Display Order 1 2 3 4 5
User ID Guest Setting Test Operation Full Access
Password (Default) N.A 0000 0000 0000 0000
View ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Setting N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Security
N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Setting
Control N.A N.A N.A ✔ ✔
Test N.A N.A ✔ ✔ ✔

Functions
Clear record N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
(function
Monitoring
keys) N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
(Reset/Revise)
allowed to
F1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
operate
F2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F3 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F4 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F5 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F6 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F7 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Note: Sign “✔” shows that the user can operate the function. Sign “N.A” shows that the user
cannot operate the function. Password can be changed in Change-Password sub-menu in the
Security setting.
- 589 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 11.10-2 Meaning of allowed operation

Functions Meaning
View All users can see all screens/menus
In the “Setting” and “IO setting” menu the authorized user can change
Setting each setting item. Operation of the “Time” menu is also allowed.
(Incidentally, all users can set the time.)
Security setting Authorized users can change security settings
An operator can control a device. An operator can also change the mode
Control
between “Remote” and “Local”.
Test A tester and an operator can access the “Test” menu.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can remove
Clear record
record information.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can clear and
Monitoring
change statistical data.
F1 to F7 Users can operate a function/an application with a function key.
- 590 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
12 Installation
- 591 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
12.1 Unpacking
Upon receipt, open the relay packing and inspect the physical damage.
Ensure that the following items are included:
- Relay unit
- Test record 1 for each Relay
- Installation guide (this document) 1
- User manual (CD-R) 1
- Flange covers 2 set
- Pocket sheet label for function keys 1
- Pocket sheet label for LEDs 1
If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the above contents are missing, please
contact the Toshiba or its agent. The contact information for Toshiba is described at the last of
this document. .
12.2 Rack mounting

The method for rack mounting is illustrated in the succeeding figure. Note that a mount kit is
appropriately required for mounting, when the size of a relay case is not 1/1 case. The mount kit is
provided as an optional accessory. (For more information, see Appendix Rack mounting)
- 592 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
- 593 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
12.3 Caution for storage

If the equipment is not installed immediately, it should be repacked in the original boxes and
should be stored in dry and clean condition.
Recommended storage condition:
- Temperature: 0 degree Celsius to +40 degree Celsius
- No condensation
12.4 Handling precautions

The inside module should be handled under electro static charge free environment. That is,
the user must use an anti-electrostatic wristband that is grounded.
CAUTION
• Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
• Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board.
Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.
• Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface connected to
the earth.
We strongly recommend the user that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be
carried out for the handling area, which is defined in the IEC 60747 standard.
- 594 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
12.5 Wiring work

The terminal block arrangement for wiring is illustrated the Appendix: External connection..
Prior to wiring, the following matters shall be understood.
(i) Electrical interface for telecommunication

The connector should be handled as follows:
• Insert the connector horizontally and tighten both upper Connector
and lower screws alternately.

• Do not touch the connector pin with your bare hand.
Screw
In electrical interface to multiplexed communication circuit for the IED, the earthing wire of
electrical cable is connected to the earth terminal (E) of the relay, if required.
(ii) Optical interface for telecommunication

An optical cable is not designed to be robust. Therefore, bending requires special attentions,
which are shown in the “Handling instructions about the optical cable”.
№ Handling instructions about the optical cable
1 Do not insert the connector obliquely.
2 Tighten the connector when connecting.
3 Do not pull the cable.
4 Do not bend the cable.
5 Do not bend the neck of the connector.
- 595 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
6 Do not twist the cable.
7 Do not kink in the cable.
8 Do not put and drop on the cable.
9 Do not bend the cable to (*)mm or less in radius.
(*)Length differs from characteristics of optical

cable.
- 596 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
12.6 How to replace an inside module by a service module
WARNING
Switch off the DC power supply. Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after
switching off the DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the module, check all of the settings
including the data related the PLC, IEC103 and IEC61850, etc. are restored the original
settings.
- 597 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(i) Removal of the front panel and rear terminal

Step 1: Check to see that the power has not been supplied for the device. Unscrew the four
screws on the front panel to uncover the front panel. An internal flat-cable is used to connect
with the inside modules (approximately 100 millimeters length). Do not pull strongly
Screws
Flat cable (100mm)
Removing direction
Step 2: To remove the flat cable, release the locks at the connector.
Releasing the lock
Connector released
Step 3: Detach terminals where the user wishes to replace a broken module for a new one.
- 598 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii) Replacement of modules

Step 1: Take off the flat cable between the CPU module and the binary IO modules.
Before the removal of After the removal of

the flat cable the flat cable
Step 2: Draw a broken module out; insert the new one.
Replace a module
Step 3: Make the connection securely between the CPU and the BIOs using the flat cable.
Check to see that the locks are enabled on the connector.
Make the connection between

the CPU and the BIOs
- 599 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) Installation of terminals

Step 1: Attach the terminal that was detached on the rear. Note that the upper terminal† has
20 screw-numbers denoted ‘1’ to ‘20’, whereas the lower terminal has 20 screw-numbers
denoted ‘21’ to ‘40’. Never attach the upper and lower terminals in the other way. Check to see
that the terminals are plugged tightly with the absence of clearance.
Example of plugging loosely Example of plugging tightly
Looseness
Step 2: Fasten the upper terminal and lower terminals using the four screws.
Fasten the screws
†The description is intended for the instruction of the “Compressed type terminal”. Hence,
the works for other types are not matched, but the user shall check to see that all
terminals including above terminals are also attached securely.
- 600 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iv) Attachment of the front panel

Step 1: Plug the flat cable. Check to see that the locks are fasten securely.
Plug the cable in as

far as a locking
sound is heard.
Step 2: Cover the front panel by screwing the four screws; then the device is ready.
Screws
CAUTION
Supply DC power after checking that all the modules are in their original positions and the
flat cables are plugged in. If the flat cables are not plugged in enough, the module could suffer
damage.
- 601 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
13 Commissioning and Maintenance
- 602 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
The IED is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.

Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the IED or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general function of IED testing practices and safety
precautions to avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring
which circuits functions when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
Measuring elements
Timers
Protection schemes
Autoreclose
Metering and recording
Fault locator
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment,
telecommunication equipment and other external equipment.
The following tests are included in these tests:
On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Signaling circuit test
Tripping and reclosing circuit test
- 603 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
13.1 Cautions
(i) Safety Precautions
CAUTION
• The IED rack is provided with a grounding terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the IED rack is grounded.
• When connecting the cable to the back of the IED, firmly fix it to the terminal block
and attach the cover provided on top of it.
• Before checking the interior of the IED, be sure to turn off the power.
• Class 1M laser radiation when remove cap for models with <30km class optical
interface. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
(ii) Cautions on Tests

CAUTION
• While the power is on, do not connect/disconnect the flat cable on the front of the
printed circuit board (PCB).
• While the power is on, do not mount/dismount the PCB.
• Before turning on the power, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
• Be careful that the transformer module is not damaged due to an overcurrent or
overvoltage.
• If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
Before mounting/dismounting the PCB, take antistatic measures such as wearing an earthed
wristband.
- 604 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
13.2 Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Three-phase voltage source
2 Single-phase current sources
1 Dynamic three-phase test set (for protection scheme test)
1 DC power supply
3 DC voltmeters
3 AC voltmeters
3 Phase angle meters
2 AC ammeters
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or
the default settings.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the IED case. If there is any damage,
the internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the IED conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage, current and frequency ratings,
and auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the USB port on the front of the IED.
GR-TIEMS software is required on the PC.
(i) Hardware Tests

On commissioning and maintenance, check wire connection and observe the movement of
relay elements. The IED is equipped the feature of signal monitor and you can check the
operation whether the movement is appropriate or not. In this section, checking points of wire
connection and signaling are discussed.
- 605 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(ii) IED External connections

AC and DC input
Power supply Terminal VCT module terminal
Figure 10.2.7-1 External connection at rear of the IED
- 606 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Table 10.2.7-1 Terminal number for AC input and DC input

Power DC VCT AC inputs
supply input module
module terminal Input assignment when VCT
terminal type 42 is applied.
1 – 1-2 Va A phase voltage

2 – 3-4 Vb B phase voltage
3 – 5-6 Vc C phase voltage
4 – 7-8 V0 Zero phase voltage
5 – 9-10 2Va A phase voltage
6 – 11-12 2Vb B phase voltage
7 – 13-14 2Vc C phase voltage
8 – 15-16 2V0 Zero phase voltage
9 – 17-18 Ia A phase current
10 – 19-20 Ib B phase current
21-22 Ic C phase current
23-24 IX1 Zero phase current
29-30 – NA
27 –
28 –
29 P
30 –
31 N
32 –
33 –
34 –
35 –
36 –
37 –
38 FG
39 –
40 –
- 607 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
(iii) Signal monitoring at test

1. Screen menu
Main Menu Record Fault Record

Event Record 1
Monitoring Statistics Event Record 2
Metering Event Record 3
Binary I/O Disturbance Record
Operation Time Clear All Records
Relay Element
Communication
Time
DC Analog Input
DC Analog Output
BCD
Device Status
Interlock
Diagnostics
GOOSE Monitoring
Setting Power Data
Communication
I/O Setting Record

DC Analog Input
Metering
Binary Input
Protection
Binary Output
Control
LED
Power Quality
Function Key
Control
Time Clock
Test Test Mode Time Zone
Signal Monitoring Time Sync.

Display Format
Telecom. Test
Information
Figure 13.2-2 Menu structure and Test menu on screen
- 608 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
2. HMI operation key
Screen
Main Menu
10:48 1/10
Record >
Monitoring >
Setting >
I/O Setting >
Control >
Cursor
Operator presses the key [ ]
Operation key
／：Move up and down

／：Move left and right or go to next page
CANCEL／ENTER
Jacks A to C for 3 signals
Figure 13.2-3 HMI and Key operation
- 609 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3. Example of TEST VIEW
123456789012345678901 123456789012345678901 123456789012345678901
1 Signal Monitoring 1 Select Function 1 Select Element

[ENTER] 2 10:48 1/128 [→] 2 10:48 1/128
2 10:48 1/3
3 Term A + 3 ***** 423100 > 3 AF00001001
4 423100AF00001001 4 ****** 423101 > 4 AF00002001
5 Term B + [CANCEL] 5 ****** 423102 > 5 AF00003001
[←]
6 423100AF00001002 6 ****** 423103 > 6 AF00004001
7 Term C + 7 ****** 423104 > 7 AF00005001
8 423100AF00001003 8 ****** 423105 > 8 AF00006001
[CANCEL] [↑/↓]
123456789012345678901 123456789012345678901
1 Signal Monitoring 1 Select Element
2 10:48 1/3 [ENTER] 2 10:48 1/128
Function ID No. 3 Term A + 3 AF00001001
4 423100AF00002001 4 AF00002001
(6 columns)
5 Term B + 5 AF00003001
6 423100AF00001002 6 AF00004001
Signal No.
7 Term C + 7 AF00005001
10 columns） 8 423100AF00001003 8 AF00006001
Figure 13.2-4 Example of Test view
- 610 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function
- 611 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001)
C0_BIT 8000001220
C1_BIT 8000011220
C0_N8 2000001128
C1_N8 2000011128
C0_N16 2100001129
C1_N16 2100011129
C0_N32 220000112A
C1_N32 220001112A
C0_N64 230000112B
C1_N64 230001112B
C0_S8 2000001120
C1_S8 2000011120
C2_S8 2000021120
C4_S8 2000041120
C5_S8 2000051120
C6_S8 2000061120
C7_S8 2000071120
C8_S8 2000081120
C9_S8 2000091120
C10_S8 20000A1120
C11_S8 20000B1120
C12_S8 20000C1120
C13_S8 20000D1120
C14_S8 20000E1120
C15_S8 20000F1120
C16_S8 2000101120
C17_S8 2000111120
C18_S8 2000121120
C19_S8 2000131120
C20_S8 2000141120
C21_S8 2000151120
C22_S8 2000161120
C23_S8 2000171120
C24_S8 2000181120
C25_S8 2000191120
C26_S8 20001A1120
C27_S8 20001B1120
C28_S8 20001C1120
C29_S8 20001D1120
C30_S8 20001E1120
C31_S8 20001F1120
C32_S8 2000201120
C40_S8 2000281120
C50_S8 2000321120
- 612 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

C60_S8 20003C1120
C70_S8 2000461120
C80_S8 2000501120
C90_S8 20005A1120
C100_S8 2000641120
C0_S16 2100001121
C1_S16 2100011121
C2_S16 2100021121
C3_S16 2100031121
C4_S16 2100041121
C5_S16 2100051121
C6_S16 2100061121
C7_S16 2100071121
C8_S16 2100081121
C9_S16 2100091121
C10_S16 21000A1121
C11_S16 21000B1121
C12_S16 21000C1121
C13_S16 21000D1121
C14_S16 21000E1121
C15_S16 21000F1121
C16_S16 2100101121
C17_S16 2100111121
C18_S16 2100121121
C19_S16 2100131121
C20_S16 2100141121
C21_S16 2100151121
C22_S16 2100161121
C23_S16 2100171121
C24_S16 2100181121
C25_S16 2100191121
C26_S16 21001A1121
C27_S16 21001B1121
C28_S16 21001C1121
C29_S16 21001D1121
C30_S16 21001E1121
C31_S16 21001F1121
C32_S16 2100201121
C40_S16 2100281121
C50_S16 2100321121
C60_S16 21003C1121
C70_S16 2100461121
C80_S16 2100501121
C90_S16 21005A1121
- 613 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

C100_S16 2100641121
C0_S32 2200001122
C1_S32 2200011122
C2_S32 2200021122
C4_S32 2200041122
C5_S32 2200051122
C6_S32 2200061122
C7_S32 2200071122
C8_S32 2200081122
C9_S32 2200091122
C10_S32 22000A1122
C11_S32 22000B1122
C12_S32 22000C1122
C13_S32 22000D1122
C14_S32 22000E1122
C15_S32 22000F1122
C16_S32 2200101122
C17_S32 2200111122
C18_S32 2200121122
C19_S32 2200131122
C20_S32 2200141122
C21_S32 2200151122
C22_S32 2200161122
C23_S32 2200171122
C24_S32 2200181122
C25_S32 2200191122
C26_S32 22001A1122
C27_S32 22001B1122
C28_S32 22001C1122
C29_S32 22001D1122
C30_S32 22001E1122
C31_S32 22001F1122
C32_S32 2200201122
C40_S32 2200281122
C50_S32 2200321122
C60_S32 22003C1122
C70_S32 2200461122
C80_S32 2200501122
C90_S32 22005A1122
C100_S32 2200641122
C0_S64 2300001123
C1_S64 2300011123
C0_U8 3000001124
C1_U8 3000011124
- 614 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

C2_U8 3000021124
C3_U8 3000031124
C4_U8 3000041124
C5_U8 3000051124
C6_U8 3000061124
C7_U8 3000071124
C8_U8 3000081124
C9_U8 3000091124
C10_U8 30000A1124
C11_U8 30000B1124
C12_U8 30000C1124
C13_U8 30000D1124
C14_U8 30000E1124
C15_U8 30000F1124
C16_U8 3000101124
C17_U8 3000111124
C18_U8 3000121124
C19_U8 3000131124
C20_U8 3000141124
C21_U8 3000151124
C22_U8 3000161124
C23_U8 3000171124
C24_U8 3000181124
C25_U8 3000191124
C26_U8 30001A1124
C27_U8 30001B1124
C28_U8 30001C1124
C29_U8 30001D1124
C30_U8 30001E1124
C31_U8 30001F1124
C32_U8 3000201124
C40_U8 3000281124
C50_U8 3000321124
C60_U8 30003C1124
C70_U8 3000461124
C80_U8 3000501124
C90_U8 30005A1124
C100_U8 3000641124
C0_U16 3100001125
C1_U16 3100011125
C2_U16 3100021125
C4_U16 3100041125
C5_U16 3100051125
C6_U16 3100061125
- 615 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

C7_U16 3100071125
C8_U16 3100081125
C9_U16 3100091125
C10_U16 31000A1125
C11_U16 31000B1125
C12_U16 31000C1125
C13_U16 31000D1125
C14_U16 31000E1125
C15_U16 31000F1125
C16_U16 3100101125
C17_U16 3100111125
C18_U16 3100121125
C19_U16 3100131125
C20_U16 3100141125
C21_U16 3100151125
C22_U16 3100161125
C23_U16 3100171125
C24_U16 3100181125
C25_U16 3100191125
C26_U16 31001A1125
C27_U16 31001B1125
C28_U16 31001C1125
C29_U16 31001D1125
C30_U16 31001E1125
C31_U16 31001F1125
C32_U16 3100201125
C40_U16 3100281125
C50_U16 3100321125
C60_U16 31003C1125
C70_U16 3100461125
C80_U16 3100501125
C90_U16 31005A1125
C100_U16 3100641125
C0_U32 3200001126
C1_U32 3200011126
C2_U32 3200021126
C3_U32 3200031126
C4_U32 3200041126
C5_U32 3200051126
C6_U32 3200061126
C7_U32 3200071126
C8_U32 3200081126
C9_U32 3200091126
C10_U32 32000A1126
- 616 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

C11_U32 32000B1126
C12_U32 32000C1126
C13_U32 32000D1126
C14_U32 32000E1126
C15_U32 32000F1126
C16_U32 3200101126
C17_U32 3200111126
C18_U32 3200121126
C19_U32 3200131126
C20_U32 3200141126
C21_U32 3200151126
C22_U32 3200161126
C23_U32 3200171126
C24_U32 3200181126
C25_U32 3200191126
C26_U32 32001A1126
C27_U32 32001B1126
C28_U32 32001C1126
C29_U32 32001D1126
C30_U32 32001E1126
C31_U32 32001F1126
C32_U32 3200201126
C40_U32 3200281126
C50_U32 3200321126
C60_U32 32003C1126
C70_U32 3200461126
C80_U32 3200501126
C90_U32 32005A1126
C100_U32 3200641126
C0_U64 3300001127
C1_U64 3300011127

BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101)
BI1F OP 3110001198 BI1 forced operate start
- 617 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101)
BI11F OP 311A001198 BI11 forced operate start
BI12F OP 311B001198 BI12 forced operate start
BI13F OP 311C001198 BI13 forced operate start
BI14F OP 311D001198 BI14 forced operate start
BI15F OP 311E001198 BI15 forced operate start
BI16F OP 311F001198 BI16 forced operate start
BO1F OP 3110201198 BO1 forced operate start
BO11F OP 311A201198 BO11 forced operate start
BO12F OP 311B201198 BO12 forced operate start
BO13F OP 311C201198 BO13 forced operate start
BO14F OP 311D201198 BO14 forced operate start
BO15F OP 311E201198 BO15 forced operate start
BO16F OP 311F201198 BO16 forced operate start
BI11F OP 311A001198 BI11 forced operate start
BI12F OP 311B001198 BI12 forced operate start
BI13F OP 311C001198 BI13 forced operate start
BI14F OP 311D001198 BI14 forced operate start
- 618 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Appendix 2 Case outline
- 619 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
1/1 case size

1. Trihedral figure (1/1×19 inches) for “Compression type terminal” case
Note: Dimensions shown in millimeters
- 620 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
2. Panel cut out figure (1/1×19 inches) for “Compression type terminal” case
3. Panel cut out figure (1/1×19 inches) when “Ring lug type terminal” applied
Note: Dimensions shown in millimeter
- 621 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
3/4 case size

- 622 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
1Note: Dimensions shown in millimeters.

2Note: When you wish to know about the panel-cut-out-figures corresponding to
rack-attachment kits, refer to Appendix: Rack mounting.
3Note: For the size relating to “Ring type terminal” case, see other figures.
- 623 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
1/2 case size

- 624 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

- 625 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
1/3 case size

- 626 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

- 627 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Appendix 3 Typical external connection

1.1. Typical arrangement of each module (1/1 case in 19inch rack for Compression-type terminal)
1.2. Typical arrangement of each module (1/1 case in 19inch rack for Compression-type terminal)
1.3 Typical arrangement of each module (1/3 case in 19inch rack for Compression-type terminal)
- 628 -
1.1. 1/1 case in 19inch rack for Compression-type terminal)
[IO#8] [IO#7] [IO#6] [IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1] [VCT#2]
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
PWS1 A BIO3 A BO1 A C11 VCT44B VCT47B
(+) 1 1 100BASE-TX 1 1
2 BI1 BO1(SF)
2
(Not used) V Ia-1VT
(-) 2 2 2
4
(+) 3 3 3
FAIL1
3
BI2 BO2(SF) V Ib-1VT
(-) 4 4 4
1
5
(+) 5 5 5
V Ic-1VT
BI3 BO3(SF)
6 6
Ia-1CT 6
(-) 6
8
10 (+) 7 7
C12 7
BI4 BO4(SF)
8 8
Ib-1CT
9 (-) 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9 9 9
BI5 BO5(SF) Ic-1CT
(-) 10 10 10
(+) 11 11 11
BI6 BO6(SF) Ia-2CT

(-) 12 12 12
(+) 13 13 13
BI7 BO7 14
Ib-2CT
(-) 14 14
(+) 15 15
C13 15
BI8 BO8 16
Ic-2CT
(-) 16 16
17 17
BO9 Ia-3CT
18 18
21 21 19
BO1(F) BO10 Ib-3CT

22 22 20
23 23 21
Ic-3CT
BO2(F)
24
BO11
24 C14 22
25 25 23
BO3(F) BO12 In-1NCT

26 26 24
27 27 25
BO4(F) BO13 In-2NCT

28 28 26
(+) 29 27
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14 In-3NCT
30 30 28
(-) 31 31 31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15 30 30
32 32
35 IRIG-B000
36
33 33
•A1
37
BO7
34
BO16
34 •B1• SIG
A2 DISUSE
35 35
•B2
38
37 BO17
• DISUSE
36
36 •A3
BO8
38
37 •B3• GND
BO18
38
GRT#3&5 (1.0) GRT#3 (1.0)
●FG ●FGE ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FG1 ●FGA ●FG2 ●E
- 629 -
1.2. 1/1 case in 19inch rack for Compression-type terminal)
[IO#8] [IO#7] [IO#6] [IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1] [VCT#2]
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
PWS1 A BIO3 A BO1 A BI1 A C11 VCT44B VCT48B
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 100BASE-TX 1 1
2 BI1 BO1(SF)
2
BI1 (Not used) Va-1VT
(-) 2 (-) 2 2 2
4
(+) 3 3 (+) 3 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(SF)
4 (-) 4
BI2 Vb-1VT
(-) 4 4
1
(+) 5 5 (+) 5 5 5
BI3 BO3(SF)
6 (-) 6
BI3 Ia-1CT Vc-1VT
(-) 6 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 (+) 7
C12 7
BI4 BO4(SF)
8 (-) 8
BI4
8
Ib-1CT
9 (-) 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9 9 (+) 9 9 9
BI5 BO5(SF) (-) 10
BI5 Ic-1CT Va-2VT
(-) 10 10 10 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11 11
BI6 BO6(SF) (-) 12
BI6 Ia-2CT Vb-2VT
(-) 12 12 12 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13 13
BI7 BO7 (-) 14

BI7
14
Ib-2CT Vc-2VT
(-) 14 14 14
(+) 15 15 (+) 15
C13 15
BI8 BO8 (-) 16

BI8
16
Ic-2CT
(-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17 17
BO9 (-) 18
BI9 Ia-3CT Ia-4CT
18 18 18
21 21 (+) 21 19 19
BO1(F) BO10 BI10 Ib-3CT Ib-4CT

22 22 (-) 22 20 20
23 23 (+) 23 21 21
Ic-3CT
BO2(F)
24
BO11
24 (-) 24
BI11
C14 22 22
Ic-4CT
25 25 (+) 25 23 23
BO3(F) BO12 BI12 In-1NCT Ia-5CT

26 26 (-) 26 24 24
27 27 (+) 27 25 25
BO4(F) BO13 (-) 28

BI13 In-2NCT Ib-5CT
28 28 26 26
(+) 29 (+) 29 27 27
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14 (-) 30
BI14 In-3NCT Ic-5CT
30 30 28 28
(-) 31 31 31
(+) 31
BI15
C15
32 BO6(F) BO15 (-) 32 30 30
32 32
35 IRIG-B000
(+) 33
36
33 33
BI16 •A1
37
BO7
34
BO16
34 (-) 34
•B1• SIG
A2 DISUSE
35 35
(+) 35 •B2
38
37 BO17 (-) 36
BI17 • DISUSE
36
36 •A3
BO8
38
37
(+) 37
BI18
•B3• GND
BO18 (-) 38
38
GRT#3&5 (1.0) GRT#5 (1.0)
●FG ●FGE ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FG1 ●FGA ●FG2 ●E
- 630 -
1.3. 1/3 case in 19inch rack for Compression-type terminal
[IO#1] [VCT#1]
T2 T1 VC1
PWS1 A BIO3 A C11 VCT35B
(+) 1 100BASE-FX 1
2 BI1 2
V
(-) 2
4
(+) 3 TX
3
FAIL1 BI2
(-) 4
1
(+) 5 RX
BI3
(-) 6
8
10 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 100BASE-FX
9 (-) 8 Ia-1CT
FAIL2 8
7 (+) 9
9
BI5
(-) 10 TX Ib-1CT
10
(+) 11
11
BI6
(-) 12 RX Ic-1CT
12
(+) 13
13
BI7
(-) 14 Ia-2CT
(+) 15
C13 14
15
BI8 Ib-2CT
(-) 16 16
17
Ic-2CT
18
21
BO1(F)
22
23
BO2(F)
24 C14
25
BO3(F)
26
27
BO4(F)
28
(+) 29
29
30
DC/DC BO5(F)
30
(-) 31 31 C15
32 BO6(F) 20
32
35
33
36
●FG1
BO7
34
37
38 35
37
36
BO8
38
GRT#1 (2.1)
●FG ●FGA ●E
- 631 -
[IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
PWS1 A BIO3 A BO1 A BI1 A C11 VCT44B
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 100BASE-TX 1
2 BI1 BO1(SF)
2
BI1 V
(-) 2 (-) 2 2
4
(+) 3 3 (+) 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(SF) BI2
(-) 4 4 (-) 4
1
(+) 5 5 (+) 5 5
BI3 BO3(SF)
6 (-) 6
BI3
6
Ia-1CT
(-) 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 BO4(SF)
8 (-) 8
BI4
8
Ib-1CT
9 (-) 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9 9 (+) 9 9
BI5 BO5(SF) (-) 10
BI5 Ic-1CT
(-) 10 10 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11
BI6 BO6(SF) (-) 12

BI6 Ia-2CT
(-) 12 12 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13
BI7 BO7 (-) 14

BI7
14
Ib-2CT
14
(-)
(+)
14
15 15 (+) 15
C13 15
Remote
BI8 BO8 (-) 16
BI8 communication 16
Ic-2CT
(-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17
RX
BO9 (-) 18
BI9 Ia-3CT
18 18
21 21 (+) 21 19
TX
BO1(F) BO10 BI10 Ib-3CT
22 22 (-) 22 20
23 23 (+) 23 21
BO2(F)
24
BO11
24 (-) 24
BI11 C14 22
Ic-3CT
25 25 (+) 25 23
BO3(F) BO12 BI12 In-1NCT

26 26 (-) 26 24
27 27 (+) 27 25
BO4(F) BO13 (-) 28

BI13 In-2NCT
28 28 26
(+) 29 (+) 29 27
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14 (-) 30
BI14 In-3NCT
30 30 28
(-) 31 31 31
(+) 31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15 BI15
32 32 (-) 32 30
35 (+) 33
33 33
36 BI16
BO7 BO16 (-) 34
34 34
37
(+) 35
38 35 35
37 BO17 BI17
(-) 36
36
36 (+) 37
BO8 37
38 BI18
BO18 (-) 38
38
GRT#2 (1.0)
●FG ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E
- 632 -
[IO#6] [IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
PWS1 A BIO3 A BO1 A BI1 A C11 VCT44B
100BASE-FX
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 1
2 BI1 BO1(SF) BI1 V

(-) 2 2 (-) 2 2
4
(+) 3 (+) 3 TX
3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(SF) BI2
(-) 4 4 (-) 4
1
(+) 5 (+) 5 RX 5
5
BI3 BO3(SF) (-) 6
BI3
6
Ia-1CT
(-) 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 BO4(SF) (-) 8
BI4 Ib-1CT
9 (-) 8 8 100BASE-FX 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9 9 (+) 9 9
BI5 BO5(SF) (-) 10
BI5 Ic-1CT
(-) 10 10 TX 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11
BI6 BO6(SF) (-) 12

BI6 Ia-2CT
(-) 12 12 RX 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13
BI7 BO7 (-) 14

BI7
14
Ib-2CT
(-)
(+)
14
15
14
15 (+) 15
C13 15
Remote
BI8 BO8 (-) 16
BI8 communication 16
Ic-2CT
(-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17
RX
BO9 (-) 18
BI9 Ia-3CT
18 18
21 21 (+) 21 19
BI10 TX Ib-3CT
BO1(F) BO10 (-) 22 20
22 22
23 23 (+) 23 21
BO2(F)
24
BO11
24 (-) 24
BI11
C14 22
Ic-3CT
Remote
25 25 (+) 25 23
communication
BO3(F) BO12 BI12 In-1NCT
26 26 (-) 26 24
(+) 27 RX 25
27 27
BO4(F) BO13 (-) 28
BI13 In-2NCT
28 28 26
(+) 29 (+) 29 TX 27
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14 (-) 30
BI14 In-3NCT
30 30 28
(-) 31 31 31
(+) 31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15 BI15
32 (-) 32 30
32
35 (+) 33
33 33
36 BI16
BO7 BO16 (-) 34
34 34
37
(+) 35
38 35 35
37 BO17 BI17
(-) 36
36
36 (+) 37
BO8 37
38 BI18
BO18 (-) 38
38
GRT#2 (1.0)
●FG ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E
- 633 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Typical external connection diagram for Compression-type terminal

VCT35B, IO: BI1A, BO1A and BIO3A for Model 1
TB1-7
8
9
10
11
CT 12
CB 1
VT BI1
2
3
1 BI2 4
BO1 2 Semi-fast BO
5
3 BI3 6
BO2 4 Semi-fast BO
7
CB 5 BI4 8
BO3 6 Semi-fast BO
CT 13 9
14 7
BI5 10
15 BO4 Semi-fast BO
8
16 11
17 9
BI6 12
18 BO5 Semi-fast BO
10
13
11
BI7 14
BO6 12 Semi-fast BO
1 13 15
2 BO7 BI8 16
14
20 15
(FG) 21
BO8 16
BIO3A BO1 Fast BO
22
1 17
23
2 BI1 BO9 18 BO2 Fast BO
BO1A 24
3 21
25
4 BI2 BO10 22 BO3 Fast BO
26
5 23
BO11 27
6 BI3 24 BO4 Fast BO
28
7 25
29
BO12 26
8 BI4 BO5 Fast BO
30
9 27
31
BO13 28
10 BI5 BO6 Fast BO
32
11 29
33
BO14 30
12 BI6 BO7 34
31
13
BO15 32 35
14 BI7 36
33
15
BO16 34 37
16 BI8 BO8
35
17 38
BO17 36
Programmable BI 18 BI9
37
21 BI1A BO18 38
22 BI10
23
24 BI11
25
26 BI12
COM-A A1
27 B1
COM-B A2
28 BI13 B2 RS485 I/F
29 A3
COM-0V B3 (option)
30 BI14 RJ45
31 Ethernet LAN I/F (option)
BI15 COM
32 Optical I/F (option)
33
34 BI16 SIG A1
B1
35 DISUSE A2
B2
36 BI17 A3 IRIG-B (option)
GND B3
37
38 BI18
PWS
RELAY 2
≥1
DD FAIL. 4
DC (+) 29
30 +5Vdc 3
31 FAIL RELAY FAILURE 1
SUPPLY (-) 1
32 0V
8
35
36 10
37
9
FG 7
E
- 634 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Typical external connection diagram for Compression-type terminal

VCT44B, IO: BI1A, BO1A and BIO3A for Model 2
TB1-5
6
7
8
9
CT 10
23
24
11
12
13
14
15
16
25
26
1
17 BI1
2
18
19 3
20 1 BI2 4
21 BO1 2 Semi-fast BO
22 5
3 BI3 6
BO2 4 Semi-fast BO
27 7
5 BI4
28 8
BO3 6 Semi-fast BO
9
1 7
BI5 10
2 BO4 Semi-fast BO
8
11
9
CT BI6 12
BO5 Semi-fast BO
10
13
11
BI7 14
20 BO6 12 Semi-fast BO
(FG) 15
13
BO7 BI8 16
1 14
2 BI1 15
21
BO8 16
3 BO1 Fast BO
BIO3A 22
4 BI2 17
23
BO9 18
5 BO2 Fast BO
BO1A 24
6 BI3 21
25
BO10 22
7 BO3 Fast BO
26
BI4 23
8 27
BO11 24
9 BO4 Fast BO
28
25
10 BI5 29
BO12 26
11 BO5 Fast BO
30
27
12 BI6 31
BO13 28 BO6 Fast BO
13 32
29
14 BI7 33
BO14 30
15 BO7 34
31
16 BI8 BO15 35
32
17 36
33
Programmable BI 18 BI9 BO16 37
34 BO8
21 BI1A
35
22 BI10 BO17 38
36
23
37
24 BI11 BO18 38
25
26 BI12
COM-A A1
27 B1
A2
28 BI13 COM-B B2 RS485 I/F
29 COM-0V A3 (option)
B3
30 BI14 RJ45
31 Ethernet LAN I/F (option)
BI15 COM
32 Optical I/F (option)
33
34 BI16 SIG A1
B1
35 DISUSE A2
B2
36 BI17 A3 IRIG-B (option)
GND B3
37
38 BI18
PWS
RELAY 2
≥1
DD FAIL. 4
DC (+) 29
30 +5Vdc 3
SUPPLY (-) 1
32 0V
8
35
36 10
37
9
FG 7
E
- 635 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Appendix 4 Ordering
- 636 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Ordering information
[Hardware selection]
7 8 9 A B C D E F G H J K L
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 1 - - 0 0 - - - 0
Analog inputs
2 x three-phase CT + 1
1 x one-phase VT (Module No. 35)
Outline
Standard LCD 1/3 x 19’’ rack Flush mounting 1
Large LCD 1/3 x 19’’ rack Flush mounting 5
Standard LCD 1/3 x 19’’ rack Rack mounting (*1) E
Large LCD 1/3 x 19’’ rack Rack mounting (*1) H
Rated Phase Currents (Default settings) (*2)

1A 1
5A 2
Rated Neutral Currents (Default settings)

None 0
(*1) For 19” rack panel mounting, accessories of joint kits are available.
(*2) Select the appropriate CT configuration is required when you require another rated current
configuration.
- 637 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 2 - - 0 0 - - -
Analog inputs
3 x three-phase CT + 3 x zero-phase CT + 2
1 x one-phase VT (Module No. 44)
Outline
Standard LCD 1/1 x 19’’ rack Flush/rack mounting 4
Large LCD 1/1 x 19’’ rack Flush/rack mounting 8
Standard LCD 1/2 x 19’’ rack Rack mounting (*1) F
Standard LCD 3/4 x 19’’ rack Rack mounting (*1) G
Large LCD 1/2 x 19’’ rack Rack mounting (*1) J
Large LCD 3/4 x 19’’ rack Rack mounting (*1) K
Rated Phase Currents (Default settings) (*2)

1A 1
5A 2
Rated Neutral Currents (Default settings) (*2)

1A 1
5A 2
(*1) For 19” rack panel mounting, accessories of joint kits are available.
(*2) Select the appropriate CT configuration when you require another rated current configuration.
- 638 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - - - 0 0 - - -
DC rating
110 - 240 Vdc/Vac 1
48 - 110 Vdc 2
24 - 48 Vdc 3
BI/BO Module
Refer to Number of BI/BO Table
Number of Serial and/or Ethernet Communication and/or Time Sync Port(s)

1 port 1
1 port + GPS 2
1 port + IRIG-B 3
2 ports 4
2 ports + GPS 5
2 ports + IRIG-B 6
3 ports 7
3 ports + GPS 8
3 ports + IRIG-B 9
Selection of Serial and/or Ethernet Communication Port(s)

100Base-TX x 1 port (When position E = 1 - 3 ) 3
100Base-FX x 1 port (When position E = 1 - 3 ) 4
100Base-TX x 2 ports (When position E = 4 - 6 ) 5
100Base-FX x 2 ports (When position E = 4 - 6 ) 6
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-TX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 ) A
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-TX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 ) B
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-FX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 ) C
RS485 x 1 port + 100Base-FX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 ) D
Fiber optic (for serial) + 100Base-TX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 ) E
Fiber optic (for serial) + 100Base-TX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 ) F
Fiber optic (for serial) + 100Base-FX x 1 port (When position E = 4 - 6 ) G
Fiber optic (for serial) + 100Base-FX x 2 ports (When position E = 7 - 9 ) H
Function Block (linked with software selection)

See function table of software selection
BI/BO Terminal Type

Compression plug type terminal 0
Ring lug type terminal 1
Rated Frequency (Default setting)

50Hz 1
60Hz 2
(*2) Select the appropriate CT configuration when you require another rated current configuration.
- 639 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Rated phase currents
2 x three-phase CT (When position “7“ = 1)
1CT group 2CT group Ordering No.
(1Ia, 1Ib, 1Ic) (2Ia, 2Ib, 2Ic) (Position “K”)
1A 1A 1
5A 5A 2
1A 5A A
5A 1A J
3 x three-phase CT (When position “7“ = 2)

1CT group 2CT group 3CT group Ordering No.
(1Ia, 1Ib, 1Ic) (2Ia, 2Ib, 2Ic) (3Ia, 3Ib, 3Ic) (Position “K”)
1A 1A 1A 1
5A 5A 5A 2
1A 1A 5A 6
1A 5A 1A A
1A 5A 5A E
5A 1A 1A J
5A 1A 5A N
5A 5A 1A S
Rated neutral currents

(When position “7“ = 2) Ordering No.
1NCT 2NCT 3NCT (Position “L”)
1A 1A 1A 1
5A 5A 5A 2
1A 1A 5A 6
1A 5A 1A A
1A 5A 5A E
5A 1A 1A J
5A 1A 5A N
5A 5A 1A S
- 640 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
[Software Ordering]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S G T E F U 9 V
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 0 - -
Analog inputs
Assignment on position “7”
Function Block
Refer to Function Table
Number of Serial and/or Ethernet
Communication and/or Time Sync Port(s)
Assignment on position “E”
Selection of Serial and/or Ethernet
Communication Port(s)
Assignment on position “F”
Protocol
IEC 61850 2
Outline
Assignment on position “9”
Language
English E
- 641 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Number of BI/BO
BI/BO 1 x I/O module

Number of BI/BO Ordering
No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
“A” to Configuration
Common
Fast-BO
DC-AO
“B”)
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
7 - - - - 6 4 - - 11 1xBIO1
12 - - - - 3 2 - - 12 1xBIO2
8 - - - 6 - 2 - - 13 1xBIO3
- 6 - - - - 2 6 - 14 1xBIO4
18 - - - - - - - - 15 1xBI1
- 12 - - - - - - - 16 1xBI2
- - 32 - - - - - - 17 1xBI3
Other Configuration ZZ To be specified at ordering
BI/BO 2 x I/O module (Set code position “9” to other than “1”, “5”, “E” or “H”.)
No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
DC-AO
“B”)
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
- - 32 - - 6 12 - - 21 1xBI3+1xBO1
7 - 32 - - 6 4 - - 22 1xBI3+1xBIO1
12 - 32 - - 3 2 - - 23 1xBI3+1xBIO2
18 - - - - 6 12 - - 24 1xBI1+1xBO1
25 - - - - 6 4 - - 25 1xBI1+1xBIO1
30 - - - - 3 2 - - 26 1xBI1+1xBIO2
8 - - - 6 6 14 - - 27 1xBO1+1xBIO3
15 - - - 6 6 6 - - 28 1xBIO1+1xBIO3
7 - - - - 12 16 - - 29 1xBO1+1xBIO1
16 - - 12 - 4 - - 2A 2xBIO3
- - 32 - - - - 16 - 2B 1xBI3+1xBO2
- 12 - - - 6 12 - - 2C 1xBI2 +1xBO1
- 642 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
BI/BO 3 x I/O module (Set code position “9” to other than “1”, “5”, “E” or “H”, or to other than “1”, “2”, “5”, “6”, “E”,
“F”, “H” or “J” when the code position “G” is 2.)
No.
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
(Position
Semi-fast
Common
Configuration
Fast-BO
“A” to
DC-AO
DC-AI
“B”)
BO
BO
BO
BI
BI
15 - - - 6 12 18 - - 31 1xBO1+1xBIO1+1xBIO3
20 - - - 6 9 16 - - 32 1xBO1+1xBIO2+1xBIO3
23 - - - 12 6 8 - - 33 1xBIO1+2xBIO3
26 - - - 6 6 14 - - 34 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO3
8 - 32 - 6 6 14 - - 35 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO3
24 - - - 18 - 6 - - 36 3xBIO3
25 - - - - 12 16 - - 37 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO1
- - 32 10 - 6 12 - - 38 1xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
36 - - - - 6 12 - - 39 2xBI1+1xBO1
- 24 - - - 6 12 - - 3A 2xBI2+1xBO1
18 6 - - - 6 14 6 - 3B 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO4
7 - 32 - - 6 4 16 - 3C 1xBI3+1xBIO1+1xBO2
7 - 32 - - 12 16 - - 3D 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO1
- - 32 - - 6 12 16 - 3E 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBO2
18 - - 10 - 6 12 - - 3F 1XBI1+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
16 - - - 12 6 16 - - 3G 1xBO1+2xBIO3
- 6 32 - - 6 14 6 - 3H 1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO4
26 - - - 6 6 14 - - 3J 1xBO1+1xBIO3+1xBI1
- - 64 - - 6 12 - - 3K 2xBI3+1xBO1
14 - 32 - - 12 8 - - 3L 1xBI3+2xBIO1
- - 96 - - - - - - 3M 3xBI3
8 12 - - 6 6 14 - - 3N 1xBI2+1xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 32 - - 12 24 - - 3P 1xBI3 + 2xBO1
- 643 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
BI/BO 4 x I/O modules (Set code position “9” to “3”, “4”, “7”, “8”, “G” or “K”.)
No.
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
(Position
Semi-fast
Common
Configuration
Fast-BO
“A” to
DC-AO
DC-AI
“B”)
BO
BO
BO
BI
BI
26 - - - 6 12 26 - - 41 1xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO3
32 - - - 24 - 8 - - 42 4xBIO3
8 - 32 - 6 12 26 - - 43 1xBI3+2xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 64 - - 12 24 - - 44 2xBI3+2xBO1
1xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
8 - 32 10 6 6 14 - - 45 +1xBIO3
54 - - - - 6 12 - - 46 3xBI1+1xBO1
1xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO2
20 - 32 - 6 9 16 - - 47 +1xBIO3
1xBO1+1xBI1+1xBO1
26 - - - 6 12 26 - - 48 +1xBIO3
20 6 15 28 49 2xBO1+1xBIO2+1xBIO3
- - 64 10 - 6 12 - - 4A 2xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
34 - - - 12 6 16 - - 4B 1xBI1+1xBO1+2xBIO3
- - 64 - - - - 32 - 4C 2xBI3+2xBO2
21 - 32 - - 18 12 - - 4D 1xBI3+3xBIO1
- - 128 - - - - - - 4E 4xBI3
7 96 6 4 4F 3xBI3+1xBIO1
8 24 - - 6 6 14 - - 4G 2xBI2 +1xBO1 +1xBIO3
- - 32 - - 18 36 - - 4H 1xBI3 + 3xBO1
1xBI1 + 1xBI2 + 1xBO1
26 12 - - 6 6 14 - - 4J + 1xBIO3
24 - 32 - - 12 16 - - 4K 1xBI3+1xBO1+2xBIO2
- 644 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
DC-AO
“B”)
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI 1xBI1+1xBIO1+1xBIO3
33 - - - 6 6 6 32 - 51 +2xBO2
44 - - - 6 12 26 - - 52 2xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO3
25 - 96 - - 6 4 - - 53 1xBI1+3xBI3+1xBIO1
8 - 96 - 6 6 14 - - 54 3xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 64 10 - 12 24 - - 55 2xBI3+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
62 - - - 6 6 14 - - 56 3xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO3
54 6 - - - 6 14 6 - 57 3xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO4
54 - - 10 - 6 12 - - 58 3xBI1+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
36 - - 10 - 12 24 - - 59 2xBI1+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
1xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
20 - 32 - 6 9 16 - - 5A +1xBIO2+1xBIO3
- - 96 - - 12 24 - - 5B 3xBI3+2xBO1
- - 96 10 - 6 12 - - 5C 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 64 10 - - - 32 - 5D 2xBI3+1xDCAI2+2xBO2
- - 128 - - 6 12 - - 5E 4xBI3+1xBO1
- - 160 - - 6 12 - - 5F 5xBI3
No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
DC-AO
“B”)
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
2xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO1
51 - - - 6 18 30 - - 61 +1xBIO3
8 - 96 - 6 12 26 - - 62 3xBI3+2xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 128 - - 12 24 - - 63 4xBI3+2xBO1
8 - 128 - 6 6 14 - - 64 4xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO3
3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
8 - 96 10 6 6 14 - - 65 +1xBIO3
3xBI1+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
54 6 - 10 - 6 14 6 - 66 +1xBIO4
- - 128 10 - 6 12 - - 67 4xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 96 10 - 12 24 - - 68 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+2xBO1
52 - - - 12 - 4 32 - 69 2xBI1+2xBIO3+2xBO2
52 - - - 12 12 28 - - 6A 2xBI1+2xBO1+2xBIO3
36 - - - - 24 48 - - 6B 2xBI1+4xBO1
36 - 64 - - 12 24 - - 6C 2xBI1+2xBI3+2xBO1
44 - - - 6 18 38 - - 6D 2xBI1+3xBO1+1xBIO3
- - 160 - - 6 12 - - 6E 5xBI3+1xBO1
7 - 160 - - 6 4 - - 6F 5xBI3+1xBIO1
- 645 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
BI/BO 7 x I/O modules (Set code position “9” to “4” or “8”)

No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
DC-AO
“B”)
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
80 - BI- - 6 12 26 - - 71 4xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO3
72 6 - - - 12 26 6 - 72 4xBI1+2xBO1+1xBIO4
8 - 96 - 6 18 38 - - 73 3xBI3+3xBO1+1xBIO3
- 6 96 - - 18 38 6 - 74 3xBI3+3xBO1+1xBIO4
2xBI1+1xDCAI2+2xBIO4
36 12 - 10 - - 4 44 - 75 +2xBO2
- - 96 20 - 12 24 - - 76 3xBI3+2xDCAI2+2xBO1
7 - 64 20 - 6 4 32 - 77 +2xBO2
- 60 - - - 6 12 16 - 78 5xBI2+1xBO1+1xBO2
- - 160 - - 12 24 - - 79 5xBI3+2xBO1
52 - - 10 12 12 28 - - 7A +2XBO1
54 - 64 - - 12 24 - - 7B 3xBI1 + 2xBI3 + 2xBO1
18 - 96 10 - 12 24 - - 7C 1xBI1+3xBI3+1xDCAI2
+2xBO1
- - 128 - - 18 36 - - 7D 4xBI3+3xBO1
7 - 160 - - 12 16 - - 7E 5xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO1
- - 192 - - 6 12 - - 7F 6xBI3+1xBO1
7 - 192 - - 6 4 - - 7G 6xBI3+1xBIO1
- - 224 - - - - - - 7H 7xBI3
- 646 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
BI/BO 8 x I/O modules (Set code position “9” to “4” or “8”)

No.
Semi-fast BO
(Position
Independent
Independent
BI (variable)
Heavy duty
Common
Fast-BO
DC-AO
“B”)
DC-AI
BO
BO
BI
BI
- - 128 10 - 18 36 - - 81 4xBI3+1xDCAI2+3xBO1
54 12 - 10 - - 4 44 - 82 +2xBO2
- - 160 - - 18 36 - - 83 5xBI3+3xBO1
- - 160 20 - 6 12 - - 84 5xBI3+2xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 192 10 - 6 12 - - 85 6xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
- - 96 10 - 24 48 - - 86 3xBI3+1xDCAI2+4xBO1
- 60 - - - 6 12 32 - 87 5xBI2+1xBO1+2xBO2
8 - 128 - 6 18 38 - - 88 4xBI3+3xBO1+1xBIO3
14 - 96 30 - 12 8 - - 89 3xBI3+3xDCAI2+2xBIO1
- - 128 20 - 12 24 - - 8A 4xBI3+2xDCAI2+2xBO1
- - 192 20 - - - - - 8B 6xBI3+2xDCAI2
- - 256 - - - - - - 8C 8xBI3
36 - 64 20 - 12 24 - - 8D 2xBI1+2xBI3+2xDCAI2
+2xBO1
18 - 96 10 - 18 36 - - 8E 1xBI1+3xBI3+1xDCAI2
+3xBO1
- - 128 10 - - - 48 0 8F 4xBI3+1xDCAI2+3xBO2
7 - 224 - - 6 4 - - 8G 7xBI3+1xBIO1
- - 192 - - 12 24 - - 8H 6xBI3+2xBO1
7 - 192 - - 12 16 - - 8J 6xBI3+1xBO1+1xBIO1
3xBI3+1xDCAI2+1xBO1
21 - 96 10 - 24 24 - - 8K +3xBIO1
Note that the user should contact with the sales staffs when requiring “other configuration (Ordering number: ZZ)”
not indicated in the ordering code above.
- 647 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
FUNCTION TABLE
Function Description Ordering No. (Position 'G & T')
Block 11 1A 1B 13
DIF Current differential protection
● ●
(87)
REF Low-impedance restricted earth
- ●
(87N) fault protection
OC Non-directional definite / inverse 8 stages
● ●
(50/51/67) time overcurrent protection
Directional definite / inverse time
- -
overcurrent protection
EF Non-directional definite / inverse 8 stages
(50G/51G/ time earth fault protection ● ●
67G) (using phase currents)
Directional definite / inverse time
overcurrent protection - -
(using phase currents)
EFIn Non-directional definite / inverse 4 stages
(50N/51N) time earth fault protection - ●
(using neutral current)
OCN Non-directional negative- 4 stages
● - ● ●
(46) sequence overcurrent protection
Directional negative- sequence
- - -
overcurrent protection
BCD Broken conductor protection
● - ●
(46BC)
THM Thermal overload protection THM trip
(49) THM ● - ● ●
alarm
ICD Inrush current detector function
● ● ●
CBF Circuit breaker failure protection CBF
(50BF) re-trip ● - ● ●
CBF trip
OVG Residual overvoltage protection 4 stages

(59G) ●(#) - ●(#)
FRQ/DFRQ Under-frequency / 6 stages

(81U/81O) Over-frequency / Rate of change ●(*) - ●(*)
of frequency protection
VPH Over-excitation protection V/f trip
●(*) - ●(*) ●(*)
(24) V/f alarm
MECH. Trip and/or Indication of external 32 stages
● ●
TRIP devices
(*) Available for phase-to-phase or

2 x three-phase CT +
3 x three-phase CT +
3 x zero-phase CT +
phase-to-ground voltage inputs

1 x one-phase VT
1 x one-phase VT
(#) Available for zero-sequence voltage input
Basic Standard 1
- 648 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Appendix 5 Technical data
- 649 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Technical data
Analog Inputs
Rated current In Either 1A or 5A (selectable by settings)
Rated voltage Vn 100V to 120V
Rated Frequency Either 50Hz or 60Hz (fixed when the ordering is performed)
Overload Rating
Current inputs 4 times rated current continuous
5 times rated current for 3 minutes
6 times rated current for 2 minutes
30 times rated current for 10 seconds
100 times rated current for 1 second
250 times rated current for one power cycle (20 or 16.6ms)
Voltage inputs 2 times rated voltage continuous
2.5 times rated voltage for 1 second
Burden
Phase current inputs ≤ 0.1VA at In = 1A, ≤ 0.2VA at In = 5A
Earth current inputs ≤ 0.3VA at In = 1A, ≤ 0.4VA at In = 5A
Sensitive earth fault inputs ≤ 0.3VA at In = 1A, ≤ 0.4VA at In = 5A
Voltage inputs ≤ 0.1VA at Vn
Power Supply
Rated auxiliary voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operative range: 19.2~ 72Vdc),
48/110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 ~ 132Vdc),
110/250Vdc (Operative range: 88 ~ 300Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply ≤ 15%
Supply interruption ≤ 20ms at 110Vdc
Restart time < 5ms
Power consumption ≤ 15W (quiescent)
≤ 25W (maximum)
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Binary Inputs
Input circuit DC voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operating range: 19.2 – 72Vdc),
48/110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc),
110/125/220/250Vdc (Operating range: 88 – 300Vdc)
Note: Variable threshold settings are available for BI2 and
BIO4 from 14V to 154V in various steps.
Capacitive discharge immunity 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage and discharged
into the input terminals, according to ENA TS 48-4 with an
external resistor
Maximum permitted voltage 72Vdc for 24/48/60Vdc rating,
300Vdc for 110/250Vdc rating
Power consumption ≤ 0.5W per input at 220Vdc
Binary Outputs
Fast operating contacts
Make and carry 5A continuously
30A, 290Vdc for 0.2s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.15A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time Typically 3 ms
Semi-fast operating contacts
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Auxiliary contacts
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Hybrid contacts (10 A breaking)
10A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R=5ms)
Break 10A, 220Vdc (L/R=20ms)
10A, 110Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time 1 ms
Durability ≥ 10,000 operations (loaded contact)
≥ 100,000 operations (unloaded contact)
Measuring input capability

Full scale
Standard current input ≥ 60A (1A rating) or 300A (5A rating)
Sensitive current input ≥ 3A (1A rating) or 15 A (5A rating)
Voltage input ≥ 200V
Sampling rate 48 samples / cycle
Frequency response < 5% deviation over range 16.7Hz to 600Hz
- 651 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Mechanical Design
Installation Flush mounting
Weight Approx. 10kg (1/3 size), 12kg (1/2 size), 15kg (3/4 size), 25kg
(1/1 size)
Case color 2.5Y7.5/1 (approximation to Munsell value)
LED
Number 26 (Fixed for “In service” and “ERROR”)
Color Red / Yellow / Green (configurable) except In service (green)
and Error (red)
Function keys
Number 7
Local Interface
USB Type B
Maximum cable length 2 meters (less than)
Terminal Block
CT/VT input M3.5 Ring terminal (ring lug type terminal only)
Binary input, Binary output M3.5 Ring terminal with 15mm stripping length (for
compression plug type terminal)
M3.5 Ring terminal (for ring lug type terminal)
Compression type terminal Ring lug type terminal
System Interface (rear port)

100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet
Physical medium Twisted pair cable, RJ-45 connector
100BASE-FX Fast Ethernet
Physical medium 50/125 or 62.5/125µm fibre, SC connector
Protocol IEC 61850
- 652 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Environmental performance
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Operating range: -10°C to +55°C.
IEC 60068-2-14 Storage / Transit: -25°C to +70°C.
Cyclic temperature test as per IEC
60068-2-14
Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 56 days at 40°C and 93% relative humidity.
IEC 60068-2-78 Cyclic temperature with humidity test as per
IEC 60068-2-30
Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 - Dust and Dripping Water Proof
IP20 for rear panel
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-27 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals
and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent
circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open
contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-27 Three positive and three negative impulses of
IEEE C37.90 5kV(peak), 1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all
terminals and between all terminals and
earth.
Voltage Dips, IEC 60255-11, 1. Voltage dips:
Interruptions, IEC 61000-4-29, 0 % residual voltage for 20 ms
Variations and Ripple IEC 61000-4-17 40 % residual voltage for 200 ms
on DC supply IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 70 % residual voltage for 500 ms
2. Voltage interruptions:
0 % residual voltage for 5 s
3. Ripple:
15 % of rated d.c. value, 100 / 120 Hz
4. Gradual shut-down / start-up:
60 s shut-down ramp, 5 min power off, 60s
start-up ramp
5. Reversal of d.c. power supply polarity:
1 min
Capacitive Discharge ENA TS 48-4 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage
and discharged into the input terminals with
an external resistance
- 653 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Environmental performance
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3, 1 MHz burst in common / differential modes
Disturbance / IEC 61000-4-18 Auxiliary supply and I/O ports: 2.5 kV / 1 kV
Damped Oscillatory IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 1 kV / 0 kV
Wave
Electrostatic IEC 60255-22-2 Class 4, Contact: 2, 4, 6, 8kV
Discharge IEC 61000-4-2 Air: 2, 4, 8, 15kV
IEEE C37.90.3-2001
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3
Radiated RF IEC 60255-22-3, Sweep test ranges: 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4
Electromagnetic GHz to 2.7 GHz.
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-3 Level 3 Spot tests at 80, 160, 380, 450, 900, 1850 and
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 2150 MHz.
Field strength: 10 V/m
IEEE C37.90.2-1995 Field strength 35V/m for frequency sweep of
25MHz to 1GHz.
Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4 5 kHz, 5/50ns disturbance
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-4 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4 kV
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 2 kV
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5 1.2/50µms surge in common/differential modes:
IEC 61000-4-5 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4, 2,
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 1, 0.5 kV / 1, 0.5 kV
Communications ports: up to 1, 0.5 kV / 0 kV
Surge Withstand IEEE C37.90.1-2002 3kV, 1MHZ damped oscillatory wave
4kV, 5/50ns fast transient
Conducted RF IEC 60255-22-6 Sweep test range: 150 kHz to 80MHz
Electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-6 Spot tests at 27 and 68 MHz.
Disturbance IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Voltage level: 10 V r.m.s
Power Frequency IEC 60255-22-7 50/60 Hz disturbance for 10 s in common /
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-16 differential modes
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Binary input ports: 300 V / 150 V
Power Frequency IEC 61000-4-8 Class 4 Field applied at 50/60Hz with strengths of:
Magnetic Field IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 30A/m continuously,
300A/m for 1 second.
Conducted and IEC 60255-25 Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB
EN 61000-6-4 (mean)
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions
30 to 230 MHz: < 40 dB(uV/m)
230 to 1000 MHz: < 47 dB(uV/m)
Measured at a distance of 10 m
- 654 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
European Commission Directives
European Commission Directives

2004/108/EC Compliance with the European Commission
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is
demonstrated according to generic EMC
standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4, and
product standard IEC 60255-26.
2006/95/EC Compliance with the European Commission Low
Voltage Directive for electrical safety is
demonstrated according EN 60255-27.
- 655 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Functional data
Current differential protection (87T)

Stage 1: Biased current differential element
Minimum operating value (DIF-S1-I1) 0.10 to 1.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Small current region slope (DIF-S1-Slope1) 10 to 100% in 1% steps
Large current region slope (DIF-S1-Slope2) 10 to 200% in 1% steps
Knee point (DIF-S1-I2) 1.00 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps
2nd harmonic sensitivity for Inrush currents
(DIF-2f) 10 to 50% in 1% steps
5th harmonic sensitivity for Overexcitation
(DIF-5f) 10 to 100% in 1% steps
Operate time Typical 25ms
Stage 2: High-set unrestrained differential

element
Overcurrent (DIF-S2-I) 2.00 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Operate time Typical 20ms
Restricted earth fault element (87N)
[Low-impedance scheme]
Minimum operating value (REF--I1) 0.05 to 0.50pu in 0.01pu steps
Small current region slope (REF--Slope1) 10 %
Large current region slope (REF--Slope2) 50 to 100% in 1% steps
Knee Point (REF--I2) 0.50 to 2.00pu in 0.01pu steps
: P, S, T
Non-directional and Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection (50P, 51P)
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Definite time overcurrent 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
threshold 0.10 to 250.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Inverse time overcurrent 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Direction characteristic Non Directional / Forward / Backward
Polarizing voltage 1.0 V(fixed)
Characteristic angle 0 – 180 degs in 1 deg steps
Delay type DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI / UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI
/ IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 / Original
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 10 to 100% in 1% steps
DTL delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS 0.010 to 50.000 in 0.001 steps
Reset type Definite Time or Dependent Time
Reset definite delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS 0.010 to 50.000 in 0.001 steps
- 656 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Non-directional and Directional Earth Fault Protection (50N, 51N, 50G, 51G, 67N)
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Definite time earth fault 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Inverse time earth fault 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Characteristic angle 0 to 180° in 1° steps (3I0 lags for −3V0)
Polarising voltage (3V0) 0.5 to 100.0V in 0.1V steps
Negative Phase sequence overcurrent Protection (46)
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Definite time NOC threshold 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.10 to 250.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Inverse time NOC threshold 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Characteristic angle 0 to 180° in 1° steps (3I0 lags for −3V0)
Polarising voltage 0.5 to 25.0V in 0.1V steps
Thermal Overload Protection (49)
Thermal setting (THM = k.IFLC) 0.40 – 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
2.0 – 10.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
Time constant (τ) 0.5 – 500.0mins in 0.1min steps
Thermal alarm OFF, 50% to 100% in 1% steps
Pre-load current setting 0.00 – 1.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.0 – 5.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
Broken conductor protection (46BC)
Broken conductor threshold 0.10 to 1.00 in 0.01 steps
Inrush Current Detection
Second harmonic detection 10 to 50% in 1% steps
Inrush current thresholds 0.10 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
- 657 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
CBF Protection (50BF)

Overcurrent element 0.1 to 2.0A in 0.1A steps (1A rating)
BF timer for retry-trip of failed breaker 50 to 500ms in 1ms steps
BF timer for related breaker trip 50 to 500ms in 1ms steps
Undervoltage Protection (27P, 27S)
1st, 2nd undervoltage threshold 5.0 to 130.0V in 0.1V steps
Delay type DTL, IDMT, Original
Reset delay 0.0 to 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Undervoltage block threshold 5.0 to 20.0V in 0.1V steps
Undervoltage block delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P)
1st, 2nd overvoltage threshold 1.0 to 220.0V in 0.1V steps
Phase to Phase Overvoltage Protection (59S)
1st, 2nd overvoltage threshold 1.0 to 220.0V in 0.1V steps
Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage (59N)
1.0 – 220.0V in 0.1V steps
Overexcitation Protection (24)
Pickup voltage 100.0 to 120.0V in 0.1V steps
Alarm level (A) 1.03 to 1.30pu in 0.01pu steps
High level (H) 1.10 to 1.40pu in 0.01pu steps
Low level (L) 1.05 to 1.30pu in 0.01pu steps
LT (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
HT (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
TVFH (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
TVFA (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
Start time less than 130ms
RT (Definite time) 60 to 3600s in 1s steps
- 658 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Voltage Controlled Protection (51V)

Voltage threshold 10.0 to 120.0V in 0.1V steps
Sensitivity range 20 to 100% of voltage threshold
Frequency Protection (81U/O)
1st - 6th under/overfrequency threshold (Fnom − 10.00Hz) – (Fnom + 10.00Hz) in 0.01Hz steps
Fnom: nominal frequency
DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Frequency UV Block 40.0 – 100.0V in 0.1V steps
1st - 6th rate-of-change frequency threshold 0.1-15.0Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps
Synchronism check (25)
Synchronism check angle 0° to 75° in 1° steps
UV element 10 to 150V in 1V steps
OV element 10 to 150V in 1V steps
Busbar or line dead check 0 to 150V in 1V steps
Busbar or line live check 0 to 150V in 1V steps
Synchronism check time 0.01 to 100.00s in 0.01s steps
Voltage check time 0.01 to 100.00s in 0.01s steps
Metering Function
AC current Accuracy ± 0.5% (at rating)
AC voltage Accuracy ± 0.5% (at rating)
Energy (Wh, varh) Accuracy ± 1.0% (at rating)
Power (P, Q, S) Accuracy ± 1.0% (at rating when power quantities being fed)
Power factor (PF) Accuracy ± 0.5% (at rating)
Frequency Accuracy ± 0.03%
Time Synchronisation
Protocol SNTP
- 659 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Cabling
The table below shows the recommended cables in the cross-section and rated-voltage for the
connection with the transformer module (VCT), the binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO), and
the power supply module (PWS). Rated-voltage required for the cable is 600Vac.
Table Cables for the connection with module
Origin of Required cable-cross-section
Required end-terminal
connection (AWG)
For Ring-lug type:
M3.5 ring-tongue terminal with insulation
BI, BO, BIO 1.5 mm squired or larger
and PWS (Either AWG14 or 15)
For Compression-plug type:
Not applicable
2.5 mm squired or larger
VCT M3.5 ring tongue terminal with insulation
(AWG13)
Protective 5.5 mm squired or larger
M5 ring tongue terminal with insulation
earth (AWG9)
Fuses
The table below shows the required fuse in the PWS. DO NOT change the fuse by the user.
The fuse is complies with IEC60127-2 Sheet 5.
Table Fuse specification in PWS
Specification Description
Rated current 3.15A
Rated voltage 500Vac & 400Vdc
Cutoff velocity Type “T”
Manufacture Littelfuse, Inc.
Type 04773.15XP
Safety and environment

The table below shows the safety category of the insulation resistance and the environment.
Table Safety and environment requirement
Safety requirement Definition in IEC Specification
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-27 More than 100 M-ohm at 500V d.c.
Protection bonding continuity test IEC 60255-27 Test current: 10 A a.c.
Resistance: less than 0.1 ohm
Protective bonding resistance test IEC 60255-27 Resistance: less than 0.2 ohm
Creepage distance and clearance IEC 60255-27 Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category III
Protective class IEC 60255-27 Class I
- 660 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Appendix 6 Rack mounting

GR-series IED is available for several case sizes as showed in the ordering information sheet.
Sub size GR-series IED, i.e. 3/4 x 19’’, 1/2 x 19’’ and 1/3 x 19’’, can be mounted into the rack
with the optional mounting kit. The combined mount is available for some sub size GR-series
IED with optional mount kit accessories. Table-2 is the applicable mount combination.
Table-1 GR-series IED mount

Mount method Applicable size
Flush mount
Flush/rack mount 1/1 x 19’’
Rack mount (*1) 1/3 x 19’’, 1/2 x 19’’, 3/4 x 19’’
*1Note: Use appropriate joint kit. Combined mounting is applicable for 1/3 and 1/2 size
IED.
Table-2 GR-series IED: Mount kit (optional parts)

No. Name Mount kit code Figure
1 Joint kit for single 1/3 x 19’’ size rack EP−201 Figure-1
2 Joint kit for two 1/3 x 19’’ size rack EP−202 Figure-2
3 Joint kit for three 1/3 x 19’’ size rack EP−203 Figure-3
4 Joint kit for single 1/2 x 19’’ size rack EP−204 Figure-4
5 Joint kit for two 1/2 x 19’’ size rack EP−205 Figure-5
6 Joint kit for single 3/4 x 19’’ size rack EP−206
To mount the GR-series IED(s) in the rack with optional mount kit,
- Remove the flange(s) at the side of attaching optional mount kit.
- Attach the appropriate parts of optional kit, e.g. joint plates, lock bracket, and screws.
- Mount it into the rack with the screws (*1).
*1Note: Mount screws are not included in the product. Please prepare the screws by the
customer.
- 661 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
CP-131
Pan-head screws (M4×8)
Countersunk screws (M4×6)
Figure-1 Single 1/3 x 19’’ size rack mount
- 662 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
CP-132

Seal-caps for the holes
CP-CC1
Figure-2 Two 1/3 x 19’’ size rack mount
- 663 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
CP-CC1
Figure-3 Three 1/3 x 19’’ size rack mount
- 664 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
CP-121
Figure-4 Single 1/2 x 19’’ size rack mount
- 665 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)

CP-CC1
Figure-5 Two 1/2 x 19’’ size rack mount
- 666 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
Appendix 7 PLC driver for relay application
- 667 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
The PLC connection points described in the main chapter are applicable to use when the user
wishes to create a custom logic by itself provided both the custom logic and the functions
provided by the manufacture are accommodated in the same CPU. On the other hand, if the
custom logic and the logic provided are not accommodated in the same CPU, the user cannot
use the PLC connection point directly. This is because exchanging data between CPUs are
provided by the PLC function; PLC drivers are provided in respective models†. The user can
program the PLC logic using the dummy connection points when exchanging data is required
between CPUs.
†The user must use the dummy connection points for programing in the model 1A, 1B, and 1C.
The other PLC drivers, which are not tabulated below tables, are provided for user-purposes.
To OC (Function ID: 45A001)

PLC driver Function + Element ID to Destination PLC connection point 1A 1B 1C
BIT_00_0 230301 8810101BB0 → OC1_BLOCK 45A001 800010EBB0 X X X

BIT_00_1 230301 8910101BB1 → OC2_BLOCK 45A001 810020EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_2 230301 8A10101BB2 → OC3_BLOCK 45A001 820030EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_3 230301 8B10101BB3 → OC4_BLOCK 45A001 830040EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_4 230301 8C10101BB4 → OC5_BLOCK 45A001 840050EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_5 230301 8D10101BB5 → OC6_BLOCK 45A001 850060EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_6 230301 8E10101BB6 → OC7_BLOCK 45A001 860070EBB0 X X X
BIT_00_7 230301 8F10101BB7 → OC8_BLOCK 45A001 870080EBB0 X X X
BIT_01_0 230301 8010101BB8 → OC1_INST_OP 45A001 800010EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_1 230301 8110101BB9 → OC2_INST_OP 45A001 810020EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_2 230301 8210101BBA → OC3_INST_OP 45A001 820030EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_3 230301 8310101BBB → OC4_INST_OP 45A001 830040EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_4 230301 8410101BBC → OC5_INST_OP 45A001 840050EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_5 230301 8510101BBD → OC6_INST_OP 45A001 850060EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_6 230301 8610101BBE → OC7_INST_OP 45A001 860070EBB1 X X X
BIT_01_7 230301 8710101BBF → OC8_INST_OP 45A001 870080EBB1 X X X
To EF (Function ID: 45A401)

BIT_02_0 230301 8810111BB0 → EF1_BLOCK 45A401 800010EBB0 X X X

BIT_02_1 230301 8910111BB1 → EF2_BLOCK 45A401 810020EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_2 230301 8A10111BB2 → EF3_BLOCK 45A401 820030EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_3 230301 8B10111BB3 → EF4_BLOCK 45A401 830040EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_4 230301 8C10111BB4 → EF5_BLOCK 45A401 840050EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_5 230301 8D10111BB5 → EF6_BLOCK 45A401 850060EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_6 230301 8E10111BB6 → EF7_BLOCK 45A401 860070EBB0 X X X
BIT_02_7 230301 8F10111BB7 → EF8_BLOCK 45A401 870080EBB0 X X X
BIT_03_0 230301 8010111BB8 → EF1_INST_OP 45A401 800010EBB1 X X X
BIT_03_1 230301 8110111BB9 → EF2_INST_OP 45A401 810020EBB1 X X X
BIT_03_2 230301 8210111BBA → EF3_INST_OP 45A401 820030EBB1 X X X
BIT_03_3 230301 8310111BBB → EF4_INST_OP 45A401 830040EBB1 X X X
BIT_03_4 230301 8410111BBC → EF5_INST_OP 45A401 840050EBB1 X X X
- 668 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
To EF (Function ID: 45A401)

BIT_03_5 230301 8510111BBD → EF6_INST_OP 45A401 850060EBB1 X X X

BIT_03_6 230301 8610111BBE → EF7_INST_OP 45A401 860070EBB1 X X X
BIT_03_7 230301 8710111BBF → EF8_INST_OP 45A401 870080EBB1 X X X
To EFIn (Function ID: 45A801)

BIT_04_0 230301 8810121BB0 → EFIn1_BLOCK 45A801 800010EBB0 X X X
BIT_04_1 230301 8910121BB1 → EFIn2_BLOCK 45A801 810020EBB0 X X X
BIT_04_2 230301 8A10121BB2 → EFIn3_BLOCK 45A801 820030EBB0 X X X
BIT_04_3 230301 8B10121BB3 → EFIn4_BLOCK 45A801 830040EBB0 X X X
BIT_04_4 230301 8C10121BB4 → EFIn1_INST_OP 45A801 800010EBB1 X X X
BIT_04_5 230301 8D10121BB5 → EFIn2_INST_OP 45A801 810020EBB1 X X X
BIT_04_6 230301 8E10121BB6 → EFIn3_INST_OP 45A801 820030EBB1 X X X
BIT_04_7 230301 8F10121BB7 → EFIn4_INST_OP 45A801 830040EBB1 X X X
To OCN (Function ID: 45AC01)

BIT_05_0 230301 8010121BB8 → OCN1_BLOCK 45AC01 800010EBB0 NA X X

BIT_05_1 230301 8110121BB9 → OCN2_BLOCK 45AC01 810020EBB0 NA X X
BIT_05_2 230301 8210121BBA → OCN3_BLOCK 45AC01 820030EBB0 NA X X
BIT_05_3 230301 8310121BBB → OCN4_BLOCK 45AC01 830040EBB0 NA X X
BIT_05_4 230301 8410121BBC → OCN1_INST_OP 45AC01 800010EBB1 NA X X
BIT_05_5 230301 8510121BBD → OCN2_INST_OP 45AC01 810020EBB1 NA X X
BIT_05_6 230301 8610121BBE → OCN3_INST_OP 45AC01 820030EBB1 NA X X
BIT_05_7 230301 8710121BBF → OCN4_INST_OP 45AC01 830040EBB1 NA X X
To CBF (Function ID: 45B401)

BIT_06_3 230301 8B10131BB3 → GEN.CBF1_START 45B401 800010EBB0 NA X X

BIT_06_4 230301 8C10131BB4 → GEN.CBF2_START 45B401 810020EBB0 NA X X
BIT_06_5 230301 8D10131BB5 → GEN.CBF3_START 45B401 820030EBB0 NA X X
BIT_06_6 230301 8E10131BB6 → EXT.CBF1_START-A 45B401 800010EBB1 NA X X
BIT_06_7 230301 8F10131BB7 → EXT.CBF1_START-B 45B401 810010EBB2 NA X X
BIT_07_0 230301 8010131BB8 → EXT.CBF1_START-C 45B401 820010EBB3 NA X X
BIT_07_1 230301 8110131BB9 → EXT.CBF2_START-A 45B401 840020EBB1 NA X X
BIT_07_2 230301 8210131BBA → EXT.CBF2_START-B 45B401 850020EBB2 NA X X
BIT_07_3 230301 8310131BBB → EXT.CBF2_START-C 45B401 860020EBB3 NA X X
BIT_07_4 230301 8410131BBC → EXT.CBF3_START-A 45B401 880030EBB1 NA X X
BIT_07_5 230301 8510131BBD → EXT.CBF3_START-B 45B401 890030EBB2 NA X X
BIT_07_6 230301 8610131BBE → EXT.CBF3_START-C 45B401 8A0030EBB3 NA X X
BIT_07_7 230301 8710131BBF → EXT.CBF1_START 45B401 800010EBB4 NA X X
BIT_08_0 230301 8810141BB0 → EXT.CBF2_START 45B401 810020EBB4 NA X X
BIT_08_1 230301 8910141BB1 → EXT.CBF3_START 45B401 820030EBB4 NA X X
BIT_08_2 230301 8A10141BB2 → CBF1_BLOCK 45B401 800010EBB5 NA X X
BIT_08_3 230301 8B10141BB3 → CBF2_BLOCK 45B401 810020EBB5 NA X X
BIT_08_4 230301 8C10141BB4 → CBF3_BLOCK 45B401 820030EBB5 NA X X
BIT_08_5 230301 8D10141BB5 → CBF1-RE_INST 45B401 800010EBB6 NA X X
- 669 -
6F2S1890 (0.21)
To CBF (Function ID: 45B401)

BIT_08_6 230301 8E10141BB6 → CBF2-RE_INST 45B401 810020EBB6 NA X X

BIT_08_7 230301 8F10141BB7 → CBF3-RE_INST 45B401 820030EBB6 NA X X
BIT_09_0 230301 8010141BB8 → CBF1-TP_INST 45B401 800010EBB7 NA X X
BIT_09_1 230301 8110141BB9 → CBF2-TP_INST 45B401 810020EBB7 NA X X
BIT_09_2 230301 8210141BBA → CBF3-TP_INST 45B401 820030EBB7 NA X X
To FRQ (Function ID: 475A01)

BIT_09_7 230301 8710141BBF → FRQ1_BLOCK 475A01 800010EBB0 NA NA X

BIT_10_0 230301 8810151BB0 → FRQ2_BLOCK 475A01 810020EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_1 230301 8910151BB1 → FRQ3_BLOCK 475A01 820030EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_2 230301 8A10151BB2 → FRQ4_BLOCK 475A01 830040EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_3 230301 8B10151BB3 → FRQ5_BLOCK 475A01 840050EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_4 230301 8C10151BB4 → FRQ6_BLOCK 475A01 850060EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_5 230301 8D10151BB5 → DFRQ1_BLOCK 475A01 800011EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_6 230301 8E10151BB6 → DFRQ2_BLOCK 475A01 810021EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_10_7 230301 8F10151BB7 → DFRQ3_BLOCK 475A01 820031EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_11_0 230301 8010151BB8 → DFRQ4_BLOCK 475A01 830041EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_11_1 230301 8110151BB9 → DFRQ5_BLOCK 475A01 840051EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_11_2 230301 8210151BBA → DFRQ6_BLOCK 475A01 850061EBB0 NA NA X
BIT_11_3 230301 8310151BBB → FRQ1-OPT 475A01 800010EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_11_4 230301 8410151BBC → FRQ2-OPT 475A01 810020EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_11_5 230301 8510151BBD → FRQ3-OPT 475A01 820030EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_11_6 230301 8610151BBE → FRQ4-OPT 475A01 830040EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_11_7 230301 8710151BBF → FRQ5-OPT 475A01 840050EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_0 230301 8810161BB0 → FRQ6-OPT 475A01 850060EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_1 230301 8910161BB1 → DFRQ1-OPT 475A01 800011EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_2 230301 8A10161BB2 → DFRQ2-OPT 475A01 810021EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_3 230301 8B10161BB3 → DFRQ3-OPT 475A01 820031EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_4 230301 8C10161BB4 → DFRQ4-OPT 475A01 830041EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_5 230301 8D10161BB5 → DFRQ5-OPT 475A01 840051EBB1 NA NA X
BIT_12_6 230301 8E10161BB6 → DFRQ6-OPT 475A01 850061EBB1 NA NA X
To VPH (Function ID: 476A01)

BIT_12_7 230301 8F10161BB7 → VPHT_BLOCK 476A01 810020EBB0 NA X X

BIT_13_0 230301 8010161BB8 → VPHA_BLOCK 476A01 820010EBB0 NA X X
- 670 -
Revision-up Records
Rev. and Section Approved Prepared
Change place and contents Checked by
Date (page) by by
-- -- Draft issue F. Kawano T. Kaneko
–
Feb. 6 2013 Feb 6 Feb. 5
0.00 First issue F. Kawano T. Kaneko
–
Feb. 15 2013 Feb. 15 Feb. 15
0.01 Chap 3 Terminal structure altered. F. Kawano T. Kaneko
–
May 20 2013 May. 20 May 20
0.02 Chap 3 PSW terminal altered. F. Kawano T. Kaneko
–
May 23 2013 May. 23 May 22
0.03 Chap 7 Improper expression revised F. Kawano T. Kaneko
–
July 8 2013 Jul. 8 Jul. 7
0.04 Chap 2 and Overall descriptions modified F. Kawano T. Kaneko
–
July 25 2013 others Jul. 25 Jul 24
0.05 Chap 2.1 Replica procedure added F. Kawano T. Kaneko
–
Mar. 28 2014 Mar. 28 Mar. 28
0.06 Chap 3.3 Overcurrent protection revised F. Kawano T. Kaneko
–
Apr. 15 2014 Apr. 15 Apr. 15
0.1 Chap 1 and Series layout added M. Takazawa T. Kaneko N. Yokoya
Jun 12 2014 other Jun. 12 Jun. 11 Jun 10
0.11 Chap 3.1 and Explanations revised M. Takazawa M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Jul 22 2014 others Jul 22 Jul 22 Jul. 21
0.12 Appendix Function table revised. M. Takazawa M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Sep 3 2014 Sep 3 Sep 3 Sep. 2
0.13 Chap 3 VCT names revised M. Takazawa M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Nov 5 2014 Nov 5 Nov 5 Nov. 4
0.14 Appendix Ordering table revised M. Takazawa M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Nov 6 2014 Nov 6 Nov 6 Nov. 5
Chap 1 Typo corrected
0.15 M. Takazawa M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Chap 6 Error codes added
Jan 5 2015 Jan 5 Jan 5 Jan. 5
Appendix Ordering codes revised
Chap 2.2 VCT number in table revised
0.16 M. Takazawa M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Chap 3.1 Typos revised
Jan 30 2015 Jan 30 Jan 29 Jan. 27
Chap 3.2 Typos revised
Chap 3.3, 3.4, Revised setting thresholds in OC, EF, EFIn,
3.5, 3.6 OCN M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
–
Chap 3.9 Revised signal monitoring points in the logic of Jun 25 Jun. 25
ICD
Chap. 4 Added clock and function key features K. Kobayashi T. Ohnari T. Kaneko
Mar. 6 Mar. 5 Feb. 2
0.20 Chap 3.8 Changed the time units to “minutes” F. Kawano M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Jun 25,2015 Mar. 10 Mar. 10 Mar. 10
Appendix Tables of BIO codes modified F. Kawano N. Yokoya T. Kaneko
Apr. 16 Apr. 16 Apr. 16
Chap 6.3 Revised and added tables of PLC drivers M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
–
Appendix Jun 18 Jun. 16
Chap. 5 Added a notice for recording w.r.t clock setting F. Kawano T. Kaneko
–
Jun 23 Jun. 20
Chap. 3.16 Added the setting notice about threshold settings M. Takazawa S. Gondou T. Kaneko
for blocking the operation of FRQ Aug 18 Aug 20 Aug. 20
Chap 3.x Added the minimum sensing voltage for M. Takazawa K. Ohashi T. Kaneko
0.21 polarizing Aug 1 Aug 1 July 30
Nov 4. 2015 Appendix Tables of BIO codes modified M. Takazawa N. Yokoya T. Kaneko
Sep. 11 Sep 10 Sep. 9
Appendix Modified at contact spec. of BO circuits as to T.Sugamoto – T. Kaneko
Break capability when 0.2A current flowing Sep. 10 Sep. 10
Rev. and Section Approved Prepared
Change place and contents Checked by
Date (page) by by
Chap. 12.6 Added the instruction for replacing modules M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
–
Appendix 7 Combined the replacing methods with Chap. 12.6 Aug 1 July 20
Chap. 4.7 Revised the operation meanings at the FAIL1
M. Takazawa T. Ohnari T. Kaneko
and Fail2 contacts; revised the operation
Oct. 8 Oct. 5 Sep. 25
conditions
Chap. 4.7 Added the notice not to guarantee the operation T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
–
Appendix 6 on the AC power source Nov. 4 Nov. 4
Chap. 9 Whole contents revised M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
–
Oct. 30 Oct. 24
Appendix 3 Added the examples of external connections M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
–
Oct. 30 Oct. 30
Appendix 4 Added PIXIT and TICS F. Kawano M. Takazawa T. Kaneko
Oct. 30 Oct. 30 Oct. 22

GRT200 (6F2S1890) 0.21

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRT200 (6F2S1890) 0.21

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRT200 (6F2S1890) 0.21

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6F2S1890 (0.

GR200 series (GRT200)

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result

Equipment installation and operation

Protective conductor terminal

Caution, risk of electric shock

Liability, copyright and others

3.3.1 Non-directional and directional OC ...................................................................................... 75

3.7.3 Miscellaneous functions....................................................................................................... 170

3.13.1 Drop-off and pickup characteristic ..................................................................................... 227

3.19 Trip circuit (TRC) ........................................................................................................................ 292

4.4.1 Binary input feature for Compression-type terminal ....................................................... 355

7.3 Disturbance Recording................................................................................................................ 427

9.2.33 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 472

Appendix 4 Ordering ............................................................................................................................ 636

Analog inputs Analog inputs Configuration

1.1 Protection functions

Relay element Model 1 Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Model 5 Function name

Table 1.1-2 Protection Relay Functions

Relay element Model 1 Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Model 5 Function name

Small Differential current Large

Figure 1.1-1 Protection coverage of DIF, HOC and REF

1.2 Monitoring and metering functions

Fault record function:

Event record function:

Disturbance record function:

1.3 Hardware overview

Module circuits and others:

1.4 Symbols used in logical diagrams

(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number

Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows:

Element ID (or Data ID) Signal name corresponding to Element or Data ID

4. Marked with : Mapping points designated by Data ID and its name

Data ID Signal name corresponding to Data ID

(ii) Timer symbol

XXX - YYY Output

(iii) Logic symbol

(iv) Flip-flop symbol

(v) Scheme switch

BCU Bay Control Unit

BCPU Bay Control and Protection Unit

BI Binary Input module or circuit

BO Binary Output module or circuit

BIO Binary Input and Output module or circuit

CPU Signal processing and communication module

EWS Engineering Workstation in the substation

GPS Global Positioning System

GR-TIEMS GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software

GUI Graphical User Interface

HMI Human Machine Interface

IED Intelligent Electronic Device

IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time

LCP Local Panel for Controlling

LED Light Emitting Diode

NGR Neutral Grounding Resistance

N/C Normally Closed

N/O Normally Open

OWS Operator Workstation in the substation